TW299439B - - Google Patents

Description

Μ Β7 299439 V. Description of invention (1) "References to related applications" This case is a partial continuation of US Patent Application No. 08 / 376,882 filed on January 25, 1995. The case was August 1993 On the 11th, he applied for a partial continuation of US Patent Application No. 08 / 105,866, which was a continuation of the US Patent Application No. 07/657, 155, which was applied on February 15, 1991, and is now the US Patent No. 5,265,079. "Background of the Invention" 1. Field of the Invention The present invention relates to a data storage system including a housing having an opening for receiving a removable optical disc cartridge, which is used to protect the information recording green media loaded therein. More specifically, the present invention relates to a system for quickly encoding and writing information to a disc in a high-density format, and for reading and decoding information written to the disc. 2. Description of related skills: With the widespread use of data processing systems and personal computers, the demand for large-capacity data storage is increasing. The optical disc storage system meets this wide range of demands and Japanese sister has become a popular tool. These optical disc systems provide relatively low-cost, large-capacity and quickly accessible storage. In an optical disc system, the encoded video signal, audio signal, or other information signal is recorded on one or two planes of the optical disc in the format of an information track. There is at least a laser light source (or other light source) in the center of the optical storage system. (In the first operating mode, the laser produces a high-intensity laser) A-4 ^ 1Qx297 mm I--— ^ n — ^^ t · Kn n ^ l ^^^ 1 m ^ 1—- -m—, · —A ^ -d (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 2994S9 A7 B7 Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperation Cooperative of the Bureau of the Central Bureau of Standards Description (2 beams and focus on a point on the information track of the rotating storage disc. This high-intensity laser beam raises the temperature of the green material surface above the Curie temperature of the material. The disc is placed in the aforementioned magnetic field At this point the material will lose its magnetizing properties and receive the magnetization of the magnetic field. Therefore, by controlling or biasing the surrounding magnetic field and allowing the disc to cool below its Curie temperature in a controlled magnetic field environment, information It can be recorded to the disc in the form of a magnetic zone. The aforementioned magnetic zone is based on the, and recessed patterns on the recording medium. After that, when the operator wants to copy or read the previously recorded green information, the laser enters the second _ mode .In secret mode τ, the laser produces low intensity Laser beam, the laser beam is focused again on the trajectory of the rotating disc. The aforementioned low-intensity laser beam will not heat the disc material above the Curie temperature. However, due to the existence of the previously formed depression, the laser material is transferred from the disc surface A reflection occurs on the display of the previously recorded information, and thus the previously recorded information is reproduced. Because the laser beam is fresh, this type of information processing system has a high green density. IL can be expected to reproduce the recorded green information. The components of a typical optical system include a housing with a built-in bee. The user can insert the recording coal body into the drive device through the insertion port. In addition to its components, the housing also allows for easy loading, unloading and reading. The mechanical and electrical sub-line device for writing CDs. These counties that rely on and electrical sub- # are usually only controlled by the data processing system connected to the drive device.) Μ specifications (2 丨 〇; Guang)-(please read the back side first (Notes and then fill this page)

, 1T Printed and printed by the Employees ’Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (3 When using the disc card to know the external wealth of the system,-the turntable for the disc to rotate on is installed on the bottom plate of the system. The turntable includes- There is a main shaft with a wall iron, and the disc core is fixed on it for its use. The magnet attracts the disc core 'It holds the optical copper in the desired position and rotates. J In the disc system discussed above, in To apply the required magnetic field to the CD-ROM-part of the writing operation, you must first magnetically deflect the CD-ROM. This part of the CD-ROM during the writing (recording, deleting) operation = laser heating. Therefore 'When the light is held at the position of the spindle magnet, it is necessary to fix the magnetic field first to deflect the device so that the aforementioned device can be conveniently installed on the surface close to the optical disc. 4 Various media or disc types are currently used in optical data storage systems for storage Digital information. For example, the standard optical disc system uses 525 inch optical castellation, and 14 optical magnets can be installed or not installed in a protective case or cassette. If the optical disc is not fixed In a protection cassette, the operator can remove the disc from the protection cassette by hand. Then the operator can manually load the disc onto the loading mechanism and be careful to avoid damage to the recording surface. Or for convenience and protection For the sake of clarity, the optical disc can be installed in a seal or a cassette. The cassette can be inserted into the port of the drive device, and then moved to a predetermined position. These optical disc cassettes are conventional technologies in the computer industry. The optical disc cassette contains A cassette case containing an optical disc capable of recording data. This paper is suitable for ϋϋ Family Standard (CNS) Mi Mi (2H) X297mm) f-installation ------, 玎 ----- -, __ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) A7 B7 Printed by the Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumer Cooperative of the Fifth, Invention Instructions (4) Cartridge loading ^ Not in the drive device, in order to protect the disc The light usually includes at least one door that is closed or a town tongue connected with one or more marriages. When the card enters the system = the disc drive is equipped with m mechanisms for opening the door or cover of Weishang. This type of mechanism includes a H-bar contacted by a tongue, thereby opening the cover. When the Card® is further inserted into the drive device, the cover will be opened and part of the green frequency included in the card will be exposed to make the disc privately-made on the main shaft of the motor or other drive mechanism, and to read and write When the head and the bias magnet enter the protection cassette of the person and the g-disc is rotated by the driving mechanism, the disc can enable the read-write head to obtain all the information of the disc media. In order to save space in the optical storage system, it is therefore desirable to minimize the required size of devices that load and unload optical discs from the spindle. The traditional loading and unloading device depends on the type of disc used. A disc loading and unloading system using a disc cassette can usually automatically transfer the disc cassette from the receiving port to the spindle. When the disc is no longer used, the conventional disc loading and unloading system can also automatically unload the disc from the spindle. A loading device is usually provided to complete the loading and unloading of the disc, so that during the loading of the disc (ie, when the disc is moved from the ejected position into the optical disc drive and mounted on the spindle), the disc is moved horizontally parallel to the bottom plate and the turntable Turntable. When the disc has been positioned above the turntable, the disc is placed vertically on the spindle at right angles to the turntable surface. Once the disc is on the turntable, the spindle magnet absorbs the size of the paper and the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) is applied --------- jr ^ ------ 1T ----- -i.: --- (please read the precautions on the back and then fill in this page j, invention description (5 light = guilty in the media to put the center disc center in the center) in order to hold the first chute in rotation Read and write operations. Field operator, when using the CD, the operator starts the exit operation. The most common way to exit the package and handle from the wire is the technology used in most Japanese $ drive = devices. In the disc unloading device, there are four pins on each side of a cassette, and these pins move on the track of the adjacent metal guide 2. When the disc is retracted, the cassette lifts the light vertically away from the spindle Then the device-parallel to the bottom plate and the turntable, moves horizontally toward the handle of the front of the optical drive. Therefore, when #CD is lifted off the wire during unloading, the sand must be lifted on the card g to 2 Call the tree on the silk money to hold the force. To overcome the maximum lifting force of the magnetic clip 1, the mechanical operation of the eject lever or the electrical retreat can be started The system is produced. In the traditional electrical exit system of the Central Mongolian Bureau of Economic Cooperation of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, where the disc card removal device lifts the disc card g vertically to cut off the spindle magnet and the disc shaft, the magnetic support of the == the electrical exit motor A large load must be generated in order to effectively move the disc card. Therefore, when the operator uses electrical to exit the system, a large motor with torque is required to generate sufficient vertical lift. It must also be retained in the system casing Space to accommodate this larger motor, thus increasing the size of the overall casing of the child loaded into the device. In addition, the larger motor also consumes a considerable amount of power capacity. The paper size is suitable for the country's homepage " iT ^ fS) A4 · (〖1GX297mm) ----------- A7 B7 V. Description of invention (6) Therefore, we want to reduce the complexity of the optical disc drive while reducing the overall size of the machine, so that the driving device can be convenient It is used in computer applications. In order to be able to accommodate a 5 1 / 4-inch disc cartridge and small enough to be used in personal computers, the disc drive must be compact and well-designed Install mechanical and electrical devices. To achieve this requirement, you need to reduce the size of the exit motor required. One way to affect this result is to reduce the force required to cut off the magnetic attraction force, which is to hold the disc center. On the spindle magnet. By reducing the magnetic attraction required, a smaller eject motor can be used in the machine. Therefore, it is desirable to design a disc loading device in which the disc is not lifted off the spindle magnet vertically but "stripped off" "The magnet.

The traditional way to achieve this peeling action is to swing the turntable and spindle down from the disc. This method is discussed in US Patent No. 4,791,511, which was obtained by MARVIN DAVIS and assigned to LASER MAGNETIC STORAGE INTERNATIONAL. However, it has not been possible to design a drive device that peels the disc off the spindle magnet. Printed a package by the Staff Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs-(please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page). Move the objective lens in two directions, one is focusing (that is, perpendicular to the horizontal plane of the disc) or the Z direction, so that the focused laser beam becomes a small spot to the correct position of the disc to write or retrieve information; (I.e. radial from the center of the disc) or γ direction, so that the positioning beam reaches the desired information on the disc

Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 ----------- B7 V. Description of invention (7) '— The correct center of the trajectory. Focusing and tracking correction can be effected in two directions-known animal mirrors are the direction of the optical axis for focusing the mirror, or the other is the tracking direction perpendicular to the optical axis. In these systems, the position of the objective lens in the focus and tracking directions is usually adjusted by the control system. The actuator supports the objective lens and converts the position correction signal into the movement of the objective lens from the feedback control system. Most of these actuators include a moving coil, a fixed magnet, and a fixed yoke, in which a magnetic field is generated in the air gap between the yoke and the magnet.丨 U.S. Patent No. 4,568,142 obtained by GUMA, titled "Objective Lens Driving Device," describes a variety of actuators, where the actuator includes a rectangular magnet placed inside a U-shaped yoke. The yoke and their opposing N poles are separated from each other, and are close enough to each other to form a magnetic circuit. A square focusing coil is combined with the outside of a square lens frame. Four tracking coils are joined to the corners of the focusing coil. Then, the edge of the focus coil is placed within the air gap of each of the aforementioned U-shaped yokes, so that the focus coil straddles the yoke. Because the focusing coil must surround these "center" or "inner" magnetic plates, the coil cannot be wound too tightly as expected and the coil structure must be moderately rigid. Also in the closed ballast design, most of the coil windings are placed outside the air gap. This shows that the efficiency of the actuator will be reduced. Most optical systems' coils must be very rigid in the air gap and the coil resonant frequency should be above 10KHz, and most of the demand value is above 25KHZ. In the design of many kinds of conventional actuators, the magnetic air gap of this paper standard is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Μ specification (210X297 Gongdong) (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this summer). Order B7 5. Invention Note (8) The large number of coil windings usually needs to achieve maximum motor performance. In order to install such a large amount of air-conditioned and suitable for the limited space of the Yang design, the ペ ギ ィ ン ム メ メ is completely or partially independent, or it must be rolled as thin as possible. These coil structures have low rigidity and decoupling effect at low frequencies. The dynamic resonance effect of many actuator designs during operation also causes the coil to relax. Other actuator designs use the same magnetic air gap to develop the power of the focusing and tracking motors 'so the tracking coil is glued to the focusing coil or Vice Versa' to save parts, space and weight. In these designs, the decoupling frequency of the tracking coil attached to an independent unsupported focusing coil is usually about 15KHz, which shows that it will cause a lower decoupling frequency. Focus sensing Optical green recording and playback systems like those that use memory discs, CDs, or video discs need to illuminate the optical beam through the objective lens to properly focus on the surface of a disc. The incident illumination beam is usually reflected through the objective lens, and then the information stored on the disc is read. It is then reflected back through the objective lens, and the reflected beam passes directly to a design to determine the focus of the irradiation beam on the optical disc. The information extracted from the reflected beam by this device can adjust the focus of the illumination beam by alternately moving the position of the objective lens relative to the disc. Some focusing techniques for detecting the irradiation beam are known. For example, U.S. Patent Nos. 4,423,495, 4,425,636, and 4,453,239 Applied Beam Condensing Papers are used in the Du Family Standard (CNS) M specifications (21Gx297 public directors). The A7 is printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economy. V. Invention Description (9) However, a method called "critical angle prism" is used. In this method, the illumination beam reflected from a storage disc is introduced into the surface of the inspection rod, which is very close to the critical angle with respect to the reflected illumination beam. When the focus of the irradiated light beam on the disc surface deviates from the desired state, the change of the optical energy reflected by the surface of the detected prism can be used to induce a focus error signal to adjust the focus of the irradiated light beam. The critical angle method generally requires correct adjustment of the orientation of the detection prism surface relative to the reflected beam. The aforementioned requirements cause the detection characteristics of the prism near the critical angle and the focus error detection system based on this method to be too sensitive. However, this critical angle technique has several disadvantages. First, the generation of the focus error signal depends on the reflected light at the interface between the detection prism surface and the air. Therefore, changing the altitude while changing the index of refraction of the air will cause erroneous focus reading (offset). Moreover, the critical angle technique is inherently unsuitable for use in differential focus sensing systems. The differential system is gradually important because the system can eliminate some types of noise that occurs in the disc drive. The critical angle method is not suitable for differential operation for two reasons. First, the transmitted beam generated by the sensing rod is compressed along one axis, which causes asymmetry with the reflected beam. In the differential system, in order to optimize the characteristics of NOISE CANCELLATION in different environments, the symmetry of the two beams is better. Second, in terms of the reflection curve of the critical angle prism, when the intensity of the two beams is balanced on this curve, the slope is too low to produce a useful differential focus error signal. Paper-like ^ Gu Zhongguan secret rate (CNS) from secret (21 () > < 297 public (please read the precautions on the back and then fill out this page) installed. 、 1 Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed A7 B7 5. Description of the invention (10) When compared with the critical angle technique disclosed in US Patent No. 4,862,442, the 'focus detection device needs to make a slight correct adjustment on the surface of the disc where the reflected illumination beam is incident. In particular, in the meantime The surface of the optical disc contains a reflective multilayer dielectric coating that continuously changes the angle of incidence of the reflected beam. This allows the rotation of the surface containing the multilayer coating to be out of phase It has a smaller effect, but such a technique will also reduce the sensitivity of the angle. Moreover, the focus error signal is incorrect due to the reaction of the multilayer film dielectric system to slight changes in the wavelength of the reflected illumination beam, because the focus error signal The design hopes to be completely related to the focus of the irradiation beam, so the sensitivity to wavelength changes is not the desired response. In addition, some use dielectric multilayers The system that emits the surface only provides a focus error signal with a limited sensitivity level. For example, Figure 37 of US Patent No. 4,862,442 shows the special reflection characteristics of the reflective surface of a broad dielectric, and the slope of the reflection characteristics It is proportional to the sensitivity of the focus error signal. The intensity range revealed by it is about 〇_75 to 0.05 when it exceeds the incident angle from 42 degrees to 48 degrees. About 10% of the reflection change per degree produces a relative Low-sensitivity focus error signal. Therefore, there is a need for an optical arrangement in the technology, characterized by a reflection coefficient profile that allows the generation of a high-sensitivity focus error signal that is insensitive to height changes and chromatic aberration (CHROMATIR ABERRATION), And it can be used in the differential system. This paper scale is applicable to China National Accreditation Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) -------- {装 ------ 定 ------ 1 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) 31 A7 --__ B7 printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Invention Description (11) Beam to read At the same time, the optical data storage system that displays information is attracting attention in the mass storage industry of computers. As such, the academic data storage system provides a high storage density, high data transmission rate, and fast random access storage on the information medium. The data is usually an optical disc. In these optical memory systems, reading and writing data is usually done using a single-laser light source with two intensity functions. During any operation, light is transmitted from the laser light source to a focus The objective lens of the forbidden beam reaches a specific focus point on the disc. During the retrieval of the data, the laser is focused on the green media and changed by the data of the data storage medium. Then, this light will be reflected from the disc back through the objective lens to- Light detector. #Other importantly, when the information is written to or read from the memory, the objective lens and the existing focusing beam must be accurately focused on the center of the correct track, so that the information can be accurately written and retrieved. In order to correctly read the information stored on the disc, it is necessary to be able to move the objective lens in two directions, one is focusing (that is, perpendicular to the horizontal plane of the disc) or the Z direction, so that the focused laser beam is a small spot Go to the correct position of the disc to write or retrieve information; the other direction is the tracking (that is, radial) or Y direction, so that the positioning beam reaches the correct center of the desired information track on the disc. The correction of focusing and tracking can be influenced by moving the objective lens in either direction, one direction is the direction of the optical axis used for the focal point of the lens, or the other direction is the direction of the tracking perpendicular to the optical axis. f ^ ------------__ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) This paper uses the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (2 丨 0 > < 297 Public)

The Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Bureau of Standards and Staff Employee Cooperative Printed on these systems, the position of the objective lens in the focusing and tracking directions is generally lightened by the control system. The secret material (iv) records the position correction signal into the secret of the objective lens. When it is not possible to put a sufficient j area of the Silang media, it will cause the specified amount of information to be included in the disc too large range 4 or to read the disc from a too wide area. Similarly, the inability to correctly scan the laser beam will cause the information to be stored in the wrong location, or the information will be read from the wrong location. In addition, the movement along the Z axis affects the focus and the movement along the γ axis affects the tracking. The actuator has at least four additional movement modes, and each mode reduces the correct read and write operations during normal system operation. Sex, this is not the desired result. These unwanted movement modes are rotation on the χ axis (an axis orthogonal to the X and z directions), or tilt; rotation on the 2 axis, which is considered to be panning left and right; rotation on the Y axis, called rolling ; And linear movement along the χ axis, or travel along the tangent direction. Movement in these directions is usually caused by the reaction force of the motor and the carriage and / or actuator. These modes generally produce unwanted movement during tracking or focusing operations and will affect the positioning of the objective lens relative to the disc. Anamorphic prism, achromatic prism system (ANAMORPHIC, ACHROMATIC PRISM SYSTEM) Disc systems usually use an anamorphic prism to adjust the ellipticity of the laser beam, move the laser beam astigmatism, and / or manipulate the direction of the beam. Please refer to the paper standard applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X297mm) (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Binding · Order Printed by the Staff Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs -__ b7 ___ V. Description of the invention (13) U.S. Patent No. 4,333,173 obtained by Yayang 2 3 // ^, 1 ^ 6 "U.S. Patent No. 4,542,492 obtained in 1716, and U.S. Patent No. 4,607,356 obtained by Bricot, described in the application of optical discs A simple deformed prism is used to change the beam shape. The deformed prism is usually equipped with an embedded film to reflect part or all of the returned beam (reflected by the optical medium) to the detection system. Deguchi US Patent No. 4,573,149 describes the use of a film To reflect a return beam to the detection system. And the entrance surface of the deformed prism is usually used to reflect the return beam to a detection system, such as the detection systems described in US Patent Nos. 4,542,492 and 4,607,356, which usually have multiple detection channels It is more convenient. For example, in the CD, one detector can provide data signals and the other detector can provide control. The signal is used as a tracking and / or focus servo signal. A typical problem with traditional 珜 鏡 is that morphological 鏜 鏡 is plagued by chromatic aberration (CHROMATIC DISPERSION), which causes lateral chromatic aberration. The angle caused by the refraction of the anamorphic prism also changes. These changes cause the side beam to shift when the beam is focused on an optical medium such as a disc. In a light beam system, a small shift in the beam can cause erroneous data signals. For example, if a shift occurs suddenly in the data address, the beam may skip the data stored on the disc. 'This paper standard is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210x297mm) (please read the back page first Matters needing attention before filling this page)

, 1T A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (14) If the light source (for example: laser) is indeed monochromatic absorptivity (CaOCHRMAT), the chromatic aberration will rarely cause problems. However, there are usually several factors Causes changes in the laser spectrum. For example, when the power of most laser diodes is increased, the increase in the material in the magneto-optical disk system occurs when the laser pulse is written from the high rotation to the disc. 'This is a conventional technique. In laser materials, it usually causes a wavelength shift of about 1.5 to 3 nm in traditional systems. Most laser diodes also respond to changes in wavelength with temperature changes. In addition, random "mode-hopping" (MQDE-H0PP 丨 NG) will be like an unpredictable wavelength change. The general range lies in. RF modulation is usually used for laser diodes operating at read power, in order to Is to minimize the effect of "mode-jumping J" on the system. However, this RF modulation increases the bandwidth of the spectrum and can change the center of the spectrum. Also, RF modulation is usually not used when the laser is used to write people. In a non-achromatic (N0N-ACHR〇MAT | C) system, the incident light A sudden change in length will cause the focal point of the side beam to shift by more than a few hundred nm. The amplitude of this side beam shift will cause serious errors in the data signal. The chromatic aberration is corrected in the optical system using a multi-element prism system Design is a well-known technology. A book such as "Moder Optical Engineering" by Warren J. Smith, McGraw-HILL Publishing 1996, pp. 75-77 discusses this concept. And "some optical disc systems use Multi-component anamorphic chromatic aberration system of color difference. However, the paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) (please read the back side first; please fill out this page if you need to pay attention) The Bureau of Standards negative labor consumption cooperatives printed the Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Bureau of Precincts ’employee consumption cooperation du printing A7 ------ B * 7 V. Send 5 ^ (15) ~~~. 'However, typical multiple components at present The 珜 鏡 system requires separate fixed multiple prism parts. Fixing these multiple components increases the cost and difficulty of manufacturing, because each component must be aligned with other related components in the system. Small deviations in alignment can cause major functional changes. This also complicates quality control. Other multi-element systems are currently attached to the elements that form the single ~ rear mirror, but these prism systems (ACHR〇MAT 丨 C) Different amethyst materials are required for achromatic systems. Finally, current achromatic systems do not provide the reflection of the returned beam to multiple detection systems. Searching for a change has changed for many years, different memorable green and / or erasable media have It is used for data storage. For example, the media of systems with different structures include magnetic tapes and optical discs. The current Magneto-Optical (MAGNETO-〇PTICAL, " M〇 ") system I records green data to the disk and retrieves the data from the disk. In the magneto-optical system, when the Tiantian pulse heats a local area, the procedure for recording green usually includes the use of a magnetic field suitable for the general area polarity on the disc, thereby fixing the polarity of the local area. This local area of fixed polarity is usually called a hole (ρ | τ). 1 The presence or absence of rules and holes on the tree by the coding system to define the green data as " 1 " or " Q " respectively. . When recording data, the sequence of binary input data will be converted from digital modulation to a different binary sequence with required properties. For example, the modulator can be installed (please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page). 1

A7 V. Description of the invention (16 characters. Most of them: = 7 sets of " there is a modulation code bit (or “B_ ") gate. The situation is that there are more code bits than data bits, ie m < ) χ (The density ratio is usually expressed according to the equation (m / d σ, where _N has the definition provided above, two, the minimum number of occurrences of 0. Therefore, when GCR./3/8/9 IS The / ^ degree ratio 'has a density ratio of 1.5 according to the aforementioned equation RU 2/7/1/2 code. In order to read data in the T system, a focused laser beam or other pre-set 2 is generally directly contacted with a rotating disc The recording surface, so that the laser beam can selectively access one of the complex tracks on the recording surface. The rotation of the laser beam riding from the recording surface can be detected by the Kerr rotation method. For example, in the Kerr rotation The change in is expressed as the first binary value. The change in the second type of Kerr rotation is expressed as the second binary value. An output signal is generated from the-and second binary values that occur at the specified clock interval / Although there is a growing demand for higher image storage data density capabilities for optical disc systems, There are still several limitations to the ability to store density data. Under normal circumstances, the modest increase in data density is partially due to the requirement of reliability2, the optical wavelength of the laser diode, the quality of the optical module, and the cost And the speed of operation. The maximum data density is also affected by the ability to resist various types of noise, interference and omissions. For example, the high density packet data and more symbolic interfaces will prevent the correct retrieval of the information department. Moreover, because the paper size of Pingben is applicable to the National Standards (CNS) Α4 specifications (210X297mm (installed-(please read the precautions on the back before filling in this 1) i Order -------- -------- Printed by Employee Consumer Cooperative of Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economy V. Description of invention (17 The technology mostly used in the intermediate mode and high-performance optical disc drive device is restricted by the compulsory compatibility of the older mode, signal processing technology It ca n’t be as fast as other aspects: (iv) To get back the money _, the eye-tracking channel (M0) and other types of optical drive devices can generally tolerate the unexpected establishment of the DC component in the read signal ⑽ 丨 LDUp) -Some problems. One reason for the establishment of straight mud (DC BU LDUP) is due to the recording of asymmetric data models on some bytes or data segments.-Symmetric data models can be considered to have an average of 0 in important areas DC component. Because the order of recording the green bit 7L must be random in many modulation codes, however, the local area of the recorded data with a special model of ^ 〇 will produce an asymmetric read of the unnecessary straight mud component Signal. Because the data model is time-varying, the level established by the DC also changes, which causes a drift in the DC reference line, a reduction in the critical detection edge, and a greater sensitivity to noise and other interference. Unnecessary DC build-up can also be caused by changes in the size of the cavity or hole (PIT) due to thermal effects on the writing laser or storage media. For example, when writing laser heating, the size of the spot (SPOT) may result in a wider cavity. When reading the recorded cavity, the change in the cavity size will cause an asymmetric input signal with a DC component. The change in the size of the cavity not only leads to the establishment of unnecessary DC but also causes the relative position of the data that shifts over time, reducing the edges of the timing and causing possible read errors. Different attempts are used to overcome the aforementioned problems. For example, different tape drive systems usually use a DC-FREE code, for example, the civilian paper standard is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 public daughter) --------: clothing --- --- 1T ------ ^ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) A7 printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Economics of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ——————- B7_ V. Invention Description (18) 0/3/8/10 code, otherwise refer to the simple 8/10 code. Since the 8 / 10th code requires 10 storage bits to generate 8 data bits, when the high data density is to be recorded, the disadvantage is that it is only 80% efficient. Another way to deal with DC establishment is to include the use of quadratic differentiation. This method generally includes detecting the peak value of the first derivative of the input signal by detecting the zero crossing of the second derivative of the input signal (DERIVATIVE), so the DC component can be effectively filtered out. One disadvantage of this method is that differentiation or quadratic differentiation can cause unnecessary noise effects. The second drawback is that this method reduces the timing edge and cannot accept low levels (for example, as much as 50%). In another method for DC creation, the stored data is randomized prior to the recorded data, so that no data model is repeated on the data area. However, this method is not accepted by the ISO standard and also lacks downward compatibility with the aforementioned optical disc drive system. A further disadvantage of this method is that it makes DE-RANDOMIZING complex. There is another method to control DC establishment including the use of so-called resync bytes between data segments. This method generally includes the inspection and operation of the data before recording the green, in order to minimize the DC build-up when reading back. Before green, two consecutive pieces of data are checked to determine whether the model of 1 and 0 has a positive DC, negative DC, or no DC component when read back. For example, if two consecutive data segments have the same DC polarity, one of the data segments is preferentially transposed (INVERTED) rather than recorded on the media first. However, in order to maintain the size of this paper, the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210χ 297 male thin) (installed -------- ordered (please read the precautions on the back and fill in this education) to continue in the special coding system Within, the "esync bytes between segments need to be written in such a continuous bit and the FLUX REVERSAL" model is more suitable. The disadvantage of this method is that it will not necessarily reduce all the straight mud establishment And it must be decided that such expected DC establishment will not affect the time constant of this property. In addition, this method requires additional auxiliary operations, including inspection of the data segment to determine their relative polarities. Therefore, there is a more convenient method When the device provides a high data storage rate, the reading of stored data from a medium does not need to endure the unnecessary impact of DC construction, and it will not cause unacceptable noise levels or severely reduce timing edges and A large number of requirements or anti-randomization algorithms that require auxiliary operations. 1_Material storage and other data retrieval parties and the Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Standards Bureau Beigong Consumer Cooperative Society can record green / cancel Except the optical disc is the effective use of current data storage media. Magneto-optical green is generally used to store data to the disc and / or search data from the disc. During recording, when a laser pulse heats a local area to fix it When the polarity of this small area is large, a magnetic field guides the polarity of a general area on the disc. A local area with a fixed polarity is usually called a pit (A Pit). Some coding systems use the presence or absence of depressions on the disc to define The data recorded in green is regarded as, 1 " or " 〇 ". The most commonly used coding system for this type of recessed recording is limited by the (RLL) 2,7 code execution length because it provides The highest data-to-sag ratio. However, due to A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (20 When the frequency increases, the amplitude and timing edges quickly decrease, so the recording type cannot reach a higher density. Please I \ I READI READ | I Face III of I Matter I Item I Further I Fill I Bookbinding The invention includes a method of moving the carriage assembly from a starting position to a target position relative to a storage medium rotating at a peripheral speed. According to the present invention, the method includes the steps of determining the first half distance between the starting position and the storage media center, determining the second radius distance between the target position and the storage media center, and determining the starting position and the target position Between the circumferential distance, the initial circumferential speed of the storage medium, the calculation of the speed trajectory relative to the first radius distance, the first half-to-distance distance, the circumferential distance and the initial circumferential speed, and under the d speed trajectory The starting position moves to the target position. Calculate the speed trajectory to make the carriage assembly reach the target position at the same time in the circumferential and radial directions. In addition, the target circumferential speed can be determined and the rotation of the storage medium can be changed from the initial circumferential speed To target circumferential speed 'and advance-step display the speed trajectory related to the target circumferential speed. According to the preferred embodiment of the present invention, the printing and printing of the employee consumer cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economics is a method of moving the carriage assembly from the starting position «to the target position relative to the storage medium ', and the storage medium has a center and a Circumferential and rotating at a speed relative to the center of the carriage assembly, including the steps of determining the first-half distance between the starting position of the carriage assembly and the center of the storage medium, and determining the target position of the carriage assembly The second half distance from the center of the storage medium determines the circumferential distance between the initial position of the carriage assembly parallel to the circumference of the storage medium and the target position of the movable assembly, determines the center of the storage center The initial circumferential speed of the storage medium, calculated relative to the first distance, the second radius distance, the distance and the initial circumferential speed ^ trace, thereby using the aforementioned speed trajectory to move the carriage assembly from the starting position Sample standard (CNS) A ^ 721〇x297A) A7 V. Description of the invention (21): The slide frame assembly will move from the prostitute with a radius and a circular square frame assembly_mesh ^^. Called the core_slide. According to a specific embodiment of the present invention, the above method goes further: the target phase of the storage medium that has been determined by the core of the storage medium is suddenly determined-the power Gu Cungu changes it from the initial 15 degrees. Is ^ circumferential distance, in which the speed trajectory is further-stepped with the expected circumference ^ 'I and in which if the carriage component actually changes the speed trajectory from the starting position = the initial circumferential speed of the storage medium to the target circumferential speed at the speed trajectory, the carriage The component will arrive at the financial statement target S in half a time.伏 J 财 向 The nuclear progress of the present invention is almost the same as the present invention. The step frequency depends on the speed of the carriage to reach the second: the target peripheral speed is reached before the position 'or when the carriage, ―reach the target & set the tree Que Hutong—Time depends on the target circumference. —I—IU. According to the present invention, another method is to position the slippery component from the beginning to the target position of the storage medium, and the storage medium has a = center and a circumference and (iv) For the aforementioned slide assembly to rotate at a speed at the aforementioned center ', the step includes moving the slide assembly at the first-speed trajectory from the starting position toward the radial direction to the target position, and determining relative to the storage medium , The quiet position of the mosquito rib frame assembly and the storage center, the second part-the radius series, the second radius distance between the target position of the mosquito rack assembly and the center of the storage medium, determines the parallel to the circumference of the storage medium The circumferential distance between the intermediate position of the clear frame assembly and the target position of the slide frame assembly determines the storage medium (CNS) A4 ^ (210X 297 / ^ ¾ A7 B7 Ministry of Economics Central Skirt % Member X. Printed by the consumer cooperative V. Description of the invention (22. Initial circumferential speed of the storage medium, calculation of the velocity trajectory with respect to the first radial moment, the second radius distance, the circumferential distance and the initial circumferential speed, Therefore, if the carriage assembly is moved from the intermediate position to the target position at the speed trajectory, the carriage assembly will reach the target position at the same time with the radius and the circumferential direction at the same time. The intermediate position moves to the target position. &Amp; The alternative method further includes the additional steps of determining the target circumferential speed of the storage medium about the center of the storage medium and applying a force to the storage medium to change it from the initial circumferential speed to the target circumferential speed , Where the speed trajectory is further related to the expected circumferential speed, and where if the carriage assembly actually moves from the intermediate position to the target position at the speed trajectory, and if the initial circumferential speed of the storage medium changes to the target circumferential speed, the carriage The components will The aforementioned target position is reached at the same time. The above-mentioned alternative method according to the present invention can be implemented such that the storage medium reaches the target UJ circumferential speed before the carriage assembly reaches the target position, or the storage medium is almost the same when the carriage assembly reaches the target position-the time is reached Target speed According to the present invention, there is another alternative method of moving the carriage assembly from the starting position to the target position relative to the storage medium, and the storage medium has a center and a circle and the moving frame assembly is placed before the The aforementioned center rotates at-speed, and the included lion determines the start of the carriage assembly and the goal of the carriage assembly. The diameter of the carriage assembly is transferred to the circumference of the storage medium (the starting position of the carriage assembly and the slide mounting The circumferential distance between them depends on the storage at the center of the storage medium = This paper scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (cns) a4 specification Γ exhibition! (Read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) '玎 ------ {------------ ./ ί. B7 V. Description of the invention (23) Initial peripheral speed Calculate the speed trajectory relative to the radius distance and the circumferential distance to the initial circumferential speed, whereby if the carriage assembly is moved from the starting position to the target position with the aforementioned speed trajectory, the carriage assembly will be almost the same in radius and gimbal -Time reaches the aforementioned target position, and actually moves the carriage assembly from the starting position to the target position at this speed trajectory. The second alternative method further includes the additional steps of determining the target peripheral speed of the remaining media with respect to the center of the storage media and applying a force to the storage media to change it from the initial peripheral speed to the target peripheral speed, where the speed The progress of the rail is related to the expected circumferential speed, and if the center is set to the moving frame, the piece actually moves at the speed from the starting position to the target position when the initial closing speed of the right material dragon changes to the target circumferential speed.f The moving frame assembly will reach the target position at approximately the same time with the radius and the circumferential direction. The second alternative method of the invention can be implemented as the storage medium reaches the target circumferential speed before the sliding position, or when the sliding reaches the target position, the storage medium is almost the same-the time reaches the target circle. _ There is a third method of moving the carriage assembly from the target position relative to the storage medium, and has a center and a circumference and changes the direction of the carriage relative to the aforementioned carriage assembly from the starting position == patterned carriage. 5 The radius distance between the target positions of Fenmu maggot is flat at the intermediate position of the slide assembly of the circumference of the storage medium. Each paper size is applicable. A7 Printed by the Central Bureau of Economic Affairs of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Beigong Consumer Cooperative 1. Invention Description (24 and the storage medium of the center of the media of the target position of the carriage assembly ^ == away from, determine the storage distance, the circumferential distance and the initial circumferential speed === calculation = :: pinch the speed track to move the carriage assembly from the middle Position shift: right = the frame component will be placed on the standard f with the radius and the circumferential direction, slide: = _ 一 滑-: 件 === the storage medium changes from the initial_speed to the target_speed Degrees, and the speed trajectory is further-related to the expected circumferential speed, and the actual speed of the carriage assembly assembly (from the start of the rail position) to the target position, and the initial round position if the storage medium becomes When aiming, the carriage assembly will reach the target position at almost the same time with half search and circumferential direction.-The third alternative method according to the present invention can also be implemented as a storage medium before the carriage assembly reaches the target position When the target circumferential speed is reached, the storage medium reaches the target circumferential speed when the carriage assembly reaches almost the same position of the target position. In addition, various aspects and components of the preferred embodiment of the present invention will be described in the following description and attached The additional features and advantages of the present invention are described and introduced in detail in the drawings. The paper size is applicable to China National Standards (CNS) Α4 specification (210 X 297 mm)

A7 5. Description of the invention (25 > B7 is a perspective view of an embodiment of the optical disc drive device of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a plan view of the light-removing device casing; FIG. 2 is the disc drive of FIG. 1 The device is taken along the line 3_3 in Figure 1 in the direction of the cross-sectional view. Figures 48 are top views of the optical module of the ®-CD-ROM device. Figure 4B is the optical path diagram of the disc drive device in Figure 1; Figure 5 is Fig. 1 is a block diagram of the electronic system of the disc drive device; Fig. 6 is another perspective view of the disc cartridge ready to be inserted into the disc drive device. Fig. 7 is an exploded perspective view of the disc drive device of Fig., Describing the relevant Wang Yao sub-components; 8A and 8B are perspective views of the bottom plate shown in Figure 7; "Binding I ---- ^ (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page). Printed drawing 9 of the Employees Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Light Industry Ministry Remove the bottom view of some components for the drive shown in Figure 6. Remove the driving wheel from the rod and read the operating relationship between these components by the motor disk driving these gears; 10A to 10F are the bottom views of the boat rod With perspective view; Figures 11A to 11C include left The bottom view, side view and perspective view of the sliding arm; Figures 11A to 11 are the bottom view, side view and perspective view of the right sliding arm; the drawings are printed on paper --- Printed by Beigong Consumer Cooperative, Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs Fifth, the invention ^ Proximity of the docking arm near two three l in two directions, one direction is the movement of the back: ΓWhen the drive device is stationary, the parking slide is installed in the drive. A perspective view of the disc drive device, in particular, the material track Ξl actuator assembly sliding frame 'is to maintain the focus of the laser beam to the disc. Figures 14 to 14 include a bottom view and a perspective view of the docking arm; Figure 15A And 15B are perspective views of the cassette receiver; Figs. 16A and 16B are bottom views of the drive device of Fig. 6 with some parts removed during insertion of the optical disc cassette to more clearly show the Solutions and lugs, and the operational relationship between these parts; Figures 17A and 17B are perspective views of the latch, which fixes the position of the cassette receiver at the top; Figure 18 is the biasing coil assembly splint Perspective view; Figure 19 is a perspective view of a bias coil assembly ; Figure 20 is the decomposition of the main components including the main components of the bias coil assembly. Figure 20-is a perspective view of the steel rail, < rotatingly supporting the bias coil assembly; This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification ( 2 丨 0X297mm) 1 nn I ί (m · nn — ^ n ϋ one eJnn I-^ —K ^ pn--ί— (please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) A7 V. Invention ~- Figure 22 is a perspective view of the bending part of the biasing coil assembly, the biasing wire = the piece is fixed on the f-curved part and the bent part is fixed in turn on the rotating wheel shown in Figure 21; Figure 22 is the cassette withdrawal cycle The fork on the right side of the cassette receiver and the clamps before the start of the display shows that the disc is loaded in the operating position on the spindle; Figure 24 is a front view of the right side of the cassette receiver and the cassette withdrawal cycle During the period, the cassette is shown diagonally centered and the disc is peeled off the spindle; Figure 25 is the front view of the right side of the cassette receiver and during the cassette ejection cycle, the cassette loading system is shown in the upper position, and the disc starts to drive The device chases out; Figure 26 is a schematic diagram of the actuator of the present invention Perspective view; Fig. 27 is a perspective view of the frame of the actuator of Fig. 26; Fig. 28 is the use of the actuator of Fig. 26 in the magnetic field housing to connect with the green system Perspective view; Figure 29 is a top view of the greening system of Figure 28; Printed by the Staff Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs — (please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Figure 30 is a picture Right-side front view of the twenty-eight green recording system; Figure 31 is a front bottom view of the recording system of Figure 28; Figure 32 shows the magnetic field generated by the magnetic pair of the actuator of Figure 26 A schematic perspective view; This paper scale is applicable to the Chinese national 抇 芈 (CNS) A4 specification (21〇Χ297 mm) A7 B7 Sixth actuator focusing coil and permanent magnet Seventh actuator tracking coil and permanent magnet economy Printed by the Staff Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry 5. Description of invention (28) Figure 33 is a perspective view of the figure; Figure 24 is along the section line 34 — 34 of Figure 33, and Figure 26 The scaled gj of the actuator and the permanent reduction are based on the face map, showing the effect Focusing force on the actuator; Fig. 35 is a schematic φ diagram 'showing the tracking force turned on the actuator; Fig. 36 is a preferred block diagram of the beam focusing sensing device of the present invention; j Figure 37 is a microscopic enlarged top cross-sectional view of the spectroscopic module (FTR 稜鏡) of the present invention; Figure 28 is the first fish M_quad detector included in the focus sensing device of the present invention Front view; 'Twenty-nine Figure 29 shows the reflective coordinate graph of the FTR 珜 鏡, a function of the angle of incidence of the beam; Piao Weiguang Figure forty is the fine error signal value generated by the device of the preferred embodiment of the present invention The coordinate diagram is the position function of the objective lens relative to the optical disc; 61 Figure 41 schematically illustrates an example of an optical reading / writing system, the slider and actuator assembly of the present invention; and Figure 42 is the slider and The perspective view of the actuator assembly; Figure 40 is an exploded view of the sliding frame and the actuator assembly;

The size of this paper is suitable for the SI family sample standard (CNS) Α4 specification (210X297 male D 1 〈Laundry 11. ^ Qin —--- 1------ I__ {Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this Page 7) A7 5. Description of the invention (29 Figure EJ · Mission, Figure 44 is an exploded view of the actuator; Figure 45 shows a schematic top view of the coarse tracking force acting on the assembly Figure 46 further shows the coarse adjustment Schematic side view of the tracking force; Figure 47 shows an exploded view of the focusing force acting on the actuator; Figure 48 shows a breakdown of the fine-tuning tracking force acting on the actuator, Ministry of Economic Affairs, Central Standard Falcon Bureau, Beige Consumer Cooperative Printed drawing 49A shows a schematic top view of the symmetric coarse tracking force on the horizontal plane; Figure 49B shows a schematic side view of the coarse coarse tracking force on the vertical plane; Figure 50A shows the Schematic top view of the symmetrical fine-tuning tracking force on the horizontal plane; Figure 50B shows a schematic side view of the net fine-tuning tracking force aligned with the centroid of the fine-tuning tracking motor; Figure 51A shows the symmetrical fine-tuning tracking reaction on the horizontal plane Schematic top view of Lizhi; Figure 51B shows a schematic side view of the net fine-tuned tracking reaction force aligned with the centroid of the fine-tuned tracking motor; Figure 52A shows a schematic side view of the symmetrical focusing force on the horizontal plane; 11 ^ # ^ ('CNSy74 ^ 7 210X297mm) (Please read the precautions on the back and then fill in this page) Pack. Order A7 Printed by Beigong Consumer Cooperatives, Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs «-~ ------ -87 —___ V. Description of the invention (30) Fig. 52B shows the schematic end view of the net focusing force aligned with the optical axis of the objective lens; Fig. 53A shows the schematic side of the symmetric focusing reaction force on the horizontal plane View 'Figure 52 B shows a schematic end view of the net focus reaction force aligned with the center of gravity of the fine-tuning tracking motor; Figure 54 shows a schematic top view of the bending force and the reaction force of the fine-tuning motor generated in response to the bending force; Figure 50 Five A shows a schematic side view of the symmetrical suspension force of the carriage on the horizontal plane; Figure 55B shows a schematic end view of the net carriage suspension force aligned with the optical axis of the objective lens; Figure 56A shows the phase on the horizontal plane Symmetrical friction A schematic top view of the friction force; Figure 56 shows a schematic side view of the friction force aligned with the center of mass of the carriage; Figure 57 shows the response of the net inertial force to vertical acceleration acting on the center of gravity of the fine-tuning motor and the carriage Schematic end view of the center of gravity; Figure 58A shows a schematic side view of the net inertial force of the fine-tuning motor aligned with the optical axis of the objective lens; f Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page} Install.,-° 丄 本 纸The Zhang scale applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (21〇X297 mm). The A7 is printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. A7 _________ B7 5 ~~ Figure 58B shows the net of the slide frame for the optical axis of the objective lens Schematic side view of inertial force; Figure 59A shows a schematic top view of the inertial force on the components of the carriage and the actuator assembly for horizontal acceleration; Figure 59B shows a schematic top view of the net inertial force on horizontal acceleration; ~ Figure 60A shows a schematic side view of the acceleration inertia force of the fine-tuning motor and carriage at the resonance frequency of the bending arm; ~ Figure 60B shows the micro at the resonance frequency of the bending arm Schematic end view of the acceleration inertia force of the motor and the sliding frame; Figure 61A to 61D show the relationship between the fine-tuned tracking position and the fine-tuned motor current; Figure 62A to 62C show the effect on The influence of the asymmetric focusing force on the assembly; > _ Figure 63 shows another embodiment of the sliding frame and the actuator assembly; Figure 7T 14 shows the operation of the actuator moving the frame in the focusing direction. Sixty-five shows the operation of the actuator to move the frame in the tracking direction. Figure sixty-six describes the simple anamorphic prism and shows the effect of chromatic aberration in 珜 鏡; " Figure sixty-seven describes the current multi-element anamorphic prism system; (Binding {(Please read the precautions before filling in this page) Figure 68 describes the air separation system according to the present invention;

A7 Five descriptions of inventions (32) B7 Printed by the Employees ’Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 11 Figures 69 and 69 A describe an embodiment of the air-spaced, multi-element system of the present invention; Figures 70 and 70 A The side view, the top view, and the top view of the plate-shaped 珜 鏡 in the embodiment of the 鏜 鏡 system in FIG. 69 are described separately with FIG. 70; FIGS. 71, 71A, and 71B are depicted in FIG. 60, respectively. Side view, top view, and bottom view of the trapezoidal 珜 鏡 embodiment of the Jiuzhong 珜 髡 system embodiment; + FIGS. 72 and 72 A respectively describe the color correction 珜 鏡 embodiment of the prism system embodiment in FIG. 69 Side view and plan view of the optical surface of FIG .; FIG. 72 describes another embodiment of the air-spaced, multi-element multi-component system of the present invention; FIGS. 74, 74A and 74B are depicted in FIG. 70 respectively Side view, elevation view and elevation view of the quadrilateral 珜 鏡 in another embodiment not shown in the third; Figure 75 shows a block diagram of the optical data storage and retrieval system; Figure 76 is a series of waveform examples; Seventy-seven A and seventy-seven b are symmetric and asymmetric input signals, respectively Waveform of No .; Figure 78 is a block diagram of the read channel; Figure 79A is a more detailed block diagram of the different stages of the read channel; Figure 79 is a detailed circuit diagram of some integrator stages ; The size of the paper ϋ Finance Customs (CNs) A video grid (21Gx297 Gong Dong -------------- Ιτ ------ ^ (Please read the notes on the back first (Fill in this page) A7 V. Description of the invention (33) [SJ · Figure, Figure 80 + e are the different stages of the reading channel 4 < • Frequency response diagram with delayed buccal rate response ®V " F is the reading channel In the combination stage, the group extension diagrams from eighty G (1) to A ten G (4) are shown in different stages. Figure 80 is a block diagram of the peak detection and tracking circuit; Figure 11 is a picture. Eighty-Schematic diagram of the bee detection and tracking circuit; Figure 83 shows the waveform of the trace traced by the critical signal of the DC envelope of the input signal; please read the notes on the back of the id before filling in this page. Figure 84 A — Waveform graph; 84. D Example showing different points in the reading channel. Order 2. The Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Bureau of Industry and Fisheries Consumer Cooperation Figure 85 is a block diagram of the optical data storage and retrieval system; Figure 80 is a series of waveforms showing the difference between the pulse GCR format and the RLL 7 format in the laser pulse; Figure 87 Laser pulses for various data modes adjusted by the write compensation circuit for a series of waveforms; Figure 88 shows a schematic diagram of the write compensation circuit; Figure 89 shows a laser pulse for a series of waveforms showing the amplitude asymmetry correction A schematic diagram showing the correction circuit for the amplitude asymmetry; A7 3 ^ 9439 V. Description of the invention (34) ~~. Figure 91 shows the basic relationship of the elements of the pulse thinning device, figure; The series of waveforms shows the criticality of the dynamic critical value circuit; " Figure 93 is a diagram showing the dynamic critical value circuit; Figure 94 is a schematic block diagram of a downward compatible optical data storage and retrieval system; Figure 9 Fifteen is the layout diagram of the trajectory of Shangyi and Duo CD; Fig. 96 is a block format diagram of high-density CD; Fig. 97 is a detailed block diagram of the read / write circuit shown in Fig. 94; Ninety-eight is- The list of the best formats for high-density discs describes the tracks in the zone, the number of zones in each track in the zone, the total number of zones in the zone, and the frequency of writing green data in the zone in the 21 best zones of the high-density disc; Figure 99 provides The list of one program is used to calculate the CRC bit of D block; Figure 100A is the first half of a list (Hex 00 to 7F) showing the three address blocks and 8 of the data blocks. How to convert the bytes (except resync bytes) into the channel bytes on the disc; this paper standard is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) (please read the back (Notes and then fill out this page) Binding · Order Printed by the Employees ’Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economy 5. Invention Instructions (35 Α7 Β7 〇B is a list (Hex 8〇 to FF). The last half of the list shows three address blocks How the 8-bit bytes in the bit and the data block (other than the resync byte) are converted into channel bits on the disc; Figures 10—A through Nine are the preferred embodiments of the present invention Schematic diagram of the electronic circuit in the middle; Figure 120 is according to the first preferred embodiment A perspective view of a mechanical isolator and a pole piece; Fig. 1, a perspective view of a mechanical isolator according to the second best practical example of the second-second series and the micro-programming language of the present invention Gang Cao # State diagram; Figure 1, two or three language state diagram; It is a micro-program diagram of the writing mode of the butterfly that is operated in conjunction with the present invention. Nyquist Figure "24" is the focus loop transfer function of the selected closed-loop peak value ---- ((Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) Figure Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economy-Zhang Yi Paper amplitude response road phase minus the transfer function phase response representation diagram Figure 1 Figure 27 shows the amplitude response curve of the focus compensation transfer function; Figure 28 shows the phase response curve of the focus compensation transfer function quasi f

A7 Printed IL B7 by Beigong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Description of the invention (36) "Best Embodiment" Overview of the table blanket: full-fledged umbrella. 璺, thunder and mechanical parts refer to Figure 1 first, showing the disc drive device 10 有 壳 14。 10 has a housing 14. The optical disc drive device 10 projects and / or records an optical disc (not shown), which is installed in a removable optical disc cassette 12. Alternatively, the optical disc may be contained within the casing 14 of the optical disc drive device 10. Referring now to FIGS. 2 and 3, FIG. 2 shows a top view of the optical disk drive 10 with the housing 14 removed, revealing some important mechanical, electrical, and optical components of the drive 10. Fig. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the driving device 10 in the direction of the cross-sectional line 3-3 of Fig. 1. In FIG. 2, the base plate 16, the spindle 17, the linear actuator assembly 20, the objective lens slide assembly 22, the optical module 24, the drive circuit board 30, the spindle motor 18, the optical module circuit board 27 and the drive circuit board 26 are shown. In short, the bottom plate 16 is the base of the other components of the driving device 10 and is used to place and arrange the components between each other. In order to reduce costs, the bottom plate 16 is preferably made of cast steel. As shown in FIG. 2, the linear actuator assembly 20 includes a pair of linear audio coil actuators 23, and each audio coil actuator 23 includes a rail 34 fixed to the base plate 16. The rails 34 are substantially parallel to each other. Next to each rail 34 is a pole plate 32. One of the actuator coils 23 is a part surrounding each pole plate 32. Each actuator coil 23 is relatively attached to the mirror slide assembly 22 using the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (20 × 297 public excellent) —I ^^^^ 1 tn t- i -1 «I nn · n ^ — ^ Nt ^^ i— One J • Accepted -5 (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) A7 _______B7 V. Description of the invention (37) --- on the part 'When the coil 23 is selectively excited The mirror carriage assembly 22 moves along the rail 34. The actuator coil 23 is driven by a signal from the drive circuit board%, so that the mirror slide assembly 22 can linearly move with respect to the optical module 24 and the individual disc (not shown) inserted into the drive device 10. In this way, the mirror carriage assembly 22 enables the optical disc to perform coarse adjustment tracking. The optical module 24 and the mirror slide assembly 22 include the optical principle of the driving device 10. The optical module 24 is fixed to the bottom plate 16 and includes a laser, various sensors and optics (not shown). In operation, the laser guides the light beam (not shown) from the optical module 24 toward the mirror carriage assembly 22, and the optical module 24 sequentially receives the light beam (not shown) returned from the mirror carriage assembly 22. As mentioned above, the mirror carriage assembly 22 is connected to the linear actuator assembly 20. The mirror slide assembly 22 includes a pentagram (not shown), an objective lens (not shown), a servo motor (not shown) for focusing the objective lens and a position for the objective lens relative to the linear actuator assembly 20 and the inserted optical disc The servo motor is fine-tuned to enable the fine-tuning of the disc. On the one hand, the electrical information and control functions are converted between the mirror slide assembly 22 and the main circuit board 30, and on the other hand, it is printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. Convert between 28. The optical module circuit board 27 includes a laser drive device and a preamplifier (not shown). The drive circuit board 26 can control the servomotors of the spindle motor 18, the linear actuator 23 of the linear actuator assembly 20, and the mirror carriage assembly 22. The driving circuit board 26 is controlled by the main circuit board 30. The paper size of the main circuit is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21〇297 public love) --- A7 printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Examination Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A 7 ____—____ B7 V. Invention description (38 ~ ϊ "- ---- Board 30 includes most of the electrical components, and those components have similar design considerations (for example: noise cancellation, EMI and power loss) and are not provided on the optical module circuit board 27 or the drive circuit board 26. Spindle motor 18 is fixed to the bottom plate 16. The motor 18 directly drives the main shaft and sequentially rotates the disc by the main shaft 17. Man: Optical module and objective lens assembly Referring now to FIG. 4A, which shows a top plan view of the optical module 24. Including housing 40, semiconductor laser diode 42, collimator lens 44, achromatic prism 46, deformation expansion prism 48, leakage beam splitter 49, 〇1 :: 1 ^ prism 50, cylindrical mirror 51, reading Mirror 52, microlens 54, servo detection sensors 56 and 58, forward sensor 60 and data detection sensor 62. These components are also shown in Figure 4B, which shows the performance of following laser beam 64 The optical path. Figure 4B shows the optical components of the optical module 24 bonded The pentagonal beam 66 and the objective lens 68 of the carriage assembly 22. For easy understanding in FIG. 4B, a part 70 of the laser beam 64 between the pentagonal beam 66 and the objective lens 68 passes through the optical module 24 The portion of the laser beam 64 is displayed on the same plane. In fact, the pentagonal beam 66 is arranged at a position where the laser beam portion 70 is guided to be perpendicular to the laser beam 64 passing through the optical module 24 Continuing to refer to FIG. 4B, it can be understood that in operation the laser beam 64 is a parallel beam generated by the mirror 44 from the split beam emitted from the laser diode 42. The beam 64 is transmitted through Lei 46 and 48, After passing through the spectroscope 49, the Chinese National Standard (CNS) M specifications (2 丨 〇-χ297mm) are applied to the paper standard (please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page). Industrial and Consumer Cooperative ^ Manufactured Α7 _______B7 V. Description of the invention (39) The lens slide assembly 22 leaves the optical module 24. The light beam passes through the pentagonal beam 66 and is focused by the objective lens 68 onto the surface of the disc. , The reflected part of the laser beam 64 returns through The objective lens 68 and the pentagonal prism 66 then enter the optical module 24. The first injury of the light beam 64 is reflected on the interface of the beam splitter between the pentagonal anamorphic beam 48 and the beam splitter 49, and passes through the reading mirror 52 Transmission and focusing, and enters the micro-prism 54. The light beam is separated into two parts according to the polarization effect, each part is detected by the respective elements of the data detection sensor 62. The second part of the light beam 64 It passes through the beam splitter 49 and is reflected by the anamorphic prism 48. After the second part of the beam 64 leaves, it enters the DFTR 50, and the second part of the beam 64 is separated into two parts at this point, each part is formed by a circle The mirror 51 focuses on the respective surfaces of the corresponding servo sensors 56 and 58. The signals generated by the sensors 56 and 58 in response can be sent directly to the optical module circuit board 27, where these signals generate tracking and focus error signals. The heavy circuit board and the circuit board and the Guanggao module Lei He will now refer to Figures 1, 2, 4A and 5 in which the system block diagram of the electrical subsystem of the drive device 10 is shown in Figure 5 where block 8 includes reading For sensing, an amplifier 82, a laser driver 84, and a servo sensing preamplifier 86 are provided. In Figures 4a and 5, the read-sensing preamplifier 82 is connected to the data detection sensor 6 2 and is now a signal generated by the data detection sensor 6 2. Similarly, the Hefu Sensing Preamplifier 86 is connected to the Hefu Xuan paper from the applicable Chinese national ifCNS) Α4 ^ — · 2ι ^ ~~. II ------- (^ n I--! _ Τ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) A7 _______B7 printed by the Beigong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Invention Instructions (40) 56 and 58, and amplify the signals generated by the servo sensors 56 and 58. The laser diode 42 is connected to a laser driver 84 which provides a signal for driving the laser diode 42. The read sensing preamplifier 82 of the subsystem block 80, the laser driver 84 and The servo sensing preamplifier 86 is gathered together on the optical module circuit board 27, which is placed close to the optical module 24. In this way, the signal can be moved from the sensor data detection sensor 62 to the sensor with a minimum distance The detection preamplifier 82 and the movement from the sensors 56 and 58 to the servo sense preamplifier 86 reduce the adverse effects of noise on these signals. Because the laser driver 84 generates the laser diode 42 The signal is high frequency, good design and implementation requires the placement of the laser driver 84 Close to the laser diode 42. Block 88 in Figure 5 includes a spindle motor interface 90, a mechanical subassembly interface (MSA) 92, a position sensing interface 94, and a switch and display assembly 96. The components of the block 88 spindle motor interface 90, mechanical Sub-assembly interface (MSA) 92, position-sensing interface 94 and switch and display assembly 96 are all placed on drive circuit board 26. Spindle motor interface 90 controls spindle electric board 18. Mechanical sub-assembly interface (MSA) 92 and various display and The switch is connected to the display assembly 96, including a front signal panel display, an exit circuit, and a switch for the optical disc card £ 12. The position sensing interface 94 is connected to the coil actuator 23 of the actuator assembly 20, the coil actuator 23 is driven by the power amplifier drive device 102. n I-II-------In τ f, τ (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

Fifth, the description of the invention (4Ί) '-: -------- • The system block diagram of Fig. 5 The other subsystems are located in the main circuit board 30 shown in Fig. 3. &amp; Subsystems include drive device analog read channel 〇〇 drive device encoder / decoder 1〇4, drive device scs chip set 〇6, buffer DRAM_'GL | C interface Sichuan and its associated EPRROM ^. Wang circuit board financial package_bit interface circuit 114, digital signal processing 116), embedded controller, RAM / eprom 120 associated with it. It should be noted that the optical drive is equipped with a recordable drive device, and the power amplifier 102 also drives the bias coil 122. First, refer to FIG. 6, which shows the disk storage system, usually labeled 1 · 1 0. FIG. 6 describes The position of the replaceable disc m13 is to be inserted into the disc drive device 1-10, which is incorporated into the card insertion and removal device of the present invention. The disc drive device 1-10 includes a bottom case 1-16 and a panel 1-19. The panel 119 includes a disc receiving port 1-22, a drive actuating indicator 1-25 and an exit button 28. The Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumer Cooperative Cooperative Printed Optical Disc System 1-10 is a focusing mechanism and tracking mechanism, Mirror and read CD, where the mechanism is controlled by the feedback loop, and the feedback loop also includes an electrical circuit to generate servo signals to affect the correction of the focusing mechanism and the tracking mechanism; the first device is used to ease the action on the movable The shadow treasure of the unnecessary mechanical force on the disc drive component; and a second device to support the first device between the component and the unnecessary mechanical force source, the paper size provided by this is applicable to the Chinese national standard (CNS ) A4 specification (210X297mm) Beigong Consumer Cooperation Cooperative Printing of Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 1-'-V. Description of invention (42 off step: rr-related to the special nature of the standard, a detailed description. 131 = type of The outer shell of the 磲 片 卡 對 13 includes an upper planar surface: the planar surface is shown in FIG. 25. The disc card calendar does not "to the label end [34. In the preferred embodiment, when the disc card g user ^ Into the tablet drive device 1 pair, the forward label end 1_34 can still be brought to the surface. For example, the 'side f1-37 extends between the upper plane surface 1-31 and the lower plane table 2 <, and the card reads _38 also extends between the upper plane surface 1 34 and the lower plane surface 1_32 and is parallel to the label poem. The «1.37 near the label end 1.34 is a slot to accommodate the setting; the cassette positioning feet 1_43 of the display panel 1-46 (Figure 8 Α— 八 Β). 剌 伟 1.13 also includes a card _ or cover ^ cover (closed (figure 6, seven and eight) with a spring drive. When the cover W9 is opened, stay on the upper plane surface% 31 Cup 52. Because the disc drive device 1-1 of the preferred embodiment is to read the disc card g1_13 on both sides, the surface and the parking section will exist in the lower level The surface [32, but this feature is not shown in the picture. Usually the cover is on the back wall of the disc card E1_13 [38 with a cover flash 1_55 (not shown). What is protected within the disc card 1E1-13 is metal Disc 1-14 (Figures 23-25) of the dish 15. In the known technique, the disc 1-14 can form a hard bottom layer with a coating of magnetic material on it. Embedded in the magnetic material The coating is based on the track of concentric circles or spiral rings. The magnetic coated paper is suitable for towels ϋ ® Home Ladder Standard (CNS) Α4 specification (^ Τ ^ 297 public) -------- {装- ----- book ------ (... (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) Printed by Employee Consumer Cooperative of Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Description of invention (43 on hard bottom One of them is expected to be dragged on the two surfaces by obstruction, and the coating can be recorded on the discs 1-14 (head., &Quot; Invented Disc_ Following 1, the main figure in item seven. The bottom plate is placed within the bottom shell 1-16 [46. The motor main engine 1.61 is mounted on the base plate 1_46. The silk disc: =:-, when the disc is installed in the -13 _ twenty-three two-one time _ iron holding the disc 1_1 tin metal disc center ^ 5 (Figure Mountain-fifteen). According to the present withdrawal system is marked as 1-67. Retreat two, 7 includes the left slide bar "〇, right slide bar port 3 Wei ㈣. In order to have a more detailed description of the exit mechanism 1.67. Figure 7, also describes the parking arm 1 79 on the left slide bar ⑺. The card receiver is marked as 1_82. Figure 7 also shows the left door link, the right door link and the receiving door 1_91. Each element is pivoted to the card E receiver 1.82. The drive panel 1-19 is described in Wei Receiving the front of S1_82. Finally, the rotatable magnetic bias coil assembly 1_94 is attached to the bias module _97, secret magnetic coil arm 1-97. The bias magnetic coil clip is described below. Each component assembly will be provided below. Continuing to refer to Figure 7, the bottom case 1-16 includes side walls [彳 ⑽ and the rear wall 1-106. The inner bottom surface of the bottom case 1-16 has 4 mounting post feet _1〇9 is used to fix the bottom plate 1 -46 The bottom case 1-1.6 is also packed with control electronic circuits, but it is not depicted in the figure. The paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21〇297mm) -------- { Install ------ order ------ ^ __ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page. J B7 V. Invention description (44) Refer to Figures 8 and 8 for more details The structure of the bottom plate 146. The bottom plate 1-46 is installed on the four mounting legs of the bottom shell.] _ 16. The bottom plate 1-46 has many molded, embedded, connected and related components. The bottom plate 1-46 Many parts of the present invention are carried together in an adhesive manner and allowed to interact with each other. The bottom wall _46 is surrounded by a front wall% 112, left outer side wall 1_115, left inner side chuan, right outer side cut, right inner side wall 1 -124 and the rear vertical wall W27. Each left and right outer side wall, 1-121 includes a vertical groove iwo, ^^^ When the card g receiver 1-82 is positioned near the bottom plate 1-46, the left vertical groove The private lifting system accommodates the left lifting column on the cassette receiver 1-82 (figure 15A). Similarly, the right vertical slot 1-130 accommodates the right lifting column 1139 on the cassette receiver _82 (Figure 10) 5B). Figure 8B printed by the Staff Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. The two cassette positioning feet -43 are placed near the front ends of the left and right outer side walls 1-115 and 1-121. These cassettes are positioned The feet 1-43 are used to fit the cassette slots 1-40 (Figure 6). When the cassette positioning feet 1-43 are located in the cassette slots 1_4〇, the cassette positioning feet 1-43 It will hold the disc cassette 1_13 and prevent the cassette from moving to both sides (edge-to-edge) and longitudinal (front and rear). The spindle motor pallet 1-142 is a mold on the bottom of the bottom plate 1-46. For example, the spindle motor 1 -61 (Figure 7) can be held on the spindle motor pallet 1-142 and connected to the middle rib 1-145 by spring clips (not shown). The base plate 1-46 has various shafts and mounting bolts associated with it. For example, the Pivot Cup 1-148 is fixed on the bottom plate 1_46 close to the main shaft motor holder a 8 4 secret (210x297 mm) This paper size is applicable to China A7 B7 Printed by Beigong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economy (45) 1-142. Rudder stock spring column 1-151 is fixed near the bottom wall [46 bottom front wall 1-112 (Figure 8A). The other bolts are attached to the vicinity of the bottom front wall 1-112 of the bottom plate 1_46 as pivots for the gears in the gear transmission chain. The bottom plate 1-46 also includes a left slider groove 1-154 and a right slider groove 1-157. The slider grooves 1-154 and U57 extend along the sides of the bottom plate 1-46. The left slider groove 154 is formed between the left outer side wall 1-115 and the left inner side wall 1-118. When positioning, the left slider 1-70 will be sandwiched between the left inner side wall 1-118 and the left outer side wall 1_115, and will rest on the left slider groove 1-154 (see Figure 9'13 and 16A) . The same 'right slider groove 1-157 is formed between the right outer side wall 1-121 and the right inner side wall 1-124. When positioning, the right slider 1_73 will be sandwiched between the right inner side wall 1-124 and the right outer side wall 1-121, and stop on the right slider bar groove 57. For example, the left and right sliders 1-70 and 1-73 can be clamped on the respective grooves 1-154 and 1-157 by the &quot; ears &quot; of spring clips (not shown), respectively. ; Hold the spindle motor 1-61 in the proper position on the spindle motor pallet 1-142. At the end of the right slider groove 1-157 near the rear vertical wall; ^ 7 end, the shaft hole 1-160 is formed on the bottom plate 1-46, the back of the right inner side wall 1_124 will be behind the right outer side wall 1-121 Merged on the bottom plate 1_46. This shaft hole is stubborn. A pivot 1-163 for receiving the latch 1-166 is received (Figures 17B and 17A). The receiving latch 1-166 has a vertical surface 1_169 (FIG. 17B) on which is a latch release lever 1_172 (FIG. 7 and 16A) that fixes the right door link 1-88, and the receiving latch can be unlocked by impact Lock 1-166. Thai paper scale is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (2 丨 ο〆29 *; male sauce) -------- clothing ------ lτ ------ {(please first Read the precautions on the back and fill in this page) A7 B7 printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (46) The bottom plate 1-46 has a hole 1-175 on the rear vertical wall 1-127. The laser diode 42 (not shown) is placed behind the rear vertical wall between the left corner 1-178 and the right corner 1-181, irradiates through the hole 1-175 and enters the carriage 1-1 84 (Figures IX, XIII, XIIIA, XVIA, and XVIB are the best displays), which includes optics that focus the information track of the laser beam onto discs 1-14. The slide rack 1-184 is discussed further below. The bottom plate 1-46 also has holes 1-187 pound molds for receiving the pivots 1 -1 90 of the docking arms 1-79 (Figure 14B). For example, Figure 9 shows the positioning of the docking arm 1-79 and its pivot 1-190 on the hole 1-187. The disc drive device 1-10 includes an optical module 1-1. The 89-type system performs operations similar to the optical module 24 discussed above. Referring now to Figures 14A through 14C, the features of the docking arms 1-79 will be further discussed. In addition to the pivot 1-190, the docking arm 1-79 includes a pressurizing end 1-193. The docking arm 1-79 has a jaw 1-196 formed away from the pressurizing end 1-193. Sweet mouth 1-196 has a long side 1-199 and a short side 1-202. As can be seen most clearly from Figures 9, 13, 16A and 16B, when the docking arm 1-79 is positioned, its jaw 1-196 will straddle the lug 1- of the docking arm 1-79 2〇5 on. The position of the stop arm 1-79 is described by the position of the left slider 1-70 on the left slider groove 1-1 54. Figure 13 most clearly shows that the docking arm 1-79 is docked on the carriage 1-184. The sliding frame 1-184 # F focal spot passes through the laser beam from the hole 1-175 (Figures 8A and 8B) on the vertical wall 1-127 behind the base plate 1-46. In particular, the paper standard of the sliding frame is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) II I *-(Please read If first and pay attention to the flat item before filling out this page) 5. Description of the invention (47) 1-184 Read the data from positioning the laser beam to the material track. The sliding frame ⑽ Gorge leaned against the text ^ called the magnetic arrangement containing the elements to drive the slide along the support rail ^ frame ^ Figure 9). When the receiver ⑽ is in the upper position, slide from the left ^ Gudang card arm 79 towards the driving equipment (backward) == the docking station 6 = A push to illustrate this situation, and in Figure 13 stop 9 and 10 show . When exiting the door at disc cal 1-13: When driving forward with solid table 1-76, the docking arm is rotated and pressed by lugs 1-205 with lugs 1-205: 1; 196 short side "02 until Pressing end of the docking arm "9 ... 3 = == ⑽ back holding the sliding frame 1,". When the card-receiver is set at 10 10, the left slider 1.7Q has been driven towards the back of the disc drive 1-10 by the snake lever 1-76. In this case, the lugs 1-205 'and the left slide lever 1_70 are driven backward, and the turn stop arm W9 rotates toward the front of the disc drive device 1-10. With the left slider 17〇 and the docking arm ⑺ in these positions, the sliding frame 1 · 184 will not be affected by the pressurizing end 1 · 193 of the docking arm W9 and can be freely attached to the disc drive device 1-1⑽'s disc card Move under box 1-13. Seen most clearly in Figures 7 and 9, the exit mechanism 167 includes the following key features. Exit motor 1-209 drives the exit mechanism. In particular, exit the motor 1-209 vertebral gear drive chain to push the output cam and sequentially force the snake rod 1-76 (Figure 9) to rotate in the first direction (counterclockwise in Figure 9), from which The disc drive device 1-10 exits the disc cassette u3. When starting and exiting the program, this paper standard is applicable to the Chinese national standard (CNS & A4 specifications (21〇X297 ^ J7 Please read the back ft Ψ item and then t set the Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Standards Bureau employee consumption cooperation Du Yin crack B7 V. Invention description ( 48) When 'exit motor 1-209 drives the connected screw 1-211. The screw ^ 1-211 is fixed on the central axis of the exit motor 1-209. The screw drives the larger first gear on the first gear shaft 1-217 1-214. The larger first gear 1-214 rotates and rotates the smaller first gear _22〇, the gear 1-220 is fixed to the bottom surface of the larger first gear 1 · 214 while A gear shaft 1-217 rotates. The smaller first gear 1_220 drives the larger second gear 1-223 on the second gear shaft 1-226. The smaller second gear 1-229 is fixed to the larger first gear The upper surface of the second gear 1-223 simultaneously rotates with the second gear shaft 1-226. The smaller second gear U29 sequentially drives the larger third gear 1_232 on the third gear fine 1-235. The gear 1-232 Drives the cam 1-238 and forces the rudder stock 1_76 to rotate with the rudder stock pivot 1-148. Printed by the Staff Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Referring now to FIGS. 10A to 10F and FIG. 9, the rudder stock _76 will be described. The rudder stock 1-76 is pivotally connected to the bottom plate milk by the rudder stock pivot ^ 48. General rod spring hook 1- 239 is molded on the elongated portion of the rudder stock 1-76. The general rod spring 1-241 (Figure 9) is connected between the rudder stock spring hook ^ 239 and the rudder stock spring spine 1-151. The rudder stock spring 241 The rudder stock 1-76 is offset in the second direction of the rudder stock pivot 148 (clockwise in Figure 9). Drive the right slider 1-73 forward and the left slider _7〇 backward to install The disc cartridge ^ 3 is attached to the spindle motor 1-61, which is the loading direction of the cartridge. The rudder stock also includes a rudder stock edge or webbed portion 1-244 straddling the rudder stock gear drive chain and thereby helping Wait for the exit gear to be positioned on the respective gear shaft. The end of the general rod near the edge of the rudder stock 1-244 contains U-shaped jaws 1-247, and the end of the rudder stock far from the edge U44 CNS) A4 specification (2lGx297 male thin)

The Printing Department of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and Industry and Consumer Cooperatives also contains a similar U-shaped jaw 1250. The U-shaped jaw [^ is rotatably mounted on the cylindrical connecting post [253 of the left slider 1-70 (Figure 11c). Similarly, the U-shaped joint U50 of the common rod 1-76 is rotatably mounted on the cylindrical connecting column 1 · 256 of the right slide rod 1-73 (Figure 12 0. Borrow the screw 1-76 to pivot Connect the front ends of the left slider bar ^ 'Right slider bar · · ^. In addition, because the left and right slider bars 1-70, [73 are held by their clips (not shown) on their respective slider bars On the slots 1_154, 1-157, the spring clips also keep the spindle motor 1-61 in position. The rudder stock 1-76 is connected to the pillar by the ^ -type jaws 1-247, 1-250 and in column. 253 , The interaction between 1 256 is maintained on the general lever pivot 1-148. The S rudder 1-76 rotates in the first direction (counterclockwise in Figure 9), and the left slider 1-70 is driven forward to The left slider groove 1-154, while the right slider 1-73 is driven backward to the right slider groove [⑹. Therefore, the rotation of the general lever [π in the first direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 9) is lifted The cassette receiver 1-82 so that the disc card g1_13 can be ejected from the disc drive device buckle 10 or loaded into the disc drive device 1-10. On the other hand, when the boat lever 176 is in the second direction (Figure 9) Center is clockwise), left slide bar. Rear drive to the left slider slot 1-154, while turning right m forward_ to the right slider slot 1-157. Rotation of the rudder stock 1-76 in this direction lowers the cassette receiver 1-82 'Place it on the disc spindle motor. The lifting and lowering action of the receiver 1-82 by rotating the cassette receiver by the joystick will be discussed further below. -------- Second clothing ------, 玎------ {(Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) _This paper form is suitable for the national towel (CNS) Α4 specification (21 () \ 297public ~ ^ employees of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the consumer cooperative A7 ~ _____-__ B7___ V. Description of the invention (50) As discussed above, under the influence of the rudder stock 1-76, the left slide bar w〇 stops on the left slide bar groove 1 -1 54 'and right Slider 1-73 is docked on the right slidebar slot 1-157. The following provides further details about the slidebars 1_7〇, 1_73. Now referring to FIGS. 11A to 11C, the following are the features of the left slider-70 The left slider 1-70 includes a cylindrical connecting post 1-253 on its front end. The docking arm lug 1-205 is on the first docking portion 1_259. The impact of the docking arm 1-79 on the lug 1-205 The first along the left slider 1_7〇 A stop portion 1-259 slides. An S-shaped groove 1-262 is formed in the left slide bar 1-70. When the left slide talent 1-70 is positioned on the left slide cup groove 1-1 54, the s-shaped groove 1- 262 opens toward the left outer side wall 1-115, near and behind the left vertical slot 30. When the cassette receiver 1-82 is positioned around the bottom plate 1-46, the cassette receives the left lifting column 1 of the cry 1-82 -136 (figure 15A) docks on the bottom plate [46 left vertical groove 1 -1 30. The length of the left lifting column 1-136 is greater than the thickness of the left outer side wall 1_5. Therefore, the left lifting column 1-136 is placed against the left vertical groove 1-130 and rests on the S-shaped groove 1-262 on the left slider 1-70. Therefore, when the cassette receiver 1-82 is placed on the bottom plate 1-46, and the left lift post 1-136 is parked at the left vertical_1-130 and the S-shaped groove 1-262, the cassette receiver Ku-82 Moving forward or backward is limited to moving up and down vertically. When the S-shaped groove 1-262 on the left slider 1_70 limits the vertical height of the cassette receiver 1-82, the left vertical groove 1-130 also restricts the forward and backward movement of the cassette receiver 1-82. In other words, at any special moment, according to the part of the S-shaped groove 1-262, behind the left vertical groove 1-130, the cassette receiver 1_82 can stay at its highest position. This paper standard applies to the national standard of towels. Rate (CNS) A4 specification (210X 297 gong) ----- (Please read the notes on the back before filling in this 1 ') The lowest position of the setting, Έ, or between its highest and lowest positions Between some locations. -The second docking part 1.265 is on the left slider (iv). —Horizontal pickup (not shown) is connected to the exhibition board 146 to prevent slippage along the second dock U. This horizontal inspection (not shown) restricts the left and right positions of the left god _7㈣ 大 杂 'because the bolt can hit the edge of the second dock U65 and reach one of the end positions of the left slider 1-70. As shown in Figure 10-B and Figure 7, the last end of the left slider 1-7 includes a notch 1-268. The notch 1-268 is located on the replacement end 1-272 of the left slider m. The notch ^ 68 receives the lever arm 1-275 of the magnetic deflector arm ^ (Figure 7). This arm [π rotates the magnetic bias coil arm according to the position of the left slider w (iv), especially the position of the notch 1-268. Replacement of the left slider ^ 0 The end 1-272 rests on the recess 1-278 on the left outer side wall 1-115 of the bottom plate (Figure 8B). Referring now to Figures 12A through 12E, the features of the right slider ⑺ will be mentioned. As described above, the rudder stock 1-76 is connected to the right slider 1_73 via the cylindrical connecting post 1_256. The right slider 1-73 has a job slot ⑹ marriage. The kS type groove 1 · 281 is the reverse position type of the left slide bar _70's s type groove _262. Figure 7 is the best display. Considering the closed state of FIG. 7, it is obvious that when the sliders 1_70 and 1_73 are connected to the rudder stock _76, the shaped grooves 1-262 and 1-281 are mirror reflections of each other in reverse position ( Mi "" 〇 "⑻ Qiong sentence. Such an arrangement is necessary, because the paper standard of the influence of the rudder stock 76 is suitable for financial _ ^ 5 ^ (eNS &gt;) ----- Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Standards Bureau Industrial and Consumer Cooperatives printed seal A7 B7 5. Description of the invention (52) The sliders 1-70 and 1-73 move in opposite directions. When the right slider 1-73 is on the right slider groove 1-157 When in position, the S-shaped slot 1-281 on the right slide bar 1-73 also opens toward the right outer side wall 1-121. Refer to the description similar to the above left slide bar 1-70, when the cassette receiver 1-82 is on the bottom plate When positioning around 1-46, the right lift post 1-139 (Figure 15B) rests on the right vertical slot 1-133 (Figure 8B). Because the length of the right lift post 1-139 is greater than the right outer side wall 1- The thickness of 121, the right lifting column 1-139 is placed against the right outer side wall 1-121 in the right vertical groove 1-133 and can be parked on the S-shaped groove 1-281 on the right slide bar _73. Right vertical groove 1-133 restricts the right lift post 1-1 39 parallel to the bottom plate 1-46 The movement of the shaft (ie, parallel to the line passing through the front wall _112 and the rear vertical wall 1 -127). Because the right lift column 1 _1 39 rests on the S-shaped groove 1-281 'cassette receiver 1 The vertical height of -82 can be defined by the position of the right lifting column 1-139 on the s-shaped groove 1-281. The §-shaped groove 1-281 on the right slider 1_73 is behind the right vertical groove at the same rate [圳 幻The rate of movement is also the rate at which the S-shaped slot 1-262 on the left slider 1-70 passes behind the left vertical slot 1-130, but in the opposite direction. However, the s-shaped slot 1-262, 1 -281's reverse position mirror mapping design ensures that the left and right lifting columns 1-136 and 1-139 are maintained at the same vertical height on the bottom surface of the bottom plate _46 at any time. Mainly still refer to Figure 12A to Twelve e, the right slide bar ^ 73 includes the following additional features. The upper surface of the right slide bar 1_73 provides a docking portion 1-284. A bolt (not shown) is installed horizontally across the right slide bar slot 彳 卩Soki Paper Standards (CNS) Eight Specifications (210X297 publication-iia I-i-^ n ml nl · * male cock,-mouth (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) V. Description of the invention (53) It can slide along the docking surface! Delete the slide. Because the end of the 1.73 movement will hit the edge of the docking cup 284, the horizontal bolt that slides at the edge of the portion 1-284 by t Λ can restrict the right Slider two = move forward and backward. The right slider W3 also includes the notch area ^ suitable for receiving flash lock 1-166 enough Figures 17a and 17 (1). At the pole 1-73, the confession was made. When the rotation in the first direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 13) is driven to drive the right slider ⑺ backward on 1-157 of the right chute, the latching action is enough to receive the flash lock 1- · i Rhythm slider 1-73 occurs between protrusions 1_293. In particular, the first-sliding surface 1 · 296 (Figure 17A), which is located on enough I ·, slides through Bunuo (Figures 12C and 12E), which is a protrusion on the right slide bar 1-73 Department 1-293. When the surfaces 1-296 and 1-299 slide through each other, the hook 1-290 is driven by a spring in the direction of the arrow marked ^ _3〇2 in Figure 17a to enter the notch area of the right slider 1-73. ? While keeping the right slider 1-73 in the rear position so as to keep the cassette receiver 182 in its uppermost position. When the Card® receiver is in this position, any disc cassette 1 · 13 in the disc drive can be ejected, or the cassette cassettes 1-13 can be loaded into the disc drive. When cutting into the disc cassette to the spindle motor and unloading the disc clamp from the spindle motor, the points are on the left and right sliders ^ ?. , S-shaped grooves 1-262 and 1-281 on 1-73 are used to produce the singulation action completed by the present invention. This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standards (CNS) 八四 threat (21〇 &gt; &lt; 297 public health) (installed— (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) ---------_

In the Ministry of Economics — Ιί 社 I f ---- — Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economics A7 ----— __B7 V. The role of invention description (54). The following further discusses the work of S-shaped grooves ι_262, 1-281 to help illustrate the peeling action produced by the present invention. Referring now to Figures 15A and 15B, the cassette receiver 1-82 and the components attached thereto will be discussed. The cassette receiver is a single-piece type, and the left door connecting rod 1-85 (Figure 7) and the right door connecting rod _88 are plastic injection mold pieces. When the disc drive is completely installed, the left door link 1-85 rests on the outside of the left and right outer side walls 1_1, 5, 1-121 of the bottom plate 1-46. When the cassette receiver 1-82 moves vertically, the left and right lifting columns ι_36, 1-1 39 also move up and down with the respective S-shaped grooves 1-262, 1-281. The cassette receiver 1-82 will also vibrate slightly up and down with the virtual horizontal axis passing through the left and right lifting columns 1-136, 1-139. This slight longitudinal movement with the up and down movements is beneficial to the peeling action accomplished by the present invention. If the cover of the disc drive 1-10 is removed, the cassette receiver 1_82 will close or lift away the remaining parts in the machine. The cassette receiver 1-82 forms therein a left cassette receiving groove 305 and a right cassette receiving groove 1-308. The stop bar 1-311 is arranged behind the right cassette receiving slot 1-308 to prevent improper insertion of the disc cassette 1-13. See Figures 6 and 7 '. The disc cassette 1-13 has a pair of slots 1-314 cast on the side walls 1_37. If the disc cassette 1-13 is inserted correctly, the rear wall 1-38 will first enter the disc receiving port 1-22, and one of the slots 1-314 on the disc cassette 1-13 will fit The stop bar 1-311 and the disc cartridge 1-13 are fully inserted into the disc drive device 1-10. On the other hand, if the user inserts the disc card Kuang 1-13, the paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X 297mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page).

1T Printed by the Male Workers ’Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. A7 ------- B7 V. Description of the invention (55) The first label end 1-34 enters the disc receiving port ^ 22, then it stops The bar 1-311 will hit the label end 1-34 of the disc cassette 1_13, thereby preventing the disc cassette 1-13 from being fully inserted into the disc drive device 10_1. The rear wall 1-317 of the cassette receiver 1-82 has a notched area U20. The notch area 1-320 allows the right door link [the latch release lever ^ 72 (FIG. 6) of 88 to collide with the vertical surface 169 of the receiving latch 1-166 (FIG. 17B). Because when the disc cassette 1-13 is inserted into the cassette receiver Ί-82, the left and right door links 1-85 and 1-88 are respectively rotated toward the back of the disc drive. When the disc cassette 1-13 is about to be fully inserted, the latch release lever 1-172 rotates the receiving latch 1_166 by pressing against the vertical surface 1-169 to release the receiving latch 1-166. The rotation of the receiving latch 1-166 releases the hook from the position of the flash pin of the protrusion 1-293 of its right slide lever 1-73. When the receiving latch 1166 is released in this way, the cassette receiver 1-82 can be lowered, and the disc cassette 1-13 is placed to the operating position on the spindle motor 1-61. Referring to Figures 7, 15A, 15B, 16A, and 16B, the connection of the left door link 1-85 and the right door link 1-88 to the cassette receiver _82 will be described. The left and right door links 1-85 and 1-88 are respectively connected to the rear corners of the cassette receiver 1-82 and close to the rear wall ^ "7. In particular, the left door links 1-85 are rotatably mounted on The first pivot point 1-323 of the cassette receiver _82, and the right door link 1_88 is rotatably mounted at the second pivot point 1-326 of the cassette receiver 1-82. Door link 1_85 and 1_88 are biased by a spring (not shown) toward the front panel of the disc drive device 1_1〇. _19. In the operation of this paper, the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (21 ^ 797 mm 1 (please first Read the precautions on the back and fill in this page} Install i

、 1T I -i-. A7 ---— B7 V. Description of the invention (56) '-----—. When the disc card E [13 is inserted into the disc drive device [1〇, the door is connected One of levers 1-85, 1-88—or the other will unlock the lock and open the lock [49. When the disc cassette 43 is inserted into the disc drive [10, whether the left door link 1-85 or the right door link will open the card ^ 49 depends on the side facing the disc card £ 1-13. If the disc card g1_13 is inserted with the first side, the right door link 1-88 operates the cover latch and opens the cover _49. If the disc cassette 1-13 is inserted on the other side, the left door link 1-85 operates the cover latch and opens the cover 1-49. When there is no disc cassette _13 in the disc drive device private 10, the door links 1-85 and 1-88 are parked against the door link stop device _329, the stop device is integrally formed It is part of the cassette receiver 1-82. Let the door link stop device 1-329 be ensured that when the disc cassette 1-1 3 is inserted into the disc drive device 1-10, the liberating ends 1-332 of the door links 1_85 and 1_88 will release the cover latch in an appropriate position And open the cover 1-49. Referring now to FIGS. 18 to 22, the rotatable magnetic bias coil assembly 1-94 will be described in more detail. The magnetic bias coil assembly 1-94 is used during the writing and erasing operations of the disc drive device 1-10. The magnetic bias coil assembly 1-94 includes a steel rod 1-335 wrapped in a set of coil wires 1-338. Figure 2 · 13 is the best display. When the magnetic bias coil assembly 1-94 is placed on the disc 1-14, it quickly straddles the disc 1-14 and therefore can be placed on the disc 1-14. The radial trajectory generates a strong magnetic field, reaching the edge of the disc 1_14 from the vicinity of the main axis 1-62 (Figures 23 to 25). When the disc 1-14 rotates under the magnetic bias coil assembly 1_94 through the bottom case 1-16, it is possible to apply the Chinese National Standard (CNS) M specification (210X297) to the entire paper size of the disc 1 to 4 Mm) A Please read the precautions on the back and then fill out this page. One ~~ ---- The magnetic field is generated on the surface, so it can allow the user to write person information to all parts of the disc 1-14 from the innermost track to the outermost track of the disc 1-14. The coil 338 and The steel rod 1_335 is covered by the top layer of the biasing coil housing, the top layer of the biasing coil housing [341 is installed on the bottom layer 1_344 of the biasing coil housing. The biasing coil assembly 1-94 is installed on the biasing coil Bending member 1_347 (Figure 22) 'It is installed on the magnetic bias coil arm 1-97 (Figure 20-) in sequence. The magnetic bias coil arm 1.97 spans the width of the base plate 1-46 and borrows a (Figure 18 of the bias magnetic coil) Rotatably mixed on the left corner Caiwang 1 178 and right corner pillar i_181 of the bottom plate 1_46 (Figure 8a and 8B) Therefore, the bias coil clamp 1_1〇 can be used as a block to allow the magnetic bias coil arm _97 to rotate. The following will refer to Figures 12 to 25 for a more careful discussion. The bias coil clamp uoo includes a stop 1- 350, FIG. 18, during the withdrawal operation, the upward movement of the cassette receiver 1-82 can be terminated. As described above, the magnetic bias coil arm _97 includes the lever arm 1-275 and the rear end of the left slider 1_7〇 The notch ^ combines operation to raise and lower the magnetic bias coil assembly 1-94. Because the lever arm ^^ engages with the notch 1-268 in the left slider, the left slider controls the magnetic bias "arm stem 1- 97 When can I turn to the disc cartridge _ 彳 3 or away from the disc cartridge 1_ 彳 3. The magnetic bias coil assembly 1-94 can be tilted or rotated around the point 1-353 near its center as the axis, it It is driven downward by a spring. In this way, go in the downward state (ie, the position depicted in Figure 20A, where the disc jam 1-13 is fully loaded), and the upward state Medium (ie Figure 25, f ^ .------ lτ ------ f ...; (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

A7 printed by the Consumer Labor Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ...........— B7 V. Description of the invention (58 ^ '' —-- ^ The position shown, where the disc card g1_13 is removed ), The magnetic bias coil assembly 1-94 can be parallel to the disc card g1_13. The following will discuss the ability of the magnetic bias coil assembly 1-94 to maintain parallel to the disc cassettes 1-13 when providing the clearing action required by the disc drive device MO in the upward condition to complete the disc eject operation. When the disc tray is loaded and the disc tray is loaded, the bias coil assembly 1-94 is parked in three positions on the disc tray -13. Referring now to FIGS. 23 to 25, the ejection action of the disc cassette 1-13 from the disc drive device 1_10 will be discussed. Figure 23 shows that the disc cassette with metal disc cores 1-15 is fully loaded onto the spindle 1-62 of the spindle motor 1-61. In this structure, the magnetic bias coil assembly ^ 々 is loaded into the disc cassette case _13 by opening the lid 1-49. When the disc cassette horn 13 is fully loaded in this way, the left slider 1_7〇 has slid to the rearmost position by the rudder lever 1_76. The lever arm 1-275 of the magnetic bias coil arm 1_97 has also rotated toward the back of the disc drive device 1-10. The rotation action of the lever arm [275] moves the magnetic bias coil assembly 1_94 to the disc cassette holder_13. As depicted in Figure 23, 'When the left slider 1-70 is driven toward the rear of the disc drive 1-10 by the lever 1-76, the lifting post of the cassette receiver 1-82 ^ 彳Shen and 1-1 39 are restricted by vertical slots 1-130 and vertical slots 1-133 (Figures 8A and 8B) and can only move vertically. Via lifting columns 1-136 and 1-139, the card receiver 1_82 can be driven to the lowest point of the S-shaped grooves 1-262 and 1-281. The middle stage of the chase cycle will be described with reference to Figure 24. When the user starts the eject action of the disc cassette 1-13 from the disc drive device 1-10, the paper size is in accordance with the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210χ297 dong) ^^ --- f Please read the back Please pay attention to the pregnancy before filling out this page)-^ 9 A7 of the Consumer Cooperation Cooperation of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Du-printed A ----------- _ V. Description of the invention (59) '^ ~ ---, exit the motor 1 -208 (Figure 9) rotate the rudder stock _76 to the first direction (counterclockwise in Figure 9). As shown in Figure 24, the rotation of the rudder stock _76 pulls the left slide 1_7 (3 toward the front of the disc drive. When the left slide bar 1-70 slides forward, the slot 1-268 makes the lever arm 1-275 rotates forward, thereby lifting the magnetic bias coil assembly 1-94 away from the disc magazine _13. See also Figure 24, the lifting columns fixed to the cassette receiver 1-82 _136 and 彳 _139 are forced up to the s-shaped grooves 1_262 and 1_281 by the movement of the rudder stock 1-76. Because the lifting columns 1-136 and 1-139 are arranged on the cassette receiver, the position has At the same time, it passes through the horizontal axis of the lifting columns 1-136 and 1-139, but does not pass through the main shaft 1-62. Remove the metal disc core from the main shaft magnet 1-64. This is done when the cassette receiving state 1-82 is lifted. In other words, as shown in Figure 24, the disc 1-14 is not lifted off the main shaft _62 vertically during the ejection cycle, but due to the cassette receiver 1-82 The position of the lifting columns 1-136 and 1-139. When the lifting columns 1-136 and 1-139 move with the respective S-shaped grooves 1_262 and 1-281, the back of the disc cassette 1-13 The part was lifted before the front end of the disc cassette 1-13 was lifted. Reduced the maximum force required to remove the metal disc core _15 from the spindle magnet 1-64 of the spindle motor 1-61. Still referring to Figure 24, it is obvious that the cassette receiver 1-82 is slipping After the movement of the levers 1-70 and 1-73 is lifted by a predetermined amount, the boss 1-356 (Figure 15A) on the rear wall Ί-317 of the card S receiver 1-82 will collide with the bias coil clamp The stop surface of 1-100 stop dip ... Figure 18) the lower surface. The contact between the bottom surface of the stop table 1-350 and the top surface of the soil boss 1-356 is accompanied by this paper from the applicable CNS} Α4 ^ 7ΙΙ〇Χ297 ^) 1, ^ 1T ------ {(please Read the precautions on the back before filling this page) The continued rotation of the rudder 1-76 causes the longitudinal movement of slippage ⑺ and ⑺, causing the card E receiver 1-82 to be slightly pushed upward, as shown in Figure 24 Show. When the lifting columns 1 · 136, 1-139 continue to lift the receiver, the aforementioned action actually occurs at a point between the contact between the stop taba and the boss 356. This slight longitudinal movement of the cassette receiver 1-82 facilitates the &quot; stripping &quot; action described above. Fig. 15 depicts the structure of the disc drive device 1-10. After the cassette receiving 1 micro-up push is completed and the cassette receiver _82 will collide close to the disc receiving device 1-22 stop device. At this time, the left secret-70 reaches the frontmost position and the lever arm _275 also reaches its frontmost position, thereby rotating the magnetic bias coil assembly 1-94 to leave the disc cartridge _13. Therefore, when the magnetic deflection line assembly 1_94 is parallel to jl, the disc card is firmly against the inside of the top surface of the disc drive device 1_1G or the circuit board, which is located against the disc drive device. Inside the top surface. The magnetic bias coil assembly 1-94 is preferably vertically moved about 9 mm from its placement position on the disc card g1_13 to the above-mentioned lifting position. As described above, when the cassette receiver _82 is lifted When it reaches its highest position (5mm above its bottommost position), the right slider bar 73 in Figure 12-8_12 will receive the latch 1 · 166 (Figures 17a and 17B) ) The latch is at its rearmost position. When the cassette receiver _82 is in the upper position shown in FIG. 25, the cassette receiver _82 is in a position parallel to the bottom plate 1-46 and is ready to be ejected from the disc cassette 1_13. As mentioned above, the offset door connecting rod 1-85 and the buckle 88 papers are suitable for the Newcastle and the NS M4 is printed by the National Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. Printed by the Beigong Consumer Cooperative A7 _________ B7 V. Description of the invention (61) One '^ The spring force toward the front end of the disc drive device 1-10 and the spring force of the offset card 1-49 toward the closed position both cause the disc cartridge 3 to be removed from the disc drive device 1-10 Exit, as shown in Figure 25. The disc loading procedure must be the reverse of the exit procedure described above. Therefore, no detailed details of the disc insertion procedure will be provided. In the present invention, when the metal disc core 1-15 is released from the spindle magnet pad 64, the required ejection force can be effectively reduced by moving the disc 1-14 from the loading position to the unloading position . According to the use of "separation" movement used in the present invention, the force required to remove the metal disc core 1-15 is smaller than that required by the conventional vertical lifting system. In addition, the design preserves the overall driving height The above design completes the peeling of the metal disc core 1-1 5 from the spindle magnet 1-64 with a mechanism, which utilizes an effective space on the side of the blade drive device 1-10 without the need to cross the base plate 1 -The width of -46 restricts the movement of both sides of the cassette receiver 1-82 and uses extra height to complete the action. Another advantageous feature of this design is that most of the required dimensions are not required for the critical size range .There is also a biasing coil actuating mechanism that loads the biasing coil assembly into the disc cassette 1-13. It is simple and has the fewest parts. The whole design can be easily assembled and most of the components can be simple and easy to manufacture When the preferred embodiment of the present invention has been described above, those skilled in the art can obviously make many changes without departing from the spirit and scope of the present invention. For example, the present invention can be applied to components that do not require magnetic bias coils 1-9 4 media system (ie, in conjunction with a change or write-once system), in order to eliminate this paper standard is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Α4 specification (210X 297 mm) (please read the notes on the back before filling this page) ί Binding _ Ordered by the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Central Bureau of Standards, and Consumer Cooperative Printing 5. The description of the invention (62 except for the use of components that operate magnetic bias coil # 97. In addition, although the preferred embodiment of the storage medium is 5 1/4 inches Magneto-optical disc card g, but the present invention can be applied to all types of media and all sizes of driving devices. The movement axis of the urgent axis is explained. The structure of the actuator 2-10. The actuator 2_1 includes an objective lens 2-12 disposed in the frame 2_14. The radial or tracking coil 2_16 is wound on the frame 2-14 so that it can be generally positioned vertically The position of the Z axis. The first and second focus coils 2-18 and 2-20 are placed on the side of the frame 2.14 and attached to the tracking coil 2-16 so that they can generally be positioned in the vertical γ axis position. The first pair of permanent magnets 2-22 is placed on the first focusing coil 2-18 The second pair of permanent magnets 2-24 is disposed near the second focusing coil 2-20. As shown in FIG. 27, the frame 2-14 includes a generally rectangular flange 2-30 at the center and It has an annular aperture 2-32. The objective lens 2-12 is glued to the position above the annular aperture 2-32 in the flange 2-30. The flange 2-30 is supported by an I-shaped platform 2-34, which is A pair of grooves 2-44 are formed on the symmetrical edge to receive the tracking coil 2-16 wound on the platform. The base 2-36 supporting the platform 2-34 includes first and second T-shaped portions 2-46 And 2-48 and in the middle to form a groove 2-50. As will be explained in more detail below, the base 2-36 provides the frame 2-14 for mass balance. The flange 2-30, the platform 2.34, and the base holder 36 are arranged in a row so as to form first and second opposing surfaces 2-52 and 2-54 of the frame on both sides. ΜΛ Zhang scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) (please read the precautions on the back and then fill out this page) for installation.-Order A7 A7 Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Department of Economics of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Explanation (63) The focusing coils 2-18 and 2-20 are attached to the pulse-tracking coil 2 and these are converging; the fd of ϋ® intersects and is preferably perpendicular to the central axis of the tracking coil. The focusing coils 2 · 18 and 2_20 are preferably formed of a thermally bound wire having a sealing material θ. The JL is preferably wound on a suitable tool or support. Those familiar with the art will know that the tightness of this envelop varies with the type of wire. During the process of Lin, it is preferable to heat the sealing material I on the melt wire to increase the solidity and rigidity of the winding coil. Advantageously, the temperature selection must be sufficient to melt the sealing material, but not so high as to destroy the insulation. After cooling, the coils 2-18 and 2_20 are removed from the support, but the independent coils without additional support can be adhered to the tracking coils 2-16 using a suitable adhesive in a conventional manner. Each independent and unsupported focus coils 2-18 and 2_20 are oval in shape and have two elongated sides 2-56 engaging a pair of shorter ends 2-58. The equal sides 2-56 and ends 2-58 of the coils 2_18 and 2-20 form an open or hollow ring-shaped center 2-60. The tracking coil 2-16 is a 1-shaped platform 2-34 that is wound around the frame 2-14 so that the coil is accommodated in and tightly held in the groove 2_44 and leans against the opposing faces 2-52 and 2- of the frame 54. At the same time, the two focusing coils 2-18 and 2-20 of McCormack 26 and 27 'are attached to the tracking coil 2-16 so that the tracking coil is placed within the center 2-60 of each focusing coil. Each of the focusing coils 2- 18 and 2-20 is also disposed on the opposing faces 2-52 and 2-54 of the adjacent frame 2-14. In this mode, the tracking coils 2-16 and the focusing coils 2-18 and 2-20 are in accordance with the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (2 丨 〇 &lt; 297mm). --Order (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this education) Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs _——_ A7 • 5 · '^ Instructions ______ are all stable in the frame 2_14, by which Create a more robust operation that drives a single assembly object. &quot; 7 Examination Diagram—Ten Hearts—Nineteen, Thirty, and Thirty—In operation, the light source element (not shown) is usually a laser diode. 2-70. See Figure 30. The light beam 2々G person hits 稜鏡 2.72 and the vertically reflected light beam goes up to the objective lens 2_12. The mirror objective lens 212 converges the light beam ⑽ to form a clear focal point or light spot 2-74 on the surface of the three recording media, such as an optical disc 2-76. On the notable disc 2_76, the beam 2_7〇 is reflected as a divergent beam that conveys the information as the asset stored on the disc 2.76 changes, the current asset 1 and the information encoded on the disc 2_76. This reflected light beam then enters the sighting range of the object 2-12 and is reflected by the light sensor 2_72 to the photodetector (not shown) to detect the data stored on the disc 2-76. In addition, if the light beam that falls on the photodetector is subtracted or Μ'㈣ difference or more results will be electronically measured and fed back to the conventional servo system (not shown), the appropriate disc 2- 76 Re-align the objective lens 2-12. These feedback signals, which determine the direction and result of the movement of the actuator 2 · 10 and the objective lens 2_12 driven by it, need to direct the light beam into the desired focusing condition for the disc 2_76. If radial or tracking movement is required to position the objective lens 2-12 under the center of the selected track on the disc 2-76, current is passed to the tracking coil 2-16. This current interacts with the magnetic fields generated by the permanent magnet pairs 2-22 and 2-24 to generate a force in the tracking direction of the shift-actuator 2-10. This force is generated according to Lorentz's law, in which the F table emperor's paper wave scale is suitable for China® family management rate (CNS) M specification (21〇χ297 male thin) (please read the precautions on the back and fill in this page) . Ordered by the Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Standard Falcon Bureau Employee Consumer Cooperative A7 __________________ B7 ____ V. Invention description (65) The force acting on the tracking coil 2-16, B means between a pair of permanent magnets 2-22 and 2-24 The magnetic flux density that hinders the field, I represents the current through the tracking coils 2-16, and / represents the length of the tracking coils 2_16. When the current flowing to the tracking coils 2-16 flows through the coils in a counterclockwise direction, a force to move the actuator 2_10 to the right with respect to the situation of FIG. 29 is generated. In Figure 31, this rightward movement is indicated by arrows 2-15. When the current to the tracking coil 2-16 flows through the coil in the opposite or clockwise direction, a force is generated to move the actuator 2-10 to the left 'as indicated by arrow 2_17 in Figure 31. In this mode, the actuator 2-10 moves the objective lens 2_12 quickly below the center of the desired information track on the surface of the disc 2-76. When current passes through the two focusing coils 2-18 and 2-20 on the tracking coil 2_16 at the edge of the frame 2-14, the actuator 2-10 can be moved to affect focusing. When the current flows through these coils 2_18 and 2_2〇 in the counterclockwise direction in the plane of FIG. 30, upward force can be generated to move the frame 2-14 and the objective lens 2_12, as shown by the arrow 2_19 in FIG. Surface of sheet 2-76. Conversely, when the current flows through the coils 2-18 and 2-20 in the clockwise direction in the plane of Fig. 30, a downward force can be generated to move the frame 2-14, as indicated by the arrow 121 in Fig. 31. Display, or away from the surface of disc 2-76. Because this trace diagram 2-16 is connected to the frame 2-14, and the public focus coils 2_18 and 2-20 directly depend on the tracking coil 2_.16 in sequence, so the action of the coil and the frame is the same. , Assembly ”and the decoupling frequency of the coil and the frame will be referred to the paper and approved for towel (CNS) specifications (21QX297 male sauce) (installed-(please read the precautions on the back before filling this page )

, 1T

I Printed by the Beigong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Department of Trade and Industry of the Ministry of Carriage and Economy A7 ---______ B7 V. Description of Invention 1 ~~~ 'High. The design and measurement of the actuator of the present invention can obtain a decoupling frequency of about 30 kHz. Referring now to FIGS. 28 and 29, the permanent magnet pairs 2_22 and 2-24 remain stationary during the movement of the frame 2-14 and are generally attached to the rectangular housing or bottom layer 2-80. Two pairs of suspension wires 2-82 and 2-84 provide magnets for releasing frames 2-14 between 2-22 and 2-24. The wire pairs 2_82 and 2-84 are connected to a stationary printed circuit board 2-85, which is vertically arranged relative to the frame 2-14 and is used as a support for the wire pairs 2_82 and 2-84 . The wire pairs 2-82 and 2-84 are also connected to the electrical contact pieces on the mobile circuit board 2-87, and the electrical contact pieces are vertically positioned and connected to the frame 2-14. In particular, the movable ends of each focusing coil 2-18 and 2-20 are welded to the electrical contact piece 2-86 so that current can be supplied to the focusing coils 2-18 and 2-20, also flowing through the welding to the contact piece 2- The second or lower conductive pair on 86 is 2-84. The other movable ends of each focusing coil 2-18 and 2-20 are soldered to the circuit board 2-87 and joined along the electrical contact piece 2-88. The movable end of the tracking coil 2-16 and the first or upper wire pair 2-82 are electrical contact pieces 2_89 soldered to the mobile circuit board 2-87 so that current can be supplied to the coil and flow through the upper wire pair. The base 2-36 of the frame 2-14 can achieve mass balance by shifting the weight of the objective lens 2-12 and the circuit board 2-87 connected to the frame 2-14. Alternatively, four flexible members can be used to suspend the frame 2-14. When the positioning of the optical axis of the object | 2-12 is hindered and changed, the flexible member can act as a parallel leaf spring and allow the frame 2-14 Move up and down to focus. Here (please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page). • The size of the paper is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) A7 A7 Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Description of the invention (67) In the formula, when the frame 2-14 is moved by the armored person to move the disc 2 7k, the objective lens 2_12 will not tilt the surface of the disc 2-76. Every time the hinge is operated in such a way as to chase the ribs, Fu Qian also includes the Xian Shao Ke frame 2-M axis. In order to achieve the focus of the frame 2_14, the position of the frame W relative to the bottom layer (iv) needs to be detected. In order to determine the position of the object 1 2 12 in the tracking and / or focusing direction, the position sensor 2-90 is actuated. The flaw is that a light-emitting diode (LED) 2 92 is placed on the side of the actuator 2- · to the sensor ㈣, so that when the frame ⑽ is located at the center of the bottom layer, the LED 2-92 will emit light. Through the slot 2-50 in the frame 2-14, the part of the housing sensor 2-90 is taken. The position sensitivity detector can be conveniently implemented with the sensor 2-90, and the sensor can be set so that when the frame 2-14 is located in the center of the bottom layer 2-80 '| _ED 2-92 Pass through slots 2-50 and will disperse onto the detector. Therefore, when the frame 2_14 moves in the side-to-side direction (that is, the tracking direction), different parts of the sensor 2_9〇 will be illuminated and indicate the position of the frame 2-14 in the tracking direction. Therefore, when the frame 2-14 is not located in the center of the bottom layer 2-80, part of the light emitted from the LED 2-92 will be obstructed by the frame 2-14, causing the sensor 2-90 to shine Irregular dispersion. This irregular dispersion can then be analyzed by conventional circuits or methods to determine the position of the frame 2-14 relative to the bottom layer 2-80. When the control signal is generated by the servo system, a specific current is connected to the tracking coil 2-16 and / or the focusing coil 2-18 and 2-20 according to the specified direction, and the paper scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) ----In-.--.1 * ^-n I! |!-I 丁 —-β (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) A7 ------ -__ B7 V. Description of the invention (68 ^ —, the displacement of the frame 2-14 and the objective lens 2-12 connected to it is required in this direction. The above-mentioned speech system and the feedback circuit that controls the magnitude of the current are in this It is known in the art. As mentioned above, this current interacts with the electromagnetic fields generated by the permanent magnet pairs 2-22 and 2-24 to generate a force to move the frame 2-14 and the objective lens 2- 12 to the appropriate focusing or tracking direction. The structure and operation of the focusing and tracking mechanism will now be described in detail. As shown in Figures 32 and 33, the permanent magnet pairs 2_22 and 2-24 are positioned at each other with relative polarities Relative position. In particular, the first pair of magnets 2-22 includes a first or upper magnet 2-100 and a second or lower magnet 2-102 to stack off Join along the plane of the contact surface, as shown in Figure 33, so that the N pole of the upper magnet 2-100 and the S pole of the lower magnet 2-102 are placed close to the frame 2-14. The second pair of magnets 2-24 includes The third or upper magnet 2-104 and the fourth or lower magnet 2-106 are joined together in a stacked relationship along the contact surfaces positioned opposite to each other in the plane, as shown in FIG. 33. Thus, the N pole of the upper magnet 2-104 and the lower magnet The S pole of 2-106 is placed close to the frame 2-14. As shown in Figure 32, it is placed close to the frame 2-14. In Figure 32, it is shown that the magnetic lines of force generated according to the aforementioned positioning method start at each The N poles of the magnet pairs 2-22 and 2-24 are terminated by the S poles of each magnet pair. The iron plate 2-110 (clearly shown with imaginary lines) can be connected to each magnet pair 2-22 and 2- 24 is on the side of the permanent magnet opposite to the frame 2-14. The iron plate 2-110 effectively shunts the opposite magnets 2-100, 2-102, 2-104 from the frame 2-14 The magnetic flux emitted from the side of 2-106, thereby enhancing the magnetic flux close to the frame and increasing the power of the actuator. This paper scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) f Please read first Back (Please fill out this page for more details).-Order-Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Standards Bureau Employee Consumer Cooperative Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Standards Bureau Employee Consumer Cooperative ------------ Fifteen. Invention Description (of) In Figure 34, the focusing force acting on the actuators 2-10 is illustrated in detail. When the current I passes through the focusing coils 2_18 and 2_2〇 in the specified direction, the direction leaves the plane shown near the upper magnets 2_100, 2-104 and enters the figure shown near the lower magnets 2-102 and 2-106. Flat surface, the forces Ffoccus1 and F FOCUS2 are transferred to the frame 2-14 to accelerate or decelerate the moving object (frame) and to the suspension wire pairs 2-82 and 2-84, and bend the suspension The wire moves the frame 2-14 and brings the associated objective lens 2 · 12 closer to the disc 2-76. Because of the magnetic flux curve shown above, the direction of the magnetic field changes vertically in the focusing coils 2-18, 2-20. For example, in the plane of FIG. 34, the coil close to the upper magnet 2-100 is vertically bisected. For the focusing coil 2-18 placed near the first magnet pair 2-22, the magnetic field is above the focusing coil 2-18. The first direction is marked as h; and the second direction is marked as B2 in the bisecting plane near the lower magnet 2-102 under the focusing coil 2-18. According to Lorentz's law F = 5 //, the interaction of current and magnetic field &amp; generates the first component F, acting on a part of the focusing coil 2-18 close to the upper magnet 2-100, and the current and magnetic field The action generates a second component force F2 acting on a part of the focusing coil close to the lower magnet 2-102. When the first component F and the second component "2's horizontal components are equal in magnitude but opposite in direction, the horizontal parts of these components cancel each other according to the vector addition rule and produce a resultant force Ff. (: US1 is in the Figure 34 is vertically upward in the plane. The same 'horizontal component components of the bracket surrounding the focusing coil 2-18 all cancel each other out, which generates vertical force and is absolutely vertically upward (ie vertically upward without a horizontal effective component ), So the moving frame 2-14 is close to the surface of the disc 2.76. The paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Α4 specification (210X297mm) (please read the precautions on the back and fill in this page). Order A7 A7 Printed by Beigong Consumer Cooperation of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ---___________ B7 5. Description of the invention (70) When the magnetic flux line generated by the second magnet pair 2-24 is generated by the first magnet pair 2-22 When the magnetic flux line is bent in the opposite direction, the direction of the magnetic field at any point in the focusing coil 2_2 is different from the direction of the magnetic field at the corresponding point in the focusing coil 2-18. In addition, because the magnetic flux line is bent, it acts on the coil 2_20礤The direction changes vertically along the line. In the plane of Figure 34, the coil of the upper magnet 2-104 close to the second magnet pair 2-24 is vertically divided, and the magnetic field direction is marked above the coil 2-20 as β3 and the force F3 generated in the direction according to Lorentz's law, when in the bisected plane close to the lower magnet 2-106, the direction of the magnetic field is marked as B4 under the direction of 2-20. The force generated is F3. The combination of these forces thus generates The force FF0CUS2 is also absolutely vertical upward as shown in the figure. Therefore, it can be understood that the forces fF0CUS1 and fF0CUS2 act on the focusing coils 2-18 and 2-20 and move the frame 2-14 upward. Conversely, if the current is When the focus coils 2-18 and 2-20 flow in opposite directions, the force generated will move the frame 2-14 down or from the surface of the disc 2-76. By moving the objective lens 2-12 close to the disc 2 -76 surface or away from the surface of the disc 2-76, the action of the focusing coils 2- 18 and 2-20 correctly focused the laser beam passing through the objective lens 2-12 onto the disc 2-76. See Figure 35 As shown in the figure, when current passes through the tracking coil 2-16 connected to the frame 2_14, the movement of the actuator 2-10 can produce a tracking that affects the fine adjustment In the plane of Fig. 35, the tracking coil 2_16 is bisected horizontally, the magnetic field with direction Ψ acts on the cross section of the coil 2-16 located closest to the first magnet pair 2_22, and the magnetic field with direction acts on the The closest to f pack — I order —----- ^ (please read the notes on the back before filling this page)

A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (71) The cross section of the coil of the second magnet pair 2-24. For example, if the current is bypassing the tracking coil 2_16 in a counterclockwise direction, the force F! Will act on a part of the tracking coil close to the first magnet pair 2-22 and the force 1 = 2 will act on the second Part of the tracking coil of the magnet pair 2-24. These forces are combined under the rule of vector addition and thus produce the effect of the resultant force FtRack to move the frame 2-14 towards the right in the plane of Figure 35. When this force acts on the tracking coil 2-16 in this way, the force will be transferred to the frame 2-14 to accelerate or decelerate the moving object (frame), and transferred to the suspension bent in the corresponding direction The hanging wire pairs 2-82 and 2-84 move the objective lens 2-12 and precisely prohibit the emitted laser beam into the center of the selected data track on the surface of the disc 2-76. Conversely, if the current flows around the coil 2-16 in a clockwise direction, the resulting force will move the frame 2-14 toward the left in the plane of Figure 35. Therefore, it can be understood that the dissipative arrangement of the present invention further reduces the distance between the resultant force acting on the tracking coils 2-16, the focusing coils 2-18 and 2-20 and the optical axis of the objective lens 2-12 , To reduce unfavorable modes of movement during focusing and tracking operations, such as bumps, rotation, and tilt. Printed by the Beigong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs III: II.-1 II-11 * ^-I 11--I ......---I Please read the notes on the back first Page) According to the actuator design of the present invention, only two pairs of permanent magnets, that is, a total of four magnets and three coils are required to affect the movement in both tracking and focusing directions, thereby simultaneously reducing the size of the actuator And the weight and produce a higher decoupling frequency. When the total number of components of the actuator is small, the actuator is easy to manufacture and assemble compared to the conventional actuator design having more coils, magnets and polar plates. In addition, because of the tracking and focusing coils 2-16, 2-18 and clothing and paper New Zealand financial home € 7cNS) A4 specifications (210> &lt; 297 public celebration 2, invention description (72 2〇 疋 directly attached to the frame From 2-14: τ σ ^, ^ ^ ^ is wound around the magnetic loss or support, and the response of the coil 2.1h is indeed improved. The direct and fine reduction of the effect i / sfcH 18 and 2_2Q ', The distance between the location where there is Ί "__ 林 # is generated, whereby t unfavourable movements such as W, rotation and tilt are improved. This issue improves the performance of the motor and is actuated according to the invention The value of the instrument's performance has been tested to reach 〇m / s / sq.ft. (W) in the focusing direction and 7Qm / s2 / sq rt in the tracking direction.) This value is indeed ⑽ previous recognition. Those skilled in the art will recognize that the design of the present invention also ensures that the coil wire is approximately utilized, thereby improving the efficiency of the actuator over the previous design. The comparison of the two-axis electromagnetic actuator actuator 2-10 The preferred embodiment has been described with reference to the coordinate system shown in FIG. 20, where the disc 2_76 is placed on the objective lens 2-12 so that the movement of focusing can be along The up and down influence of the z-axis moving actuator 21〇, while the tracking movement can be influenced by moving the actuator along the γ-axis in the side-to-side moving direction. However, those skilled in the art will recognize the invention The actuators 2-10 can also be incorporated into an optical system having an arrangement different from that shown above. Focusing Sensing Device Figure 36 is a preferred embodiment of the beam focusing sensing device 3-10 of the present invention The block diagram shows. The device 3-10 includes optical arrangement 3-12 to mention the paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) f pack-(please read the precautions on the back before filling in This page is ordered by the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Central Bureau of Precinct Employee Consumer Cooperation Du Printed A7 A7 The Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Standards Bureau Employee Consumer Cooperative Printed 5. Description of Invention (73) Servo beam S can be directed to irradiate the beam on disc 3-14 〖 Focusing. The optical beam S contains a part of the illuminating beam I reflected by the optical disc 3-14. The technique of generating this servo beam is known to those skilled in the art. For example, the optical arrangement 3- 12 to generate the servo beam S The optical system is introduced in US Patent No. 4,862,442, which is incorporated herein by reference. The following is a brief summary of the operation of the optical arrangement 3-12. As shown in FIG. 36, the optical arrangement 3_12 includes the laser source 3_16. To produce a linearly polarized beam B. The beam B is collimated by the parallel lens 3-18 and the parallel beam is guided by the optical splitting arrangement 3_2 to the objective lens 3_24. The parallel beam is then focused by the objective lens 3-24 to the disc 3-14 On the surface. For example, the optical disc may include a CD, a video disc, or an optical memory disc. The irradiated beam focused on the disc 3_14 is reflected back through the objective lens 3_24 to the beam splitting array 3_2. Those skilled in the art will recognize that the beam splitting arrangement 3_2 may include a first beam splitter (not shown) to change the direction of the reflected illumination beam. In order to form the servo beam S °, the beam splitting arrangement 3_20 generally also includes a second beam splitter (not shown) Display) Change the direction of the reflected beam in order to generate the data beam. The aforementioned data beam carries the information stored on disc 3-14. The servo beam S is intercepted by FTR 稜鏡 3-30, such a design and structure are discussed in more detail below. The following also more completely introduces that the servo beam S is split into a transmission beam T and a reflection beam R by FTR 稜鏡 3-30. In the embodiment of Fig. 36, the transmitted beam and the reflected beams T and R. are substantially equal in profile and intensity. When the reflected light beam R is incident on the second quadruple detector 3_34, the transmitted light beam T is incident (binding ------ ^ (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 2 '^ 9439 a? --- -B7 ___ V. Description of the invention (74) onto the first quadruple detector 3-32. The electronic signals that react to the intensity dispersion of the transmitted beam and the reflected beams τ and r are generated by the quadruple detectors 3_32 and 3-34, and used by the control unit 3-37 to generate a differential focus error signal (DFES) indicated on the disc 3- 14 Focusing effect of the irradiated light beam. A preferred embodiment of the control unit 3-37 and the associated method of generating DFES will be discussed below. For example, the focus error signal can be used to control a mechanical array (not shown), which can adjust the focus of the illumination beam by changing the displacement of the objective lens 3-24 relative to the optical disc 3-14. Figure 37 shows an enlarged top cross-sectional view of FTR 稜鏡 3-30. The prism 3-30 includes first and second optical elements 3-35 and 3-36 with a separation layer 3-38 in between. The optical elements 3-35 and 3-36 may be formed by lenses having a refractive index (coefficient) greater than that of the separation layer 3-38. For example, in the preferred embodiment, when the separation layer 3-38 is composed of a solid such as magnesium fluoride (MgF2) or dissolved quartz (lead 〇2) and its refractive index is 1 38 and 1 48 respectively At this time, the optical elements 3-35 and 3-36 can be manufactured from lenses having a refractive index of 1.55. The separation layer 3-38 need not be composed of a solid, and may be formed of a liquid or gas to provide the optical elements 3-35 and 3-36 with a larger refractive index. The following describes the physical phenomenon of the interaction between the beam servo beam S and the light in the separation layer 3-38. If neither the separation layer 3-38 nor the optical element 3-35 is present, a phenomenon known as internal reflection in the direction in which all light beams S are sent to the light beam R will occur on all oblique side surfaces of the optical element 3-36. However, there will be some ---- f equipment that will not be transmitted in the form of evanescent wave &quot; (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) m.----

, TT

Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Standards Bureau Negative Consumers Cooperative A7 -------- B7_ V. Description of the invention (75) The light energy lies behind the slope of the optical element 3-36. When the optical element 3-35 is placed close enough to the optical element 3-36, the energy will be coupled to the optical element 3-35 without loss and transmitted into the direction of the light beam T. This phenomenon is known as Frustrated Total Refection (FTR). In this situation, if the FTR system is configured with respect to the light beam s so that the incident angle A of the light beam S at the separation layer 3-38 is close to the region of frustrated total reflection, the transmission and reflection curves will have a very steep slope (Angle sensitivity). This allows the manufacture of various sensitive focus sensing systems. Furthermore, a comparison between the transmission and reflection curves of a system based on the FTR principle and the curve of a multilayer structure will be relatively insensitive to the wavelength of light in the beam S. FTR prisms 3-30 can be manufactured by first placing a separation layer on one of the optical elements via conventional thin film technology. Then another supplementary optical element is attached to the exposed surface of the separation layer with optical glue. Although the refractive indexes of the optical elements 3_35 and 3-36 are generally the same, different refractive indexes can also be selected for use. In a preferred embodiment, the first and second optical elements have the same refractive index in the geometry of substantially the same cross-section of the transmitted and reflected beams T and R. As shown in the front view of thirty-eighth, the first quadruple detector 3_32 includes first, second, third, and fourth image detection elements, respectively, 3404, 3-42, 3-44, and 3-46. The electrical signals used to generate the electrical signals labeled T1, T2, T3, and T4 here respond to the intensity of the transmitted light beam hitting the occupied surface. Similarly, the second quadruple detector 3-34 includes the fifth, sixth, seventh and eighth shadows (please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page)

The Ministry of Economic Affairs, Central Bureau of Standards and Staff's Consumer Cooperation Du Printing Pack Α7 Β7 V. Description of the invention (76) The image detection elements are 3-50, 3-52, 3-54 and 3-56, respectively, to generate electronic signals, which are marked here as R1 , R2, R3 and R4 respond to the incident condition of the reflected beam R. The image detection element may use a PIN diode, in which the level of the electron output from each diode is proportional to the optical energy it receives. When the objective lens 3-24 of FIG. 36 can be applied to the disc 3-14 to correctly focus the irradiating beam, the light rays contained in the servo beam S can be properly aligned (ie, substantially parallel) and therefore It is incident on the separation layer 3-38 at substantially the same angle A, as shown in FIG. 37. If this is not the case, when the objective lens 3-24 cannot focus the irradiated beam into the plane occupied by the surface of the disc 3_14, the rays including the servo beam S will converge or diverge from each other. When the irradiation beam is properly focused, all the rays within the servo beam S will hit the separation layer 3-38 at substantially the same angle, and when the irradiation beam deviates from focus, rays of different angles of incidence will stay On the separation layer 3-38. FTR 稜鏡 3-30 is designed to have an extreme degree of flexibility in the reflectivity and transmission of the separation layer 3-38 to the angle at which optical energy is incident on the separation layer 3_38. Therefore, the spatial dispersion in the intensities of the transmitted beam and the reflected beams T and R will change as the focal position of the irradiation beam I changes with respect to the surface of the disc 3_4. That is, a properly focused illumination beam produces a well-aligned servo beam S, so that all of its rays undergo the same degree of reflection through the separation layer 3_38. Thus, when the irradiation beam is properly focused, the transmission beam and the reflection beams T and R will have substantially the same intensity. Conversely, the paper standard for convergence or divergence is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Eight-, (-Please read the precautions on the back and then fill out this page)..? A7 ^ ____ ^ B7__ i 'Invention Explanation (77) — The servo beam S will cause different spatial intensity dispersion of the transmitted beam and the reflected beams T and R, because the light within the servo beam s is subject to varying degrees of reflection by the separation sound 3-38 It is restricted. By detecting these spatial changes in the intensity of the transmitted and reflected beams T and R, the photodetectors 3_32 and 3-34 generate electronic signals that can be used to generate DFES to indicate the focus position of the illumination beam. Refer to Figure 39 for a more comprehensive understanding of the quasi-degree response of the DFES to the servo beam S in this mode. Figure 39 is a graph showing the reflectivity of the ft prism 3-30 (the intensity of the beam R + the intensity of the beam s) as a function of the angle of incidence of the servo beam S with respect to the light within the separation layer 3-38. In particular, the graph of Figure 39 depicts the reflectivity of 稜鏡 3-30 | ^ and 1 ^ for the S-polarized and P-polarized optical economy departments with a wavelength of 0_78 microns Printed and printed by the Central Consumers ’Cooperative Staff Consumer Cooperative -------- If you want to order f, please read the notes on the back and then fill out this page to learn the reaction of energy irradiation. The reflectivity curve of Fig. 39 relates to the refractive index of the FTR prisms 3-30 having separation layers 3-38 and 1.38 of 45 microns thick. The lens element sandwiching the separation layer has a refractive index of 1.55. As shown in FIG. 39, it is preferable that the prism 3-30 is positioned at an incident angle with respect to the servo beam S. Thus, the prism 3-30½ operates at the operating point P. That is, the configuration of P 稜鏡 3-30 at the working point can properly illuminate the irradiation beam focused on the disc 3-14 to induce a good collimation servo with the angle A and the light hitting the separation layer 3-38 Beam S. Because the reflectivity of 稜鏡 3-30 is about 0.5 'at the operating point P and the optical arrangement 3-12 including the 珜 鏡 3-30 produces transmission and reflected light beams of substantially the same average intensity. This paper scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard Rate (CNS) A4 specification (21〇x297 &amp; ^ :) Printed and printed by the Staff Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 ------------ B7 V. Description of invention ( 78) ~-When the separation between the objective lens 3-24 and the disc 3_14 changes, such as the servo beam S is polarized in a convergent or divergent manner, the first part of the servo beam s will be at an angle of incidence greater than angle A Hit on the separation layer 3_38. For example, in Fig. 39, the part corresponding to the incident angle 'servo beam will undergo a reflection of about 07. Because when the servo beam S is well aligned with the first servo beam part, it is only dominated by the reflectivity of 0.5, and the detectors 3-32 and 3 that receive the reflected and transmitted beams R and T from the first servo beam part The area of -34 respectively collects more or less optical energy than when the irradiation beam is properly focused. Similarly, the transmitted beam and the reflected beams τ and R generated by the second part of the servo beam S are incident on the separation layer at an angle of incidence A3 smaller than the angle A at the area of the detectors 3_32 and 3_34 in the optical arrangement On 3-38, each will be irradiated with more or less optical energy than in properly focused conditions. The DFES produces an electronic signal response to the photodetectors 3-32 and 3-34 indicating the degree of spatial inconsistency in the intensity distribution of the transmitted and reflected beams and latches. Moreover, because the optical element 3_36 is non-absorptive in the preferred embodiment described herein, the intensity change of the transmission beam T caused by a change in the incident angle of a part of the servo beam S is caused by the same part of the servo beam The amplitude of the part of the reflected beam R is mirrored with equal and opposite guided changes. An undifferentiated error signal can be generated independently of one of the transmitted or reflected beams, using the equation: (1) FES (transmitted) = (T1 + T2)-(T3 + T4) (2) FES (reflected) = (R1 + R2)-(R3 + R4) The size of this paper is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (2 丨 0X297mm) II (I set I ----- 1 (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page ) 5. Description of the invention (79 In the differential system, the differential focus error signal (DFES) can be generated by the control unit 3-37 according to the following expression: (3) DFES = (R1 + R2 + T3 + T4)-(T1 + T2 + R3 + R4) The control unit 3-37 includes circuits suitable for implementing the arithmetic operations of equation (3) and is suitable for generating DFES based on these operations. A preamplifier (not shown) is included and amplifies the light from the light The detectors 3_32 and 3-34 preferentially process the electronic signals generated by the control unit 3-37. The arrangement of dual quadruple light detectors described herein results in the synthesis of differential focus error signals, with reduced sensitivity and some incompleteness The optical beam is not included in the inaccurate focus position of the irradiation beam with respect to the disc 3-14. The localized reduction in the intensity of the beam S, which is not relative to the focal position of the irradiated beam, affects the detector photodetectors 3-32 and 3-34 in a substantially similar manner, as it occurs in equation (3) Corresponding to the elimination, such a reduction will not affect the value of DFES. As mentioned above in the background of the present invention, the previous focusing system is generally not suitable for the assembly and implementation of differential focus sensing architecture as shown in equation (3). In particular, The feature of the present invention is that the technique of FTR 稜鏡 3-30 can provide substantially similar split transmission and reflected beams, and the intensity of the two can effectively supply the synthesis of DFES. In addition, DFES is provided to maintain the irradiation beam | focus on the disc 3_14 In the direction of the surface normal, the electronic output from the photodetectors 3-32 and 3-34 can also be used as a second garment ------ Ιτ ------ '(please read the note Ϋ item on the back before filling in This page) Printed 299439 A7 by the Beigong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (8〇--Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) Used by the control unit 3-37 to generate traces Error signal (TES). The TES indicates irradiation The light beam is relative to the position of the radius of a traditional spiral or concentric guide track (not shown) engraved on the surface of the disc 3_14. This TES enables the light beam I to follow the guide track of even an eccentric circle, thereby controlling the machine (Not shown) operation to adjust the position of the objective lens 3_24 relative to the radius of the disc 3_14. TES is calculated by the control unit 3-37 based on the electronic output generated by the photodetectors 3-32 and 3-34 and according to the following equation : (4) TES = (T1 + T3 + R3 + R1). (T2 + T4 + R2 + R4) Furthermore, for example, in the method disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 4,707,648, the number 5 Wuchak can come from the existence of The relationship between the spatial intensity change of the servo beam and the tracking position of the irradiation beam. Perhaps most of the system operations control the focus of the irradiated beam relative to the optical disc's desire to produce both tracking and focus error signals in response to the electronic output of the image detection element. Because the generation of both focus and tracking error signals is generally a conventional technique and requires at least one quadruple photodetector, the disclosure of the embodiments of the present invention has been described with reference to the quadruple photodetector. However, the conventional technology can also use the electronic signal generated by the photodetector with only two independent image sensing areas (dual cell detector 'bicell detector) to generate the focus error signal. Therefore, in applications that only need to generate a focus error signal, a single image detection element can be replaced by the first and second elements 3-40 and 3-42 of the photodetector 3-32 'and a single image detection element can replace the first Three and fourth elements 3-44 and 3-46. Similarly, a single image detection element can be replaced by fmm: ns) A4tm (^ msd 2094 ^ A7 ____B7. Fifth, the invention description (81) The fifth and sixth elements 3-50 and 3-52 of the photodetector 3-34, And a single image detection element can replace the seventh and eighth elements 3-54 and 3-56. F-install-(please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) Figure 39 reflectivity at operating point P The slope of the curve is proportional to the sensitivity of the DFES produced by the device 3-10. In particular, the change in the sensitivity of the device 3-10 during the focusing of the irradiation beam I increases as the slope of the reflective behavior increases. One of the main points of the invention is to provide FTR 稜鏡 3-30 with the same reflective behavior characteristics as the actual slope. The shape of the reflective curve at the operating point P in Figure 39 can be adjusted with the separation layer 3-38 The thickness changes. For example, see Figure 39. Increasing the thickness of the separation layer 3-38 will shift to the minimum reflection angle of the critical angle A. It does not affect the angle 8. The value of the separation layer can be increased by increasing the thickness of the separation layer. Provides a slope that increases the reflectivity curve near the operating point P. Also Decreasing the thickness of the separation layer 3-38 increases the angular displacement between the critical angle Ac and the minimum reflection angle Am. The shape of the reflectivity curve of this 珜 鏡 3-30 can be changed as the sensitivity of the DFES is adjusted. For example, a moderate slope can be obtained by using a separation layer with a thickness greater than half the wavelength of the irradiated beam. The Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs of the People ’s Republic of China can print the critical angle A. The value of the separation layer can be changed by changing the separation layer 3_38 Adjusted with respect to the reflectance of the lens elements 3-35 and 3-36. Therefore, the adjustment of the thickness of the separation layer and the treatment of the reflectance of the separation layer and the surrounding lens elements allow the prism 3-30 to be adjusted according to the desired reflectivity The curve is used for manufacturing. This paper scale is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) A7 B7 Printed by the Beigong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (82) Figure 40 is the device 3-10 The resulting normalized DFES (NDFES) coordinates can be used as the error function of the displacement required for the crop mirror 3-24 relative to the disc 3-14. Furthermore, the data in Figure 40 uses reflectivity Is 1 38 and thickness is 4 · Obtained by the separation layer 3-30 of 5 microns, where the reflectivity of the lens element sandwiching the separation layer is 1.55, and irradiated by a servo beam with a wavelength of 0.78 microns, is 3-30. As shown in Figure 40, when When the required displacement exists between the objective lens 3-24 and the disc 3-14, the value of DFES is preferably zero. Therefore, the sign (+ or-) of DFES can indicate whether the displacement between the objective lens and the disc surface Exceeds or is less than the displacement required for proper focusing. As mentioned above, DFES can be used to control the mechanical arrangement (not shown) to adjust the separation between objective 3-24 and disc 3-14. It can be seen that the slope of NDFES at the operating point defined as zero disc displacement is about 0.16 micron-1 (micron-1). Although the servo beam S has been described here, the actual alignment condition when it is incident on the separation layer 3-38, the present invention does not limit the structural configuration that causes the alignment of the beam. When a converging or diverging servo beam is used, an error in the focus position of the irradiation beam will change the angle of convergence or divergence. Those skilled in the art will know that the focus sensing device of the present invention can be used to generate DFES responses to changes in convergence or divergence. Therefore, the focus-sensing device of the present invention has been shown to overcome the shortcomings inherent in other focus detection systems, thereby providing a reverse paper scale of substantially the same shape and strength, which is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm)- ------- f 袈 ------. 玎 ------ For foreign f, please read the notes on the back and then fill out this page) Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed A7 —__________ B7 V. Description of the invention (83 ^ ~ '-to emit and transmit light beams to obtain a highly fine-tuned, non-highly sensitive focus error signal. The focus sensing technology is disclosed but some related focus detection systems are still retained Features such as low sensitivity to mechanical vibrations, reduced sensitivity to disc tilt, and increased thermal stability. Search for actuators The diagram in Figure 41 illustrates an example optical read-write system 4_5. The operation of reading data from the correct location 4-52 on the storage medium such as the optical disc 4-54. When the illustrated system 4-50 is a single write (w "jte_0f1ce) or WORM system, those skilled in the art will Know the slip of the invention Frames and actuators can also be used in magneto-optical elimination systems. Information can be transmitted to and read from the disc 4-54 using the light beam 4-56 generated by the light source 4-58. 56 passes through a plurality of components including a cube-shaped separating mirror 4-60 to split the beam 4_56 according to its polarization, a quarter-wave plate 4-62 to change the polarization of the beam 4-56, the aligner lens 4-64 and the objective lens 4 -66, combine the aforementioned elements to guide the light beam 4-56 to the desired position 4-52 on the disc 4-54. The light source 4-58 is generally a laser diode, which emits the light beam 4-56 toward 4 during operation -64. The convex aligner lens 4-64 converts this beam 4-56 into a parallel, linear S-polarized beam 4-70 and directs the beam 4-70 towards the beam splitter 4-6. This cubic shaped beam splitter 4 -60 is formed by connecting two right-angle prisms 4-72 and 4-74 along their hypotenuses respectively, and includes a polarization-sensitive coating formed on the beam splitting interface 4-76 between the two oblique edges. The beam splitter 4_6 〇The size of the paper used for separation is China National ^^ TcNS) A4 size (210X297mm) Please read the back first (Notes to be filled out on this page) A7 — ^ _____B7 printed by the Beigong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Economic Affairs of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Description of the invention (84) and / or beams combining different polarization conditions, namely linear S polarization and linear P polarization. The separation function is implemented together with the polarization-sensitive coating. The coating transmits linearly polarized P beams and reflected linearly polarized S beams. The light passing through the beam splitter 4-60 passes through the quarter-wavelength plate 4-62 to convert the linearly polarized beam 4 -70 is the circularly polarized light beam 4-78. After passing through the quarter wave plate 4.62, the circularly polarized light beam 4-78 enters the actuator 4-80. The actuator 4-80 includes a mirror 4-82 which can vertically reflect the light beam 4-78 upward toward the objective lens 4-66. The objective lens 4-66 converts the circularly polarized light beam 4-78 to a precise focusing point 4-52 onto the surface of the disc 4-54. On the prominent disc 4-54, the circularly polarized beam 4-78 changes with the information stored on the disc 4_54 and is reflected as a divergent circularly polarized beam 4-84 carrying the same code encoded on the disc 4-54 Λ News. The reflected circularly polarized light beam 4_84 enters the objective lens 4-66 to be aligned. The light beam 4-84 is reflected from the mirror 4-82 and then enters the quarter-wave plate 4-62. After passing through the quarter-wavelength plate 4_62, the circularly polarized light beam 4_84 is converted into a linear p-polarized light beam 4-86. When the linear ρ polarized light beam is transmitted through the beam splitter 4-60 and is not reflected at the beam splitting interface, the beam center 86 continues to pass to the first detection 4 88, the light detection consultation 4-88 is used to detect the data stored on the disc 4_54 The light beam 4-86 falling on the photodetector 4-88 is defocused or out of adjustment, then the amount of out of adjustment or defocus is electronically measured and used as the feedback of the servo system (not shown) to properly re-appropriate Align objective 4 to 66. . Fig. 41 illustrates an example of an electromagnetic sliding frame and actuator assembly 4_1 (Κ) constructed according to the present invention. This assembly can be used with an optical module 4_1Q2. The module I f is installed with II binding -H-^ (please first Read the notes on the back and fill out this page}

299439 A7 _______B7_ V. Description of the invention (85) Group of icons related to FIG. 41 read and write data on the surface of the disc, including light source 4-58, detector 4-88, alignment lens 4-64, quarter A wavelength plate 4-62 and a beam splitter 4-60 are all incorporated into the module 4_102. The spindle motor 41〇4 is located in the vicinity of the assembly 4-100 and the rotation axis A above the assembly 4-100 rotates the disc (not shown). The assembly 4.100 includes a sliding frame 4.10. The first and second bearing surfaces 4-108 and 4-11 are slidably mounted on the first and second rails 4-112 and 4-114 ', respectively. The actuator 4-1Ί6 is mounted on the carriage 4-106. It will be appreciated that the guide rails 4_112 and 4_114 provide the framework to move the carriage along. The optical beam 4-120 emitted from the light source 4-58 in the optical module 4-102 enters the actuator 4-116 through the round hole 4-118 and is reflected by the mirror included in the actuator through the objective lens 4-122, The objective lens defines the optical axis 0 to the disc surface. It can be easily understood that the rotation axis A of the disc is parallel to the optical axis 〇 of the objective lens 4-122. I--.--1 · (; Water ·. I!--1!-! —I— I ------ (Please read the notes on the back first (Fill in this page again) The carriage 4-106 and the actuator 4-116 transported thereon are moved horizontally along the guide rails 4-112 and 4-114 in the tracking direction by a coarsely adjusted tracking motor to obtain the disc surface Different information track data. The tracking motor includes two permanent magnets 4-130 and 4-132, each of which is connected to the C-shaped outer polar plates 4-134 and 4-136. The two inner polar plates 4-138 and 4-140 is arranged on the ends of the outer polar plates 4-134 and 4-136 so as to surround the permanent magnets 4-130 and 4-132 to form a rectangular box. Two equal-length coils 4-142 and 4-144 is connected to the vertical plates 4-174 and 4-176, see Figure 43 'and can be moved around the polar plates 4-138 and 4-140, for the purpose of this paper standard is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (Cns ) a4 specification (210X297 company director) Beigong Consumer Cooperation of the Central Bureau of Economic Affairs of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. Du Printed V. Description of the invention (86) When the sliding frame 4-106 moves in the tracking direction, it can be placed in the polar plate 4-138 4-140 moves up. In this embodiment, the coarse adjustment coils 4-142 and 4-144 are the only movable parts of the chasing and tracking motor. The following will be described in more detail 'Actuator 4-116 movable objective lens 4-122 is closer or farther away from the disc, so as to focus the emitted light beam 4-120 to the desired position on the surface of the disc. Figure 43 shows the slide frame 4.106 and actuator 4-116 in more detail Exploded view. The carriage 4-106 generally includes a rectangular base 4.15〇 and the actuator 4-116 is connected thereto. The base 4_15〇 has a substantially flat upper surface 4-152 which generally has Rectangular chamber 4_154. The first article surface 4__ is cylindrical in shape and the second bearing surface 4_11Q contains two approximately equal-length elliptical bearing portions 4-160 and 4-162 and is on the base 4.15. Internal communication. The choice of the distance between the guide rails 4-112 and 4-114 with respect to the optical axis 0 is controlled by the same amount of advance for each support surface 4-108 and 4-110. The bearing surfaces 4-108 and 4_110 are also designed so that the two surfaces have substantially the same surface area to contact the guide rails 4 · 112 and 4 · 114. Although a slight change in length for reasons of wear may be necessary, the length of the support portion including the second support surface is approximately equal to the length of the first support surface. Two vertical walls 4_156 and 4_158 near the end of the compartment 4-154 extend upward from the upper plane 4_152 of the base 4-150. The base 415〇 also includes two platform areas 4-164 and 4-166 formed at the ends of the base 4-150 above the support surfaces 4-10 and 411, respectively. Step 4_168 is joined between the upper plane 4-152 of the base 415〇 and the second platform area 4.166. The first υ-shaped gap ΜΛ Zhang New is applicable to China National Standards (CNS) Α4 specifications (add f ------- order (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) A7

The printed printing 4-170 of the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Economic Affairs of the Ministry of Economy is formed in the first platform area 4-164, and the second u-shaped gap 4-172 is formed in the second platform area 4-166 and the step 4-168 . Coarse adjustment coils 4-142 and 4-144 are connected to two vertical 4_ 彳 74 and 4-176, respectively. The plates 4-174 and 4-176 are placed in the gaps 4-180 and 4-182, respectively, and the gaps are formed at the ends of the base 4-150. The base 4-150 further includes a mass balance plate 4-184 connected to the lower surface 4-186 of the base 4-150 with screws 4-188, and the mass balance projection 4_19 is close to the base from the base 4-150 The adjustment coil 4-142 extends outward. A circular hole 4_192 is formed in the front side 4-194 of the base 4.150 and receives the light beam 4-120 emitted from the optical module 4-102 of FIG. 42. The pillar 4-196 has a circular hole 4-198 therein and is disposed between the second vertical wall 4-158 and the first platform area 4-164 along the front side 4-194 of the base 4-150. In addition, the pillar 4_196 includes a notch 4-200 for Gu Na photodetector 4-202, so that the photodetector 4-202 is disposed between the pillar 4-196 and the first platform area 4-164. Actuator Actuator 4-116 is usually used as an actuator that moves in two stages, that is, focusing and tracking 'are installed between vertical walls 4-156 and 4-158 and platform areas 4-164 and 4-166 between. A prism (not shown) is placed in the chamber 4-154 in the base 4-150 to bias the light beam 4-120 emitted from the optical module 4-102 so that the light beam 4-120 passes through the objective lens 4- 122 Exit the actuator 4-116. The objective lens 4-122 is placed inside the frame 4-210 'and the frame is connected to the focusing and fine-tuning tracking motor to move the objective lens 4-122 to correctly align and focus the emitted light beam 4-120 to the light table The paper size is in accordance with the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210x297mm) -------- f pack ------ ordered (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) A7 B7 Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by Beigong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Precision Industry 5. Description of the invention (above the required position on 88. The objective lens 4-122 defines the optical axis. The system extends vertically through the center of the mirror. It can be clearly seen in Figure 44 A part of the actuator 4-116. The frame 4-210 is generally rectangular in shape and includes a rectangular opening 4-212 formed through the frame. The upper surface 4-214 of the frame 4-210 includes a round collar 4-216 is placed between the two shoulders 4-218 and 4-220. The round hole 4-222 has substantially the same diameter as the diameter of the round collar 4-216 and is on the lower surface of the frame Formed in 4-224. The rectangular focusing coil 4-230 is placed inside the rectangular opening 4-212 in the frame 4-210. Two round oval fine-tuning tracking coils 4-232 and 4-234 are Placed at the corner of the first end 4-240 of the focusing coil 4-230, and two identical tracking coils 4-236 and 4-238 are placed at the corner of the second end 4-242 of the focusing coil 4-230 At this point, the first pair of U-shaped poles 4-244 is placed around the first end 4-240 of the focusing coil 4-230 and the tracking coils 4-232 and 4-234 are connected thereto, while the second pair of U The polar plate 4-246 is placed around the second end 4-242 of the focusing coil 4-230 and the tracking coils 4-236 and 4-238 are connected to it. In addition, two permanent magnets 4-250 and 4-252 are placed Between the respective pole plate pairs 4-244 and 4-246 and close to the respective tracking coils 4-232, 4-234 and 4-236, 4-238. Two upper flexible arms 4-260 and 4 -262 is connected to the upper surface 4-214 of the frame 4-210 and two additional lower flexible arms 4-264 and 4-266 are connected to the lower surface of the frame 4-210. Each flexible arm is the most It contains the Chinese version of the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210x297 Gongdong), which is embossed or stamped. The size of the paper is -------- 1 Packing ------ ordered (please read the notes on the back first (Fill in this page) A7 B7 printed by the Consumer Labor Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs It is stated that (89) is a thin plate (usually steel or beryllium copper) with a thickness of 25 microns to 75 microns. For convenience, the following will only describe the flexible arm 4-260. However, it should be noted that the flexible arm 4- 262, 4-264 and 4-266 have the same structure. The flexible arm 4-260 includes a first vertical portion 4-270 connected to the first 'second and second horizontal portions 4-272, 4-274 and 4-276, and a third horizontal portion 4-276 is also connected to the vertical horizontal Arm 4-280. The first horizontal portion 4-272 includes a shoulder portion 4-278 connected to a corresponding shoulder 4-218 attached to the frame 4-210. In the same way, when the shoulders of the lower flexible arms 4-264 and 4-266 are connected to the corresponding structure on the lower surface of the frame 4-210, the shoulders of the second upper flexible arm 4-262 It is attached to the corresponding shoulder 4-220. The flexible arms 4-260, 4-262, 4-264, and 4-266 are further connected to the supporting member 4-290. The support member 4-290 includes a central notch 4-292 to receive the second pair of pole plates 4-246. The ledge 4-294 is formed on each side of the notch 4-292 on the upper and lower surfaces of the supporting member 4-290. The transverse arm portions 4-280 of the flexible arms 4-260 and 4-262 are connected to these ledges 4-294, while the flexible arms 4-264 and 4-266 are connected to the corresponding bottom surfaces of the support members 4-290 The girder is for hanging the frame 4-210 from the support 4-290 together. The support member 4-290 also includes a hole 4-296 to receive the light emitting diode 4-300. As shown in Figure 43, the diode 4-300 is aligned with the hole 4-198 in the pillar 4-196, and the photodetector 4-202 is placed within the gap 4-204 in the pillar, so when the light is emitted two When the polar body 4-300 is excited, the aligned light emitted substantially passes through the hole 4-198 in the pillar 4-196 and is incident on the photodetector 4-202. Sight frames 4-210 series This paper scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) M specifications (210x297 mm) 1 {installed ------ ordered (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) A7 '^ ---- B7 5. Description of the invention (9〇) '-* ---- Depending on the position of the support 4-290, the light emitted by the diode 4_3〇〇 will fall on the detector 4-202 Above the various parts. The position correction signal is generated by analyzing the amount of light incident on the detector 4 202 to determine the correct focus and the amount of displacement to track the desired position on the disc surface. In the illustrated embodiment, the fine-tuned motor material includes a frame 4 210, an objective lens 4.122, a focus coil 4_23〇, and fine-tune tracking coils 4-232, 4_234, 4_236, and 4_238. The sliding frame set includes a base 4-150, coarse adjustment coils 4_142 and 4_144, a post 4_196 and a photodetector 4-202, a support 4-290, a vertical plate 4-174 and 4-176, a mass balance plate 4-184 and Screw 4-188, permanent magnets 4_25〇 and 4 252, pole plates 4-244 and 4-246 and bearing surfaces 4-108 and 4-110. Printed and printed by the Central Standard Falcon Bureau Employee Consumer Cooperative I—, UK. — ^ N '1 — ~ ·-. I κ! · Ι, (please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Forty-three and Figure forty-four related explanations, the coarse adjustment coils 4-142 and 4-144 have the same size and are relative to the optical axis of the objective lens. In addition, the pair of tracking coils 4-232, 4-234 and 4-236, 4-238 have the same size and correspond to the optical axis of the objective lens 4-122. Conveniently select the size of the mass balance plate 4-184 and the mass balance projection 4-190 to compensate for the support 4-290, pull arm 4-260, 4-262, 4-264, 4-266, support surface 4- 108, 4-110, pillars 4-196 and 4-202 and other masses, such as the center of mass and fine-tuning tracking and focusing driving device of the sliding rack group (including pole plates 4-244, 4-246, permanent magnets 4_25〇, 4_252, The center of mass of the focusing coil 4-230, the tracking coils 4-232, 4-234, 4-236, 4-238) can generally intersect the optical axis 0 of the mirror 4-122. The following is a more detailed description. These centers of gravity are related to the paper standard of Caiguanjia County (Cm> A4 · (21Qx 297 Public Broadcasting). A7 Printed by the Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumer Cooperative Co., Ltd. 5. Description of Invention (91) Mirror 4 The optical arrangement of -122, and the symmetrical electromotive force and the reaction force acting on the == actuator M6 do cause an unnecessary movement pattern that minimizes the adverse effect of the position of the objective lens 2. Refer to FIG. 45, The permanent magnets 4-130, 4-132 near the coarse adjustment trace coils 4_142, Π # generate a magnetic field b whose magnetic flux lines extend internally toward the coarse adjustment coils 4_142 and 4 · 144. When the coarse adjustment trace moves, the objective lens 4 is driven When the position of -122 is under the selected track on the disc, the current will pass through the coarse tracking coils 4-142, 4 · 144. The interaction of this current and the magnetic field B generates the force to move the carriage 4-106 to the tracking direction The force is generated according to Lorentz's law f = quasi /, as mentioned above, where F represents the force acting on the focusing coil, magnetic field 5 represents the flux divergence of the magnetic field between two permanent magnets, and I represents The current through the focus coil, and / or the coil Length. For example, when the current through the first coarse-tuning tracking coil 4-142 moves in a direction into the plane of FIG. 45 through a part of the coil placed within the magnetic field B, the generating direction is arrow 4 -320 force FC (3arse1. Similarly, when the current through the second coarse tracking coil 4-144 is moved away from the plane of FIG. 45 through a part of the coil placed within the magnetic field B At this time, the force Fcoarse2 in the direction of arrow 4-322 is generated. The effect of this force "⑽㈣ and Coarse2 makes the carriage 4-106 horizontal to the left. On the contrary, Figure 46 shows that if the coil is tracked within the magnetic field B When the current in the part of 4-142, 4-144 is in the opposite direction, a force is generated, which acts as FCt5aree2, and acts to move the carriage into the plane of Figure 46 (ie, please read back I | Event I Item I Complete this page 1

F

Coarsel This paper scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Standards Bureau Negative Consumer Cooperative A7 5 '--- to the right in Figure 45). The amount of movement in the tracking direction depends on the amount of current flowing through the coarse adjustment coils 4-142 and 4-144. In this way, the sliding frame 4-1 06 moves the position where the objective lens 4-122 is placed so that the light beam 4-120 exiting the mirror 4-122 can be focused into the required information track on the surface of the disc. When the control signal is generated by the optical module 4-102, the specified current flows to one of the trimming tracking coils 4_232, 4-234, 4-236 and 4 238 or the focusing coil 4-230 depending on the direction, and the frame 4 The displacement of -210 and the attached object #Brother 4-122 must be required in the aforementioned direction. Such a servo system and a feedback circuit that controls the amount of current are known in the art. This mechanism interacts with the electromagnetic fields generated by the permanent magnets 4-250 and 4-252 to generate force to drive the frame 4-210 and the objective lens 4_122 attached thereto into the proper tracking or focusing direction. For example, based on the focus error signal, if you want to re-determine the desired focus direction, the signal will be transmitted to the servo amplifier (not shown), which generates current through the focus coil 4.23. As mentioned above, the force is generated according to Lorentz's law F = fii7. Referring now to Fig. 47, the permanent magnets 4-250 and 4-252 of the 2-D actuator 4-116 are arranged such that the S pole of each magnet 4-250, 4-252 faces the frame 4-210. In this configuration, a magnetic field b is formed and its magnetic flux lines start at the permanent magnets 4-250, 4-252 and are directed inside toward the frame 4-21, as shown. When a current 丨 is applied to the focus line 4-230 and flows to a part of the coil placed in the direction (as shown) in the magnetic field B, the upward force sinks ⑽ on the focus line 4-230 Each part is produced and transferred to the flexible arm 4_26〇, this paper standard ii financial customs home standard (CNS) Α4 · (210 ^ 297117 --------- * installed ------ order (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) A7 B7 printed by the employee consumer cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economy V. Description of invention (93) 4-262, 4-264 and 4-266 'to pull the flexible arm Moving the frame 4-2Ί0 brings the associated objective lens 4-122 closer to the disc. Conversely, when the current is known to the coil part in the opposite direction as shown in the figure, a downward force acting on the flexible arm is generated to move The frame 4-210 moves the objective lens 4-122 further away from the disc surface. The amount of displacement depends on the amount of current flowing through the focusing coil 4-230. By moving the objective lens 4-122 closer to or farther away from the disc surface 'focus coil 4_23. The function can correctly focus the light beam 4-120 exiting the objective lens 4-122 to the desired information track on the disc. As shown in Figure 48, when the current is connected to When the four fine-tuning tracking coils 4_232, 4-233, 4-236, and 4-238 of the focus coil 4-230 are generated, the movement of the actuator 4-116 that affects the fine-tuning tracking is generated. When the current flows in the direction shown in the figure When added to the tracking coil and passing through a part of the tracking coil placed in the magnetic field B, a force FTrack is generated and moves the frame 4-210 to the right. When the force FTrack acts on the tracking coil 4-232, 4-234 , 4-236 and 4-238, these forces are transferred to the focus coil 4_23〇 and the frame 4-210 and pull the flexible arms 4-260, 4-262, 4-264 and 4-268 to the corresponding direction 'And the objective lens 4-122 moves in the direction of the right force shown in Figure 48. When the current is applied to the trace lines 4-232, 4-233, 4-236 and 4-238 in the opposite direction, it moves The leftward force of the frame 4-210 is generated. The amount of current added to the fine-tuning tracking coils 4-232, 4-234, 4-236, and 4-238 and the coarse-tuning tracking coils 4-142 and 4-144 Compared with the current, the amount of current is relatively small, and in order to increase the vibration frequencies, the paper size of the fine-tuning tracking coil is suitable for the Chinese national standard (r * MC \ Α &gt; &lt; 4β 1A / -____ At \ 1 II : I--I ·· I — ^ * · U5 &quot; 11 I— I II * t ^ n 丁 I 洚 ，-口 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) A7 A7 Service V. Description of invention ( 94) The trace line_size is much smaller 'so it can have higher word frequency and control more precise tracking error. Figures 49 to 58 are actuators and carriage assemblies MO. The figure of Figure 1 shows the symmetry and balance of the force obtained by the design of the present invention. Figure 49A illustrates the symmetry of the loop or the sliding electromotive force acting on the actuator 4_U6 in the horizontal plane. #Current is applied to the coarse adjustment tracking coils 4-142 and 4_144 as described above, the force%. _Xianyi is produced and concentrated when the blade is located in the part near the coarse adjustment coils 4-142 and 4_144 of the permanent magnets 4_13 () and 4_132. The size of the first coarse adjustment line, _i42 is equal to the size of the second coarse adjustment coil 4-144, and the current flowing to each coil is the same, so the force acting on the coil is also equal. In addition, the coarse coils 4-142 and 4-144 are placed at equal distances ^ and k from the objective lens 4_122 so that the magnetic moment caused by the optical axis 〇 of the objective lens 4_122 is equal, and the left and right swing of the carriage is also minimal. In Figure 49B, the center of the coarsely adjusted electromotive forces Fcarse1 and FC (3arse2 is in the vertical plane as shown. Because the forces F and F CQarse2 are vertically aligned with the center of mass c M c of the carriage (That is, it generally includes the carriage center of mass CMc intersecting with the line perpendicular to the radial direction and the optical axis 〇), so the moment relative to the horizontal axis is equal, and by introducing a tracking offset, the offset of the beam angle is caused by the pitch of the beam. The jitter is also reduced. Figures 50A and 50B show the fine-tuning of the tracking electromotive force in the horizontal and vertical planes. By exciting the fine-tuning tracking coils 4 within the magnets sent by the permanent magnets 4-250 and 4-252 -232, 4-234, 4_236 and 4-238 are produced. This paper scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X 297mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) * ^ τ Printed by the Central Bureau of Standards 'Staff Consumer Cooperative Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs of the Central Bureau of Standards' Worker's Consumer Cooperative A7 ^ ------- B7 I. Invention description (95) 'Tfracki and TT' aCk2 are concentrated to be between fine-tuning Tracking coil pair 4-232, 4-234 and 4-236, 4-238, and in the tracking side Extend horizontally. The size of the coils is equal and the amount of current applied to the coils is also equal, so the forces generated by TracM and TTrack2 are equal. In addition, the fine-tuning tracking coils 4-232, 4-234 ,, 4-236 and 4-238 are placed at a distance LT from the optical axis of the objective lens 4-122, such as 0 Bai, so the magnetic moments generated with respect to the optical axis 〇 are equal, so the relative 4-axis lens frame 4-210 and above The left and right shaking of the transported objective lens 4-122 is reduced. As shown in Figure 50b, the generated fine-tuning tracking force TTrack can act on the center of mass of the fine-tuning motor. Change.

Fig. 51A illustrates the reaction force F React1 and F React2 generated from the fine-tuning tracking motor with the fine-tuning tracking electric power T in Fig. 50A.

Track *! Acts on the carriage 4-106 in the opposite direction to TTak2. These reaction forces FhW and FRea⑽ act on the plates 4 · 244 and 4-246 '. The plates are placed on each side of the frame 4-210 to trace the coils 4-232, 4-234, 4-236 and 4-238 Above. As mentioned above, the tracking force is equalized to the size of Ding Ruru. In addition, the dimensions of the pole plates 4-244 and 4-246 are also equal, so that the resulting forces FReact1 and FReact2 are equal. Since the pole plates 4-244 and 4_246 are both placed at an equal distance U from the optical axis 0 of the objective lens 4-122, the moments relative to the optical axis 0 are equal in magnitude, thus reducing the rotation of the vertical axis or panning left and right. Figure 51B illustrates the reaction force FReact generated in the vertical plane. As shown in the figure, the reaction force FReact acts above the center of mass of the sliding frame. This paper button is suitable for the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4C ^ (210X297 (please read the precautions on the back and fill in this page).

* tT A7 V. Description of the invention (9 ^ —- Fine adjustment of motor centroid at CMF%, so the magnetic moment will act on the carriage 4-106. However, because the distance LRM and the reaction force FR_ and FReact2 are more 'Small' so the magnetic moment is relatively reduced and does not affect the performance of the sliding frame. Printed by the Staff Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs -------- 1. Installed ------ ordered (please read first (Notes on the back and then fill in this page) Figure 52A shows the focusing forces F FOCUS1 and Ff〇cus2 generated on the actuator 4-116. These forces ff〇cus1 and FF (3cus2 concentrated In the part of the focusing coil 4-230, the part is located between the tracking coils 4_232, 4-234, 4-236 and 4-238 and the pole plates 4-244, 4-246 and is close to the permanent magnet 4-250 And 4-252. In Figure 44, the focus coil 4-230 is wound within the rectangular opening 4-212 in the frame 4-210, so the same amount of current will flow on each side of the coil near the magnet, Therefore, equal forces F Focus1 and FFOcus2 are generated on each side of the frame 4-210 to move the frame and the objective lens 4-122 carried on it in the vertical direction. Placed in the rectangular opening 4-212 in the frame 4-210, the resulting "[:. (^ 1 and" |:. (^ 2 is centered at an equal distance LF from the optical axis of the objective lens 4.122 Generated at the position. In the aforementioned configuration, the moment generated relative to the optical axis of the objective lens 4-122 is equal, which can reduce the rotation of the frame 4-210. In addition, as shown in Figure 52B, when the slide frame At the end of the observation, the 'focus force is FF (3cus) and the center of mass CMc of the carriage is aligned, thereby reducing the jolt of the carriage 4-106. In Figure 53A, the horizontal plane is used to illustrate the The focus force FF (3CUS1 and ff) shown in Figure 52A is corresponding to the order of the reaction force generated by the 2 and the paper scale are applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm). A7 printed by the Bureau Cooperative Consumer Cooperatives ------ ^ ___ V. Description of the invention (97)-FFR2. The reaction force F order and FFR2 are equal in size and opposite to the focusing forces Fhw and FFQCUS2 and concentrated in close proximity Fine-tune the permanent poles of the motor 4-250 and 4-252 in the middle of the iron plate 4-244 and 4_246. As mentioned above, the stupid power FF (3CUS1 and "~ This is equal, so the reaction force F and Fjrp2 are also equal. In addition, the reaction force FFR ^ FFR2 acts at an equal distance LFR from the optical axis of the objective lens Il22 to further reduce the bumps. In addition, as shown in 彡 彡 十 ζ B It is shown that when viewed from the end of the carriage 4-106, the idle forces fFR1 and fFR2 (ffr in the figure) and the center of mass CMc of the carriage are arranged in a row to reduce the jitter of the carriage. The force generated by the flexible arms 4-26〇, 4-262, 4-264, and 4-266 on the frame 4-21o is illustrated in FIG. 54. The forces of Fig. FRex ·! And FFlex2 are acting on the upper flexible arms 4-260, 4-262. Those who are familiar with this talent should understand that the same force will act on the lower flexible arms 264 and 4-266. Forces that act on the upper flexible arms 4-260 and 4-262 respectively 1 FFlex2 was blamed at the 4-28〇 of the cross arm portion of the flexible arms 4-260 and 4-262 '&lt; Department The flexible arm is connected to the support 4-290 position. As mentioned earlier, when the forces Fpiexi and Ffw act on the pull arms 4-260 and 4-262, the pull arms are pulled in the direction of the pull to achieve the fine-tuned trace. In order to maintain the flexible arms 4-260 and 4-262 under their pulling conditions, the trim motor generates a reaction force 1 = sand and FRB are concentrated on the pole plates 4-244 and 4-246 on one side of the frame 4-210. As shown, the flexural forces FFlex1 and FFlex2 act on the distance from the optical axis of the objective lens 4-122 "at the same time, while the reaction forces FRA and FRB act on the optical axis of the original paper wave scale applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 Specifications (210X297 mm) I--I— 1 ^ 1-1 ^ 1--I ^ ϋ. I-- Please open the back-end method first. Please continue to fill in this ΪΤ

--I • I-m A7 ----------- B7 _ V. Description of the invention (98) -------- 1 'Lang— (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in (This page) 0 distance between LRA and LRB. Those skilled in the art will know that the torque generated by several pairs of forces with respect to the optical axis of the objective lens 4-122 is not equal because (FFiexi + FFieX2) is not equal to (FRALRA + FRBLRB). However, because these forces can be effectively decoupled from the carriage except at very low frequencies (usually below 40 Hz), these forces will not affect the performance of the actuator under most normal operating conditions. As mentioned above, the carriage 4-106 includes two bearing surfaces 4-108 and 4-110 which are slidably mounted on the guide rails 4-112 and 4-114 for positioning the carriage 4-106 on the disc with different data tracks under. In essence, the bearing surfaces 4-108 and 4-110 act as "springs" to keep the carriage 4-106 above the guide rails 4-112 and 4-114. The "spring" strengthening force FBearingl and FBearing2 are shown in Figure 55. * Heli F Bearing &quot;! and F Bearing2 are concentrated between the bearing surfaces 4-108 and 4-110 and the guide rails 4-112 and 4-114 The Ministry of Economic Affairs, Central Bureau of Precision Industry, Beigong Consumer Cooperative printed the contact point and extended down through the center of the guide rail. As mentioned above, the surface contact area between the bearing surfaces 4-108 and 4-112 is approximately equal to The surface contact area between the bearing surface 4-110 and the guide rail 4-114, so that some strengthening force "fine, _ and" ^ _2 are substantially equal. The bearing surfaces 4-108 and 4-11〇 are placed at At the equidistant LBearing distance from the optical axis 〇 of the objective lens 4-122 ', the moments generated by these forces FBearing1 and FBearing2 with respect to the optical axis θ are equal, which minimizes the swing of the carriage. In the plane, the net sliding frame suspension force FBearing directly acts on the position between the two supports and is aligned with the optical axis 〇 This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification U10X297 male thin)

The printed figure 56A of the employee consumer cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economics illustrates that the frictional force F acting on the bearing surfaces 4-108, 4-110, and the guide rails 4_112 and 4-114 varies with The first supporting surface 4-108 includes two parts 4-160 and 4-162 hours. So the two frictional forces and other shafts ... and the plant ~ Cangari exist and the force is different from each supporting part 4 -160 is associated with 4-162 and is concentrated in the middle of the support along the contact area with the guide rail 4-114. The second frictional force FFricti () n2 acts on the support surface 4-108 and is concentrated in the middle of the support along the guide rail 4-112 in contact with it as shown. Because the contact area of the support portions 4-160 and 4-162 forming the first support surface 4-11〇 is substantially equal to the contact area of the second support surface 4 · 108, and the leading amount of the two support surfaces As with the friction coefficient, the 4-114 is located at an equal distance lf from the optical axis O of the objective lens 4-122, so the torque generated with respect to the optical axis of the mirror is also equal. In the vertical plane, the forces FFricticinIA, FFricti〇n1B and FFricti〇n2 act on the contact area between the guide rails 4_ * | 12, 4-114 and the bearing surfaces 4-108, 4-110, Figure 50 Six B can be conveniently designed to be horizontal with the center of mass CM of the carriage. Arranged in a line, this will cause the moment of the center of mass about the sliding frame to swing left and right will be reduced. Figures 57 to 60 illustrate the inertial forces acting on the carriage 4-106 and actuator 4-116 in vertical and horizontal acceleration. The inertial force acting on the fine-tuning of the vertical acceleration response of the motor and the carriage to the components is shown in Figure 57. In Figures 57 and 58 A, the 'first-down inertial force% etc. --1 --- I--y installed —----. (Book (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page }

Printed by the Beigong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ΑΊ __________B7 V. Description of the invention (100) Adjust the quality of the electric motor times the acceleration. In Figures 57 and 58A, the second downward inertial force Flc acting on the carriage center of mass CMc is equal to the carriage mass times the acceleration and acts on the center of mass of the trim motor. Figures 58 and 58 also show that the inertial forces Fif and FIC are horizontally aligned with the optical pickup of the objective lens 4-122. Fig. 59A illustrates the inertial forces acting on the coarse adjustment tracking coils 4-142, 4-144 and the pole plates 4-244, 4-246 for the horizontal acceleration of the carriage and the trim motor, respectively. The inertial force FIC1 acts on the upper center of the first coarse adjustment coil 4-142 and the inertial force FIC2 acts on the upper center of the second coarse adjustment coil 4-144. As mentioned above, the coils 4-142 and 4-144 have the same size 'so that the mass of the first coil 4-142 will be equal to the mass of the second coil 4-144. The magnitude of each force FIC1 and FIC2 is equal to the respective coil mass times acceleration, so the inertial forces acting on coils 4-142 and 4-144 are equal. Since the coils 4-142 and 4-144 are both placed at an equal distance 1 ^ from the optical axis 0 of the objective lens 4-122, the inertial forces FIC1 and FIC2 generate equal magnetic moments with respect to the optical extraction of the mirror. Similarly, because the trimmer motor plates 4-244 and 4-246 have the same size and are placed at an equal distance Lp from the optical axis 0, the inertial forces FIP1 and FIP2 acting on the plate are equal and relatively The magnetic moment generated by the optical axis 0 of the objective lens 4-122 is equal. Apply the same analysis to all other components or sub-components of the carriage or actuator assembly, and, as will be explained in more detail below, the inertia caused by horizontal or vertical acceleration above the resonant frequency of the flexible arm The force is balanced and symmetrical to the optical axis. The paper scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm). (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) ^ &quot; 439 ------ A 7 V. Issue date ▲ 明 ~~ --- Therefore, the motor and slider are fine-tuned on the components with horizontal acceleration The net inertial force F ① and F |. The effect is along the center line passing through the carriage, and the display in Figure 59B intersects the optical axis 〇. Since the net inertial force Fle of the coarse adjustment motor is equal to the mass of the motor times the acceleration, the net inertial force F | f of the fine adjustment motor is equal to the mass of the fine adjustment motor times the acceleration. In the south frequency aspect, the acceleration in the tracking direction is about 40Hz above the "white vibration frequency" of the frame to the flexible arm, and the components of the assembly 4-100 can be unshaked and do not affect the position of the objective lens 4-122 . Therefore, the inertial force is different from the acceleration above or below the resonance frequency of the flexible arm. The inertial forces at these high frequencies for horizontal acceleration are shown in Figure 60A. At these high frequencies, the actuator 4_116 is decoupled from the carriage 4-106, so the first inertial force% is equal to the mass of the trim motor multiplied by the acceleration and acts on the center of mass of the trim motor. Two inertial forces "! 2 is equal to the mass of the coarse adjustment motor multiplied by the acceleration and concentrated to the center of mass CMe of the sliding frame. The Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Bureau of Customs and Crafts Consumer Cooperation Du Yin I I--I-----11 · -Lg ^^^ 1 ί —I --- 1 ^ 1 l ·! ·· ^^ 1 XV • —3, va (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) Figure 60B The inertial force of the horizontal acceleration below the resonance frequency of the sexual arm. At these low frequencies, the movement of the fine-tuning motor and the carriage is like a unit with a net center of mass at CMc. As shown, the net center of mass CMJ is located on the carriage At the vertical distance X above the center of mass CMc, the coarsely adjusted electric forces F coarsei and Fcoarse2 and the friction force are bright. 〇1 and strong resistance. N2 is no longer in line with the center of mass of the carriage, and is now shifted to CMc '. Although the vertical displacement of the center of mass of the carriage will occur, the symmetrical design of components 4-100 will ensure the quality of the carriage CMc will not shift in the horizontal plane, and the center of mass will move vertically from ci. This paper scale adopts the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification. (210X297mm) Central Ministry of Economic Affairs-Industrial and Consumer Cooperatives Printed A7 _ B7 Fifth, the description of the invention (102) — ·. ~-— The position of the forest sliding tube will also maintain symmetry with the optical axis Ο. In addition, the design of the symmetry will ensure that The sub-parts or components of the carriage will not shift horizontally at the center of mass% at high frequencies. For example, in the frequency range of KHZ, finely adjust the motor pole plates 4-244, 4-246 and magnetic age 25Q, 4_252 将 _ 合. However, by the design of readability, the center of mass will not shift in the horizontal plane. Because the center of mass CMc does not shift in the horizontal plane, the reaction force of the focus motor is loosened in those parts that make The solution will not shake or turn the moving frame. Therefore: by aligning the center of mass of the optical axis of the objective lens 4_122 with the money, the mirror ’s position at the kneeling position is affected by the Korean position. The effects of the vibrations, motors and reaction forces acting on the components 4-100 will be minimal. Figure 7T Eleven A ElevenB illustrates a Bode transition diagram of the fine-tuning tracking position of the present invention to the fine-tuning motor current of the actuator 4-116 with the 〇24 gram objective lens suspended in the fine-tuning motor of 1-9 gram mass. As shown in cave eleven A, the actuator exhibits a nearly ideal dB curve 4-310 with a slope of approximately 40 dB / decade and an ideal phase shift curve 4-312, FIG. Sixty-one B. These two dB and phase shift curves have the same trace lines 4-310 and 4-312, respectively. Figures 61-C and 60-D illustrate the same transfer function when the prism is out of focus by 15 mm in the horizontal or tracking direction. The two dB and phase shift curves' traces are 4_31〇 · and 4-312 ·, respectively, showing interference or spikes, which will occur at approximately the size of this paper. China National Standards (CNS) A4 (210x297 mm) ) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Packing. Order i Printed and printed description of the Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (103) 3 2KHZ. The phase margin dips approximately 25 degrees to reduce the loop and increase the time and maximum overshoot. The horizontal displacement of the mirror's position in the mirror's position disturbs the symmetry and balance of the fine-tuning tracking force acting on the mirror and causes a moment about the optical axis of the mirror, resulting in left and right shaking. Therefore, it can be understood that the balance of the force in the optical axis 0 of the objective lens 4_122, and the element 4_1GG significantly improves the tracking position. Figures 62A through 62C illustrate the effect of the non-uniform focusing force acting on the assembly 4_1〇〇. Figure 62 briefly shows the trace signal. The picture shows the trace line 4-320. When there is a 15-micrometer track crossing the track, each sine wave corresponds to the data track on the surface of the disc. In Figure 62B, the focusing force is concentrated on the centroid CMp of the fine-tuning motor and the optical axis 〇. When the focusing current of 0.1 ampere and the focusing acceleration of 0.75 m / s2, the upper margin line 4-322 shows The focus line_current is passed during the step, and the lower trace line 4.324 shows the tracking difference signal when tracking a specific track. As shown in Figure 7JT, the tracking error signal actually remains unaffected by the focus current level. Fig. 62C shows the influence of the current and the tracking error signal in the magnetic field B of Fig. 62 when the focusing force is shifted away from the aligned optical axis 〇 and the centroid CMF_.2mm. The trace lines 4_322 and 4_324 correspond to the same aforementioned curve, respectively. At this moment, the tracking signal is obviously affected by the focus current. Under the same focus current and acceleration, the tracking deviation of Q Q22m is caused. Normally, all permissible tracking offsets in the optical drive device are in the 0.005 micro-meter paper ruler, the New fiscal Guanjia Duojiun (CNS) A4 specification (% · 〖install-(please read the precautions on the back first Fill in this page} Order 1 Printed by the Central Diplomatic Bureau Employee Consumer Cooperative. V. Description of invention (104) A7 B7 meters to 0.1 micrometers. Therefore, by aligning this force in Figure 62B, then The tracking offset can be clearly reduced. An alternative embodiment of the actuator assembly 4-400 and the carriage is illustrated in Figure 7T XIII, where the center of mass of the 2-D actuator coincides with the center of mass of the carriage. Except for the substance It is symmetrical to the optical axis of the objective lens, and the center of mass of the fine adjustment motor coincides with the center of mass of the sliding frame and is aligned with the optical axis. The sliding frame and the actuator assembly 4-100 of the first embodiment are suitable for most However, the component 4-400 of this alternative embodiment can be used at frequencies below the frequency of the flexible arm spectrum to avoid the displacement of the center of mass of the sliding frame. The component 4-400 includes the sliding frame 4-406, with The first and second bearing surfaces 4-408 and 4-410 are substantially the same as the assembly 4-1 The support surface in 〇 is slidably mounted on the guide rail (not shown), and it is installed in the carriage 4-406 as the 2-D actuator 4-416. The carriage 4-406 includes a pair of thick The tracking coils 4-412 and 4-414 are placed in the individual gaps 4-417 and 4-418 formed in the sliding frame 4-406 'Figure 65 is near the support surface 4-408 and 4-41. Acts to move the carriage 4-406 horizontally in the tracking direction, and access different information tracks on the surface of the light beam. The actuator 4-416 includes a frame 4-420 on which an objective lens is mounted ^ 422 ° a pair of ledges 4-424 forms a pair of upper flexible arms 4-426 on the upper surface of the sliding frame 4-406, and the flexible arms are further connected to the upper surfaces of a pair of blocks 4-428 formed on the frame 4 . A pair of lower flexure arms 4_429 have the same structure as the upper flexure arms 4-426, and are supported by (CNS) A4 ^ m (210X297 ^) ~-(Please read the precautions on the back before (Fill in this page) Binding · Order 1 11-1 i ^ i · Printed by A7 ------- B7___, the employee consumer cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (105) '--- The corresponding wall in the ground floor Supported by the frame, The lower surface corresponding to the bump 4-428 attached to the frame 4-420. The light beam 4-430 passes through the elliptical aperture 4-432 and enters the actuator 4-416 and is contained within the actuator 4-416 A mirror (not shown) reflects along the optical axis 0 and passes through the objective lens 4-422. The actuator 4-416 is also connected to a focusing and fine-tuning tracking motor, which moves the mirror 4-422 to properly align and focus the emitted beam Go to the desired location on the disc surface. The focusing and fine-tuning tracking motor includes two permanent magnets 4-440 and 442 connected to opposite ends of the frame 4-420. An elliptical fine-tuning tracking coil 4_444 is connected to each permanent magnet 4-440 and 4-442 and is close to the support surfaces 4-408 and 4-410. The focusing coil 4-448 is connected to the lower and lower surfaces of the sliding frame 4-406 and supported by the ledge formed inside the sliding frame, so that the lens frame 4-420 can be placed between the focusing coils 4-448. The coarse adjustment tracking movement of the carriage 4-406 and the actuator 4-416 is affected in the same manner as the assembly 4-100 shown in Figs. 46 and 47. According to Lorentz's law, the force generated in Figure 65 moves the carriage 4-406 and actuator 4-416 in the tracking direction, so the objective lens 4-422 is positioned under different information tracks on the disc. Figure 64 shows the operation of the actuator 4-416 to move the frame 4-420 and the objective lens 4-422 carried thereon in the focusing direction. When electric current is generated in the focusing coil 4-448, an electromagnetic field 4-450 is introduced into each coil. As shown, the electromagnetic field 4-450 has different directions in the respective focusing coils. In the example shown, the two permanent magnets 4-440 and 4-442 will be connected to the lower focusing coil. The paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 × 297 mm) (please read the notes on the back before filling in 1) Installation · i A7 B7 The Ministry of Economic Affairs, Central Standards Bureau, Employee Consumer Cooperative printed various paper standards and used the Chinese National Standard (CNS) 84 specifications (210.5, invention description (106) 4-448 (not shown) and Against the upper focus coil 4_448, so move the objective lens holder 4-420 toward the lower focus coil 4-448 and away from the upper focus coil 4-448 to further position the objective lens 4-422 away from the disc surface, where the magnitude of the displacement depends on the imported Electromagnetic field strength depends. In the same way, Figure 65 illustrates the interaction of permanent magnets 4-440 and 4-442 and fine-tuning tracking coil 4_444. Excitation tracking coil 4-444 is in the tracking direction to the right or left Moving the frame 4-420 horizontally depends on the direction of current flow through the coil. For example, in the magnetic field 4-460 shown in the figure, the frame 4-420 and the objective lens 4-422 are moved to the left. In this way, the tracking coil 4-444 is used for more precise Position the light beam of the objective lens 4-422 to the center of the desired information track on the disc. In the following discussion, the same force and length corresponding to the components 4-100 are discussed together. For the convenience of illustration, the above, , Will be used to discuss the corresponding value and will still refer to Figures 46, 49B, 50A-52A, 55A, 56A and 58B to use the association The marked forces and lengths discussed in components 4-100. As mentioned above, the coarse tracking motor operates in the same way as the coarse tracking motor in components 4-100. The coarse tracking coils 4-412 and 4- 414 has the same size and is placed at an equal distance from the optical axis of the objective lens 4_422. See Figure 46. Equal current is applied to the coils, so the corresponding force Fc () on the carriage 4_4〇6 arsei • With Fc &lt; jarse2, it can be used at the equal corresponding distance Lci from Fig. 49B to the optical axis 〇 ', and lc2_. At vertical X 297 mm)-"Please read the two notes Please fill in this page again.

A7 A7 Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economy V. Description of the invention (1〇7) These forces Fc_U are aligned in the direction of the rear half in the straight plane. Fifty-eight B sliding frame center of gravity CMc ', in order to reduce the sliding frame and actuator bumps. In the same way, the supporting surfaces 4-408 and 4-410 are placed at an equal distance from the optical axis 0, so that the suspension force of the carriage is also symmetrical to the optical axis 0. Compare in Figure 55A, 'Each force FBearing1' and FBearmg2, acting at an equidistant LBearing1 from the optical axis'. This produces moments relative to the optical axis that are equal and reduces the sliding frame and actuator bladder toss. The bearing surface area of the contact rail is designed to be practically equal. Thus, the frictional force acting on the carriage 4_406 can also be substantially equal. Since the supporting surfaces 4-408 and 4_410 are placed equidistant from the optical axis, the moment acting on the optical axis is equal and the jitter of the carriage and the actuator is reduced. The assembly is also designed so that the frictional force is vertically aligned with the center of mass of the carriage 4-406 and the actuator 4-416. The tracking coil 4-444 has the same size and the same current is applied to the coil, so the fine-tuning tracking force acting on the actuator is also equal. In addition, the tracking coil 4-444 is placed at an equidistant distance from the optical axis 0_ in FIG. 50A, so that the moments generated with respect to this axis are equal. In the vertical plane, these forces FTrack / and FTrackJ of FIG. 50A are also aligned with the center of gravity of the actuator 4-416 and the carriage 4-406, thus reducing the jitter of the actuator 4-416. Because the fine-tuning tracking forces acting on the components are equal, it can be inferred that the reaction force F React1 generated by the reaction of this track force FTrack1 'and FTrack2_ in Figure 51A is also equal to FReact2, and these reaction forces act on At an equal distance of 1_ 'from the optical axis and the vertical paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm> (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page)

2. Description of the invention (108) A7 B7 Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economics, aligned directly with the center of gravity, so that the moment of the optical axis 0 is equal and the left and right shaking is reduced. In the same manner, the focus coil 4-448 is substantially the same size and the current applied to the focus coil 4-448 produces equal forces FFqcus1 'and Fp. ⑶S1 'acts on the actuator. However, in this embodiment, the focusing coil 4 448 is located at an equal distance lf of the center of gravity of the trim motor and the carriage in Fig. 56A, so that the moment of the optical axis 0 'is equal. In addition, in FIG. 11A, the focus reaction forces Ffr1_ and FFR2, which act on the fine-tuning motor of FIG. 58, are affected by the focusing forces “?. Coffee 1_ and“?:. Coffee 2, equal to each other ”(Figure 53. A) are equal and act on the equidistant distance LFR_ of the center of gravity of the sliding carriage CMc in Fig. 53A from the carriage CMc '. Therefore, the moments generated by the reaction force on the optical axis CT are equal and It also reduces the actuator's bumps. The flexible force FFlex1 acting on the actuator, and Fnex2, and the fine-tuned motor reaction forces FRA, FRB generated in response to the flexible force, as shown in Figure 54 The forces shown for the components 4-100 in Figure 1 are the same. Because the flexural force and the reaction force are not symmetrical to the optical axis, the moments generated by these pairs of forces at the optical axis are not equal. However, these forces In addition to the low frequency (usually below 4 (^ 2)), it can be effectively disengaged from the carriage 4-406, so that these moments will not affect the performance of the actuator under most operating conditions. Therefore, The electromotive force and reaction force acting on the component 4-400 are symmetrical to the optical axis. Directly align the center of gravity of the trimming motor Cmf · ★ sliding frame CMc '. Because the center of gravity of the trimming motor and the sliding frame are coincident, so please (please read the precautions on the back side and fill out this page). Packing and Ordering — — ^ n Economy A7 ______B7 printed by the Employees' Consumer Cooperative of the Central Prototype Bureau of the Ministry 5. Description of the invention (109) The decoupling of the actuator 4-416 or any sub-components of the assembly 4-400 will not shift the center of mass and act on the assembly 4 The force and torque of -400 will actually maintain a balance between all horizontal and vertical accelerations. Anamorphic, achromatic Prism System (Anamorphic, Achromatic Prism System) Figure 66 describes the optical system of the prior art 5_ 〇〇 has an incident light beam 5-106, which is depicted by a dotted line 5-102, a simple deformed lens 5-108, a focusing mirror 5-110, and an optical medium 5-112. The beam 5-106 is relative to the lens The angle of incidence 5-114 between the normal to the entry surface 5-116 enters the prism 5-108. As is known in the art, laser light sources usually produce an elliptical beam of light with astigmatism. Morphology 5-108 Provide expansion along the short axis of the ellipse to correct The ellipticity of the beam. The angle of incidence 5-114 is selected to provide the desired spread along the short axis. The anamorphic prism 5-108 can also correct astigmatism in the incident beam 5-106. The lens 5-110 focuses the resulting correction beam 5 -118 forms a point 5-120 onto the optical medium 5-112. The simple prism 5-108 is suitable for keeping the wavelength of the incident light beam 5-1 〇6 as long as possible. Random, lambda mode-hopping &quot; (mode-hopping) and other conditions as described in this negative technique change the wavelength. In the magneto-optical disk system, the laser power is continuously at the power level required for writing operations and the power required for reading operations. Matters needing attention before filling this page)

, Cut between 1T levels = calculate the angle of refraction of light at the interface of the lining, as is known in this technique: n1smei = n2sine2 where: Πι = refractive index of material 1; θι = normal The angle of incidence sandwiched; η2 = the refractive index of material 2; and 02 = the angle of refraction sandwiched with the normal. When the beam 5-106 enters the prism 5. The above relationship defines the refraction of the beam 5-106. As shown in Figure 66, when an incident light beam 5-106 of a wavelength enters 珜 鏡 5-108 ', the light beam is refracted at a specified angle by the refractive index of 珜 鏡 5⑽ and the incident angle 5_114 of the beam 5-106. The radiant energy of the light beam 5_118 generated by the ellipticity correction is the astigmatism of the light beam 51Q6, which enters the focusing mirror 5-110 and generates a focused light spot 5-120 on the optical medium 5_112. However, the refractive index changes with wavelength. This can be used as a reference for dispersion phenomena. Yu Yuan, § When the wavelength of the light beam 5-106 changes, the angle of refraction generated from the interface between the air and the pitch 5-108 is different from the previous wavelength. Figures ττ and ττ are described by dotted lines, and the influence of the wavelength of the beam 5-106 on the displacement. The light beam 5-106 is refracted at different angles and causes the light beam 5-122 to enter the focusing mirror 5-110 at different angles to cause a focused light spot 5-124 on the optical medium 5-112. As shown in Figure 66, this light 5-124 is printed from the beam 5_120 central frame of the Ministry of Economic Affairs for the employee consumer cooperative. Fifth, the invention description (1H) is shifted. This shift caused by the wavelength change in the incident beam is used here as a reference for the lateral beam displacement. The lateral beam displacement of children can be avoided without the use of 珜 鏡 5_108. For example, the system can use round lenses to provide round spots on the optical media. However, in order to form a dot with a lens, the lens focuses only the circular aperture (cirCuar aperture) into the elliptical beam. This will result in the use of laser power without dissipation efficiency, because part of the beam outside the circular aperture is scattered. Therefore, there is also a system that uses deformable prisms for the beam shape, which cannot contribute to the spectroscopic correction from the ellipticity and the astigmatism in the incident beam. The performance of the beam formed by the anamorphic prism is to expand the elliptical beam into a circular beam and provide efficient use of laser power. Especially in the optical disc system, when it is necessary to increase the power for writing to the disc, the effective use of the power is advantageous. Figure 67 shows the traditional structure of the 5-element multi-component system known in the art. The described system includes three prism elements, prism 5-132, prism 5_134 and prism 5-136, focusing mirror 5_138 and reflective optical medium 5-140. The prism system 5-130 can be designed to be achromatic by appropriate selection of the unique prism geometry, refractive index, and dispersion of prism 5_132, prism 5_134, and prism 5_136. The 稜鏡 system 5-130 shown in FIG. 67 also allows the return beam from the optical medium 5-140 to be reflected back to the detection system 5-144, which includes Between the splitting film 5-146. The size of this paper is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm). Second garment ------ 1T ------ ^ ____ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Economy A7 ___ B7_ of the Ministry of Central Standards Bureau ’s employee consumption cooperation. V. Description of the invention (112) As shown in Figure 67, the entered 5-148 passes through 珜 鏡 5 · ι 32, 稜鏡 5-134 and 稜鏡 5 -1 36, and then focused by the lens 5-1 38 to form a point 5-137 onto the optical medium 5-140. The light beam 5-148 is reflected back from the optical medium 5_14〇 through the lens 5-138 to enter the prism 5-136, and reflected from the thin film 5-146 to obtain the light beam 5-150. The beam 5-150 then enters the detection system 5-144. If it is designed to be achromatic, changing the wavelength of the input beam 5-148 should not cause lateral displacement in the focused spot 5-137 on the optical medium 5-140. As explained earlier, optical systems are usually more beneficial than more than one detector. The prism system with air gaps in the path of light means that it can provide more advantages, especially a high-density, achromatic prism system that can reflect the parts of the return beam and the reflected beam to the multiple detectors. Furthermore, by using air-spaced 'symmetrical correction prisms, it can also be added to current anamorphic prism systems. Finally, in order to provide a stable, high-density, easy-to-manufacture and install 稜鏡 system, a single 鐜 鏡 system with air gaps can benefit. For a more complete explanation of the design of an achromatic prism system with an air gap between them, please refer to Figure 68, which describes the two-element prism system 5-152 that has been added to the simple deformable prism 5-156 Color difference correction prism 5-154. At the selected wavelength, the modified 珜 鏡 5_154 has a refractive index while the simple deformed 珜 鏡 5-156 has a refractive index of gate 2. The angles in the system are shown as f, a, a2, a3, a4, a5, a6, a7, β, ^, and Pair in Figure 68. The deviation angle from the incident light beam to the outgoing light beam is taken as a reference. ¾ 'τ (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) such as 9439

5. Description of the invention (113) α = Pi + Pair-(97 + φ + β2) The handle can be repeated 丨 丨 Law Qian He 4 _Material calculation. In order to obtain the desired result (that is, through the selection of design conditions. For example, in order to set the material to select a range of wavelengths where a is a constant. ”, The general Θ conditions are from the incident beam to the beam * beam For _required a = A, the following conditions are met: ^ Pi + Pair '(37 + φ + β ^ difference angle. Moreover, the condition is normalized. 5_154 becomes a symmetric prism with no unexposed beam_exPans_ such as It can be added to the anamorphic prism 5-156 'as shown in Figure 68, as shown below: (Pack-(Jing first read the notes on the back and then fill out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs f = sirr1 [n1 * sin (3l / 2)] By selecting the condition, it can be corrected that 珜 鏡 5-154 will not expand the incident beam. Therefore, this modified 鏜 鏡 can also be added to the current anamorphic prism system to be selected to provide appropriate expansion Finally, the prism assembly 5-152 can meet all (|), 01, 02, 0 ^ appropriate selection and lens dispersion limit design. It may be possible in some systems. It must have a specific angle of deviation from the incident beam to the outgoing beam For example, a 90 degree deviation will have advantages. This can be The paper scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) B7 5. Description of the invention (114) The beam is emitted from the 珜 鏡 to provide the total internal reflectivity in the deformed 珜 鏡 5-156 to implement. Such a change The foregoing calculations have been completed, but the goal of this design can still be achieved by appropriate selection of parameters. Apply the aforementioned principles to increase the force. Symmetrically modified prisms to the current deformed prisms, the prism system is designed with multiple surfaces to partially reflect the Reflected beams to different detectors. The embodiment of a single prism, air gap, achromatic prism system has a specific deviation angle between the incident beam and the emitted beam and there are multiple reflections to different detection systems, which will be introduced below Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Central Bureau of Standards, Employee Consumer Cooperative. Figure 69 illustrates the embodiment of the air gap, deformation, and achromatic system according to the present invention 5-170. The rear mirror system depicted in Figure 69 5- Take 170 and have two prisms and combine them into a single-assembly. As explained earlier, this provides the advantage that prism system 5-170 can be installed properly A single assembly unit. Because the lumps are combined together, there is no need to install them separately in the optical system. This will reduce the installation time, increase the stability of the system, reduce the installation cost and enable the function between different optical systems The deviation is the smallest. The two prism elements are the plate prism 5-172, the trapezoidal prism 5-174 and the modified prism 5-176. Figure 69 also shows that the beam path comes from the light source 5 -102 beam 5-178, air gap beam 5-180, exit \ reflect beam 5-182, first detector channel beam 5-184 to first detector 5-185, second detector channel beam 5_ 彳86 to the second detector 5-187 and the third detector beam 5-1 88 to the third detector 5-189. By including the paper standard between the modified 珜 鏡 5-176 and the plate-shaped 鏜 鏡 5-172, the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Μ specification (21〇 &lt; 297mm) is applied A7 ------ ---- B7 V. Invention ^^ &quot; —---- Between the air gap and the air gap beam 5-180 passing through it, the correction prism 5_176 can be designed as a symmetrical corrector to the incident beam 5.178 without net Unfold. Therefore, the modified prism 5-176 can be added to the plate-shaped prism 5-172 and combined with the irregular quadrilateral prism 5-174 in order to achromatize the prism system 517 shown in FIG. 69. Figure 69 also depicts the placement of the lens 5-190 to focus the outgoing light beam 5-182 onto the optical medium 5-191. The special design shown in Figure 69 is described and designed to be completely free of chromatic aberration for the design wavelength of 785 ± 22nm. At this wavelength, the system will have the characteristics described below. Printed by the Employees Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs II u-nn II-in--I-n 丁 ^ 戋-&quot; (please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page). The seventy B has a more detailed description of the plate prism 5-172. Figure 70 is a side view of a plate-shaped 珜 鏡 5-172, Figure 70A is a bottom view describing the surface S1 (5-200), and Figure 70B is a top view describing the surface S2 (5-202) There are optical surface S1 (5-200), optical surface S2 (5-202), optical surface S3 (5_204), optical surface S4 (5-206) and surface S5 (5_2〇8). In one embodiment, the surfaces S1 (5-200) and S2 (5-202) are substantially parallel and separated by a distance, which is labeled 5-210 in Figure 70. In this embodiment, the distance 5-210 of 6.27 mm is more advantageous. The surface S5 (5-208) and the surface S3 (5-204) are also completely parallel in this embodiment. In Figure 70, surface S1 (5-200) intersects surface S3 (5-204) and is limited to edge 5-211 (ie S1 / S2 edge) at an angle of 5-212 (ie S1 / S2 angle). In this implementation The favorable angle in the example is 50 degrees 21 '± 1〇'. As shown in Figure 70, the surface S3 (5-204) intersects with the surface S2 (5-202> and is limited to the edge 5-214; the surface S2 (5-202) and the surface are subject to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification ( 210X297 mm) A7 B7 printed by the Consumer Labor Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economy V. Description of the invention (116) S4 (5-206) intersects and is limited to the edge 5-216; surface S4 (5-206) and surface S5 ( 5-208) intersects and is limited to the edge 5_218; surface S5 (5-208) intersects with the surface S1 (5-200) and is limited to the edge 5_22. The length of the surface S2 (5-202) is marked in Figure 70 as 5_222 and the width are marked as 5-224 in Figure 70A. In this embodiment, the length 5_222 is 13 34 mm and the width 5-224 is 8.0 mm. In this embodiment, the overall length of 珜 鏡 is referred to in FIG. 7 Ten is marked 5-225, measured from edge 5-218 to edge 5-211 parallel to surface S1 (5-200). It is 23_61mm. The distance from edge 5-218 to edge 5-220 is marked 5_227, along the vertical The reference plane 5-226 on the surface si (5-200) and the surface S2 (5-202) measured 2.14 mm. The plan view in Figure 70A depicts the transparent aperture 5_23〇 and the transparent diaphragm 5-232 defined on the surface S1 5-200 The transparent aperture refers to the surface area of the surface of the 珜 鏡 that meets the specific selected quality. In this embodiment, the axis lengths of the transparent apertures 5-230 and 5-232 are respectively 8.5mm to 6.5mm oval. For convenience, The center of the short axis of the iris 5-230 is a distance 5-233 from the edge 5_211 and the center of its long axis is on the center line of the surface S1 (5_2〇〇), as shown in Figure 70A. In this embodiment, the transparent iris The center of the short axis of 5_232 is a distance 5-234 from the edge 5-220 and the center of its long axis is along the center line of the surface S1 (5-200). In this embodiment, the distance 5_233 is 6_15mm and the distance 5-234 It is 5_30mm. The plan view shown in Figure 70 magnetic field B illustrates the transparent aperture 5-235 defined on the surface S2 (5-202). This embodiment defines the axis of the transparent aperture system. The paper size is applicable to the Chinese national ^ ⑽ ) A4 specifications ('----- (installed — (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this education). Order A7 printed by the Ministry of Economy Central Standards Bureau Employee Consumer Cooperative ― ·--Βτ Five I Description of Invention (1 ^) ----- The ellipse with lengths of 8.5mm and 6_5mm respectively and the center of its short axis from the edge 5-214 is a distance of 5-236 and its length The axis center is on the center line of the surface S2 (5-202) shown in the seventy magnetic field 8 in FIG. In this embodiment, the distance 5-236 is 5.2 mm. The transparent apertures 5,23〇, 5 232 and 5_235 define a part of the surface and the surface quality is preferably at least 40/2, as is known in the art. In the illustrated embodiment, the BK7 grade A fine-tuning soft lens (fine annea 丨 g 丨) known in this art is a more suitable optical material for 珜 鏡 5-172. Fig. 71 vs. Fig. 60 The irregular quadrilateral prism 5-174 of the embodiment described in Nine shows additional details. The irregular quadrangle prism 5-174 has optical surface S6 (5-240), optical surface 37 (5 242), optical Surface S8 (5-244) and optical surface (5 · 246). Surface Fang (5-240) intersects with surface S7 (5 · 242) and limits the material edge 5.248; Surface S7 (5-242) and surface S8 (5-244) intersects at the reference angle 5 25, limited to the edge 5.25 ^ Actually, the angle 5.251 has an angle of 35 degrees. Surface S8 (5-244) intersects surface S9 (5_246) and The angle 5254 is limited to the edge 5-252, preferably 50 degrees 21 in this embodiment. The surface% (5-246) intersects the surface S6 (5 · 24_ and limits the edge 5 256. The surface S6 5-240 There is a length 5-258 shown in Figure 71. In this implementation the length 5-258 is preferably 9_5mm. The surface S6 (5 24〇) and the surface S8 5_244 are actually parallel and separated by a distance of 5.26〇 , As shown in Figure 71. In this implementation, From 5-260, measure this paper in the direction perpendicular to the surface S6 (5 24〇). The paper ruler is the new financial reward (CNS) 8 4 secret (210X297 公 #) (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page ) Installed.

, 1T B7 V. Description of the invention (118) The quantity is 8.0mm. The edge 5_25〇 and the edge 5_248 are separated by a distance 5-261 along a plane 5-262 parallel to the surface S8 (5-244). In this implementation, the distance 5-261 is preferably 8.0 mm. Fig. 71a is a plan view of an irregular quadrilateral prism 5-174 describing the surface S6 (5_24〇) and the surface S9 (5_246). The irregular quadrilateral prism 5_174 as described in Fig. 71A has a thickness 5-263. In this embodiment, the thickness 5_263 is preferably about 8 mm. As shown in Figure 71A, the surface S6 (5-240) has a transparent diaphragm 5-264. In this embodiment, a circular aperture with a minimum diameter of 6.5 mm is defined whose center spans the width of the surface and is spaced apart from The edge 5-248 is the distance 5-265. In this embodiment, the distance 5-265 is preferably 4.0 mm. The surface S9 (5-246) has a transparent aperture 5-266 and its center is on the surface. In this embodiment, the transparent iris 5-266 system defines a minimum ellipse whose axial length is 6.5 mm to 8.5 mm, respectively. Printed by the Staff Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page). Figure 71B depicts the irregular quadrilaterals. Hyun 5-174. Surface S7 (5-242) and surface S8 (5-244) of 5-270. As shown in Fig. 71B, the irregular quadrilateral prism 5-174 has a length 5-272 measured from the edge 5-252 and the edge 5-248 along the reference plane 5-262. In this embodiment, the length 5-272 is preferably 16.13 mm. In one embodiment, the transparent aperture 5-268 of the surface S7 (5-242) defines an ellipse whose axis length is 6.5 mm to 9_2 mm respectively. On the surface S7 (5-242), its short axis is parallel to and between the edges Between 5-248 and the edge 5-250. The transparent aperture 5-270 preferably has its axis length. The paper wave scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 public Chu:> A7 ________B7___ V. Invention description (119) 6.5mm to 6.7mm oval on the surface The long axis of S8 (5-244) is parallel to the edge 5-250 and the edge 5-252. In this embodiment, the transparent apertures 5-264, 5-266, 5-268 and 5-270 A surface quality of 40/20 is preferred, as is known in the art. Many surfaces in 稜鏡 have coatings to help the performance of the prism. In this embodiment, the surface S6 (5-240) has an inverse Reflective coating is at 90. The 0.5% incidence angle of the soil has a transmission rate of 99_8 ° / .. The coating on the surface S8 (5-244) is 10.7. The 0.5 ° incidence angle of the soil has a transmission rate of 98.5 for internal incident light. %. The surface S9 5-246 has a low extinction film coating at 39β 3 with an incident angle of 0.5 ° at its S polarized state (Rs) (ie, normal to the plane of incidence) reflectivity> 90%, and P polarized state (Rp) reflectivity = 12 · 5% ± 2 · 5%. The material of the irregular quadrilateral prism 5-174 in the embodiments shown in Figs. 69 and 71-71 is the magnetic field BK7 etc. Α's fine-tuning soft optical lens (fjne annealed optical glass), as is known in the art. The Ministry of Economic Affairs, Central Standards Bureau, Beigong Consumer Cooperation Du Yin «. Figure 69 of the Leihan system 5-170 The modified prism 5-176 of the embodiment is shown in more detail in Figures 72 and 72 A. As shown in the figure, the 'modified prism 5-176 has an optical surface S10 (5-290) and an optical surface S11 ( 5-292) Configured with optical surface S12 (5-294) to form a triangular prism. Surface S11 (5-292) intersects surface S12 (5-294) and is limited to edge 5-296. Surface S10 5-290 and surface S12 5-294 intersects and is limited to the edge 5-298. Surface S10 (5-290) is relatively symmetrical with S11 (5-292). The surface S12 (5-294) has a length of 5-300 and is in this embodiment For this paper, the Chinese national standard is applied () (2 丨 Guangguang) A7 A7 Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economy V. Invention description (12〇) 7_78 circle. Therefore, the distance between the edge 5 side and the material 5_298 is 5 -300. The surface (5 side) and the surface such as (5_292) are close to each other at the reference angle M. 2. In this embodiment, the angle is read as 38. 20. The more favorable surface S11 (5-29 2) The surface S10 (5 29〇) from the surface such as (5-294) is regarded as the distance 5 side, the distance is measured perpendicular to the surface S12 (5-294). The 5.3_ in this embodiment is ⑺ cut. Figure 72 describes the view seen from the surface S10 (5_29〇). In this embodiment, the thickness of 稜鏡 5-176 is marked as 5 in Figure 72. In this embodiment, the thickness 5 is 8. Round is more favorable. It can be expected that the surface S1Q (5_29Q) has a circular transparent aperture 5_. In this real ㈣t ’㈣ shape, the central long axis is parallel to the transverse line at 5-298 and has a distance of 5_308 from the transverse line. The long axis is shown on the surface S1G (5 · 290) as shown. In this embodiment, the transparent aperture 5_3Q6 is preferably defined to have an axial length of 6.5 mm and 2.8 mm and an ellipse, and the surface quality on the transparent aperture 5-306 is 40/20, as is known in the art. In this embodiment, the 'surface S11 (5-292) also defines the same transparent aperture on its surface. Irregular quadrangle prism 5-174 and chromatic aberration correction prism 5-176 have some coatings on their surfaces for better performance. In one embodiment, each surface S10 (5-290) and S11 (5-292) has a retro-reflective coating (ie, at an angle of incidence of 35.5 ° ± 1.0. The reflection coefficient is $ 3%, as in this technique The size of the Chinese paper is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) (installed-I ordered--^ (please read the precautions on the back and then fill in this page) A7 A7 Employee consumption of the Central Bureau of Economic Affairs of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the cooperative -------- B7 V. Description of the invention (Ί21) Conventional). In this embodiment, the SFII grade A fine-tuned soft lens is the material for the correction of 珜 鏡 5-176. When 珜 鏡 is assembled into the single prism system of the embodiment shown in FIG. 69, the following diagram and explanation are given for the reflection of the light beam with a wavelength of 785 ± 22mm. One side of the mirror system 5.170 defines a reference plane 5-237. The incident light beam 5-178 enters the surface S10 (5-290) from the light source 5-1 〇2 at an incident angle 5-326 and is parallel to the reference plane 5-237. The incident beam 5-178 exits Lei 5-176 and enters the air gap as beam 5-180 and passes through surface S2 (5-202) into prism 5-172. Part of the beam The film on the surface S9 (5-246) is reflected and emitted from the surface S3 (5-204) as a light beam 5-188. In an embodiment, the light beam 5-188 can be introduced into the detection system 5-189. Because of this reflected The beam is part of the input beam, and the detection system 5-189 receives the beam 5-188 to monitor the intensity of the incident light. The remaining beam that is not reflected by the film on the surface S9 (5-246) enters the irregular quadrilateral. 5-174, in the embodiment described in the surface S7 5-242 and reflected through the surface S6 (5-240) as a light beam 5-182, if the incident angle 5-326 of the incident light beam 5-178 is 35 ° 26. The beam then emits an irregular quadrilateral prism 5-174 with a total deviation from the incident beam 5-178 to 87. 37 '± 5% of the beam 5-182 and parallel to the reference plane 5-327 within 5 * , And the light beam 5-182 exits the surface S6 (5-240) within 5 'of the normal 0. The paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS & A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) One Pack — II Order — -II-^ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) A7 B7 printed by the Beigong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economy V. Description of Invention (122) Lens 5-190 Focus Beam 5-182 onto the optical medium 5-191. The beam reflects backward through the lens and enters the normal of the surface S6 (5-240) and reflects inside the surface S7 (5-242), then in an irregular quadrilateral The thin film between the prism 5-174 and the plate-shaped 珜 鏡 5-172 is reflected. The resulting light beam 5-1 84 exits the irregular quadrilateral prism 5-174 through the surface S8 (5-244) at a deviation angle 5-328. The light beam 5-184 enters the first detector 5.185. A part of the light beam reflected back from the optical medium 5-190 is that the light beam 5-186 also passes through the film, and is reflected on the surface S2 (5-202) and exits the plate-shaped prism 5-172. This reflection is beneficial because of the air gap in the system. In one embodiment, light beam 5-184 and light beam 5-186 are introduced into respective detection systems 5-185 and 5-187, respectively. For example, the detection system 5-185 can collect data signals' and the detection system 5-187 can gather control signals (i.e., focus and tracking servo information). As explained above, the described embodiment is actually achromatic within the range of the wavelength change of the conventional laser light source. Therefore, the displacement in the wavelength of the incident light means that it does not affect the position where the focused beam generated on the optical medium 5-190 traverses. 'The calculation of simulating the performance of the 稜鏡 system 517〇 for the wavelength change from 780nm to 785nm is shown in the table below. Phi is the angle of incidence on the modified prism (i.e. 35.26 'in this embodiment) and its change is estimated to be ± 0.5. . Among them, the displacement of a specified wavelength shift is related to the focal point of the Uggei system. The shift is marked at the angle of incidence Phi ± 0.5. In the block. For example, see the first f paper of the table from the National Finance Standard (CNS)) (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page). Δτ A7 ____B7 V. Description of the invention (123) column is 780nm The wavelength of the incident beam to 781_5nm is shifted, and the focused light spot is shifted by -0_2nm at the incident angle of Phi, at Phi-0.5. The incident angle shift of 2.6nm and the incident angle shift of Phi + 0.5 ° -2.9nm. Wavelength shift Phi-0.5 ° Phi Phi + 0.5. 780-781,5nm 2.6nm -0.2nm-~ 2.9nm 780-783 nm 5.2nm -0.2nm -5.6nm 780-785 nm 9_0nm -0.1 nm, 9.0nm As can be seen from the table above, at the incident angle Phi horizontal The shift has a less than inm change from 78 ° to 783nm wavelength shift. This is in contrast to the lateral shift of approximately 200 nm for the wavelength shift of 3 nm in the embodiment. This embodiment is the same as the above-mentioned embodiment but does not have chromatic aberration correction. This actually indicates an achromatic system. Fig. 73 shows an alternative embodiment of the 珜 鏡 system 5-339 of the present invention, this embodiment has a modified 珜 鏡 5-340, a plate-shaped 珜 鏡 5-342 and a quadrilateral 珜 鏡 5-344. The correction prism 5-340 and the plate prism 5-342 are substantially the same as the correction prism 5-176 and the plate prism 5-172 of the prism system 5-170 shown in FIG. 69, respectively. However, the quadrilateral prism 5-344 is different from the irregular quadrilateral prism 5-174. The quadrilateral prism 5-344 of Figure 73 is described in more detail in Figures 74, 74A, and 74B. The quadrilateral prism 5-344 has surfaces S13 (5-346), S14 (5-348) 'S15 (5-350) and S16 (5-352). The surface structure is the same but the surface S6 of the irregular quadrilateral 珜 鏡 5-174 This paper scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Α4 specification (210Χ297 mm) -------- ί Installation ----- -, Order ------ f (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Central Bureau of Economic and Technical Affairs, Beigong Consumer Cooperative Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Central Bureau of Standardization, and printed by A7 B7 Description of the invention (124) (5-240), S7 (5-242), S8 (5-244) and S9 (5-246) are different. Surface S13 (5-346) and surface S14 (5-348) intersect at edge 5-353 at an angle 5-354; surfaces S14 (5 · 348) and S15 (5-350) at edge 5 at a reference angle 5-356 -355 intersect; intersect the surfaces S1 5 (5-350) and S16 (5-352) at an angle 5-358 at the edge 5-357, as shown in Figure 74. Finally, the surface S16 (5-352) and S1 3 (5-346) intersect at the edge 5-359. In one embodiment, the angle 5-354 is 49. 40 'and the angle 5-356 is 135. The angle 5-358 is 50.21. The distance between edge 5-353 and edge 5-355 in Figure 74 is measured perpendicular to surface S15 (5 · 350) and marked as 5-360. In one embodiment, the distance 5-360 is 8.0 mm. In addition, the distance from edge 5-353 to edge 5-359 is marked as 5_362. In one embodiment, the distance 5-362 is 8.9 mm and is measured parallel to the surface S15 (5-350). Finally, the distance from edge 5-353 to edge 5-355 is marked as 5-364 and is measured in a plane parallel to surface S15 5-350. In one embodiment, the distance 5-364 is 8.0 mm. FIG. 74A is a plan view of the surface S13 (5-346) and also describes the surface S16 (5-352). Figure 74A also illustrates the thickness 5_368 of the quadrilateral 珜 鏡 5-344. In one embodiment, the thickness 5_368 is 8.0 mm. As shown in FIGS. 74, prism 5-344 has transparent aperture 5-370 defined along surface S13 (5446), and transparent aperture 5-372 defined along surface S16 (5-352). In this embodiment, the transparent aperture 5-370 is circular (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page). Binding · Order A7 B7 printed by the Beigong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economy V. Description of the invention (125 ) The center of the aperture spans the surface and is at a distance 5-374 from the edge 5-353. In one embodiment, the transparent aperture 5-370 is a circular aperture with a minimum diameter of 6.5mnri and the distance 5-374 is 4.0 mm. Advantageously, the surface S16 (5-352) also has a transparent aperture 5-372 on the surface. In one embodiment, the transparent aperture 5-372 is an elliptical aperture with a center length of 6.5 mm and 8.5 mm on the surface S16 (5-352), as shown in Figure 74A. Fig. 74B is a plan view of the surface S14 (5-348) and also illustrates the surface S15 (5-350). The overall length of the quadrilateral prism 5-344 is measured from the edge 5-353 to the edge 5-357 along a plane parallel to the surface S1 5 5-350 and marked as 5-380 in Figure 74B. In one embodiment, the length 5-380 is 16.13 mm. As can be seen in Figure 74B, the surface S14 (5-348) has a transparent aperture 5-382 with the center on the surface, and the surface S15 (5-350) has a transparent aperture 5-384 with the center on the surface . In one embodiment, the transparent aperture 5-382 has an ellipse with a shaft length of 6.5 mm and 9.2 mm, and the transparent aperture 5-384 has an ellipse with a shaft length of 6.5 mm and 6.7 mm. The quadrilateral prism 5-344 is also coated on some of its optical surfaces. In one embodiment, the surface S13 (5-346) has a coating with a reflectance of $ 0.2% at an incident angle of 4.40 · ± 5 'between the internal incident light and the normal. In the same embodiment, the surface S15 (5-350) has a coating at an angle of incidence of 10.7 between the internal incident light and the normal. The reflectivity at ± 0.5 ° is <0.50 / 0. Finally, surface S16 (5-352) preferably has a film coating at an angle of incidence of 39 ° 39 '± 0.5 to the normal. Sometimes rs> 90%, rp = 12.5% ± 25%. This thin private paper towel close family fine (CNS) A4 ^ (21 () &gt; &lt; 297g thin)-nmm I--^ IIIII n 丁 —- * (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this Page) A7 printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Operations Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ------------ B7 7. Description of the invention (126) '-The film coating is the best for all operations and optical conditions There are also less than 8. 'S phase shift. In the configuration shown in Fig. 74, the angle of deviation of the incident beam to the exit beam is preferably 9CT in total. Because of 9 (). Partial installation components are convenient for manufacturing, which is compared to 87. Deviations come easy to manufacture, as shown in Figure 69; je example. For the dimensions and coatings specified in the embodiment of FIG. 72, it is preferred that the prism is not achromatic. However, the Huang system shown in Figure 73 is actually achromatic over the acceptable range of operating wavelengths among the designed wavelengths. The simulation of the change in the wavelength from 780nm to 785nm is shown in the following table. In addition, phj is 35 ° 26 in this embodiment, and the wavelength shift is Phi-0.5. Phi Phi + 0.5 ° 780-781.5nm 12.5nm 9.8nm 7.1nm 780-783 nm 25.1nm 19.6nm 14.3nm 780-785 nm 42.0nm 32.9nm 24.0nm It can be understood that the design shown in Figure 73 is not related to The design shown in Figure 69 is also achromatic. However, for a wavelength shift of 780 to 783 nm, the lateral shift of the focused spot of light emitted from Leiwa is only 19.6 nm. .- * Furthermore, this should be about the wavelength shift of 3nm in the example. This paper scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification &lt; 210X297mm) (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page ) Installation and ordering A7 Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Description of Invention (127) == _, Nina Pay ⑽ Example But Data Retrieval-Transition Detection For errors in storage or retrieval of data from magneto-optical drive devices The detailed system was provided in Saga, with serial number 07 / 964,518, which was filed on January 1, 1993. The case is hereby incorporated by reference as if it were placed in the foregoing. A block diagram of an exemplary magneto-optical system is shown in Figure 75. The system can have read mode and write mode. During the write mode, the data pulse 10 transmits the data to the encoder 6_12. Cheng code |! 6_ 彳 2 Convert this data into binary code bit tl. The binary code bits are transmitted to the laser pulse generator 6-14, where the code bits can be converted into pulse _㈣ or turn off the laser 6-16. In the embodiment, the code bit of "for example" indicates that the laser will excite a fixed period regardless of the code bit pattern, and the code bit of ○ // indicates that the laser will not excite And it stops for one cycle. Depending on the type of special lasers used, the performance can be enhanced by adjusting the generation of related laser pulses or expanding the uniform pulse cycle in other ways. For the response to excitation, the laser The radiation 6-16 will heat the local area of the optical medium 6-18 ', thereby revealing the local area of the optical medium 6-18 and allowing the magnetic flux to fix the polarity of the magnetic material on the optical medium 6-18. The local area is usually called ", Pits" (pits) 'store the encoded data in magnetic form until it is eliminated. This paper scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) H-II--IH ^ jid IIIII D (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) B7 V. Invention description (128) in The reading mode, laser or other light source is turned back on the surface of the optical medium 6-18. The deflection of the reflected beam depends on the polarity on the magnetic surface of the optical medium 6-18. The reflected beam provides the optical The reader 6-20 'sends the input signal or reads the signal to the waveform processor 6 22 to adjust the input k number and receive the encoded data. The output of the waveform processor can be provided to the decoder 6_24. The decoder 6_24 converts the encoded data It is in its original form and the decoded data is sent to the data output port 6_26 to prepare for the required transmission or other processing. Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Standards Bureau Employee Consumer Cooperatives. Detailed procedure of Figure 7. For the GCR 8/9 code in Figure 76A, unit 6_28 is a channel bit. 6_42 coincides with the channel bit during each clock period; therefore, unit 6-30 reaches 6 41 each The clock waveform 6_45 corresponds to a clock period 6-42. Taking an example of a clock frequency, a 3 1/2 &quot; disc has a storage capacity of 256M bytes at a speed of 2400 revolutions per minute, and the clock period 6-45 42 will usually be 63 nanoseconds (ns) or a clock frequency of 15_879MHz. The GCR input waveform 6_47 comes from the encoder data output of the encoder 6-12 in Figure 75. The gcr input waveform 6_47 and the expressed wave The sequence of channels,, 〇1111〇1〇〇〇〇 /, consistent. The laser pulse generator 6-14 uses the GCR data waveform 6-47 to derive the pulse GCR waveform 6-65 (Figure 76 has not yet sequenced or period Adjust to reflect the performance enhancement of the specified data mode) In general, when the 6-47 of the GCR data waveform is high, the GCR pulse will occur from 6-67 to 6-78 in the clock cycle. The pulse

Printed by Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 -------- 扪 5. Description of the invention (129) ^ ~ GCR waveform 6-65 is provided to the laser 6_16. When an external magnetic field of opposite polarity appears in the eliminated medium and when the laser is excited with sufficient energy to exceed the Curie temperature of the medium, the magnetization properties of the previously eliminated optical medium retain the polarity. Laser pulses generated from GCR pulses 6-68, 6-69, 6-70, etc., create a pattern of recording recesses 6_80 (rec〇 "dee pjts") on the optical media 6-18. · 82 to 6-88 correspond to pulses 6-68, 6-69, 6-70, 6-71, 6-73, 6-76 and 6-77. Continuous recording depression 6-82 to 6-85 Merging together effectively creates an extended pit. The extended pit has a rising edge system that matches the rising edge of the first recording recess 6-82 and a falling edge system that matches the falling edge of the last recording recess 6-85. Reading a recording pit with an optical drive, such as a laser, can cause the readout signal 6-90. The readout signal 6-90 is a low potential when any green pit is not present. The rise of the pit 6-86 At the edge, the read signal 6-90 will rise and remain high until the falling edge of the recess 6-86 arrives, at this point the read signal 6-90 will decrease and remain low until the next recess 6-87. The program can be used as a reference for pulse width modulation (Apwivr), because the pulse width in the read signal 6-90 indicates 1-bit 1-bits). Therefore, the edges of the recording recess 6-80 define the length of the pulse in the read signal 6-90 and contain appropriate data information. If the read signal 6-90 is differentiated, Then, the signal peak value of the first derivative readout signal will be in accordance with the Chinese national standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) according to the green paper size. I --- I--n ^ 1 · * ^ ---- n I τ Shoulder WJ5 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) A7 _____ B7 _11.15, Invention Description (130) These edges of the recess 6-80 are slightly off Shift, because the displayed read signal 6-90 is ideally known as b 5 tiger. In order to recover the information of the concave edge from the first derivative signal, it is necessary to detect its peak value. Such a procedure will have further steps here Description. In contrast, most of the systems with RLL 2, 7 codes are used with pulse position modulation (^ ppivt). In the PPM system, each pit is expressed as, 1 &quot; Expressed as ,, 0 / ,. The distance between these recesses is expressed in 1-bits (1-bits) The distance between each recess corresponds to the data position. In order to find the center of the recess, the readout signal is differentiated and the zero-crossing of the first derivative will be detected again. Such a technique can be formed with the PWM system as described above In contrast, the signal peak value of the first derivative contains appropriate pulse width information. However, it is possible to use PWM to replace the PPM of the RLL system, just like the RLL 2,7 code system. Each channel bit can match the clock cycle of the clock waveform. As mentioned previously for the GCR system using PWM,, 1 &quot; can be expressed as transitions in the input waveform. Therefore, the RLL2 and 7 input waveforms will remain in the same state when they occur, but will change the high potential to low potential or the low potential to high potential when 1 and 1 occur. In the RLL and GCR codes and other codes, when reading in the data mode, the input signals generated from the optical readers 6-20 are often not symmetrical. When an asymmetric signal between circuits is AC coupled, the average DC value will shift from the peak to the midpoint of the peak. Unnecessary displacement away from the middle point will cause the paper size to depend on the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Μ Specification (2Η) Χ297 Gongguang) -------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) · Order, invention description (131) The recorded data can not be recovered.丨 ng margin) or make a note

H-I Printed by the Consumer Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Samples of the Ministry of Economics. This phenomenon can be explained with reference to Figures 77A and 77. The ideal input letter for the original data model: from 1 to 1 The transition is detected between the high Si and low I of the input signal, j =: r. In Fig. 77A, it can be observed that the area A2 on the surface of the bee coffee P1 with the input letter = is the same as that of τ, and it is between 1 and 0. The transition correctly reads the W number and peak to peak. The middle point matches from the intersection of ~. In contrast to this, Figure 77 shows the input signal S2 from asymmetric data. It can be observed that the area A above the middle point of the peak-to-peak is larger than the area under _. Therefore, the input signal \ has a DC component. It can be a private DC • Baseline DCsase is above the peak-to-peak midpoint MP2. When trying to determine the position between 峳 and again by judging the zero-crossing of the AC coupled input signal &amp;. The transition between them will be caused because the DC level is different from the peak-to-peak intermediate point Me '. The Wu difference DC level will not remain fixed but the rise or fall depends on the waveform of the input signal. A larger built-in (bujldup) DC will have more detection transition points and deviate from the positive transition point. Therefore, the built-in DC will cause the timing limit to become smaller or the data cannot be recovered. Figure 78 is a block diagram of the read channel 6-200 in order to mitigate the effect of the built-in DC according to the embodiment of this example. The reading channel 6-200 is roughly equivalent (installed --------------- (please read the precautions on the back before dissipating the dome f). I- II U1] Home Standard (CNS) M specifications (2 songs 297 meals) A7 B7 209439 5. Description of the invention (132) Waveform processor 6-22 in Figure 75. Reading channel 6-200 includes preamplifier Stage 6-202, differentiation stage 6-204, equalization stage 6-206, partial integration stage 6-208, and data generation stage 6-210. The operation instructions for reading channel 6-200 will refer to Figure 79. The detailed block shown, the waveforms shown in Figures 84A to 84D and various materials that can sometimes be referred to here. When scanning the data on the optical media 6-18, the pre-amplification stage 6 -202 Amplifies the input signal to form an appropriate level. The pre-amplification stage 6-202 may include a pre-amplifier 6-203, as is known in the art. The pre-amplifier 6-203 may be configured elsewhere For example, within the optical reader 6-20. The example amplified readout signal 6-220 is described in Figure 84A. As shown in Figure 79A, the output of the preamplification stage 6-202 is provided to differential Stage 6-204. The differentiation stage 6-204 may include a differentiation amplifier 6-212 ', such as a video differentiation amplifier configured with a capacitor 6-213 in a method known in the art. The differentiation stage 6 is shown in Figure 80A Typical frequency response diagram of 204. The differential stage 6-204 can effectively increase the relative amplitude of the high frequency component of the pre-amplification stage 6-202. Figure 84B shows an example waveform of the output of the differential stage 6-204. Seventy-nine A shows that the equalization stage 6-206 follows the differentiation stage 6-204. The equalization stage 6-206 provides additional filtering, which corrects the overall channel transfer function and provides more reliable data detection ◎ Equalization stage 6 · The waveform of the input signal that achieves differentiation in 2〇6 makes the amplitude of the high-frequency and low-frequency parts flat &amp; Zhang Congshi (countries of 4 countries) Μ specification (21〇 × 297mm) --- ~-(please read the note on the back first Please fill out this page again.) ”Ordered by the Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Standards Bureau Employee Consumer Cooperation Du Printing Ministry of Economic Affairs Ordered Standards Bureau Beigong Consumer Cooperative Printed A7 丨 丨 丨 ·--__— _B7___ V. Invention Description (] 33) and Produce a smoother signal for the latter to process. The equalization filter usually corrects the noise spectrum and the signal. Therefore, the improvement in the differentiated input signal waveform (that is, the reduction of glare) is often accompanied by the degradation in the signal-to-noise ratio. Therefore, the design of the equalization stage 6-206 contains a compromise between the desire to minimize noise and provide a lossless signal at an acceptable hardware cost. In general, the equalizer design depends on the compensated intersymbol interference (intersymbol interference), the modulation code, the data recovery technique used, the signal-to-noise ratio, and the amount of noise spectral waveform. When reading the data stored in the magneto-optical recording system, an important part of the linear intersymbol interference is due to the limited bandwidth of the analog read channel and the edge of the input signal amplitude with increased storage density (r〇 ||- 0ff) caused. Thus, the equalization stage 6-206 may include one or more linear filters to modify the read channel transfer function so as to provide more reliable data detection. In the normal state, the equalization stage 6-206 is provided as part of the read channel, but under some conditions the part of the 'equalization filter' may also provide part of the write channel. For analysis purposes, the read signal can be considered as a series of bipolar rectangular pulses with unit amplitude and period T. Alternatively, the read signal can be regarded as a series of bidirectional step functions at each flux reversal position, and the step amplitude corresponds to the pulse amplitude. When the input signal is sent to the equalization stage 6-206, the timing information and pulse polarity for each clock unit or binary digit (binit) can come from the output signal of the equalization stage 6-206. Theoretically, the timing and polarity information can be pushed to the paper standard by using the ideal waveform recovery equalizer. The Chinese National Standard (CNS) Α4 specification (210Χ297 mm) II —-I— n-I ^ I— I—. ^ 1 nn— τ 痛 -¾, τ (please read the precautions on the back and then fill out this page) A7 A7 Central Government Bureau of Economic Affairs Employee's Consumer Cooperation Du-printing 5. Invention Instructions (i34) ~~ ' One ~ ----- salty equalization produces an output signal with a mid-binit and binary digit boundary value similar to the input signal. In order to regenerate the clock correctly, the zero crossing of the output signal is again in the binary digit Boundary occurs. If the time and direction of the point grab are known, the clock and data can be obtained from the zero points of these signals at the same time. In an embodiment, the equalization stage 6_2〇6 includes an equalizer that returns from the waveform level k Equalizer selection. Generally, the waveform recovery equalizer generates a signal containing a binary sequence, similar to the input or read waveform. Because the signal waves are in the channel, the edges of the other rectangular pulses of the generated signal become smooth .Xuan The signal also indicates some changes in the amplitude of the output signal. The equalizer that produces the output signal with the minimum bandwidth is an ideal low-pass filter that has a unit response to the minimum cut-off frequency and no response to high frequencies. The pass filter is physically impossible to achieve, but the NyquisUf theory suggests that the degraded dragon clearly shows that the most mechanical wide wave filter can be modified and the output pulse zero point is maintained at all mid binit unit time Also, in order to achieve such a result, the high-frequency piping (“〇M-0ff) of the equalization channel is preferably symmetrical and set at the half-amplitude point at the cut-off frequency of the minimum bandwidth filter. A piping feature can be expressed as The filter in the equalization stage 6_2〇6 is raised cosine roll-off (raised cosine roll-off), and is designated as a raised cosine equalizer. The raised cosine roll-over transfer function is almost achievable, and has a minimum bandwidth filter. Improved response. The output pulse has zero value at time nT, but the size of the next paper is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS> From specification (2mx297 Gongqing j ----- -------- 一 #- ----- 、 玎 ------ ^ (please (Read the precautions on the back before filling this page); the amplitude of the sidelobe damped oscillation is reduced. The output zero crossings of the raised-sine co-wave filter are more harmonious than those of the minimum bandwidth filter. And the linear phase characteristic of gradual hemming is easier to achieve, just as the gradual hemming of relatively raised cosine filters. However, these benefits are generally available at the cost of increasing the bandwidth. The ratio of bandwidth extension to minimum bandwidth, fm is sometimes referred to as a raised cosine channel. Therefore, in the case where d = 0 'α = 〇 modulation code is the minimum bandwidth, but it represents a rectangular transfer function that cannot be implemented. At the same time (= 1 means Use a filter with twice the minimum bandwidth. The pulse transfer function of the raised cosine equalization channel (including the number ratio channel plus the equalizer, but excluding the output filter) can be specified as · Η⑺ = 1, for 〇 &lt; f &lt; (1-a) · fm H (f ) = 1/2 {1 + cos [(f- (ia). Fm) / (2 · a · fm)]} Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Sample Bureau Employee Consumer Cooperative for (1-a) · fm &lt; f &lt; (l + a) · fm H (f) = 〇, for f> (1 + a) · fm where (f) = k · f is the phase 'and k is a constant. The above types can be used as ... skin shape recovery equalizer. The a = 1 channel has the property of having zero adjustment (nu ||) between the half-binit interval and the full-binit interval. Such a channel leads to a signal with unsigned inter-signal interference at the mid-binit or binary-digit limit time, which is the signal zero point. The paper standard. National Standard (CNS) A4 (21GX297 mm) Economy Printed by the Ministry of Standards and Standards Bureau Staff Consumer Cooperative Μ __—____— Β7 V. Description of Invention (136) Delivery and sampling time, thus allowing accurate clock and data reply. For image bandwidth equalizers, the rollover phenomenon starts at zero frequency and extends to the cutoff frequency

The V-raised cosine equalizer can modify the amount of inter-symbol interference extension given an appropriate signal-to-noise ratio. A large amount of high-frequency acceleration needs compensation for the analysis of | ^ 〇_media and optical systems. Physically assuming that the achievable channel is operated on a modulation code of d = 0, it is best to eliminate the inter-symbol interference by equalizing the bandwidth at least equal to twice the minimum bandwidth. Generally, a bandwidth of this width leads to a reduction in signal-to-noise ratio. The equalizer bandwidth is chosen to achieve the best compromise between interference loss and noise. In some examples, in order to increase the unexpected loss in the unqualified form of the clock signal to improve the noise, it may be necessary to use the transfer function of α &lt; l to narrow the bandwidth. Another conventional waveform reply equalizer is a cosine-response equalizer. The pulse transfer function of the full-bandwidth β channel is

H (f) = cosp (p. / (2. F)) for 0 &lt; f &lt; 1V H (f) = for f &gt; f Ο There are many calling equalizers like cx equalizer series, full bandwidth The equalizer has a soil cutting frequency of 1 and reduces the instability of the clock signal due to a relatively small amount of interference at the binary digital boundary. The technique used to optimize these types of equalizers in this technique is conventional and can achieve the minimum probability of error in various noise conditions. This paper is based on CNS) Α4 regulation) 4 Binding ^ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) A7 -------------- B7 V. Description of the invention (137) Generally, the use of an alpha equalizer will have a narrower bandwidth, thereby reducing noise in the instability of the clock signal or horizontal eye opening. Generally, the use of β equalizer will improve the signal-to-noise ratio to reduce the high frequency boost (boost) without reducing the bandwidth. The choice of an equalizer can reduce vertical eyes or the reduction in effective amplitude. α = 1 and &gt; 5 = 2 The equalizer channel is the same from the eye pattern, the two channels have relatively wide open eye patterns. The equalizer channel bandwidth preferred for codes of d &gt; 0 is not necessarily determined by the expected smaller recording pulse width (Tr), but is determined by the binary digit width (Tm). This is because the data recovery circuit generally needs to distinguish between the time resolution of a pulse as small as the width of a binary digit and the signal bandwidth function. (K) code (k represents the maximum number of consecutive binary digits without flux reversal). The nominal bandwidth BWN0M = 1 / Tm = fc is required, so that the interference is eliminated at the center and edge of each binary digit, and the binary digit boundary is provided. No inter-symbol interference. Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economy. The interference to the code of d &gt; 〇 must be eliminated at the binary digital boundary of the attenuation bandwidth of B \ / y = l (2.Tm) = fc / 2. In this situation, all binary digital read pulses will have a unit amplitude at the flux reversal, and the read pulse will follow the crossing zero point at the flux transition. The narrower bandwidth BW causes the zero crossing of the output signal at the point where there is no interference, without considering the center of the binary digit, but the general bandwidth attenuation is obtained by expanding in the presence of channel fault detection ambiguity. The narrower bandwidth BW also leads to the signal of this paper standard (CNS) 210X 297 publicly ------ Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs

5. Description of the invention (138) Enter the same position number of the pulse edge. However, this result is only equalized. This is not due to the condition of the magneto-optical channel. It is not due to the up and down drift of the DC baseline. The zero point crossover and the amplitude deviation of the detector. The DC recovery introduced here makes the converter achieve the desired low frequency response. Under some conditions, the reduction of the zero cross slope of the letter A7 B7 causes a potential increase in the recording level of the signal, disc speed change, analog channel differential or τ, proper equalization. For example, 'Half bandwidth = 2 equalization channels have ⑽2,3 ratio modulation codes generated at the zero crossing of the signal with no intermittent money, but some amplitude changes between zero crossings. The bandwidth is less than the non-return-to-zero (, INRZ 丨,.) Modulation bandwidth 'even if more information is recorded in green than NRZI modulation (for example, relative to NRZI bandwidth = Q.75 and bit ratio = 1 The attenuated bandwidth compensates for the modulation code proportional loss. The α-1 and recall waveform recovery equalizer can allow the output zero crossing to occur again and then the data detection can be achieved by non-limiting (hard-limiting) equalization signals. It usually occurs when the response of the original reader is extended to DC. 1. The birefringence of the disc in the M0 channel causes the output binary digits to be lengthened or shortened according to the degree. This problem can be borrowed to reduce. Waveform recovery, etc. means that the low-frequency signal must be amplified, which is the proportion of noise. If the low-frequency noise situation is serious, the waveform recovery equalization technology may not be satisfactory unless there is a DC modulation code and a little low-frequency component or DC recovery circuit In the preferred embodiment, the neutralization stage 6-206 may include a programmable wave breaker and equalizer 6-207, as shown in Figure 79A, which is arranged on the integrated chip. This paper is suitable for the Chinese national government. Standard (CNS) (21 () &gt; & l t; 297mm) | Outfit ------ Order ------ II (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs &quot; — —_______ B7 ____ V. Description of the invention (139) There are currently many manufacturers of integrated chips. The filter and the equalizer 6-207 can be of equal ripple (equj-ripple) type and have a relatively fixed group delay (group delay). At twice the cut-off frequency D, the typical frequency response of the equalization stage 6-206 is shown in Figure 80B, and the example output waveform is shown in Figure 84c. After the signal is processed by the equalization stage 6-206, The signal peak value of the waveform in Figure 84C contains the correct information about the position of the read data. The signal peak value can be detected by another derivative, but doing so may be detrimental to the signal-to-noise ratio of the system and will most likely cause the signal Unstable. The preferred embodiment of the invention described here provides a correct way to detect the peak value of a signal without having to use the second derivative to take advantage of partial integration and a new data generation circuit. In the signal equalization stage 6-206 After processing, the signal The shape of the waveform is provided to the partial integration stage 6-208. As shown in Figure 79A, the partial integration stage 6-208 may include an amplifier stage 6-229, a bandpass filter stage 6-230, an integrator, and a low Pass filter stage 6-232 and subtractor and low pass filter stage 6-234. Amplifier stage 6-229 receives the output of equalization stage 6-206 and provides a signal to band pass filter stage 6-230 and integrator And low-pass filter stage 6-232. Integrator and low-pass filter stage 6-232 preferably reduce the selected range of high-frequency components. Figure 80 describes the typical frequency response 6-260 of the integrator and low-pass filter stage 6-232 and the typical frequency response 6-261 of the band-pass filter stage 6-230. CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) n I ϋ. 1 —-I---«^ 1-· (Μ. 衣 ^^ 1 —-- II i. ^ Ϋ I ^^ 1 τ * ( Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) A7 ------------- B7 printed by the Staff Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economy V. Invention description (140) &quot;-Figure 7 In 19A, the output of the band-pass filter stage 6-230 is then subtracted from the output of the integrator and low-pass filter, waver stage 6 · 232 and filtered by the low-pass waver stage 6-234. The graph of all frequency responses of the integration stage 6-208 is shown in Figure 80D, which includes the low-pass filter 6_234. Some example output waveforms of the integration stage 6-208 are shown in Figure 84. Figure 70 The detailed circuit diagram of a special embodiment of the partial integration stage 6_2〇8 is illustrated in Nine B. Initially, as shown in Figure 79B, the differential inputs 6-238, 6-239 are just as received from the equalization stage 6_2〇6 As shown in the configuration, the differential inputs 6-238 and 6-239 are provided to the differential amplifier 6-240 to differentially synthesize its input signal. The differential amplifier 6-240 must be the same as the amplifier stage 6-229 shown in Figure 79a Match. The output 6-24 9 of the sub-amplifier 6-240 is connected to a pair of current generators 6-241 and 6-242. The first current generator 6-241 includes a resistor R77 and a PNP transistor Q61 'as shown in Figure 79B The second current generator 6-242 also includes a resistor R78 and a PNP transistor Q11, as shown in Fig. 79B. The output of the current generator 6-241 is connected to the band pass filter 6_243. The pass filter 6-243 includes an inductor L3, a capacitor C72 and a resistor R10, as shown in a parallel configuration. The band pass filter 6-243 must conform to the band pass wave breaker stage 6-230 of Figure 79A. Another The output of the current generator 6-242 is connected to the integrator 6-244. The integrator 6-244 includes a capacitor C81 and a resistor R66, as shown in the parallel configuration in Figure 79B. (Please read the notes on the back first (Fill in this page again) _ ^ m fI 1------· Binding · The size of the printed paper is in accordance with China National Standards (CNS) Μ Specification (210X297mm) A7 B7 Printed by Beigong Consumer Cooperatives, Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs System V. Description of the invention (141) The output of the integrator 6-244 is connected to the NpN transistor Q31 through the resistor R55. Configuration of the transistor Q31 The emitter follower (Emitter Foil) can provide insulation about the output of the integrator 6-244 and operates with a voltage source. The emitter of the transistor Q31 is connected to the low pass filter 6_245. The low-pass filter 6-245 includes an inductor L6, a capacitor C66 and a resistor R49, as shown in Figure 79 β. The integrator 6-244 'emitter follower includes a transistor q31, and the low-pass filter 6-245 must be matched with the integrator and low pass Yunbo Yijie # 又 6-232 shown in Figure 79A. . The frequency response of the integrator 6_244 must match the frequency response 6_260 shown in Fig. 80C, and the frequency response of the band-pass filter 6-243 must match the frequency response 6-261 shown in Fig. 80. The output of the low-pass filter 6-245 and the output of the band pass filter 6_243 are coupled to the differential amplifier 6-246 in the configuration shown in Fig. 79 β. The differential amplifier 6-246 differentiates and synthesizes its input, and provides a differential output to the low-pass filter 6-247. The differential amplifier 6-246 and the low-pass filter 6-247 must correspond to the subtractor and low-pass filter stages 6_234 shown in Figure 79A. Example waveforms of the circuit of Figure 79B are shown in Figure 80 G (1) -80 G (4). First, Figure 80 G (1) shows that an example input waveform 6-256 can be provided from, for example, an equalizer 6-206 to a differential amplifier 6-240. The next waveform 6-257 in Figure 80 G (2) coincides with the output of the bandpass filter 6-243 in Figure 79B and responds to the circuit receiving the input waveform .6-256. The next waveform 6-258 in Figure 80 g (3) is consistent with the output of the low-pass filter 6-245 and applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) M specifications (2I0X297 mm) to the paper size of the figure Qiren (please first Read the precautions on the back and then fill out this page). Installed. * 1T Consortium of Consumers in the Ministry of Economic Affairs and the Ministry of Industry and Fisheries. Co., Ltd. Printed A7 -------- B7 V. Description of the invention (142) 19B The circuit response to the input waveform 6_256 is received. Waveform 6_258 shows the operating effect of the integrator 6 · 244. The function of the low-pass filter 6-245 must provide a delay that aligns the input of the differential amplifier 6-246 to the output of the bandpass filter 6-243 and the integrator 6_244 at such timing. With this, the low-pass filter 6-245 lags behind each input of the differential synthesis leading edge differential amplifier 6-246 to match the aforementioned delay. After the signal output of the band-pass filter 6-243 and the low-pass filter 6-245 are combined and filtered, the final waveform 6-259 in Figure 80 G (4) matches the output of the low-pass filter 6-247. The typical waveform 6_259 represents an improvement on the original read signal read from the magnetic medium. It should also be noted that some of the integration functions described in relation to Figures 79A and 796 are implemented using differential amplifiers (ie, differential amplifiers 6-240 and 6-246), thus providing common mode rejection, or Refers to the rejection of the DC component of the input signals 6_238, 6-239. Another feature of the embodiments shown in Figures 79a and 79B is that a good frequency response characteristic is achieved by the partial integration stage. Especially 'by combining the integrated signal and the high-pass wave signal (ie, in the subtractor and low-pass filter block 6_234 or the differential amplifier 6: 246), the noise can be removed from the differential equalization readout signal, but at the same time The high-pass frequency increases (boost) and is provided by the bandpass wave filter to maintain a relatively rapid response time. Differentiation stage 6-204,-Luhua stage 6-206 and partial integration stage 6-208 The main function is to help the data recovery in an appropriate way. The paper standard National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210x297 public) | Pack II Order-I--I (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Ministry of Economic Affairs ^ 09439 A7 --------- B7 V. Invention description (143) Waveform processor 6-220. Comparing Figures 84A and 84D shows that the signal generated in Figure 84D is the same as the waveform processor 6-220 in Figure 84a (this can be inferred from the figure) but The difference here is that the amplitudes of its high and low pass frequency components have been equalized and sharp noise-like features have been removed. Fig. 80e shows all the frequency response diagrams of the differentiation stage 6-204, the equalization stage 6-206 and the partial integration stage 6_2〇8. Figure 80F shows a graph of all group delay responses with the same chain. It can be noted that the current tape drive system uses the equalization and integration functions of the readout signal to help the data recovery. However, such a system cannot bear the problem of a large degree of DC built-in, because the DC-free code is generally used. As mentioned earlier, DC-free codes have the disadvantage of lower density ratio and are therefore less efficient. In various embodiments, the present invention provides a method of eliminating the effects of DC built-in without the need to use DC-free codes and allows the use of more efficient coding systems. The output of the partial integration stage 6-208 (ie, the waveform in Figure 84 D) is provided to the data generation stage 6-210 of Figure 79. Figure 81 shows the block diagram of the data generation stage 6-210. The data generation stage 6_21〇 includes a positive peak value detector 6-300, a negative peak value detector 6_3〇2, a voltage divider 6-304, a comparator 6_306, and a double-edge circuit 6308. The operation of the display circuit in Figure 81 can be explained with reference to Figure 83. In Figure 83, it can be assumed that the recording bit sequence 6_320 has been read and the result is based on the previous introduction from the department | installed-(please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) -ding -3 i

Printed and printed by the Staff Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 ------ B7_ V. Description of invention (144) The pre-processing of signal 6-322 in the integration stage 6-208 results. It should be noted that the pre-processed signal 6-322 and the various other waveforms introduced here are somewhat idealized for illustration purposes. Those familiar with the art will also know that the actual waveforms are described in Figure 83 and elsewhere The waveform has a change in shape and size. The preprocessing signal 6-322 is sent to the positive peak value detector 6-300 and the negative peak value detector 6-302. These detectors measure and trace the positive and negative peak values of the preprocessing signal 6-322, respectively. The positive peak value output signal 6-330 of the positive peak value detector 6-300 and the negative peak value output signal 6-332 of the negative peak value detector 6-302 are shown in Fig. 83. The positive peak value output signal 6-330 and the negative peak value output signal 6-332 are averaged by a voltage divider 6-304, and the divider includes a pair of resistors 6-341 and 6-342. The output of the voltage divider 6-304 is used as the critical signal 6-334, Figures 81 to 83, and represents the approximate peak-to-peak midpoint of the pre-processed signal 6-322. The output of the voltage divider 6_304 is supplied to the comparator 6-306, which compares the distributed voltage with the preprocessing signal 6-322. The comparator 6-306 changes the state when the pre-processing signal 6_322 and the critical signal 6-334 intersect, indicating that the transition from 1 to 0 or 0 to 1 in the read data. The output of the comparator 6-306 is the output data waveform 6-362 shown in Figure 83. As explained in more detail below, the output data waveform 6_362 is sent back to the positive peak value detector 6-300 and the negative peak value detector 6_302 in order to allow the tracking of the DC envelope. The output of the comparator 6_3〇6 is also provided to this paper and the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Α4 specification (21〇χ297 gong) is used (installed-(please read the precautions on the back and fill in this page)

, 1T Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economics __ A7 &quot; --------------B7 V. Invention 1 ^ 7 ^ ^ -— Double edge circuit 6-308, which The circuit generates a fixed period of unipolar pulse (Um'p〇 | ar port ⑴ dip) every time the comparator 6_306 changes state. The output of the double-edge circuit 6-308 provides timing and data information. From this, the recorded data can be recovered in a simplified way. For example, in the Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) technique, as in the previously introduced gcr 8/9 modulation code, each data pulse output of the double-edge other way 6-308 represents a transition in the data stream (ie, a recorded 1 _ Bit), and no data pulse output in the clock interval indicates that there is no transition in the data stream (ie, a recorded 0-bit). Thereafter, the sequence of recorded bits can be decoded by decoders 6-24 (shown in Figure 75) and the original data can be determined by methods known in the art. In order to properly trace the envelope caused by the DC component of the preprocessing signal 6_322, the preferred embodiment feeds back the duty cycle information of the output data waveform 6-362 to the peak value detector. Therefore, the output of the comparator 6-306 is fed back to the positive peak, the detector 6_300 and the negative peak value detector 6-302. This procedure can be further explained by referring to the circuit diagram more fully evaluated in the description data generation stage 6-21 in FIG. 82. As shown in Figure 82, the preprocessing signal 6-322 is provided to the bases of transistors Q2 and Q5. Transistor 〇2 is associated with positive peak value detector 6_Ca, while transistor Q5 is associated with negative peak value detector 6-302. Because the positive peak value detector 6-300 and the negative peak value detector 6-302 operate in a similar way, the duty cycle feedback operation will only refer to the positive peak value • 1 I I- I (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in the clothes) • I i II · • II «-ί · This paper size is applicable to China A7 '' -------__________ B7__ i 'Invention thorn (146)' ~~ ~ '' — -—— Description of detector 6,3GG 'At the same time, those skilled in the art will be able to understand the similar operation of the negative peak value detector 6 · 302 after participating in phase 82 and the following. When the signal is processed 6 When the amplitude of -322 exceeds the storage voltage of the capacitor ci plus the forward bias of the transistor Q2, the transistor Q2 will charge the capacitor 〇. In Figure 83, we can see that the positive peak value output signal 6_33〇 quickly The peak value of the processing signal 6-322 is charged. The output data waveform 6_362 is fed back. When the output data waveform 6-362 is high, it will maintain a positive charge on the capacitor ci, and when the output data waveform 6_362 is low. The capacitor ci is allowed to discharge the charge. Therefore, if the output data waveform 6_362 is a high potential, the positive charge on the valley C1 The charged transistors are maintained through the resistor 82. The resistors R1 and R2 are preferably the same resistance value. The charge charged to the capacitor through the resistor latch 2 is thus discharged through the resistor R1 at the same rate and thus can be maintained-疋The net electricity% is on the capacitor C1. On the other hand, if the output data waveform 6-362 is low potential, the transistor qi is cut off and the capacitor 〇 is allowed to release charge through the resistor R1. The values of the capacitor C1 and the resistor R1 are best selected The time constant is faster than the DC built-in expected speed, so that the capacitor C1 can track the change in the DC level. The output of the capacitor C1 is provided to the base of the transistor Q3. The voltage level of the emitter of the transistor Q3 is the output of the capacitor C1 above The bias voltage level. The current flows in through the resistor R3 and allows the emitter of the transistor Q3 to change with the potential of the capacitor C1 (offset from the emitter base bias voltage). Therefore, the emitter of the transistor q3 generates a positive peak value output signal 6 -330. It should be noted that transistor Q1 and transistor Q2 are of the NPN type. The paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Α4 specification (21〇 &lt; 297mm) (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this Page) Pack · .1 Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Central Bureau of Industry, Beigong Consumer Co., Ltd. A7 B7 Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Central Standards Bureau Employee Consumer Cooperative. V. Invention Description (147) Transistor 'At the same time transistor Q3 is a PNP transistor. The NPN-PNP configuration structure can largely eliminate the adverse thermal effects on the transistors Q1, 〇2, and 〇3, and also eliminate the bias voltage associated with their operation. The negative peak value detector 6-302 operates in a similar manner to the positive peak value Detector 6-300, so it will not be described in more detail. The emitter of transistor 〇6 produces a negative peak value output signal 6-332. As mentioned in the introduction, the positive peak value output signal 6-330 and the negative peak value output signal 6-332 are evenly distributed by the voltage distributor 6_304, which contains a pair of resistors R4, (6-341 and 6-342), As shown in Figures 81 and 82 to form the critical signal 6-334. Therefore, the critical signal 6_334 constitutes a rough peak-to-peak intermediate point of the pre-processing signal 6-322 and the DC wave seal of the pre-processing signal 6-322 is traced and compensated by the duty cycle feedback. Although duty cycle feedback in the preferred embodiment shows its output from the comparator 6-306, it can be observed that other feedback paths can also be used. For example, if flip-flops or other memory elements are arranged at the output of the double-edge circuit 6_308, the same feedback path can be taken from the output of the double-edge circuit 6_308. Or, the method of measuring the duty cycle and adjusting the critical signal for tracking the DC wave envelope can also be used. In general, the preferred techniques described in Figures 78 and 79 include partial differentiation # steps such as a signal, followed by a DC tracking step. This preferred method is a relatively poor method, and is especially suitable for reading the paper with appropriate financial standards ^^^ 7 ^ (2,0X297 ^) · ----- (Please read the notes on the back before filling in page)

-1T Printed by the 1T Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Skirt Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. A7 ----- B7. 5. Description of the invention (148) The signal system can be effectively applied. In the preferred method, the initial step of differentiation reduces on the one hand the low frequency portion from the incoming readout signal. In the preferred method, the partial integration stage on the other hand causes the readback or partial recovery of the readout signal to also provide a rapid response due to high-pass boost (i.e., from the bandpass filter stage). This preferred method can be compared with an earlier method of integrating the readout signal (i.e., prior to differentiation). This leads to an increase in the DC part and is relatively difficult in tracking the DC part time. It can be seen that the various circuits and methods introduced are not limited to magneto-optical systems, but can also be used to read data on magnetic tapes and other types of discs. In a general sense, it is any system (whether or not a data storage system) that needs to mitigate the built-in effects of DC on processing electronic signals. Thin check and other data retrieval aspects As shown in Figure 85, data source 7-10 transmits data to encoder 7_12 during write mode. The decoder 7-12 converts the binary data into a binary code. After that, the binary code is passed to the laser pulse generator 7_14, and the generator 7-14 converts the binary code into an excitation pulse, thereby turning the laser on or off. In the preferred embodiment, regardless of the format of the binary code, as long as the binary gamma is 1, it means that the laser 6 will be excited for a fixed period. However, depending on the laser and optical medium used, the characteristics can be enhanced by generating light laser pulses or extending the beginning of the square wave pulse. The output of the laser 716 will heat the local area of the optical medium 7 · 18 exposed to the magnetic field lines, so as to set it (please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page)

* 1T —i I I-I · Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (149) Optical media 7-18 Polarity of magnetic materials. During the reading of the optical media 7_18, the laser light impinges on the surface of the optical media 7-18. The polarity of the reflected laser beam will depend on the polarity of the magnetic surface of the optical medium. The laser beam reflected in the reading mode 'will be input to the optical reader 7-20, and the output of the reading code of the reader 7_2 will be sent to the waveform processor 7-22. After that, the processed read code is sent to the decoder 7_24, and the output data of the decoder is transmitted to the data output port 7_26 to transmit the data. Figure 86 shows the difference in laser pulses between GCR 8/9 and RLL 2, 7 format. As shown in Figure 86A, in GCR 8/9, cells 7-28 are defined as bit codes' and 9 cells or bit codes are equal to 8 data bits. Therefore, each of the units 7-30 to 7-41 corresponds to one pulse period 7-42 of the pulse waveform 7_45. For a 31/2 'disk with a storage capacity of 256Mbytes and a disc rotating at 2400RPM, the pulse period of 7.42 is typically 63ns or 15.879M Hz. GCR data waveform 7-47 is the encoder output waveform of encoder 7-12. Figure 86a shows a representative data sequence. GCR data 7-50 to 7-61 show the data sequence &quot; 010001110101 &quot;, where GCR data 7-50 is low potential, GCR data 7-51 is south potential, GCR data 7-52 is also high potential, and so on. The pulse GCR waveform 7-65 is the output of the laser waveform generator 7-14, and is input to the laser 7-16. The invention uses a non-return-to-zero drive signal to excite the green head. Therefore, when the laser is enabled with sufficient heat exceeding the Curie temperature of the medium to cause an external magnetic field with a reverse polarity to be added to the cleared medium, the paper standard that was previously cleared is subject to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Α4 Specifications (210X297mm) 〖Installed-- (please read the notes on the back before filling in this page) * 17 Printed by the Ministry of Economy Central Standards Bureau Employee Consumer Cooperative A7 ------------ B7 5 3. Description of the invention (15〇) '----- Yu's quality will change the polarity. As shown in the pulse Gcr waveform 7-65, the special data pattern is not adjusted in time or interval Enhanced response characteristics. Pulses GCR 7-67 to 7-81 do not generate pulses when GCR data waveform 7-47 is low, and pulses are generated when GCR data waveform 7-47 is high. For example, due to GCR Data 7-50 is low potential, so pulse GCR 7-67 does not generate a pulse. Conversely, because GCR data 7-51 to 7-54 are high potential, pulse GCR 7-68 to 7-71 have a laser pulse, respectively , Pulse GCR 7-72 to 7-78 also have the same situation. For easy description, pulse GCR7-65 pulse GCR7-68, 7-69, 7-70, 7-71, 7-73 Both 7-76 and 7-77 are square waves. In the preferred embodiment, the pulse width is 28 ns. Each laser pulse corresponding to the pulse GCR waveform 7-65 creates a recording recess 7 on the optical medium 7-18 -80. The green depression 7-82 corresponds to the pulse GCR 7-68. The green depression 7-83 corresponds to the pulse GCR 7-69. Similarly, the recording depressions 7-84 to 7-88 correspond to the pulses GCR 7-70, 7 respectively -71, 7-73, 7-76 and 7-77. Due to the influence of the thermal divergence of the optical medium 7-18 and the size of the projection point, the recording recess 7-80 is wider than the pulsed GCR 7-65. Continuous recording of the green recess 7_80 Combined together, it is effective to create a larger recording recess. Therefore, the extended recording recess has a leading edge corresponding to the first green recess and a trailing edge corresponding to the last recording recess. For example, from the green recess 7_82 to 7- The 1 recorded depression created by 85 has a leading edge generated by recording depression 7-82 and a trailing edge generated by recording depression 7-85. Under the data format of GCR 8/9, the 'leading edge' applies to this paper size China National Standards (CNS) A4 Specification (210X297mm) -------- "Policy -------- ^ (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page} Printed by the Beigong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 --------------- B7 V. Description of the invention (151) --- ~~ GCR data 7_47 that should go up, and later The margin corresponds to the falling gcr data 7-47. Therefore, for the data styles of GCR data 751 to 7_55, as shown in the record depression 7_82, the leading edge occurs at the first 1 (GCR data 7_47 rising), and in the GCR data 7 At the end of 54, the GCR data is reduced to &quot; 〇 &quot;, so as shown in the recording recess 7_85, a trailing edge is generated. Tian-jiluo concave | When ra7-80 shows no recording, the read signal 7_9 will be low. At the leading edge of the green recess, the read signal 7-9 rises, and the same potential is held until the trailing edge of the green recess. After that, the read signal 790 maintains a low current level until the next depression. For example, because the gCD data 7-50 is low potential 'and no sag is established, the read signal ⑽ is low potential. As shown by the read signal 7_92 at the leading edge of the green depression 7_82, the read signal 7-90 has a leading edge. The read signal 7-9 will remain unchanged until the trailing edge of the green depression. For example, because the recording recesses 7_83 and 7_84 have no trailing edge, read ## 7-93 and 7-94 to maintain a high potential. However, because the Gcr data 7-55 is at a low potential, the green depression 7_85 is generated-the trailing edge, so the read signal 7-96 is attenuated. The read signal will be attenuated to &quot; 〇 "until the green pit is established. Therefore, when the green pit 7-86 corresponding to the rising gCR data 7_56 is generated, the read signal 7-97 will rise. However, because the GCR data 7-57 is at a low potential, the recording pit 7-86 is not always maintained, and the read signal 7-98 is attenuated. Because the GCR data 7-58 is at a low potential, the recording pit does not establish a pit, so The reading signal 7-99 is kept low. The standard rate of this paper is the standard rate (cns) A4C ^ · (210X297mm) '------- ~ 5 clothes ------ order- ----- For f ^ first read the notes on the back ^ then fill in this 1) A7 ____________ —_ B7 ________ V. Description of the invention (152) '' When GCR data 7-59 and 7-60 are high potential, record The recesses 7-87 and 7-88 partially overlap to create a larger recess, so the read signals 7-100 and 7-101 maintain a high potential. And because the GCR data 7-61 is low potential, the read signal 7-102 is at The trailing edge of the record depression 7-88 is lowered. As shown in Figure 86B, for RLL 2,7-cell contains 2 data bits, which correspond to two pulse periods of 2F pulse waveform 7-120. For 256MBytes discs, the RLL 2,7 encoding format requires a pulse width of 35.4ns or a pulse frequency of 28.23 MHz 'such as 2F pulse 7-121. The calculation of this data is very simple. In order to maintain the same disc density, GCR 8/9 The encoding format of RLL 2,7 must maintain the same amount of data at the same recording time. Because in the RLL 2,7 format, each data bit requires two bit codes, so 2 · (8/9) Double the pulse rate of GCR 8/9. The GCR data format needs to record 9 code bits for every 8 data bits, so the GCR data bit pulse is 9/8 times the pulse 7_42. Therefore, for the 63ns GCR pulse 7-42, pulse 7-121 of RLL 2,7 needs to be 35_4ns to maintain the same disc density. Each unit of data waveform 7-122 of RLL 2,7 has two code bits. For example, RLL 2 , 7 data 7-124 shows the data style "〇〇", and only dagger 2,7 data 7-125 shows the data style "10". In this data format, "Ί" refers to the data conversion, therefore, when彳, appears in the style, R "'2'7 data 7-125 becomes high potential. Similarly, when"! • When it appears in the pattern, RLL 2,7 data 7-126 becomes low potential. And when |, 〇 &quot; appears, only use Zhong Lu Zhun (CNS> Bashan Tao (210X297 male 1 '---- m In-I ......... (please read the back Please pay attention to this page and then fill out this page) 袈 定 i The Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Standards Bureau Employee Consumer Cooperative Printed and Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Sample Bureau Employee Consumer Cooperative Printed Bag Μ _____ Β7 5. Description of Invention (153)-2,7 Information 7-122 Maintain the same state. Pulse RLL 2,7 waveform 7.137 reflects and corresponds to the pulse of laser 7-16 of RLL 2,7 data 7-122. Therefore, for RLL 2,7 data 7-125 and 7-126 When these data are in the ancient two, the pulse 2,7 waveforms 7-140 and 7-141 are also high potential. Due to the thermal diffusion of the depression, the pulse 2,7 waveform 7-141 needs to be earlier than the RLL 2,7 data 7_126 Becomes low potential. For longer “〇 &quot; data patterns, the pulse needs to maintain a high potential. For example, in RLL 2,7 data 7-128, 7-129 data gas only # 1000Γ, pulse 2,7 Waveforms 7-143 and 7-144 are wider than Pulse 2 7-wave to 7-Ί40 and 7-141. For the consecutive "&quot; 0 &quot; style, Pulse 2,7 Waveform 7-137 can be separated into different pulses. For example, For data only &quot; 100000Γ 'RLL 2,7 data 7-132, 7-133, and 7_134 can generate two pulses as shown in pulses 2,7 7-147, 7-148, and 7-149. Like GCR 8/9 The format 'record pit 7-160 indicates thermal diffusion. For example, the green pit 7.162 is wider than the pulse 2,7 waveforms 7_14〇 and 7_141. The green pit 7-163 also has the same result. Note that the leading edge of the green depression 7-160 rises and falls at the trailing edge and remains unchanged for the rest of the time. The pulsed GCR code can be changed by correcting the predictable positional displacement. Figure 87 shows the laser pulse 7- Timing chart of writing compensation in 14. Experimental tests show that when laser 7-16 is turned off, two or more bits of green in advance can enhance the characteristics. Pulse waveform 7-176 is used in pulse data 7_177, 7 -203, and 7-229 code position without pulse, the pulse waveform is the worst data style to be strengthened. Other styles can also be modified, but the signal size will damage the paper size suitable for financial Guanjia County (CNS) ~ Specifications (21GX297mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) 装-* 1Τ

1. Description of the invention (154 丨 Printed by the employee consumer cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. Documents 7, 18 to 7_184 correspond to the data column "1〇1〇〇". The data waveform without compensation 7_188 to 7-192 corresponds to no Write the compensated data pattern. The uncompensated pulse waveform 7,189 and M1 occur in the second half of the pulse period. The output of the laser pulse 7-14 corresponds to the compensated pulse waveform 7.195 After the write compensation, the compensated pulse waveform 7_197 Keep the same with 7_198, and the shorter off interval of the compensation pulse waveform 7-199 provides the earlier compensation pulse waveform WOO. During the compensation pulse waveform 7_2〇1, the laser 7_16 remains longer than the non-debt pulse 7 192 Closing time. Similarly, data 7-206 to 7-209 correspond to the data style &quot; side, I, no pulse waveform 7_211 to 7-213 is low potential, followed by two pulses, that is, no compensation pulse waveform 7-214 And 7_216. ㈤ 理 '· Worenqing circuit listens to the simple pulse waveform 7-220, so the compensation pulse waveform 7_225 will be closer to the compensation pulse waveform 7-223', so the compensation pulse waveform 7_224 is shorter than the uncompensated pulse waveform 7.215. Finally , Corresponding information The data of sample "00100" 7-231 to 7-235 is the result of compensation pulse waveform 7-237 without compensation pulse waveform 7-240. Writing compensation will adjust the compensation pulse waveform 7_246 of compensation pulse waveform 7-243 forward. Eighty-eight shows a schematic diagram of the write compensation circuit, including the data pattern monitor 7-248, the write compensation pattern detector 7-249, and the delay circuit 7-269. The data pattern monitor 7_248 is a serial shift temporary The memory sequentially inputs the encoded data from the encoders 7-12. The last 5 pulses of the data bits are sent to f 袈 ------ 1T ------ f {Please read the back Matters needing attention, please fill out this page} A7 -----___ Β7 ___ printed by the Male Workers' Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Economic Development of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 5. Description of Invention (155) ---- Write the compensation pattern detection n7_249, analyze and decide here Is it necessary to send the pulse to the laser early. The data model monitor 7-248 contains D-type flip-flops 7_25〇 to 7-256. The encoded data is input to the D port of D-type flip-flop 7-250, and its Q Hun output WD1 becomes the input of the D-type flip-flop 7-251. The connection continues to the D-type flip-flop 7_256, and the data is monitored from input to data. The signal _7 from the converter 7.248 to the output Q of the D-type flip-flop 7_256 is delayed by a total of 7 pulse cycles. The output WD1 to WD5 phases of the ○ -type flip-flop 7_25〇 to 7_254 represent the last input to the data Pattern monitoring ^ The last 5 material bits of the heart. These 5 bit cores are sent to the healthy pattern detector 7-249 'and compared with the data pattern determined in advance. If it matches, the write enable signal is sent to the delay circuit 7_269 to indicate that the laser pulse is generated earlier than the normal time. The first pattern detection is to use the inverters 7_26〇, 7_261, 7_262 and 7-263 to reverse the outputs WD1, WD2, WD4 and _ of the D-type flip-flops 7_25〇, 7_251 and 7 253 respectively. The output of these inverters and the output of the D-type flip-flop 7-252 use pre-test and gate 7_264 to perform AMD operation. Therefore, when the sequence "Q_," is generated, the output of the detection and closing 7-264 becomes high, which means that a resource pattern is detected. Similarly, the second pattern detection uses the inverter 7_282, 7_283 blood 7 284 will D type positive and negative H7-25., 7._251 and 7.253 output coffee w〇2 and WD4 reverse. The output of these inverters and type 0 positive and negative inverter 7 ------ -(Installed ------ ordered (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

Printed by the Beigong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 ______B7 V. Description of Invention (156) The output of 7-254 utilizes detection and gate 7-286 for AND operation. Therefore, the data pattern "1001" will cause the gate 7-286 to output a high potential, indicating that the predetermined pattern is detected. The third pattern detection is to use inverters 7-287 and 7-288 to invert the outputs WD1 and WD2 of D-type flip-flops 7-250 and 7-251, respectively, and to invert the outputs of these inverters to D The output of 7-252 and 7-253 flip-flops are used for AND operation with detection and gate 7-289. Therefore, the data pattern "1100" will cause the gate 7-289 to output a high potential, indicating that the predetermined pattern is detected. The outputs of the above three and gates 7-264, 7-286 and 7-289 are ORed by OR gate 7-266, so as long as one of the patterns is detected, or the output of gate 7-266 becomes high Potential. The detection pattern output is input to the write enable D-type flip-flop 7-268, and its output signal Q is the write enable signal, which is sent to the delay circuit 7-269. The delay circuit 7-269 selects the output WD4 of the data D flip-flop 7-253 and simultaneously inputs it to the delay circuit 7-276 without delay selection and gate 7-274. The delay output of the delay circuit 7-276 is input to the delay selection and gate 7-272. The write enable signal written into the compensation pattern detector 7-249 will result in delay selection and gate 7-272 or no delay selection and gate 7-274. When the write enable signal is low, it means that none of the three patterns are detected. This signal is reversed by the write enable inverter 7_270. This will allow the delay data of the delay circuit 7-276 to generate pulses. Conversely, if the write enable signal is high, it means that one of the data patterns has been detected, so no delay and gate 7-274 will allow the D-type flip-flop 7_253 data to be transmitted without delay. Delay and ^ 1. Ϋ m H «ϋ-m / nn 1 ^ 1 n HI an T —-3- $ (please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs 3 ^ 9439 A7 ——___ B7 V. Description of the invention (157) '' --- 7-272 output with or without delay and gate 7_274 is carried out using OR 7_278. The output is the output of the delay circuit 7_269 Although it was mentioned earlier that the write pulses for the three types of write compensation circuits will be generated earlier, but in practice, all but the three types are delayed by 10 nS. For the frequency of the preferred embodiment, the delay circuit The delay time of 7-276 can be set between 7 and 12 ns. S «When the data pattern of the lower frequency of green has a slower rise time of the generated magnetic field optical signal. This causes the final output of the waveform processor 7_22 to The positive peak is attenuated, and this situation can be corrected by the energy with higher effectiveness at the leading edge of the data pattern. For the preferred embodiment, the data pattern &quot; 000111 &quot; will trigger a comparison during the second &quot; Γ of the data pattern The wide write signal 'allows the laser to close normally The pulse is generated during the off period. In Figure 89, the pulse waveform 7-301 provides the data pattern 7.303 of the data waveform 7.303 through the laser pulse generator 7-24. -305 to 7-310, when the data waveform 7-303 is &quot; 1 &quot;, the laser pulse generator 7-14 generates a pulse waveform 7-312 with pulses 7-314, 7-315, and 7-316 .In the second "1" of the data pattern, the laser pulse generator 7-14 will turn on an enhanced energy waveform 7 · 318 and generate pulse 7_32. Put pulse 7-312 and enhanced energy waveform 7-31. OR logic operation is performed to generate laser pulse waveform 7-322 output with laser pulses 7-323, 7-324 and 7-325. During normal operation, laser pulse 7_324 will be interrupted during the first half of the pulse period Turn off. But here the special data format will keep the laser pulse 7-323 and the paper size applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21〇 × 297mm) I, 1T ------ {(please Read the precautions on the back first and then fill out this page) A7 A7 Du Printing Cooperative Printed by the Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs ------------- B7 V. Description of Invention (158) '' · ~ ·-7-324 laser operation, especially during this time can increase the energy of 50%. In Figure 90, the amplitude asymmetry correction circuit 7_291 generates a wide write pulse 7-292 (corresponding to the figure Eighty-nine enhanced energy waveform 7_318), the child-wide write pulse 7-292 uses the laser pulse or gate and delay circuit 7_269 laser pulse output (corresponding to the pulse waveform 7_3123 of FIG. 89) to perform OR logic operation, This generates the output of laser pulse waveform 7_322. The operation of the data style monitor 7-248 is shown in Figure 88. Data D flip-flop 7-25 to 7-256 Q output WD2, WD3, WD4, WD5, WD6 and WD7 are input to amplitude asymmetry correction circuit 7_291, data D flip-flop 7-254, 7 The output WD5, WD6 and WD7 of -255 and 7-256 are reversed by data inverters 7_293, 7_294 and 7-295, respectively. The data inverters 7-293, 7-294 and 7-295 and the data D-type flip-flops 7-251, 7-252 and 7-253 output use AND gate 7-296 to perform AND logic operation. The output of detection and gate 7-296 represents whether the pattern "000111" is detected, the output will send a pulse wave through the wide-write D-type flip-flop 7-297 at the next pulse wave 7-301. The waveform output of the optical reader 7-20 will be attenuated as a function of frequency and data pattern. The amplitude and timing can be increased by the signal processing of the waveform processors 7-22. The asymmetry of the rise and fall times of isolated pulses can be improved by adding up equal and differential signals with derivative functions. In Fig. 91, the magneto-optical signal 7-327 is differentiated using a differential amplifier 7-329. This paper scale is applicable to China National Standard Rate (CNS) A4 (210X297mm) (please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page). Packed. A7 B7 Printed by Zhengong Consumer Cooperative, Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs Explanation (159) ~~ ~~~ The differential signal is input to the equalizer 7_331. In the preferred embodiment, 5dB is used to perform the equipotential operation, and the amplitude is performed as a function of the frequency. The derivative function of the Sun equal position signal is obtained by the derivative function processor 7_333, and the total equal position signal of the force port 7-335 is used. The output of force mouth 7_335 is read signal 7-337. ’★ Figure 92 shows the timing diagram of the dynamic critical value circuit of Figure 93. Reading signal 7-337 will contain the overshoot caused by the weakening pulse. Since the overrun is predictable, the critical value of the read circuit during the overrun can be increased to prevent the positive peaks 7_339, 7_34〇, 7 341 and 7-342 and the negative materials 7-343, 7-344 and Error data was read during 7_345. The critical value waveform 7-348 is switched to a higher value during the positive peak. The critical value waveforms 7-349, 7-350, and 7-351 are high during the positive peaks 7-339, '340, and 7-341, respectively. The critical value waveforms 7-352, 7-353, and 7-354 are low during the negative peaks 7_343, 7-344, and 7-345, respectively. Each positive peak and negative peak of the read signal 7_337 will generate a peak waveform 7-356, which is a short pulse immediately following the peak of the read signal 7_337. The peaks 7-339, 7-343, 7-340, 7-344, 7-341, 7-345, and 7-342 of the read signal 7-3 37 respectively generate peak waveforms 7-358 to 7-364. The critical value waveform 7-348 shown in 93 is input to the D port of the critical value delay D-type flip-flop 7-366. Peak waveform 7-356 applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X29? Mm) through this paper scale -------------- 1τ ------ ¢-(please Read the precautions on the back first and then fill out this page.) A7 B7____ printed by Beigong Consumer Cooperation of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 5. Description of the invention (160) D-type flip-flop 7-366 as the pulse of the critical value waveform 7_348. Delay The critical value waveform 7-368 is the critical value delay 0 output of the Q-type flip-flop 7-366 'and uses the critical value mutex or gate 7_37〇 to perform the mutual exclusive or logical operation with the critical value waveform 7_348. The EXOR signal 7-372 is the output of the mutex or gate 7-370. The EXOR signal 7_372 has twice the frequency of the original critical value waveform 7-348. The EXOR signal 7_372 is input to the D port of the EXOR D-type flip-flop 7-374. The O-type flip-flop 7-374 uses the read pulse 7-375 as the pulse wave. The F1 waveform is the Q output of EXOR D type flip-flop 7-374. Except that the low potential of the EXOR signal 7-372 is greater than a read pulse waveform 7-375, the read pulse waveform 7_375 also has a leading edge during the high pulse of the EXOR signal 7-372. Therefore, except that the low potential of EXOR k No. 7-372 is greater than a reading pulse waveform 7-375 to the next EXOR signal 7.372 pulse period, F1 waveform 7-376 is high potential. The F1 waveform 7-376 performs OR logic operation with the EXOR signal 7-372 using the package or gate 7_378. Except for the period from the first read pulse 7_375 with the low potential of EXOR signal 7_372 greater than one pulse period to the time when signal 7-372 becomes high potential again, the output of package or gate 7_378 is all high potential. The output of the package or gate 7-378 is given to the pulse wave through the D input of the package D flip-flop 7-379, and the read pulse wave 7_375 is used as the input pulse wave. The output of the package or gate 7-378 'F2 waveform 7_381. Except for the second read pulse waveform after changing from EXOR signal 7-372 to low potential. The paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 ^ 5 ^ t) Read the precautions on the back before filling this page) A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (161) From 7-375 to the next EXOR signal 7-372 pulse reading signal is outside the high potential period, packaging or gate 7-378 The output is high. The F2 waveform 7-381 is reversed by the F2 inverter 7-383, and the dynamic critical value reverse or gate 7-385 is used to perform the reverse OR logic operation with the EXOR signal 7-372 to generate Dynamic critical value waveform. In addition to the F2 waveform 7-381 being low, as long as the EXOR signal 7-372 is low, the dynamic critical value waveform 7-387 is high. Therefore, the next read pulse 7- During 375, the EXOR signal is low, and the dynamic critical value waveform 7-387 will be half as slow to read the pulse wave 7-375 period. For this exceptional case, the dynamic critical value waveform 7-387 changes from the falling edge of the EXQR signal 7-372 to The second read pulse wave 7-375 has remained high until the pulse. Dynamic critical value waveform 7-387 is used in forward or Reverse bias-bias the diode 7-389. When the dynamic critical value waveform is high, the bias diode 7-389 is the reverse bias voltage. Conversely, if it is difficult to move, the critical value waveform 7-387 If it is a low potential, the bias diode 7_389 is a forward bias. Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Central Bureau of Preservation and Consumer Cooperatives (please read the precautions on the back and then fill out this page). 387 When the bias diode 7-389 is forward biased (ie low potential), the potential of the filtered bias signal 7_39 is higher than the junction voltage of the bias diode 7-389. The potential of the standard device is 〇6 Volt. The voltage source of 5 volts is reduced to the potential of the wave bias signal 7-390 after the current limiting resistor 7_393, because the voltage of the charging capacitor 7_394 is the voltage difference between the wave bias signal 7-390 and the ground. Charging capacitor The standard of 7.394 replenishment paper applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Α4 specification (21 ^ —297 mm ~) A7 A7 Ministry of Economic Affairs t Central Standards Bureau Staff Consumption Cooperation. Printed by the Society V. Description of Invention (162) to this The electric potential is also the bias voltage of the transistor 7-395. This bias voltage causes the transistor 7 395 to act, which also makes the electricity The emitter voltage of the crystal reaches 14 volts. Because the transistors 7-395 and 7-396 are connected together, the emitter voltage of the transistor 7-396 is lower than the 25 volt bias of the transistor 7_395. The crystal 7-396 has no action, so the collector voltage across the collector resistance 7_397 produces an increased critical value waveform 7_399 of 0 volts (ground). The increase threshold value waveform 7-399 can increase the threshold value of the read signal 7_377 during the overrunning period. When the dynamic critical value waveform 7-387 is at a high potential, the bias diode 7-389 is reverse biased, so the base of the transistor 7_395 cannot reach 6 volts. When the dynamic critical value waveform 7-387 becomes a high potential, the charging capacitor 7-394 starts charging, causing the base potential of the transistor 7_395 to rise to 5 volts of the supply voltage. When the voltage of the filtered bias signal 7-390 rises, the emitter voltage of the transistor 7-395 also rises, which also causes the emitter voltage of the transistor 7-396 to rise. When the emitter voltage exceeds the emitter-base junction potential of the transistor 7_396, the 'transistor 7-396 will operate. This action of transistor 7-396 causes the increase in the critical value waveform 7-399 to rise. In normal operation, the dynamic critical value waveform 7-387 is the pulse described above. During the normal read signal period, the high-potential period of the dynamic critical value waveform 7_387 is equal to the high-potential period of the read pulse 7-375. The charging capacitor 7-394 will charge more than 2.5V base voltage for longer than half the period of the pulse. Therefore, under normal circumstances, increase the critical value of the waveform. The paper standard is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210'〆297mm) -------- (袈 丨-(please read the back (Notes and then fill this page)

, 1T i A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (163) 7-399 Keep at low potential. However, during the overrun period, the dynamic critical value waveform 7-387 maintains a high potential for a longer period of time, causing the charging capacitor 7_394 to charge more than 2.5 volts. Therefore, the trigger increase of the critical value waveform 7_399 makes it the local potential. In Fig. 94, the king computer 7-410 as a digital data resource and utility server is coupled to the data bus 7-414 using an interface circuit 7_412. When the host computer 7-410 processes data and needs to access external memory, it connects to the data bus 7-414 through the interface circuit 7-412. The data bus 7-414 is connected to the input terminals of the write encoder 7_416 and the write encoder 7-418. The write encoder 7416 encodes the data of stream 7_414 in the low-density (and ANSi) format, while the write encoder 7.16 encodes the data in the high-density format_bus 7_414. On January 1, 1991, the materials exchanged for the requested materials can be read and written in meters, and the patronized plan towels should be described in ANS 丨 format and have reference materials in the job description. The outputs of the write encoders 7_416 and 7_418 are selected by the switch 7-422-to the magneto-optical read / write head μ. Write input. The read output of the read / write head 7.42◦ can be selectively tapped to the read decoder 7 or read decoder MM through the switch 7. To read the decoder, you decode the data in the format of "Encoder 7_416 (ie, ANSI); while to read the decoder 7 7 28, you decode the data in the same format as the code # 7-418. Top-&lt; Code The coding and decoding technology can be implemented in the write encoder 7_418 and read decoder ^ 428. Read decoder I (Binding ^ (please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page). Install the paper; the Cai H® Falcon A4MiT210X297 public f A7 B7, invention description (164) 7-426 and the output of the reading decoder 7_428 are connected to the data bus-414 Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Bureau of Industry and Fisheries Consumer Cooperation Du Yinxian For the mode selection signal, the switch control circuit 7-430 can set ON 422 and 7-424 to be the first mode or the second mode. In the first mode, the write encoder 7_418 and the read decoder 7_426 are connected to Between data bus 7-414 and read / write head 7_42G. In the second mode, write encoder 7.428 and read decoder 6 are connected between data bus 7_414 and read / write head 7_42Q. Write head 7 from 90% of the light contained in the interchangeable disc drive 7-432 Read the encoded data from the disc, and transfer the encoded data to the disc. The above-mentioned interchangeable optical disc drive 7 rhythm is transmitted from the disc drive circuit 7.434 (iv) read / write head 7.42 ~ χ to the disc drive 7-432. The optical disc surface, surface position control circuit 7-436 controls the position of the read / write head. When the optical disc drive 7-432 accommodates 90 cm in height, the mode selection signal sets the system to the second mode. ^ ^ Brain "I. It needs to be stored when sent The data on the disc is written by Jielu ': the main computer writes an 8-code. And the second = uses the predicate decoder 7_428 to decode it, and it is transmitted to the host computer 7_410 by the media 7's processing. The device 7.432 contains a 90-square-meter low-density secret. The first time, the mode selection signal sets the system to the first upsetting host computer 7-410. The data to be stored on the disc is from = surface j when the paper is suitable Secret (read 21GX297. "Install-- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page), 11

J A7

One Pack — (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Order 1

In both formats, the same media 7_412 can be used to organize the data stored on the disc and the data read back from the disc. According to the present invention, different formats can use the same read / write head 7-420, position control circuit 7-436, optical disc drive 7 432, optical disc drive circuit 7-434, interface circuit 7_412, and data area stream 7_414. Store on CD and read materials from CD. In this way, compared to the high-density format developed in a more advanced state, the discs with poor capacity can also use the same equipment to read the industry's standard ansi format. The best format for high-density optical discs is described below with reference to Figures 95, 90T and 98 '. The disc has 10,000 tracks numbered from 0 to 9999 and is allocated to 21 sessions. Each track is divided into a plurality of sectors. Each zone has a different number of zones. The more peripheral the disc, the greater the number of zones. The frequency of the data recorded in each zone is also different, and it increases toward the periphery of the disc. (Refer to Figures 95 and 98, the number of tracks in each zone, the number of zones in each zone, and the green frequency of each zone are described). Unlike low-density optical discs, the recording format can be re-recorded on the optical disc using the same recording technology as the data, preferably magnetic energy optics (MO). These entry formats include section parts, header parts for each section, and control tracks. Unlike the header part and data, the segment part of each segment is recorded at the same frequency. The following describes the preferred embodiment of the section format. The size of this paper is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (please read the notes on the back before filling in this page) A7 ------ B7 printed by the Staff Consumer Cooperative of the Bureau of Standards V. Description of the invention (167) (Sector Layout) The section contains the section 'marker' header and can record 512 bits of user data Record field. The green field can be empty or recorded by the user. The total length of the section is 721 bytes of different frequencies for the header and recording field in different sections (one byte is equivalent to 9 bits), plus 80 bits of the section mark at a fixed frequency Yuan, that is, each section has the same frequency. Tolerances can be absorbed by the buffer, the last part of the section. The header length is 48 bytes. The length of the record block is 673 bytes. The section mark (SM) area and the mark f contain patterns that are not generated in the data, and the drive can identify the start of the section without relying on the phase-locked loop. The sector marks are recorded in all areas at a fixed frequency of 116 MHz. The length of the segment marker is 80 bits. The following shows the style in NRZI format. 1111 1111 1100 〇〇〇〇1111 1100 0000 0000 〇〇〇00000000 1111 1100 〇〇〇〇〇1111 1100 0000 1111 1111 1100 1001 0010 A signal of the phase-locked loop voltage control oscillator of the read channel in the phase loop (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page). Installed,-°

Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 __B7 V. Invention description (168) At the VFO stop, the information of VF01 and VF03 is exactly the same style and has the same length of 08 bits. Each VF02 block has a length of 72 bytes. Address mark (AM) The address mark contains a pattern that is not marked in the data. This field is used to provide a synchronous drive byte for the disk drive in the following ID block. The tag is 9 bits long and has the following style: 110000101 ID block has three ID blocks, each of which contains a data segment The address of, for example, the track number of the data segment is the number of data segments, and CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) bytes. Each block contains five bytes of the following content: The first byte: the number of high-byte trajectories The second byte: the number of low-byte trajectories The third byte: bits 7 and 6: 00: ID Block 0 01: ID Block 1 10: 丨 D Block 2 11: Unused paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X 297 mm) -3 J— II---1! I ------1-1 Clothing—II 2. Description of the invention (169) Bit 5: 0 Bit 4 to Bit 0: Number of binary data segments Fourth and fifth bytes: CRC block CRC byte contains CRC information, which is based on Figure 90 The equations (1), (2) and (3) listed in the table of nine are generated by calculating the first three i-bytes. Referring to this equation, the 16 check bits of the CRC in the D field will be generated by calculating the three bytes before the block. In the remainder polynomial defined by equation (2), bj is the bit of the first three bytes, and its inverted bit. Bit23 is the highest bit of the first byte. The contents of the 16 check bits ^ of the CRC are defined by equation (3) in Figure 99, where c15 is the highest bit of the fourth byte.

Postamble (PA) post block lengths are all equal, all are 9 bits. The post follows ID3 and also the data block. The post will terminate the last byte of the previous CRC or data block. The post has 9 bits of the following pattern: 100010001

Gaps GAP 1 is a block, with a defined length of 9 channel bits, and GAP 2 is 54 channel bits. GAP 1 will be set to 0, and GAP 2 is not specified. GAP 2 is the first stop to remember the green stop. The Chinese national sample rate (CNS) Α4 specification (21〇 &lt; 297mm) is applicable to the paper size of the document reader at the completion of the file (please read the notes on the back (Fill in this page) Appearance · A7 __B7_ printed by the consumer cooperation of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. V. Invention description (170) After taking and writing or reading the VF03, the disc drive can be provided with some processing time.

Sync

The Sync block allows the drive to synchronize the bytes following the data block. It has 27 bit lengths of the following bit data: 101000111110110001111000111 Data block The data block is used to record green user data. The block has 639 bytes (each byte = 9 channel bytes) and contains: 512 user data bytes; 4 bytes, whose content is not specified by the standard, in It will be ignored when swapping; 4 CRC polar bytes; 80 ECC polar bytes; and 39 resynchronization bytes. User data bytes User data bytes are allocated to users to record information. The paper standard of CRC and ECC bytes is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) f pack-(please read the precautions on the back and then fill out this page) -53 A7 B7 171) The Ministry of Economic Affairs, Central Bureau of Standards, and Staff Cooperative Printed a Cyclic Backup Check (CRC) byte and error correction code (ECC) byte used by the error detector and correction system to correct erroneous data. ECC is a 16th order Reed-Solomon (Reed-Solomon) code. Re-synchronize the operation byte. The resynchronization byte enables the drive to synchronize again after a large deviation in the data block. It has 9 bits in the following style: 100010001 The content and the location of the rest data are as follows. The resync block is inserted between bytes A15n and A15n + 1, of which 1 SnS39. Buffer block The buffer block has 108 channels in length. In addition to the resynchronization byte, the 8-bit byte in the 3 address block and the data block is converted into channel bits on the disc according to FIGS. 100A and 100B. All other stops in the zone are also defined as the aforementioned channel positions. The green code used to record all data in the disc information area is Group-Code (GCR 8/9). In Figure 97, the written data is decoded by RLL 2,7 Encoding / Decoding (ENDEC) 7-502 in a low capacity, 128Mbyte (low density) mode. GCR encoding / decoding (ENDEC) 7-504 is used in high-capacity, 256Mbyte (high-density) mode. Nest in low-capacity mode (please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Qu ·

、 1T i Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Standards Bureau Negative Consumer Cooperative A7 __________B7 V. Description of the invention (172) ～ -—- The pulse generator 7 still produces pulses with a width of ⑽ nanoseconds, and its writing power is from internal to external areas. 7_0mW changed to 85mw. In the high-capacity mode, the 'write pulse generator 7-507 reduces the width to four nanometers :, but its write power increases from the internal to the external region to 9.0 to 100 °. The selection circuit 7-509 couples the pulse generator 7_5〇6 or 7_5〇7 to the laser diode driver of the magneto-optical read / write head according to the control bit HC. The control bit Hc is 0 in the low-capacity mode and is low in the high-capacity mode. Select the appropriate output to drive the laser diode driver. The write pulse is generated by the frequency synthesizer in the data separator 7_508. This frequency is set to 11 · 6ΜΗζ 'in the low-capacity mode from 10.59MHz to 15.95MHz in the area from the inside to the outside in the high-capacity mode. During reading, the preamplifier 7-51 can be selected to be in sum mode (A + B) or difference mode (A-B). The signal is supplied by the laser diode of the magneto-optical head. In the sum mode, the read ratio of the preamplifier 7-510 changes due to the formatted recess. These depressions are marked at rLl 2, 7 yards, and the confirmation section mark 'VFO block, and track section data. There are 512 user data bytes recorded in each formatted section. In the low-capacity mode, 10,000 tracks are divided into 25 sectors, with a total of 128 Mbytes of data. In the low-capacity mode, the disc is formatted as GCR code. There are 40 sections in the inner area (ie area 1), and the teaching objective is slowly increased to 60 sections in the outer area (ie area 21). Each zone records 512 bytes, so there are a total of 2561 \ / ^ 7! 63 data. This paper scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) from the specifications (21Qx297 public) ------ 1T ------ f (please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs Employee consumption cooperation du printing V. Invention! ^ ~ ^ ~ -———— · In RLL 2,7 mode, the writing of the data is still concave green. When these pits are read in the difference mode (A-B), the preamplifier output waveform is the same as the formatted pits when read in the sum mode (A + B). These signals need only be differentiated once by the dv / dt amplifier 7-512. The pulse corresponding to the center of each recess is generated by digitizing the output (VNOM P, VNOM N) of the programmable filter. The cut-off frequency of the filter is set to 5.4MHz in the low-capacity mode and corresponds to the HC control bit. After being digitized, the considered signal is digitized by a narrow pulse elimination logic (Deglitching Logic) circuit 7-518. The signal is also coupled to the system controller to detect the segment label. In response to the HC control bit, divide the PL0 of the frequency synthesizer in the data separator 7-508! § · Is not set to 3 'and the frequency synthesizer is set to 11-6MHZ. The synchronization data is the same as the original data encoded by RLL ENDEC 7-502. The data is coupled to RLL ENDEC 7-502 for decoding and passed to the data bus for use. In the high-capacity mode, the preamplifier 7-510 selects the difference mode. The read signal at the output of the preamplifier is in the form of NRZ (non-return-to-zero) and requires detection at both ends. This detection can be achieved by the double differentiation of the dv / dt amplifier and the differentiator of the programmable filter chip 7-514 after passing through the AGC amplifier 7-516. The differentiator with high cut-off frequency and the equalizer on wafer 7-514 are driven by HC control bits. This cut-off frequency can be adjusted according to the area identification input to wafer 7-514 (differentiators and equalizers in wafer 7-514 are not used in low-capacity mode). The size of the wafer paper is in accordance with the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (2 丨 0x297 male sauce) I f sand clothing ------ 1T ------ {f Please read the precautions on the back before filling in This page j Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Central Bureau of Precision Industry, Beigong Consumer Cooperative A7 B7_ V. Description of Invention (174) The output signals of 7-514 (VD 丨 FFP, VD 丨 FFN) are digitized, and the logic circuit is eliminated in the narrow pulse 7-518 was eliminated. This circuit suppresses low signal level noise. The turning level is set by the HYST control signal supplied to the narrow pulse cancellation logic circuit 7_518. The DATA P output is provided to the data separator. In conjunction with the HC control signal, the PLO divider is set to 2 and the frequency synthesizer is set to an appropriate frequency, which is determined by the number of zones supplied by the system controller. The cut-off frequency of the programmable filter is also determined according to the area bits, but only in the high-capacity mode. The sync signal is the same as the original GCR encoded data. The data is coupled to GCR ENDEC 7.504 for decoding and then passed to the data bus for use. The entire reading function can be shared by low-capacity and high-capacity modes. RLL 2,7 ENDEC 7-502 and write pulse generator 7-506 are shown as write encoder 7-416 and read decoder 7-426 in Figure 9 + 4. GCR ENDEC 7-504 and write pulse generator 7-507 are shown in Figure 94 as write encoder 7-418 and read decoder 7-428. The selection circuit 7-509 is represented by a switch 7-422 in Fig. 94. The internal control of ENDEC 7-502 and 7-504, which act according to the hc control bit, is represented by switch 7-424 in Figure 94. Preamplifier 7-510, amplifier 7_512, AGC amplifier 7-516, chip 7-514, deglitching logic circuit 7-518, and data separator 7-508 are used in both low-capacity and high-capacity modes. Therefore, the aforementioned components are all part of the reading decoders 7-426 and 7-428. The $ ^ standard applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X297mm) (please read the precautions on the back and then fill out this page). Packed. Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of Invention (175) The mechanical isolator refers to FIGS. 120π__ and 121, showing two examples of the mechanical isolation of the present invention, which are 9_1 () and 9_12, respectively. This mechanical isolator is suitable for use in photonic drives' such as high-density magnetic disks, optical disks, or magnetic / optical readers / writers. The mechanical isolator can also be used in similar systems. Two embodiments of the invention-the first mechanical isolator 9_1Q embodiment are shown in Fig. 20, and the second mechanical isolation 119-12 are implemented in ®-II-. The mechanical isolator 9-12 has compression ribs 9-14. Its function is to ease the compression of the present invention. The mechanical isolators 9 · 10, 9 · 12 can be arranged at the end of the pole piece assembly 9_16. And it is designed with Shiya collision stop 9 · 18 anti-branch frame collision ^ hard metal. Xian 9-20S has been placed at the end of the pole piece 9_16 to prevent vibration and regulate thermal expansion. The mechanical isolator 9 · 10, 9_12 can be made of a material that does not slide easily. Materials such as silicone rubber, high molecular polymers or injection molded plastics can be used. In this example, choose MS40G14H-4RED material. It is easy to understand in appearance, because each mechanical isolator contains a first mechanism to mitigate the influence of unnecessary mechanical forces on the movable optical disc drive element, as well as to the components and sources of unnecessary mechanical forces It supports the second mechanism of the first mechanism, so the mechanical isolator 9-10, 9-12 is an embodiment suitable for use in special applications, so the mechanical isolator of the component is provided. In each of the mechanical isolators 9-10, 9-12, the first mechanism may be achieved by a shock absorbing bumper bar or a collision stopper 9-Ϊ8, and includes at least one compression rib 9-14. The multiple compression ribs 9_14 shown in Figure 12-1 can ease the compression and make it suitable for wood paper. Iin * like Hua (CNS) from the secret (2iGx297 male thin) (please read the precautions on the back and fill in this page) -Subscribe 1. Description of the invention (176)

Please I first, I, I read | I, I, I, I !, I, I, I, -1 page I. The second mechanism includes the housings shown in Figures 120 and 121, which form the ends of the configurable pole piece assembly 9.16. The first mechanism contains materials that are not easy to slide 'and choose materials such as Shixi rubber, polyimide vinegar or injection molded plastic. The first mechanism of the mechanical isolator 9'10, 9-12 provides shock absorption, and has a collision stopper 9 · 18 to prevent the movable frame from colliding with the hard metal. Refer to Appendix A, which contains the hexadecimal executable code in the moving body. The function and structure of the hexadecimal executable code in Appendix A are described below. As detailed below, the 80C188 body handles the interface between Shen Yin and the host computer. The dynamic book contains the necessary execution code, so as to be completely read, written or searched through the interface initialization and digital signal processor, and the drive instruction module can be directly connected to many hardware. Printed and printed by the Employees Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, including the core and SCSI monitor task modules. The core and SCSI monitor task modules receive scs 丨 commands from the host computer. If it is not a media processing task, the SCS monitor monitors any group or executes the task, or instructs the low-level module to execute the task. For all other tasks, the scs 丨 monitor handed over the task to the required driving secretary Wei Xing and waited for the response from the driver = the task layer had completed the task. The driving task layer sequentially specifies any modules to perform the required tasks. These modules include tH command module, _㈣touch and formatting module. This paper standard is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 public completion) A7 5. Invention description (177) module and other modules , Error management module 'exception handling module, and, and digital signal processing as the operation _ Xing Xian task. , Please read the back-end items first, then fill in ’This f page itself makes the module designate the digital signal processor, or specify the hardware device = move the hardware device. The format module specifies the drive command module ^ raT media. Errors found in the media during processing are stored in the error management module located in RAM. The feedback signal from the digital signal processor and the hardware device occurs when the command j is completed, and the signal and interruption are transmitted to the driver for attention. In addition, the driver attention module allows other modules to record the precautions, so when the interruption occurs, the registered module will receive the interruption signal. When the driver pays attention to the model, calls an error, or sends a letter, the driver has no face ^ The group will lean from the driver ’s finger to find the status information of the body ship shop | information ’and the exception handling module will use this information to recover the error. It is not necessary to return the error 丨 the error status to the scs interface and the main surface of the scavenging secret ride and main surface. The group can refer to the Lai Long group or the formatting module to execute the correction again. ㈣ 丨 Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economics. Attention module before giving up _iv. |

I This exception handling procedure can occur on any task, such as search, exit, magnetic deviation, and temperature control. In addition to the error status, the sensing code qualifier j

Was sent to the driving task layer. The sensing code qualifier correctly pointed out that the paper size of this paper is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (2Γ〇χ297 public A7 '---------------- V. Invention description ( 178) ~ ~ ----- ~ error, and allow the SCSI interface to enumerate information to the host computer. The exception handling module can be included in the driver attention module. When operating the magnetic deviation, the deviation magnet needs to be activated, and The deviation is monitored by an analog / digital converter. The deviation value is continuously monitored until it reaches the required range or exceeds 5 ms, and the error status is transmitted to the driving task layer. „During operation, the temperature of the motherboard is also monitored Monitoring. The characteristics of the media will be changed by the increase in temperature. When the temperature changes and the characteristics of the media change, at a high information density, the fixed intensity of the writing beam will cause the recorded green information to overlap. Therefore, monitor the Ambient temperature, the body can adjust the power intensity of the writing beam according to the temperature sensitive characteristics of the media, or re-correction. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs --- Order (please read the note on the back first thing (Enter this page again) The characteristics of the writing beam are also affected by the position of the media. The media is divided into several concentric circles. The number of regions depends on the information density recorded on the media. For dual density green, the media is It is divided into 16 areas. For quadruple-density recording, the media is divided into 32 or 34 areas. The power of the writing beam changes roughly linearly between the areas. In addition, the characteristics of the writing beam and reading beam are also affected by the medium itself Change. Different media manufactured by different manufacturers may have different optical characteristics. When the media rotates at a predetermined speed, the identification code can be read from the media. Information on the optical characteristics of the media is already loaded when the media is manufactured To the non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM) 'and the paper size of the identification code book is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Α4 specification (210Χ297 public daughter) Fifth, the description of the invention (179)' S media m The information is sent to the digital processing annunciator. If the identification cannot be read I 4 The power of the beam is set to a low power, and the power is slowly increased until the identification is read Codes. When-monitoring and changing of selling beams or writing beams, you can use a plurality of digital heart rate conversion monitoring power monitoring and change also includes one or more digital / analog converters. Including the method of changing the rotation speed of the storage medium, it can be changed from the initial rotation speed to the required narrow rotation distance with an acceptable lower limit and an acceptable upper limit. The general method includes providing the storage medium force, so that the rotation speed from the initial Φε towards the The first-upper limit speed changes the rotation speed of the storage medium. The first-upper limit speed is between the initial rotation speed and the required rotation speed; when the force supply step is performed, it occurs when the rotation speed of the storage medium exceeds the first upper limit speed The first signal; after performing the supply step and generating the first signal, when the rotation speed of the storage medium exceeds the acceptable lower limit, the first serial number is generated, and then, the force stored in the medium is ended. In the method of the special embodiment of the Ministry of Economy, Central Standards Bureau and Employee Consumer Cooperatives, the end step also includes setting a second upper limit on the acceptable upper limit of the required rotation speed, and setting a lower limit on the acceptable lower limit of the required rotation speed; And when the rotation speed of the storage medium exceeds the lower limit, the procedure for storing the force of the scorpion is ended. The acceptable upper limit of the required rotation speed is preferably greater than the acceptable lower limit of the required rotation speed. In addition, the acceptable upper limit is 1.5% higher than the rotation speed and the lower acceptable limit is 1.5% lower than the required rotation speed. ”This paper size New Zealand Laijia County (CNS) (2 丨 Qx297 male thin) Printed by the employee consumer cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 _____ B7 V. Description of the invention (180) Another method of the invention includes changing the storage media rotation The speed method can be changed from the initial rotation speed to the desired selection speed with an acceptable first speed limit and an acceptable second speed limit. The method includes providing the storage medium force, thereby changing the rotation speed of the storage medium from the initial rotation speed toward the first intermediate speed limit. The first intermediate speed limit is between the initial rotation speed and the required rotation speed; During the step, when the rotation speed of the storage medium exceeds the first-intermediate speed limit, a first signal is generated; after performing the supply step and generating the first signal, when the rotation speed of the storage medium exceeds the acceptable first speed limit, a second signal is generated Signal; after that, end the force of the storage medium. In a special embodiment of the method, the ending step further includes setting a first operating speed limit at an acceptable upper first speed limit, and setting a second speed at an acceptable second upper speed limit Limit; and when the rotation speed of the storage medium is between the first speed limit and the second speed limit, the process of the force of the storage medium ends. The difference between the first operation speed limit and the required rotation speed is preferably 1.5% of the required rotation speed, and the difference between the second operation speed limit and the required rotation speed is preferably 1.5% of the required rotation speed. When the spindle motor starts to rotate from a stop or slow speed, the drive instruction module writes the upper limit of the rotation speed to the digital signal processor. The upper limit is lower than the required rotation speed. When the spindle speed exceeds this upper limit, the digital signal processor generates an interrupt. At this point, the acceleration of the spindle motor speed may decrease at this point. Afterwards, the drive command module writes another upper limit to the digital signal processor. The new upper limit is lower than the acceptable lower limit for normal operation. When the spindle speed exceeds

(Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) I I K— ·

， 1T 丄 P The Ministry of Economy, Central Standards Administration, Negative Labor Consumer Cooperative Seal «. A 7 __________ B7 V. Description of the invention (⑻) '-~ When the new upper limit' The final silk and lower limit are written to the digital signal processor. These final limits define the speed range of the spindle, which differs by approximately 1%. Although the algorithm related to the magneto-optical drive device turning the spindle motor up or down is disclosed, it is not limited to the application of the algorithm to optical drive devices, including CD-ROM drive devices, CD_R drive devices. Write Once Read Many (WORM) drive, DVD drive, and audio CD drive. In addition, the Lai algorithm can be applied to magnetic drive devices, both fixed disk drives and removable disk drives. During the initial rotation process, according to the aforementioned process, the medium is first rotated to the lowest speed for normal operation. At this time, the identification code is read. If the ID code cannot be read, the media is rotated to the next lowest speed for normal operation, and the ID code is tried again. This process is repeated until the identification code is still read black at the highest speed during normal operation, and an error condition is generated, or the identification code is successfully retrieved. There may be multiple forms of memory storage in the drive. First, it may be to update the electronically erasable programmable read-only memory (nash EEPR0M). The implementation of the invention may include 256 Kbytes of Flash EEPROM. Second, it can be static random access memory (SRAM), and the implementation of the invention can include 256 Kbytes of SRAM. Finally, it may be NVRAM, and the implementation of the invention may include 2 Kbytes of NVRAM. This paper red ^ Applicable (CNS) A4 ^ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this tile)-Order 1

*-. -I

The defect management module generates a defect table when formatting the media format, and writes the defect table into the media. When the previously formatted media is loaded into the drive, the defect management module will read the defect table and cut it into memory. The defect management module can then view the defect table to ensure that the digital signal processor or hardware device does not directly access the defective part of the media. The commands SEEK-COMP_ON and SEEK-COMP-OFF are turned on separately

Activate and deactivate algorithms that optimize the search time for specific parts of the media. This command can directly enable the algorithm, or generate an interrupt to specify other modules to start the algorithm. In addition, other implementation instructions NORMAL PLL

•• Μ —I

BWIDTH, HGH_PLL_BWIDTH and VHGH-PLL-BW 丨 DTH can read the value from the memory, and store the value in the read chip memory. In addition, this instruction can calculate the value and store the value in the read wafer memory. There may be similar implementations for 2x write power correction and 4x write power correction. During the manufacturing process, the write power of the digital radiant light source obtained from the digital-to-analog converter. The write power can be measured as the value of different digital / analog converters, and a reasonable value can be determined ^ the reasonable value can be stored in the memory of the drive. During use of the drive, the digital value obtained from the digital / analog converter controls the write power of the radiant energy light source, and measures the reasonable numeric value. These reasonable numbers are compared with the stored reasonable numbers until the Zhongguan Family Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21〇x297 mm) is used in the original paper. Please read the intentions before filling out this page. The Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed and invented instructions for consumption cooperation of employees of the Central Bureau of Preservation of the Ministry of Economic Affairs of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. Printed and invented (183 in the Ninja Fan Garden, 丨 4 changer. This> etc. —㈣Cut digital 7 analog conversion ^ In addition, as mentioned above, this process can correct the writing power according to the temperature. Then execute ^ “according to the temperature, media form and other factors,“ driver management device ° shame ”SERV〇S recalibration The slave digital signal is set in% to set SERV〇s according to some different factors. The system requires that the aforementioned information is recorded and stored in the memory of the device when the drive is manufactured. The function generates a drive interruption. The request function of the front panel can determine the status of the drive, and based on the information, the command can be allowed to complete or stop the command. The stylistic motion designation is the best designation. In particular, sliding The movement of the rack component requires power. The power demand is related to the speed of the carriage, and the generation of pyrogens is related to the power demand. Therefore, the body's microprogramming language searches for a given command without affecting the access time. The movement speed of the component is reduced. When the instruction is queued in the microprogramming language, the module in the microprogramming language determines the starting radius position of the slide assembly relative to the storage medium and the slide assembly relative to the storage medium The initial circumferential position and the initial circumferential speed of the storage medium. The module in the microprogramming language also determines the purpose of the carriage assembly relative to the storage medium Sa. The target position and the carriage assembly relative to the storage medium Target circle position. Then the microprogramming language is for the carriage assembly f ------------ I '^-H-I— H ___ (please read the precautions on the back before filling; ^ this € ) «II · ί-·

B7 V. Description of the invention (184) Jiyi-Kuidulin. The editing trajectory is related to the initial half # position |, the starting circumferential position, the target radius position, and the target ^ circumferential position, which are related to the initial circumferential speed. The calculation of the velocity trajectory (iv), if the sliding pure phase velocity trajectory moves from the starting position M to the target position, the carriage assembly will reach the aforementioned target position at approximately the same time in the circumferential and radial directions. The microprogramming language will guide the carriage assembly to move from the starting position to the target position on the velocity track. Before the carriage calculates the speed track in the recording language, it starts to move from the starting position to the target position at a predetermined speed. The velocity trajectory for the radius and the circumferential position in the middle will be calculated instead of the velocity trajectory calculated with respect to the starting radius and the circumferential position. When the micro-distance δU ends the trajectory calculation of different speeds, the radius and the circumferential position of the middle and the radius and the circumferential position of the carriage assembly are consistent at this time. In addition, the 'microprogramming language can determine the target circumferential speed of the storage medium. In this case, the velocity trajectory is further related to the target circumferential velocity. The carriage assembly actually moves from the initial position to the target position with a speed trajectory, and the rotation rate of the storage medium changes from the initial circumferential speed to the target circumferential speed. In this case, the 'slide assembly' will actually reach the target position in both radius and circumferential direction. The storage medium can simultaneously reach the target peripheral speed before or after the carriage assembly reaches the target position. Although the optimization algorithm of the magneto-optical drive device is disclosed, it does not limit the microprogramming language to execute the optimization algorithm and apply it to the optical drive device, including the CD-ROM drive device, CD-R drive device, and Mini-Disc drive Device, write once, read many (WORM) drive, DVD drive, and audio CD drive. In addition, the algorithm can be applied to the paper standard of magnetic drive. It is applicable to the Chinese national standard (CNS> Λ4 specification (210X297mm). Both disc drive devices. The SCSI eject command can be disabled by a selector switch. The selector switch can be implemented using a DIP switch.

The External ENDEC test and Glue logic test include reading and writing information in certain situations to ensure that External ENDEC and

Glue logic has proper functions. The aforementioned two tests can be performed as part of the self-test when power is supplied. The following describes the microprogram language system in more detail. At the time of patent application, the specification describes the best mode in which the invention can currently be fully implemented. As can be understood from the technology, the following part includes certain restricted areas marked as &quot; TBD &quot;, where &quot; TBD &quot; indicates the areas where the aforementioned implementation is applied. -------- Eryi (please read first Note on the back and then fill out this page) The paper standard printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (210X 297mm). Disclosure of Invention (186) ~~ 'Disc Drive SCSI Firmware (Disc Drive SCSI Firmware) The purpose of the following paragraphs is to introduce JupitM 5 25-inch &quot; 〇 disc drive device SCSI microprogramming language Functional characteristics. The microprogram language T is part of the control code executed by the 80C188 CPU. This discussion will not include the functional characteristics of the control code executed by the DSP. This aspect is used to develop the microprogram language of the present invention. The requirements will be included in this discussion and can be found under the paragraph titled “A. Firmware Requirements” below. The following old documents are incorporated by reference here, 1) Cirrus

Logic CL-SM330, Optical Disk ENDEC / ECC, April 1991, 2) Cirrus Logic CL-SM331, SCSI Optical Disk Controller, April 1991, 3) MOST Manufacturing, Inc., 1,7 ENDEC / FORMATTER, 1994 August 2, 2014 4) M0ST Manufacturing, Inc., Jupiter-I Product Specification, September 15, 1994, and 5) M0ST Manufacturing, Inc., 80C188 / TMS320C5X Comunications, Rev_XH, 1994 On the 25th. SCSI support (SCSI SUPPORT): SCSI Command: The list of SCSI commands supported by the Jupiter microprogramming language is shown in Table 1 to Table 5 below. In addition, the supported command settings are listed. These tables 1 to 5 confirm those commands to install 1x, CCW, Ο-ROM or P in the issue (issue). This paper standard is applicable to China National Standards (CNS) Α4 specification (210Χ297 Mm) Clothing --------, 1τ —----- ^ (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Employee consumption of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs is 8t; printed by Zuoshe A 7 B7 5 2. Description of the invention (187) The drive device of the ROM medium is invalid, and the column of the P-ROM indicates the command to the block of the read-only group of the P-ROM medium. Table--Group 0, 6-Byte Command Code Command Name 1x CCW P-ROM 00h Test Unit Ready 01 h Rezero Unit 03h Request Sense 04h Format Unit No TBD TBD 07h Reassign Block No TBD No 08h Read 09h Erase OAh Write No No OBh Seek OCh Erase No No No 12h Inquity 15h Mode Select 16h Reserve Unit 17h Release Unit 1Ah Mode Sense 1Bh Start Stop Unit 1Ch Receive Diagnostics 1Dh Send Diagnostics 1Eh Prevent Allow Medium Removal (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page Outfit

* 1T The size of this paper is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) Α4 specification (210X297 mm) A7 ___B7 V. Description of invention (188) Table 2 printed by the Staff Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs-Group 1, 10-bit Group Command Code Command Name 1x CCW P-ROM 25h Read Capacity 28h Read 2Ah Write No No 2Bh Seek 2Ch Erase No No No 2Eh Write and Verify No No 2Fh Verify 35h Synchronize Gache No No 36h Lock Unlock Cache 37h Read Defect Data 3Bh Write Buffer 3Ch Read Buffer 3Eh Read Long 3Fh Write Long No No Table 3-Group 2, 10-byte Command Code Command Name 1x CCW P-ROM 40h Change Definition 41h Write Same No No 55h Mode Select 5Ah Mode Sense Table 4-Group Group 5, 12-byte command code Command name 1x CCW P-ROM A8h Read &quot; AAh Write No No This paper standard uses the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) ------ --t outfit ------ order (please read the notes on the back before filling in this page) A7 _____B7 ACh Erase No No No AEh Write and Verify No No AFh Verify B7h Read Defect Data V. Description of invention (189) Table 5-Group 7, vendor's unique command code Command name 1x ccw P-ROM EOh Peek / Poke CPU memory ——— E1h Read Drive Attention Count ________ E5h Read Trace Buffer E7h Read / Write ESDI E8h Read Special EAh Write Special No No ECh Erase Absolute No No No EAh Manufacturing Test TBD Clean Optics (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) The complete introduction of the SCSI command settings supported by the cooperative printing is provided in paragraph 9 of the j upite "-丨 Product Specification, and is provided in SCSI Support, which is hereby incorporated by reference. More importantly, the Log Select and Log Sense commands in the Jupiter microprogramming language will not be supported. SCSI Messages: The Jupiter microprogramming language will support the SCS message list in Table 6. Table 6-Message Code Information Name Supported by SCSI OOh Command Complete 01 h Extended .Messages OOh-Modify Data Pointer 01 h-Synchronous Data Transfer Request This paper standard is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210x297 Gongchu) A7 B7 02h Save Date Pointer 03h Restore 04h Disconnect 05h Initiator Detected Error 06h Abort 07h Message Reject 08h No Operation 09h Message Parity Error OAh Linded Command Complete OBh Linded Command Complete (With Flag) OCh Bus Device Reset OEh Clear Queue 80h + Identify 190) (Please read the notes on the back. Please fill in this page first). It is important to note that the Terminate I / O Message will not be supported. SCSI Mode Pages: The list of mode pages supported by Jupiter microprogramming language is shown in Table 7.

, 1T Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs-Industrial and Consumer Cooperatives Printed Table 7-Supported Mode Page Information Name OOh Unit Attention Parameters 01 h Read / Write Error Recovery Parameters 02h Disconnect / Peconnect Gont "ol / Pa" 3mete "s 07h Verify Error Recovery Parameters 08h Caching Parameters Page OBh Medium Type Supported Parameters OCh Notch and Partition Parameters 30h Vendor Unique Parameters 3Bh MOST Engineering Features Control 3Ch Error Retiy Limit Parameters 3Dh Vendor Unique Inquiry Data Page 3Eh Vendor Unique Manufacturing Data Page (CNS) Α4 specification (210X297mm) A7-__B7 5. Send ^^ ~-Saved Pages: Jupiter microprogram language will not be supported. Also note that 20h and 21h in the mode page will not be supported -------- 一 装 — _ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) Reset: Reset is performed by the drive device, resets the SCSI bus, and auto-converter (Autochanger) reset, or 12V power failure response. These functions are The device executes each reset signal. The following will be introduced immediately. SCSI Bus Reset: When the SCSI bus reset signal occurs, INT3 of 80C188 will be generated. The use of NT3 allows the drive to react The adaptability of reset is regarded as the reset of hardware or software. However, the use of INT3 assumes that the interrupt vector of INT3 is still valid. If the microprogramming language does not pay attention to overwriting, it enters the interrupt vector table (IVT ), The reset will not restore the drive device. The user's only option is to turn the drive power off and then on. INT3 interrupt service routine (| SR) is reset by hardware or software. Is it necessary for employees of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Standards Bureau to consume The cooperative prints the selection switch for execution to determine. If the hardware reset selection switch is enabled, the hardware reset will be performed. If the hardware reset selection switch is disabled, the software reset will be executed. Hardware SCSI reset (Hard SCS 丨 Reset): When the SCSI Bus Reset is detected by the drive device and the Hard Reset selection switch is enabled (indicating a hardware reset), the drive device, (1) will not try to deal with any currently possible The order carried out, (2) will not be written in any of the RAM of the buffer (for example, in the writing of the book and the Gu Jinguan home transfer (CNS) M inspection (2ω × 297 public Chu) Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Standards Bureau negative labor consumption cooperative printing System A7 ________B7____ V. Description of the invention (192) Enter the cache) data to the media '(3) No SCSI device reservation will be saved, (4) All processing commands will be removed from the queue, ⑼The steps of the following paragraph, P〇werUp Sequence, will be performed on the hardware reset, (6) will set the value of each mode page to its default (defau ⑴ value, and (7) will set the unit attention status. There is no hardware reset To reset various chips on the board, the microprogramming language must use a chip that can handle software reset. The microprogramming language must also initialize the scratchpad, such as page 36 of the Cirrus Logic SM330 manual and page 47 of the Cirrus Logic SM331 manual Page introduction These manuals explain the difference between chip hardware and software reset. Soft SCSI Reset: When SCSI Bus Reset is detected by the drive device and the Hard Reset selection switch is not available (instructs software reset) , The drive device, (1) will not try to process any currently possible commands, (2) will not write any data in the buffer RAM (for example, in the write cache) to the media, (3) No SCSI device reservations will be saved, (4) All processing commands will be removed from the queue, the software will be reset to execute the following paragraph, Powerup Sequence, step '(6) will set each The value of the mode page is its default (default) value, and (7) will set the unit to pay attention to the situation. Autochanger Reset (Autochanger Reset): If the autochanger accepts a self-inverter reset during the startup sequence, the drive device , (A) Autochange "EJECT must be ignored, and b) Before the SCS is initialized, the paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A # specification (2 丨 〇 &gt; &lt; 297mm) (please read the notes on the back first Fill in the matter This page}

, 1T Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Standards Bureau employee consumption cooperation Du printed A7 B7 V. Invention description (193) Must wait for Autochanger RESET to be released (deasserted). The autochanger can assert Autochanger RESET at any time to change the SCSI ID of the drive. 12V Power Failure: When the 12V power failure is below (TBD), a hardware reset will be generated for 80C188, SM330, SM331 and R | _L (1, 7) External ENDEC. Once ENDEC is reset ’, this will drive Servo Reset to its initial state, suggesting that the DSP and the server will be reset in sequence. Unclearable Conditions: When a serious error (listed in Table 8 below) is detected by the drive device, the unclearable condition exists. Failure to clear the situation forces the drive to sense the request (Request

Sense) command response, Sense with HARDWARE ERROR

Error codes for Key, INTERNAL CONTROLLER ERROR, and Additional Sense Code Qualifier for errors. Send

The Diagnostic SCSI command can remove the source of hardware errors and clear the unclearable condition. If the Send Diagnostic command is not successful in clearing the hardware error, then the SCSI Bus Reset will be required to clear the unclearable condition. When the drive device cannot be cleared, the accepted SCS bus reset will force the drive device to perform a hardware reset and implement all settings for its diagnosis. In the method, when an operation is performed, any serious error is found that the operation is currently disabled, and then subsequent operations are prevented from attempting to change the media drive. ------ IT ------ ^ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page)

A7 __B7 printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Invention description (194) Table 8-Explanation of severe error symbol name ASCQ_NO_TCS_AVAIL No information box available ASCQ_CZ_RD_REE When reading the control track / SFPM ^ ASCQ_UNDEF_UNIT_ATTN Undefined Unit Attention ASCQ_CPU_FAILURE CPU Invalid ASCQ_BUFF_RAM_FAILURE Invalid buffer RAM ASCQ_SM330_FAILURE Cirrus Logic SM330 Invalid ASCQ SM331_FAILURE Cirrus Logic SM331 Invalid ASCQ_WCS1_FAILURE Cirms Logic Write Control Store Test Titanium # 1 ASCQ_WCS2_FAILURE Cirrus Logic END_QQ Undefined redistribution ASCQ_LOAD_SEQ_FAILURE When loading Format Sequencer ASCQ_TOO_MANY_ATTNS Too many Drive Attention ASCQ_DSP_CMD_CHECKSUM DSP command check and (Checksum) failure ASCQ_LASER_FAIL Laser power control failure ASCQ_HRDWR FAIL unknown FAW_READ_ACCESS_UNKNOWN Interruption of ASCQ_DRV_INIT_FAIL Invalidation ASCQ_INV_OP Invalid DSP command ASCQ_RELOC_LIMIT_RCHD Try too many redistributions for the same sector ASCQ_DRV_SELECT_FAIL Drive device selection failure ASCQ_MAGNET_FAILED Multi-Initiator Support: Multi-initiator support in Jupiter microprogramming language Support. The queue of incoming requests will be maintained by the microprogramming language, in order to request the cut off command from the multiple initiator command. The tag queue command will not be supported initially. However, microprogramming language design will not hinder the ability to add this feature in the future. The size of this paper is the financial house of Ege (2 丨 0X297mm) ----- ------, Ding -------- ^ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) S99439 A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (195) When a non-media access command is accepted and the drive is currently cut off, the media access command and microprogram language must be able to provide new commands while maintaining contact. The correct way to provide this capability is not specified. The commands supported in the non-disconnection fashion are listed in Table 9 below. Table 9-No Cut Off SCSI Command

Code Information Name 00h Test Unit Ready 03h Request Sense 12h Inquiry 16h Reserve Unit 17h Release Unit 1Ah Mode Sense 1Ch Receive Diagnostic 1Eh Prevent / Allow Media Removal 25h Read Capacity 5Ah Mode Sense EOh Peek / Poke CPU Memory E1h Read Drive Attention Count E5h Read Trace Buffer E7h Read / Write ESDI (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) Binding · Order SCSI REQ / ACK response printed by the Consumer Labor Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs: Cirrus SM331 chips only accept SCSI command description symbol boxes ( CDb) The first 6 bytes then generate an interrupt. Therefore, the microprogramming language must use Programmed I / 0 (PI0) to convert any maintained bytes. If the microprogram language is delayed, the command will stop between the sixth and seventh bytes. Applicable to Cirrus SCS 丨 interrupted response-driven paper wave scale. Applicable to China's g-sample standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 × 297 public directors) A7 B7 printed by employees ’consumer cooperatives of the Central Standard Rating Bureau of the Ministry of Economy V. Invention description (196) Potential factors Must be within the following range: 2〇pS is a moderate time, 40ps is a bad time length and 150ps is unacceptable. SCSI Inquiry Command (SCSI Inquiry Command): The drive will respond to the SCSI Inquiry Command and return the microprogram language revision level to the SCSI microprogram language and the DSP microprogram language, checksum to the SCSI microprogram language Flash PROM and DSP prom, and a bit system indicate whether software reset or software reset is currently supported. Initialization (INITIALIZATION): Diagnostics: Diagnostics performed by the drive unit are performed during the power-on self-test (POST) in response to the SCSI Send Diagnostics Command, or when the drive unit detects that the serial diagnostic interface cable is connected. Power-on self-test (POST): During POST, the drive will perform the tests listed below. A detailed description of each test is provided in the title below, which will be provided under B. Post Definition. These tests include, (1) 80C188 register and flag test, (2) CPU RAM test, (3) 80C188 interrupt vector test, (4) R0M check and test, (5) SM331 register test, ( 6) SM331 sequence generator test, (7) SM330 ENDEC test, (8) External ENDEC test, (9) Glue Logic test, (10) Buffer RAM test, (11) DSP POST, and (12) bias magnetic test. This paper uses the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X 297mm) I-one pack n-order f (please read the precautions on the back and then fill out this page) Page Workers and Consumers Cooperative Printed A7 ________B7__ V. Description of the invention (197) 'If the buffer RAM test is performed, it can be determined that those of the buffer RAM are damaged, but only the failure of the hardware is reported. The buffer RAM test will be performed in two stages. The first stage will only test the 64K bytes of the buffer. At that time, the drive can respond to the SCSI command issued by Busy. After the drive is initialized, the rest of the buffer RAM will be tested in the background mode (see the section on Powerup Seqnence, described in detail below). If a portion of the buffer RAM is detected to be damaged during the background test, the drive will declare that it cannot be cleared. Send Diagnostic Command (Send Diagnostic Command): When the drive device receives the SCSI command, the drive device will perform the following diagnosis, (1) R〇M check and test, (2) SM331 sequence generator test, (3) SM331 SCS丨 Interface test, (4) SM330 ENDEC test, (5) Extemal ENDEC test, (6) G | ue L〇g | _ test, (7) Buffer RAM test, (8) bias magnetic test. The tests performed in response to the sending of the diagnostic command will be the same as the tests performed by the drive device when the POS is executed 'as described above. Serial Diagnostic Interface (Serial Diagnostic Interface): When the drive is turned on, the diagnosis from No. 4 to No. 4 in the previous boot self-test (POST) will be performed, and then check to see if the electrical specification of the stab diagnostic interface is currently connected. on. If the cable is not detected, the drive will continue to perform POST. If the cable is detected, the drive will no longer be executed (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) 衮 ------------------ A7 A7 2. The Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs printed an invention description (198) POST and prepared to receive diagnostic commands through the serial diagnostic interface. The diagnostic command and its format are beyond the scope of this discussion. --------. 衮 丨-(please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Chip lnitialization: SM330 initialization: This section introduces the initialization of Cirrus Logic SM330. The memory methods (mnemonics) used by the SM330 scratchpad are listed in Table 31, and are provided in the following paragraph C. SM330 Registe. The steps of Cirrus Logic SM330 initialization are listed below: (1) General purpose output (EDC_GPO ) The current value of the register is stored 0 (2) Set the EDC_ERROR_RESET field in EDC_CHIP_RESET, EC_OPER_HALT and EDC_CFG_REG1 to reset the chip.

(3) Set the ED_VU_PTR_SRC-MODE, EDC_130MM_M0DE and EDC_1_SPEED_T0L blocks in EDC_CFG_REG2. (4) The EDC_SPT register is set to the default number of sections for each track. SECT_PER_TRK_RLL_1X_512_1 ° (5) Set the EDC_SM_WIN POS, EDC_SMM (shift left 3) and EDC_SMS blocks in the EDC_SMC register. (6) The DEC_RMC register is set to the default value of 2. (7) The EDC_ID_FLD_SYN_CTL register is set to the default values of 2_out_of_3 IDs and 9_out_of_12 Data Sync Marks. — (8) The EDC_WIN_CTL register is initially 0x00. This paper scale is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) Α4 specification (210Χ 297 mm) A7 A7 A DR-M and order five, invention description (199) H by writing people 〇 湖 to EDC-CFG-REG 1 scratchpad Take the wafer out of reset. (1〇) The value stored in the EDC_GPO register is written back to the register. (11) The EDC-CFG-REG3 register is initially 0 × 〇〇. (12) By writing OxFF to EDC-ΙΝΤ-STAT and [〇〇_1 \ / 1 £ 0_ £ foot 6_ £ ask the register to clear all chip interrupts. (13) Write 0x00 to EDC-INT-EN REG and EDC-MED-ERR-EN register to stop all chip interruption. (14) Write 40 into SF_SYNC-BYTE-CNT_LMT register initialization sequence generator sync byte count. _ (15) The data buffer address index is initially 0 (EDC_DAT_BUF-ADR _L, EDC DAT EDC_DAT_BUF-ADR_H register). (16) The EDC_TOF_WIN_CTL register is cleared to οχοο. (17) EDC_PLL_LOCK-CTL register is cleared to 0x00. (18) The EDC_PLL_LOCK_CTL register is initially 0 × E〇. (19) The EDC_PLL_RELOCK_CTL register is cleared to 0 × 00 (20) The EDC_LFLD_WIN_CTL register is cleared to 0 × 00. (21) ECC Corrector RAM addresses 0x00 and 0 × 〇ι are zero. (22) The ECC Corrector RAM addresses 0x0F and 0x016 are zero. (23) ECC Correctof RAM addresses 0x20 and 0x027 are zero. The size of this paper is universal Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) (Please read the notes on the back before filling in this page) A7 ______B7 printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economy V. Description of Invention (200) (24) The critical initial ECC Corrector RAM for the sector correction is OxOF. (25) The initial threshold for interleave correction ECC Corrector RAM is 0x03. (26) Initialize EDC_GPO register by clearing SP_DIR_, BIAS_EN_, BIAS_E_W_, SCLK, SDO and MIRROR_TX_Bit. (27) Turn off the LED of the drive unit. SM331 Initialization: This section introduces the initialization of Cirrus Logic SM331. The memory methods (mnemonics) used by the SM331 register are listed in Table 32. In the following paragraph, D. SM331 Registe is provided. The initialization of SM331 includes the selection switch of the read chip and the initialization of SCSI, Buffer Manager and Format Sequencer. In order to read the three-state selection switch (trj-stated) on the SCSI bus, the microprogramming language performs the following steps: (1) Set BM_SW_RE-SET in the BM_MODE_CTL register to reset SM331. (2) Clear BM_SW_RE-SET in BM_MODE_CTL register to make SM331 out of reset. (3) SF_LOCAL_HINT_EN, SF LOCAL DIN ΕΝ and SF_SCSIJO_40 47H bits set in SF_MODE_CTL register. This paper size is suitable for China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210x297 mm) II I- -I 1-- I 11 In I ^ -61 1 ^ 1 I-I .- -1 I Mi 3,-mouth (please read the note on the back first Please fill in this page again) A7 R7 '..., 11 D' printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economy V. Description of the invention (201) (4) Set the BM_MOE_DISABLE bit in the BM_MODE_CTL register. (5) The BM_SCHED_DATA register is read twice. ( The first reading starts the actual conversion of the data from the buffer, which is captured during the second reading.) (6) The value of the read complement is stored and stored as the value of the selection switch. ⑺ Clear The BM_MOE_DIS-ABLE bit in the BM-MODE-CTL register. The steps to initialize the SCSI part of the SM331 are listed below: (1) The SCSI ID of the drive device is read from the 20-pin connector via the GLIC B_INP_REG register Take and place in the variable targetjd. (2) SCSI Parity Enable selects to read from the 20-pin connector via the GLIC_JBJNP_REG register. (3) The SCSI ID of the SCSI_MODE_CLT register and drive device, SCSI Parity Enable installation (setup), and the CLK_PRES- CALE block are set. (4) The phase control register SCSI__PHA_CTL is cleared to 0x00. (5) The initial value of the synchronous control register SCSI_SYNC_CTL is (OxOF-1) · 0X10. (6) Clear Buffer Manager FIFO by writing 0x10 to BM-STAT-CTL register. (7) BM-SCSI_DATA_2T and BM_DRAM_BURST_EN are set in Buffer Manage Control register BM_STAT CTL. This paper scale is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X297mm) (please read the precautions on the back and then fill out this page) ϋ ^ · — ^ n A7 B7 5. Description of the invention (202)

(8) Buffer Manager Transfer control register bm_XFER _CTL is initialized to 0x00. (9) SCSI Reselection ID register SCSI_SEL_REG is set to the SCSI ID of the drive. (10) SCSI_RESET, SCSI_ATTN, SCSI_OFST_OVERRUN, SCSI BUS FREE, SCSI BFR PTY ERR, SCSI_BUS_PTY_ERR bits set in SCSI Status register SCSI_STAT_1 ° (11) SCSI_STAT_2 register 54 is initialized to OxFF. (12) Disable the SCSI interrupt by writing 0x00 to the SCSI_NT_EN_2 register. The steps to initialize the Buffer Manager part of SM331 are as follows: (1) Set BM_SCSI_DATA_2T and BM: DRAM_BURST_EN in Buffer Manager Control register BM_TAT_TL: DRAM_BURST_EN bit 0 (2) Buffer Manager Transfer control register BM_XFER_CTL is initially 0x00. (3) Set the BM_DRAM 'BM_256K_RAM, BM_PTY-ΕΝ and BM_NO_ WS in the Buffer Manager Mode Control register BM_MODE_CTL ° (4) DRAM timing is initialized in the BM_TIME_CTL and BM_DRAM_RE-F-PER registers. (5) The size of the Buffer RAM is coded into the BM_BUFF_SIZE temporary memory. The size of this paper is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (210Χ297mm) (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

* 1T 1 299439 A7 B7 V. Description of invention (203) Printed by the employee consumer cooperative of the Central Operations Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (6) Disk Address Pointer in BM-DAPL, BM-DAPM and BM_DAPH registers The initial value is 0x000000. (7) The host address pointer (Host Address Pointer) is initially 0x000000 in the BM_DAPL, BM_DAPM and BM_DAPH registers. (8) The stop address pointer (stop address pointer) is initially 0x000000 in the BIVI_SAPL, BM-SAPM, and BM_SAPH registers. SM331 format sequence generator (F〇 "mat Sequencer) part of the initialization steps are as follows: (1) by writing 0x1 F (stop address) to the sequencer start address temporary SF_SEQ_STRT-ADR to stop format sequence generation (2) The default segment size of 512 bytes is set in the segment size register SF_SECT_SIZE by writing 〇x〇〇. (3) Writing 0x028 to SF_SYNC_BYTE &lt; Initialize the Sync byte count. 1. ⑷ Set the SF_DATA, BR, and FLD_EN to initialize the operation control register SF_0P CTL. ', 〖Policy-(please read the precautions on the back, please fill in this book) 0x00 ⑼ branch The address register SF-BRANCH-ADR is initially

Forbidden Corruption I (6) Write 0x00 to the SF_NT_EN register to load the generator in the sequence generator ^ The default write control storage (WCS) program is loaded into the format sequence

• I- I I Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Department of Economic Affairs of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 _________B7_ V. Description of Invention (204) RLL (1,7) Initialization of External ENDEC: (TBD).

Glue Logic IC (GUC) initialization: GLIC initialization includes the following steps: (1) Set the Read Gate Hold Override bit in the GLIC_JB_CTRL_REG register, and (2) enable all interrupts in the GLICJNT-en-reg register . SCSI initialization: The SCSI initialization microprogramming language will use the 20-pin connection as the source of the drive's SCSMD and SCSI Parity Enable. When the cable is connected, the signal will be automatically detected and driven. When the cable is not connected, the same pin will have a patch cord to install to indicate the Scsi ID and SCSI Parity Enable used. The limit of the SCSI bus within the drive unit will be selected via the selector switch. Those interactions that will have no micro-programming language are required to support scsi's limitations. Power-on sequence: Table 10 below details the steps to execute the power-off sequence. The series of boot, software reset and hardware reset indicate the steps performed under boot status' software reset or hardware reset. If the resulting software reset is accepted 'and cannot be cleared, the reset will replace the hardware reset to force the drive to complete all diagnostic settings. π 张 Scale tree 嶋 榡 ~ 見 衣 &quot; ------ ^ (Please read the precautions on the back and then fill out this page) A 7 B7 printed by the Staff Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economy V. Description of invention (205 ) Table 10 Power-on hardware reset software reset instructions Y 1) ENDEC advocates that the Servo Re set signal is supported. The SCSI chip cannot respond to the selection. Y Y 2) S0C188 chooses to initialize ROM, SRAM and peripheral chips. Peripheral Control ° Y Y 3) 8〇Cl88 disable timer. Y Y Y 4) 8〇Cl88 initial interrupt controller. Y Y 5) S0C188 executes CPU flag test. Y Y 6) 8〇Cl88 performs CPU register ripple test. At this point, the 80C188 checks to see if all hardware resets should be performed or changes called Firm Reset can be replaced. Firm Reset will not reset the DSP. This method saves a lot of time and does not force the DSP to download (download) the code or cause the DSP to reinitialize all its service circuits. Firm Reset will check the valid RAM mark (TBD) in the 80C188 CPU memory. The unclear condition will not appear, and the DSP can respond to the appropriate Get Status command. If any of these responses are not serious, the drive will perform a hardware reset. Continue to explain the number immediately after Table 11. Table 11 Startup Hardware Firmware Software Description Y Y '—--------- ^-7) 80C188 resets External ENDEC, which advocates Serv〇 Re s e t signal. Y Y Y 8) 80C188 performs CPU RAM test. Y Y Y 9) 80C188 executes the CPU interrupt test. Y Y Y 10) 80C188 initially enables all interrupt vectors. This paper scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (210X297mm) {Package-(please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page}, -0 Printed coffee, such as A7, the Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs B7 V. Description of the invention (206) YYY 11) 80C188 executes the CPU ROM checksum. Y Y Y Y 12) 80C188 initializes all chips and timers. Y Y Y 13) 80C188 tests Cirrus Logic SM331. Y Y Y 14) 80C188 tests Cirrus Logic SM330. Y Y Y 15) 80C188 test RLL (1, 7) External ENDEC. Y Y Y 16) 80C188 performs buffer RAM test. Only the first 64K bytes of the buffer RAM are tested. Y Y Y 17) 80C188 executes Bias Magnet test Y Y Y Y 18) The system microprogramming language performs initialization on itself (ie, core initialization). Y Y Y Y 19) The drive device initializes the perception data structure. Y Y Y Y 20) The initial host (host) request information structure of the driving device. Y Y Y Y 21) Enable interruption of SCSI and Drive Attention. Y Y Y Y 22) The initial SCSI interface and the driver can respond to any SCSI command BUSY. Y Y 23) 80C188 releases Serv. Reset. Y Y 24) The DSP code is downloaded from the SCSI ROM. Y Y Y 25) DSP execution start and complete diagnostic limit setting (TBD). Y Y 26) 80C188 requests the location of Velocity Table and downloads the default (low speed) table. Y Y 27) 80C188 confirmation (TBD) DSP functions properly. If not, Servo Reset is claimed to be released, and then repeat the procedure of step (23) and try again. Y Y Y Y 28) 80C188 enables all interrupts from GLIC. Y Y Y Y 29) The initial mode page structure of the driving device. Y Y Y Y 30) The initial Inquiry Data structure of the driving device. Y Y Y Y 31) The DSP confirms that the Eject Limit switch is in the correct position. If it is not correct, 80C188 correction (TBD). Y Y Y Y 32) The driving device checks whether the carriage appears and turns it up. Y Y Y Y 3 3) The DSP is instructed to close the focus and tracking circuits. If the DSP proposes a failure of the carriage initialization, two additional retries will be performed before the "slide initialization failure". Y Y 34) The drive implements the media type determination algorithm described in paragraph 5.1. Once the type is determined, the media parameters are initialized. Y Y Y 35) The Velocity Table of the currently installed media is downloaded to the DSP. Y Y Y 36) Drive the device to read the defective green sheet and establish the Defect Management data structure. 〖Install-(Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

、 1T i This paper scale is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X 297mm) Printed by A7 ______B7 of the Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Invention description (207) YYY 37) The drive device starts to test in the background mode The remaining portion of the buffer RAM. Y Y Y Y 38) The SCSI interface is fully operational (ie, the SCSI interface does not return to BUSY). Drive ATTENTIONS: Drive Atten-tion Interrupt:

Drive Attention interruption indicates an irregular condition that has occurred within the drive. These interrupts are generated by one of the hardware connected to Glue Logic IC (GLIC) or DSP. The DSP interrupt is routed through GLIC to form a combined source of interrupts (INT2) on the 80C188. The next paragraph introduces the interrupt generated by DSP. The GLIC Interrupt section describes the interrupts generated by other hardware connected to GLIC. By detecting the GLIC interrupt status register (Base Addr + 05h), the microprogram language can determine the source of the interrupt. DSP interrupts: The sources of DSP interrupts can be divided into two classification systems including Aborting interrupts and Non-Aborting interrupts. When an unexpected event occurs, the abort interrupt is generated by the DSP. This event requires that the write capability of the drive be immediately disabled. When the DSP asserts an interrupt, the driver hardware will release the write gate, turn off the laser, and generate Drive Attention Interrupt to 80C188. When 80C188 advocates non-abandon interrupt, only Drive Attention Interrupt is generated to 80C188. Aborting DSP Interrupt (Aborting DSP Interrupt): The conditions that caused the DSP to propose an abort interruption are listed in Table 12. The size of this paper is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21〇χ29? Mm) # ^, 定 ------ ^ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) __B7 When the focus error signal exceeds When the programmable threshold set by 80C188 is 1, DSP raises Focus Error. When the tracking error signal exceeds the programmable threshold set by 80C188, 〇ff_Track Error is proposed by the DSP. When the laser output is no longer controlled by the DSP within the threshold set by 80C188, Laser Read Power Control Error is raised by the DSP. When the spindle speed drops below the minimum RPM established by 80C188 or exceeds the maximum RPM established by 80C188, Spindle Not At Speed Error is proposed by DSP. Non-Aborting DSP Interrupt (Non-Aborting DSP Interrupt): The conditions that caused the DSP to propose a non-aborting DSP Interrupt are listed in Table XIII. Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of Invention (208) Table 12-Abandon DSP Interrupt Focus Error Off-Track Error Laser Power Control Error Spindle Not At Speed Error (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page)

Table XIII-Non-Abandon DSP Interrupt 10-Second Timer Event Bad Command Checksum Unknown Command Bad Seek Error Cartridge Eject Failed Error

The 10-Second Timer Event interrupt is returned to the DSP to notify the system that its internal clock has reached 10 seconds. The responsibility of 80C188 is to maintain the execution clock in total hours and minutes of power-on. Every 10-Second Timer Event interrupts the progressive power-on hour clock. When the checksum calculation of the command does not match the contents of the checksum and bytes within the command just received by the 80C188, Bad Command Checksum is proposed by the DSP. When the content of the command byte just received by the 80C188 is not a valid DSP command, Unknown Command is presented by the DSP. The Bad Seek Error is raised in the DSP when (a) the first entry in the Seek Velocity Table is empty, or (b) Focus Loop is not closed (this will only happen before the DSP is initialized if the search is assigned as the first Commands). Seek Sttling Error appears as 〇ff-Track Error. After the Tracking Loop is closed, the DSP will disable Off-Track Errors. The Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Standards Bureau Employee Consumer Cooperative will print (D β β) με to prevent the failure at the installation time. The Eject Limit signal is at (TBD) gs When it is not detected by the DSP, the Cartridge Eject Failed Error signal is raised by the DSP. GLIC interrupt: GUC (Glue Logic IC) provides various input and output signal interfaces managed by 80C188. The input signals defined to generate interrupts from GLIC are listed in Table 14 below. This paper music scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210x297 mm) A7 __B7 printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economy V. Invention Description (210) Table 14-Other Drive Attention Request Autochanger Eject Front Panel Eject Cartridge Inserted (in throat) (future) Cartridge Pressent (seated on the hub) Whenever the Autochanger Reset input signal on the 20-pin connector of the Jukebox detects a rising edge, the Autochanger Reset is interrupted Produced by GLIC. Whenever the Autochanger Power Down Request input signal on the 20-pin connector of the auto-detector detects a rising edge, the Autochanger Power Down Request interrupt is generated by GLIC. Whenever the Auto-changer Eject input signal on the 20-pin connector of the automatic detector detects a rising edge, the Autochanger Eject interrupt is generated by GLIC. Whenever the front panel Eject Switch input signal on the 20-pin connector of the auto-detector detects a rising edge,

Front Panel Eject Switch interrupt was generated by GUC. Whenever a rising or falling edge is detected on the signal of the Cartridge Inserted Switch, the interruption of Cartridge Inserted (detecting the cartridge in the channel of the drive device) is generated by GLIC. This interrupt can be generated by GLIC hardware, however, there is no actual switch that generates the interrupt. „This paper ruler New Cai ® Mujia County (CNS) Α4 specifications (210x29T ^ y, 1τ ------ {(please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standardization Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed 2 ^ 94 ^ 9 A7 ---__ B7_ V. Description of the invention (211) At this time 'no microprogramming language will be written to support the feature. Whenever the leading edge or signal is detected on the signal of Cartridge Seated Switch At the trailing edge, the interruption of Cartridge Present (the cartridge is installed in the center of the drive unit) is caused by GLIC. Drive Attention Recovery: The Drive Attention code must provide all Drive Attiontion and return to the drive unit a safe, known In order to complete the aforementioned actions, the Drjve Attention code must be assigned to the interrupt service routine (isr) and the handler (Handler). The Drive Attention ISR must be executed as the highest priority to cover the ISR, so that the SCSI ISR and / or Disk ISR can be obtained first And disable the ongoing operation to make the drive device to a safe state. Once the operation is disabled, the SCSI ISR or Disk ISR allows the execution to complete or exit. Then D "jve Attention Handler" The management program part is arbitrarily executed and attempts to bring the drive device to a known state. Usually when the drive device is connected in series through a series of errors, there are multiple Drive Attention interruptions, causing the Handler to interrupt itself. When the DSP detects Drive Attention, GLIC (in INT2) An interrupt is generated to 80C188. When the interrupt is an abort interruption, GUC also releases the Write Gate and turns off the laser. The Drive Attention ISR will stop any ongoing drive operations to stop the SM331 Format Sequencer, SM330 and External ENDEC. Callers will be provided (please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) 袈-,-· 1 This paper standard is applicable to the Chinese national standard (CNS> A4 specification (210X297 mm) A7 ________B7 V. Invention description (212) to Call application special stop procedure. The following paragraph, Drive Attention Notification, provides further information.

Drive Attention Handler is responsible for confirming Drive Attention Interrupt, clearing the source of interruption, initial recovery procedure to make the drive device into a known state and verifying that the initial error condition has been cleared. The source of Drive Attention Interrupt is determined by checking the glIC interrupt status register (Base Addr + 05h) and possibly requesting the current DSP status. The possibly wrong relative priority is stated in the following paragraph. If the DSP is the source of the interrupt, the Drive Attention Handler sends a command to the DSP to reset the attention status and clear the status bit. The error response procedure for each different error condition is described below. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) 袈 · * -β Drive Attention Error Priorites (Print Attention Error Priorites) printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs: This paragraph lists the The error condition is recognized by the Jupiter drive device, and the related priority is raised for each type of error. Table 15-Drive Attention Priorities (Drive Attention Priorities) 'The relevant range of each error is listed below. Table Fifteen-drive attention priority

Laser Power Error Focus Failure

Not On Track, which includes:

Seek Settling 'Error .I— ^. ^ 1 .—I.

Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 __B7__ V. Description of the invention (213)

Tracking Error Write Terminated

Write Fault (Write Gate asserted and Bias ok not yet asserted)

Bias Magnet Failed (TBD)

Spindle Speed Failure

Eject Request, which includes:

Front Panel Eject Request

Autochanger Eject Request

Autochanger Powerdown Request

Autochanger Reset

Cartridge Detected (Cartridge In Throat Switch)

Media Changed (Cartridge Present Switch)

Cartridge Unload Failure (cartridge still seated after eject cycle)

Disk Rejected (not used for Jupiter)

Command Fault, Which includes:

Bad Command Checksum Invalid Command Drive Attention Error Recon-ery: This paragraph introduces different Drive Attention error conditions, which are recognized by Jupiter drives. Each sub-paragraph will describe the use of status bits to classify error conditions and also include pseudocode to describe how to handle error conditions. -This paper is suitable for Chinese home-made (CNS) Yue Tao (21QX297 Gongqing) ίι ------ Ιτ ------ ^ (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Printed by ABS employee consumer cooperatives A7 ______ B7 V. Description of the invention (214) The virtual code listed in each sub-paragraph is reengineered by the currently used Drive Attention Handler and RMD-5300 products and only for guidance Policy only. The actual code uses multiple flags to further subdivide the priority of Drive Attention. The variables displayed in the virtual code SuggSenseKey, SuggSen-seCode and SuggSenseCodeQ represent the SCSI Sense Da-ta paste bit Sense Key 'Error Code and Additional Sense Code Qualifier (ASCQ). The variable unclr_cond_flag is used to indicate when an unclearable condition exists in the drive. The unclearable condition forces the drive to respond to Request Sense Command. The variable unclr_cond_flag contains the HARDWARE ERROR Sense Key and INTERNAL CONTROLLER ERROR Error. Code and ASCQ current values. Reset or execution of the SCSI Send Diagnostic command can be cleared but not cleared This will force the drive to perform all of its diagnostic settings. In this mode, any serious errors found during the operation will prevent the drive from changing the media. The convention used in the following sub-paragraphs is that S is the standard state of the drive , 0 is the optical state of the drive device, D is the DSP state and G is the GLIC interrupted state. The standard state and the optical state are to modify the ESDI status characters of the drive device. The following paragraphs, the drive command state, provide information on the edsI state. Below Paragraph: The definition of DSP status is to provide information on the status of dsP. The status bit system listed at the beginning of each sub-paragraph is based on the paper standard applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) 84 specifications (21〇 &lt; 297 mm) -nn I I ---, ^ I --- II Ding-5, T (please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Ministry of Economy Central Standard Staff Consumer Cooperative A7 _____ B7 &quot; 1 —-. — '&quot; Fifth, the description of the invention (215) Decide whether there is a special error condition. Then, the virtual code describes how to deal with the situation. Error Command: (Command Fault) Status Bi ts: S = ESDI_CMD_PTY_FLT | ESDI_INVALID_CMD; Pseudocode: SuggSenseKey = HARDWARE_ERROR; SuggSenseCode = INTERNAL_CONTROLLER_ERR; if S = ESDI_CMD_PTY_FLT SuggSenseCodeQ = ASCQ_CMD_PRTY; if S = ESDI_INVALID_CMQ_DQ; Or when the DSP receives an invalid command, a command error will occur. None of these errors should occur in the final product manufactured according to the technology of the present invention. Therefore, if there is an error, it may be another indication of error, such as a memory error that was detected during a reset that required a situation that cannot be cleared. Rejected disc: (Disk Rejected) Status Bits: 0 = CARTRIDGE_REJECTED Pseudocode: send RESET ATTN command (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) Loading and ordering This paper is also applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 Specifications (210X297 mm) Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Standards Bureau Beigong Consumer Cooperative A7 B7 V. Description of invention (216) get REQ_STD_STAT get REQ_OPT-STAT; if (ANY_ATTN_PENDING) return (ATTN_DIDNT_CLEAR); send Bias Magnet command to turn off magnet if medium present send STOP_SPINDLE command Wait_for_cmd-cmplt If the DSP cannot successfully close the focus and / or trace circuit after three attempts, a Disk rejected error will be raised. Cartridge unload failure: (Cartridge Unload Failure)

Status Bits: 0 = CART_L0AD_FAILURE Pseudocode: if third attempt fails GLIC_JB_CTRL_REG &amp; = ~ JB_ERROR; // Assert. SuggSenseKey = HARDWARE_ERROR; SuggSenseCode = INTERNAL_CONTROLLER_ERR; SuggSenseCodeQ = ASCQ_CANT_UNLD; command get RE_Q_D_STAT__ / Deassert. If (ANY ATTN_PENDING) This paper scale is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) Α4 specifications (210X297mm)

, 1T 299409 A7 Printed by the Employees Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economics ____B7 V. Description of invention (217) ^ return (ATTN_DIDNT_CLEAR); if medium present send EJECT_CART command Wait_for_cmd_cmplt (); DSP will monitor the order of exiting the cassette and if Eject Limit signal can not be executed after three seconds, it will generate an interrupt. The reply program will try to exit ten boxes three times. If the error persists, the failure will be raised on the connector signal ERROR (low potential enable) of the SCSI and 20-pin auto selector. Exit request: (Eject Request) Status Bits: 0 = EJECT-REQUEST Pseudocode: SuggSenseKey = MEDIUM ERROR; SuggSenseCode = MEDIUM_OUT; SuggSenseCodeQ = NO_SENSE_CODE_QUAL; get REQ_STD_STAT; if medium present send Bias Magnet command to turn off magnet send STOP_SPINDLECTRL_REG_J | JB_CATR_LOADED; // Deassert. Send EJECT_CART command Wait_for_cmd_cmplt (); send RESET_ATTN command get REQ_STD_STAT;

This paper scale applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (2 丨 0 X 297 mm) (please close # ¾¾Item I to fill out this book. Ir Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 _______ B7 Five 3. Description of the invention (218) if (ANY_ATTN_PENDING) return (ATTN_DIDNT_CLEAR); Exit request: can occur from one of the automatic converter or the front panel. If the cassette appears, the spindle stops and the CART_LOADED signal of the automatic converter is released (low potential causes Yes). After the spindle stops (specified in the following paragraph, STOP_SPINDLE), the cassette will exit. Media Change: (Media Changed)

Status Bits:

0 = CARTRIDGE_CHANGED

Pseudocode:

SuggSenseKey = MEDIUM ERROR;

SuggSenseCode = MEDIUM_OUT;

SuggSenseCodeQ = NO_SENSE_CODE_QUAL;

Set_not_rdy_mchg_attn (); send RESET_ATTN command get REQ_STD_STAT; get REQ_OPT_STAT; if (ANY_ATTN_PENDING) return (ATTN_DIDNT_CLEAR); send STOP_SPINDLE command send START_SPINDLE command for 4x RPM Wait_for_cmd_cmplt (); _ CTRL = _C; REG_B; _CRE_ (); The size of this paper is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X 297 mm) (installed ^ I-order {(please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) A7 printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs ____B7 V. Description of the invention (219) This situation exists when the cassette is installed on the center and the Cartridge Present switch is closed. The automatic converter signal CART_LOADED is asserted (low potential enable). Spindle speed failure: (Spindle Speed Failure)

Status Bits:

〇 = SPINDLE_SPEED_FAILURE

Pseudocode: send RESET_ATTN command get REQ_STD_STAT; get REQ_OPT-STAT; GLIC_JB_CTRL_REG = JB_CART_LOADED; // Deassert. If (ANY_ATTN_PENDING) return (ATTN_DIDNT_CLEAR); if media present send START_SPINDLE command for current media Wait_for_Cd; GID-C; = ~ JB_CART_LOADED; // Assert DSP will monitor the spindle speed based on the acceptable speed range of the special type of media. The minimum and maximum speeds are determined by 80C188 and sent to the DSP. If the spindle speed is detected out of the specified range, the DSP will generate an interrupt. Laser power failure: (Lase 「Power Failure） • Status Bits: .. 〇 = laser_drive failure This paper scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) {依 衣 ------ 1T- ----- ((Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) A7 _____B7 printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economy V. Description of the invention (220)

Pseudocode:

send RESET_ATTN command send RECAL_DRIVE command get REQ_STD_STAT; get REQ_OPT_STAT; if 0 = LASER_DRIVE_FAILURE

SuggSenseKey = HARDWARE_ERROR;

SuggSenseCode = INTERNAL CONTROLLER ERR; — — '

SuggSenseCodeQ = ASCQ_LASER_FAIL; unclr_cond_flag = SuggSenseCodeQ return (ATTN_DIDNTXLEAR); if (ANY_ATTN_PENDING) return (ATTN_DIDNT_CLEAR); return (ALL_DONE); When the laser read power threshold is exceeded and detected by the DSP, an abort will be generated. If the laser fails and cannot be cleared after the drive unit is recalibrated, the status of failure to clear will be declared. Focus failure: (Focus Failure)

Status Bits:

0 = F0CUS_SERV0_FAILURE

Pseudocode: GLIC_JB_CTRL_REG | = JB_CART_L〇ADED; // Qeassert. Send RESET_ATTN .command get REQ_STD_STAT; (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this 1) install_ order

A7 __B7 printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Prototype Bureau of the Ministry of Economy V. Invention description (221) get REQ_OPT_STAT; if (ANY_ATTN_PENDING) return (ATTN_DIDNT_CLEAR); GLIC_JB_CTRL_BEG &amp; = ~ JB_CART_LOADED; // Assert. As planned by 80C188, when the focus signal exceeds the specified threshold, the DSP will generate an abort interrupt to 80C188. Write failed: (Write Fault)

Status Bits: S = WRITE_FAULT-ERROR Pseudocode: if medium not write protected

Set_not_rdy_mchg_attn ();

SuggSenseKey = NOT_READY;

SuggSenseCod = DRIVE_NOT_READY;

SuggSenseCodeQ = NO_SENSE_CODE_QUAL; else

SuggSenseKey = MEDIUM_ERROR;

SuggSenseCode = WRITE_PROTECTED;

SuggSenseCodeQ = NO_SENSE_CODE_QUAL; send RESET an ATTN command

get REQ_STD_STAT get REQ_OPT_STAT; if (ANY_ATTN_PENDING) return (ATTN_DIDNT_CLEAR); This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) n I n. 1-n A n I_ (please read the notes on the back first (Fill in this page again) Order 29 ⑷ 9 A7 ~~~ _____________ B7 V. Invention description (222) Not on track: (Not On Track)

Status Bits: 〇 = NOT_ON_TRACK / WRITE_TERMINATED; S = SEEK_FAULT;

Pseudocode: get DSP status if Bad Seek and Focus Loop NOT Closed download seek tables to DSP send RESET_ATTN command else send RESET_ATTN command if (S == SEEK_FAULT) or (0 = WRITE_TERMINATED) send RECAL_DRIVEMIN command get REQ_STD_STAT get REQ_OPT_STAT; if (ANY_ATTN_PENDING) return (ATTN_DIDNT-CLEAR); Printed by the Staff Consumer Cooperative of the Central Sample Agency of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. When Bad Seek is proposed by the DSP, the Drive Attention Handler should request the DSP status to decide whether to find an error or whether the Velocity Table is missing. If the Bad Seek status bit is set and the 'Focus Loop Not Closed &quot; status bit is not set, it means that the seek table has not been properly initialized. If only the Seek Fault status bit is set, the Drive Attention Handler will send out &quot; Reset. This paper standard is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21〇 297 mm). The A7 is printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. I ----- B7 _ V. Description of Invention (223)

The Attention &quot; command is given to the DSP and indicates that the seek fault status bit is cleared. Then the 80C188 seek code will need to start from the recording point of Drjve Attention. The criticality of ○ ff-Track Error is programmable by 80C188. If the writing program needs to have a higher limit, the threshold can be set for reading or writing separately. When Off-Track is detected, dsp will use &quot; catastrophic &quot; interrupt to terminate the drive operation. The Drive Attention Handler will issue the "Reset Attention" to the DSP. Open issue. The reply mechanism may allow the microprogramming language to order another seek command (thus allowing the DSP to seek and then obtain the trace). Another alternative is to open the tracking loop (Tracking Loop) and then instruct the DSP to obtain the tracking again. This method does not work in failure mode when looking for unset and the read / write head is "Skating" across the disc. Therefore, the best response agency is to try another search. A special code will be required to deal with the situation, and the last search will invalidate the Off-Track Error. Another search may be the best response to try. Magnetic bias failure: (Bias Magnet Failed)

Status Bits:

S = MAGNET_BIAS_FAILURE

Pseudocode:

SuggSenseKey = HARDWARE_ERROR;

SuggSenseCode = INTERNAL_CONTROLLER_ERR; This paper scale is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) ~ # 衣 1T ------ ^ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Central Standard of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 ______B7 printed by the Bureau ’s Consumer Cooperative V. Description of the invention (224)

SuggSenseCodeQ = ASCQ_MAGNET_FAILED; send RESET_ATTN command get REQ_STD_STAT get REQ_OPT_STAT; if (ANY_ATTN_PENDING) return (ATTN_DIDNT_CLEAR); Spiral Mode: When all error conditions have been cleared, the Drive Attention Handler must return the drive to its original state for the spiral (Otherwise known as trajectory following or jumping back to the disabled). This is done by storing the original state on the entry and executing the code on exit (see below). if ((WasSpiraling == 0) &amp; &amp;! (S &amp; MEDIUM_NOT_PRESENT) &amp; &amp;! (S &amp; SPINDLE_STOPPED))

SpiralMode (FALSE); Drive Attention Notification (Drive Attention Notification): Drive

Attention generates an interrupt to the Drive Attention Handler to make the drive known. Then the responsibility of the Handler is to notify the microprogramming language to manage a part of the program currently in operation. The operation is to pay attention to the existence and execution of the program, and eliminate the status. Two agencies are used to inform the microprogram language. These include work schedules and guidance notices. When the task is initialized and waits for the SCSMSR or Disk ISR to send information, the Drive Attention Handler will send the information to the service document list. The paper standard is suitable for financial standards (CNS) / \ 4secret (2 丨 GX297 public celebration) ~~~ ----- -------- 〖Install—— (please read the notice on the back first and then fill in this page) Order B7 V. Description of invention (225) to indicate the occurrence of Dnve Attention. The task responsible for the current operation is maintained at the ordering variable t. When the women's material is miscellaneously executing a prostitute at any time when a Drive Attention (for example, looking for a code) is generated, it will take too much auxiliary processing to continuously poll the task queue for information. The first organization that proposed D "jveAtten_tion used the" Long Jump "feature to get code execution back to the place where the microprogramming language knew how to restart the algorithm or attempted to try again. Identify the long jump The procedure can be referred to the record. Multi-level registration can be completed, each new level saves the previous registration information in its local stack. When the code is recorded in the section itself, the code can also identify the program Drive Attention ISR will call Context sensitive abort detected in the execution program ° Media format (MEDIA FORMATS): Media Type Deter_ mination: The type of media will be identified using the sequence of the following events. (A) When the drive is turned on, the card g is inserted or has been inserted Exist. (B) 80C188 designates a 4x speed command to the spindle motor. Printed by the Employees ’Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (C) 80C188 designates a DSP command to notify when rpm is greater than 60 RPM. (D) When RPM is greater than 60 and the DSP is interrupted , 8qci88 generates DSP commands to inform when RPM is greater than 4x minimum RPM. (E) Then 80C188 specifies DSP commands to initialize: (1) DSP sends slowly The internal collision stops. This paper standard is suitable for the financial standards (CNS) A4 specifications (210X297 public) '~~~~~------- V. Description of the invention (226) A7 B7 (2) DSP pair ( TBD) The track is looking towards 0D. (3) The built-in condition is to enable Jump Backs and the direction is 4X. (4) If the DSP encounters an error during the initial search, the error will be raised to 80C188. 80C188 will reset the DSP and then Re-initialization. (F) 80C188 attempts to read the ID of the 4x area (TBD) that fits the internal diameter (TBD) track. (G) If there is no ID to read, 80C188 attempts to use the adjacent area often, plus Or subtract the (TBD) area and read the ID. (H) If there is no ID to read, 80C188 specifies the 2x speed command to the spindle motor. (I) 80C188 specifies the DSP command to notify when the RPM is greater than 2x the minimum speed. (J) When the RPM is greater than 2x the minimum speed DSP interrupt, 80C188 assigns the initial command to the DSP and then attempts to read the ID in the area (TBD) that conforms to the (TBD) track (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Γ

• «V Printed by the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumer Cooperative (k) If there is no ID to read, 80C188 attempts to use the adjacent area, often adding or subtracting (TBD) area, to read 丨 D. . (丨) If there is no 丨 D to read, repeat steps (h) to (k) for 1x. (m) If there is no ID to read, 80C188 assigns 2X speed command to the spindle motor.

This paper standard (CNS) field (21QX297 / J ¥ T A7 B7 printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Invention description (227) (n) 80C188 specifies DSP commands to notify when the RPM is less than 2x the maximum speed. ⑼ When the RPM is less than 2x the maximum speed DSP interrupt, the 80C188 reads the ID by performing frequency sweep. The frequency sweep type will be: built-in area, area-1, area + 1, area_2, area + 2 Wait until all frequencies have been tried. (P) If there is no ID to read, 80C188 specifies 4x speed command to the spindle motor. (Q) 80C188 specifies DSP command to notify when RPM is less than 4x maximum speed. ⑺ When RPM is less than 4X maximum When the speed DSP is interrupted, the 80C188 reads the ID by performing a frequency sweep. The sweep type will include: Area 'Area-1, Area + 1' Area-2, Area +2, etc. until all frequencies It has been tried. ID fAN ID HAS BEEN READ) (s) 80C188 specifies the seek command to locate the SFP range. (t) 80C188 attempts to read SFP data for 512-byte segments. Unable to successfully read the section '80C188 attempts to read SFP data for the 1024_byte section. (u) 80C188 initializes the media parameters of the driver for the media type and SFP information. The prewrite test flag is set to indicate that the prewrite test must be performed prior to writing to the media. (CNS) A ^ FT2T〇x297 ^^ is rape clothes—1τ ^ (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) A7 ______B7 printed by the Consumer Labor Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economy V. Description of Invention (228) ( v) 80C188 starts the initialization of card E (for example, read

Management Areas ’create group tables, etc.). If any DMA must be rewritten so that it and other DMA-induced devices must check whether the pre-write test should be performed first. CCW (PSeud〇-WORM) support: Cirrus L〇gjc SM33〇

The Blank Check function will be used to decide whether 1) (or 2) &lt; the cassette is not green. DMP block will not be used. EXternal ENDEC's B check check function will be used to decide whether the 4x cardmaker cannot remember the green. DMp block will not be used. Whenever the cassette is inserted into the drive device, the drive device will automatically disable the write cache and clear mode page 08h, Caching Parameters, WCE (Write Cache Enable) block. All initiators are notified of the change in the next command from each initiator by dispatching CHECK CONDITION. The combination of Sense Key / Sense Code returned in response to Request Sense Command will be UNIT ATTENTION / MODESELECT PARAMETER SCHANGED (06h / 29h). P-ROM support: open discussion. For P-ROM media, the preFMT signal must be set when the read / write head crosses or is within three tracks of the ROM area of the cassette. The search algorithm will need to consider the p_ROM area on the cassette and may need to cross this area. During the initial period, the DSP will require searching on the p-ROM area. This initial search will be performed at a low speed to minimize changes in ff_fraCk Error. This paper scale is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) Α4 specification (2Ι0Χ297mm) ί ^ .------ ΪΤ ------ {(Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the Central Consumer Product Cooperative

A7 -----____ _____B7 5. Description of the invention (229 ^ '-Retry Strategy): When the drive device attempts to access the media for reading, erasing, writing or verifying operations, it may encounter media errors , Correct errors or other errors. The sources of media errors are: section mask (SM), section IDS, Data Syncs (DS) or Resyncs (RS). The sources of corrected errors are: Cyclical Redundanay Check 'CRC ) Or Error Checking & Correction (ECC). Other sources of errors that the drive device may encounter are: format sequence generator errors, Drive Attention or Buffer RAM parity errors. For each media or correction error, the drive device confirms the correct type and The effective error of the operating mode of the threshold. The threshold is maintained by various mode pages, which can be modified by the host. The following table 16 reveals the built-in threshold used by the driving device. Table 16-The built-in critical threshold lx, 2x 512BPS lx, 2x 1024BPS 4x 512BPS 4x 1024BPS section mask 4/5 Marks 3/4 Spaces 4/5 Marks 3/4 Spaces 4 / 5Segments 4 / 5Segments section IDs read 2/3 2/3 2/3 2/3 Write, Erase 2/3 2/3 2/3 2/3 Verification 3/3 3/3 3/3 3/3 Data Sync (DS) 9/12 Groups 9/12 Groups 3/4 Groups 3 / 4 Groups Resync (RS) 3 6 3 6 ECC bytes in error per Sector 15 30 15 30 ECC bytes in error per Interleave 3 6 3 6 This paper size is applicable to China National Standards (CNS) Α4 specification (210Χ297mm)- -(Please read the notes on the back before filling this page)

、 1T Printed and printed A7 by the Employees ’Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs —------------- B7 _ V. Description of the invention (230) — '~-When the media or correction errors exceed the current critical threshold On any other error defined above, the drive will try to retry the operation as described later in this paragraph. The retry operation will be executed unless the servo error causes the situation that cannot be cleared or when trying to access the data encounters other abandonment conditions. In addition, if the internal debug flag, drvRetryDisable, is set, no retry is performed. The dn / RetryDisable flag is set or cleared by the SCS 丨 Read / Write ESD 丨 command (E7h). When the drive performs a read operation, the maximum number of retry attempts will be performed. As set in Mode Page 01 h, read / write error recovery parameters, read retry count (byte 3). When the drive performs an erase or write operation, it will execute the maximum number of retries as set in Mode Page Olh, Read / Write Error Recovery Parameters' Write Retry Count (Byte 8). When the drive device performs the verification operation, the maximum number of retry will be executed as set in Mode Page 07h, \ / 6 "-ify Error Recovery Parameters» Verify Retry Count (Byte 3) ). If the section cannot be read within the current threshold, the drive device attempts to recover the section using the Heroic method described in the following paragraph, Heroic Recovery Stategise. If the section is recovered, the section can be reassigned as follows The above paragraph introduces the redistribution strategy. Error Checking dnd Correction (ECC): Error checking for reading or verification operations is applicable to cirrus Logic. The paper standard is Zhongguanjiabiao ^ (CNS) 8 4 inspections (21Gx297 Gongguang- --- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page).

, 1T 乂:

»-. -I • ^ n-I». A7

It is implemented in the hardware in SM330 printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. Correct any bytes in the error to update the vector generated by SM330 and transfer it to SM331 via a dedicated serial connection between the two wafers. The crc and ECC codes for write operations are generated by SM330. When the Disable Correction (DCR) bit is set in Mode Page 01 h (Read / Write Error Recover Parameters), the correction will not be applied to the read operation section. When the Enable Early Correction (EEC) bit is not set in Mode Page 01 h (Read / Write Error Recover Parameters), ECC is not applied to the read operation sector. If the EEC bit is not set after all but one retry has failed, the drive will automatically apply the correction to the last retry if the DCR is not set. It is important to note that with the DCR bit setting, ECC errors are still detected, but will not be corrected.

Heroic Recovery Strategy: Project Heroic Recovery is used to introduce all possible procedures for recovering data from the media. The strategy is to selectively relax various critical and finally intact responses. The absolute criterion for deciding whether the section has been restored is whether the data can be corrected within the maximum threshold set by the correction hardware. In order to reduce missing corrections, the Media Criteria will relax the order of progress (TBD). If the block cannot be read within the current threshold and the Transfer Block (TB) bit or Automatic Read Reallocation Enabl Valley d (AR-RE) bit is in Mode Page 01 h (Read / Write Error Recover) This paper size is applicable to China Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) I '-' Policy II Order -------- ^ (please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Bureau of Precision Industry Beigong Consumer Cooperative Printed A7 ____B7 5. Description of the invention (232)

Parameters), Heroic Recovery is initialized. If the data of the section is completely restored and ARRE is enabled, the section can be redistributed as described in the following paragraphs, and then redistributed. The drive device parameters that can be changed in the attempt to restore data are (1) PLL Bandwidth (normal, high and very high), (2) Frequeney Zone (expected zone-1, expected zone + 1), (3) ? 361 ^ 〇36〇-tor Mark »(4) Pseudo Data Sync» (5) Lock on First Re-sync (segment is not qualified for redistribution, may only be sent to the host), and (6) (TBD) . Redistribution strategy: Reallocation is the process of relocating data from the logical section to the new physical section. The segment is reallocated (1) in response to the host request (SCSI Reassign Block Command, 07h), (2) when the segment cannot be read within the current threshold, the segment is completely restored and the ARRE bit is set, ( 3) The section using the current threshold cannot be cleared or written and the Automatic Write Reallocation Enable (AWRE) bit is set in Mode Page 01 h (Read / write Error Recovery Parameters), or (4) the section is under the current threshold It cannot be verified as part of SCSI Write and Verify Command. Read Reallocation: When the data on the section that exceeds the read threshold has been fully restored 1 ARRE bit is set, if the threshold is due to Data Sync Resync or ECC status error, the drive will apply the first paper standard for China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) (please read the precautions on the back and then fill in this page) Outfit · A7 A7 Central #Public Bureau Employee Consumer Cooperative printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Invention description (233) Write data to the same actual section. If the data for the same section can now be verified within the threshold defined in Mode Page 7H, Verify Error Recovery Parameter, the section will not be allocated again. Errors in the masking of the ID-blocked section masks generate incorrect sections or sections that cannot be verified correctly will be reassigned to the new actual section. When a new actual segment is requested to relocate a logical segment, the drive will write data (using write threshold) to the spare segment and then verify the segment (using write threshold). If the zone cannot use the current critical write or verify, another actual zone will be considered as a spare and repeating process. The maximum of three spare zones will be used to try to relocate a single logical zone. Write reallocation: If the automatic write reallocation enable (AWRE) bit is set, the segment that cannot match the criticality of the segment mask or critical to the number of effective Elsd + DS will be reallocated. Section 丨 is defined in Mode Page 01 h, Read / Write Err〇 "Recvery Parame- ters ° When the new actual section is requested to be relocated in the logical section, the drive device will write data (using the write Critical) to the standby segment and then verify the segment (using the write critical). If the segment cannot use the current critical write or hearing, another actual segment will be considered as a spare and repeating process. Three The maximum size of the spare zone will be used to try to relocate a single logical zone. F 'Install IT ------ {(please read the notes on the back before filling in this page) Beigong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau Printed A7 _________B7 V. Description of Invention (234) Verification After Write Reallocation (• Verify After Write Reallocation)

As part of Command, the critical section of the verification will be redistributed. The ARRE and AWRE bits no longer affect the segment that determines that redistribution cannot be verified within the current threshold as part of the SCSI Write and Verify Command. When a new actual segment is requested to relocate a logical segment, the drive will write data (using write threshold) to the spare segment and then verify the segment (using write threshold). If the zone cannot use the current critical write or verify, another actual zone will be considered as a spare and repeating process. The maximum of three spare zones will be used to try to relocate a single logical zone. SCSI Error Codes Re turned: The following sub-paragraphs introduce the combination of SCSI Sense Key / Sense Code / Additional Sense Code qualifier (ASCQ). Each of the above paragraphs is the status of Retry Strategy and the following introduction. The control bits that affect the response of the drive unit combined with the SCSI Sense Key / Sense Code / ASCQ returned to the host are listed in Table 17 below-Mode Page 01 h, Error Recovery Par-meters. ) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ~ 1 --- -------- {¾ .------ IT ------ {(Please read the notes on the back before filling in This page j ^ U6d ------- V. Description of the invention (235) A7 Table 17 M〇de Page 〇1h 'Error ReC0ve "y Pa" meters bit name ----- Description AWRE Automatic Write Reallocation Enabled driver The device will perform automatic redistribution of detected defective blocks during the write x operation. ARRE Automat ic Read Reallocation Enabled will perform automatic redistribution of detected defective blocks during the driver loading and unloading operation. TB Transfer Block The block after being returned beyond the critical. RC Read Continuous drive device will not add delayed transfer data to perform error recovery. (Data can be manufactured to maintain continuous data flow) EEC Enable Early Correction The drive device will use error correction before retrying PER Post Error The drive device proposes Check Condition to the box, which is retried through retry, correction and redistribution. DTE Disable Transfer on Error When an error is encountered, the drive device will terminate the data transfer DCR Disable Correction The drive device will not use error correction for data error recovery. The drive device will still detect ECC errors. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)!. -I — · — I 1 · Install , ιτ Errors While Reallocating: Printed Ruler I Sheet of Paper for Staff Cooperatives of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (Errors While Reallocating): When attempting to reallocate a logical section to a new actual section, if the indicated error condition is encountered The combination of perception in eight will be proposed by the driving device. Table 18. Error Code Error Status When Trying to Reallocate Sections Sense Key / Code / ASCQ Data is forced to be backed up and there is no backup available 03/32/00 is an automatic redistribution failure 04/81/00 is too many redistribution attempts 04/44 / A6 is the Defect List (Defect List) error 03/32/01 is yes. China National Standard (CNS) Α4 ^ # · (21GX297 公 楚 Α7

Printed by Beigong Consumer Cooperative, Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs. When hardware errors or other serious errors prevent the drive from performing reallocation, Automatic Reallocation is considered invalid. When performing reallocation, the drive will only make three attempts to configure the logical zone to the new actual zone. If more than three attempts are required, the drive will assume that a hardware error has occurred. This method limits the number of redistribution zone attempts and thereby reduces the time spent in reallocation and reduces the waste of all effective backup opportunities. If the drive can only write and verify a single Defect on the disc

Management Area (DMA), the drive will present a Defect List error. 1 Read Error Codes: The paragraph introduces the situation that when the read operation is performed, the drive device may propose to return to the host. Whether the status is actually raised depends on whether the host specifies the SCSI Request

Sense Command. The situation belongs to five main categories, including (1) trying to configure the desired section, (2) trying to read the section, (3) trying to reply with Her〇icew〇 section, (4) trying to redistribute the Section, with (5) Drive Attention and other serious errors. Table 18 provides the sensing combinations proposed when redistribution fails, while Table 18 provides the sensing combinations proposed by serious errors. When attempting to configure the zone, the sensing combination in Table 19 will be proposed by the drive if it encounters the indicated error type. --------: clothing ------, 玎 ------ ^ (please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of Central Central Bureau of Economics of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (237) Table 19-Error codes and error conditions proposed when configuring the desired section Sense Key / Code / ASCQ Data return section mask cover critical 03/01/00 No ID critical (Bad CRC) 03/10/00-No ID Mark (No Address Mark) 03/12/00-No _ When attempting to read a zone, if encountering the indicated error type, ARRE is not set and the threshold for retry is executed The data within cannot be restored. The sensing combination in Table 20 will be proposed by the driving device. If all retry attempts have been made and the data cannot be recovered, the drive will execute He "〇jc reply if the TB bit is ill. Then the data will be sent back to the host regardless of whether the data is completely restored. If it is completely restored, the data will not be assigned to the new Section of the table. Table '10 -Ready to buy, error code error condition when ARRE is not set Sense Key / Code / ASCQ data return Data Sync Threshold 03/13/00 if ΤΒ = 1 Resync Threshold 03/11 / 07 If TB = 1 ECC Error Threshold 03/11 / 0C If TB = 1 Uncorrectable ECC Error 03/11/02 If TB = 1 When trying to read a section, if DCR is set and when Retries &lt; Heroics is executed, the data can be Reply within the threshold, the sensing girl in Table 21 will raise the situation to be driven by the device. If the data cannot be returned by Her〇jcs, the error code returned is listed in Table 20 above. If the data is complete In response to ARRE being set, the data will try to re-allocate the logical section to the new actual section.-, The private paper standard is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) -------- {装- ----- Subscribe ------ {(Please first Read the precautions on the back and fill in this education) 9439 A7 5. Description of the invention (238) Table 21 Error code and error condition raised when the reading is done and DCR is set. Try again. No use ECC_ Request Her 〇ics. No allocation is performed (ARRE = 1) Dan requests Heroics. No ECC is used. Self-service allocation is entrusted (ARRE = 0) No request for Heroics. No Ecc is used. Needle white pin redistribution and rewriting succeeded. Invoice

Sense Key / Code / ASCQ 00/00/00 01/17/01 01/17/06 01/17/07 Retry without request

---- 1 When trying to read the section, if the pure line retry or Her〇ic_ DCR is not set and the data can be recovered within the threshold, the combination of sensing in Table 22 will be targeted for the situation The drive is presented. If the data cannot be returned via Heroics, the error code returned is listed in Table 20 above: If # 料 元 全 回回 和 ARR £ is set, the drive will drive the logical section to the new actual section. Knife configuration Table 22-Error code when reading and retrying, DCR is not set Error status

Sense Key / Code / ASCQ (Binding-I ---- ^ (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) Printed by the Beigong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and requested to retry. No ECC is used. Retry without request .ECC request (within the threshold).

00/00/00 01/18/00 Know to try again. ECC request (within the critical 01/18/01). Request Heroics. Automatic redistribution 01/18/02 is executed (ARRE = 1). The request is like 1 &quot;.丨. 5. Automatic redistribution 01/18/05 was entrusted (ARRE = 0). Λ1 / 1 Q / AV function ίcheng! Write π and then F match

A7 printed by the Staff Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ___B7 V. Description of the Invention (239) Proposed Reading Error (Read Error Reporting): This paragraph introduces the logic used in the microprogram language to determine when to set a specific sense; 1 When to make an error via Check Condition and when to return it to the Information Division.

Read Operation

Do_seek: seek to desired sector if seek error abort with 04/15 (RANDOM POSITIONING ERROR) init read retry count from Mode Page 01 h if DCR is set of EEC is set set to detect ECC errors but not correct if RC is set if 1x or 2x mode set RC mode in SM330 else set RC mode in SM330 set to ignore ID errors, RS errors, and DS errors

Wait_for_msg: wait for msg from / SR if no error if recovered from retry if PER is set set Check Condition ---- ^ {Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page} A7 __B7 printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economy V. Invention description (240). If DCR is set set sense to 01/17/01 (RECOVERED DATA WITH ERROR CORRECTION &amp; RETRIES) if DTE is set set to return all blocks read do not continue after this block queue data for SCSI if new seek required goto Do_seek else if more to do goto Wait_for a msg else return to caller else decrement read retry count if no more retries if (TB is set or ARRE is set, and not physical access, and not read long) perform Heroic Recovery if successful if PER is set

Set check Condition if DCR is set set sense to 01/17/07 (RECOVERED. DATA WITHOUT ECC, RECOMMEND REASSIGNMENT) This paper scale is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) (Please read the notes on the back first (Fill in this page again)

A7 ____B7 printed by the Staff Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Invention description (241) else set sense to 01/18/05 (RECOVERED DATA, RECOMMEND REASSIGNMENT) if TB is set set to retun fully recovered block if ARRE is not set goto report_error if ARRE is set attempt to reallocate if rewrite of same sector was successful if PER is set if DCR is set set sense to 01/17/09 (RECOVERED DATA WITH RETRIES AND / OR ECC, REWRITE OF DATA WAS SUCCESSFUL) else if reallocation was successful if PER is set set Check Condition if DCR is set set sense to 01/17/06 (RECOVERED DATA WITHOUT ECC, AUTO REALLOCATION PERFORMED) else set sense to 01/18/02 (RECOVERED DATA WITHOUT ECC, AUTO REALLOCATION PERFORMED ) else The size of this paper is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X297mm) -------- 1 '. Installation ------, 玎 ------ {(please first Read the precautions on the back and fill out this page) A7 __B7_ printed by the Staff Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Invention Description (242) set Check Condition if no spares available set sense t o 03/32 (NO DEFECT SPARE LOCATION AVAILABLE) if automatic reallocation failed set sense to 04/81 if too many attempts to reallocate set sense to 04/44 / A6 (RELOCATION LIMIT REACHED) if Defect List could not be written set sense to 03/32/01 (DEFECT LIST UPDATE FAILURE) else set Check Condition if TB is set set to return partially recovered block goto Report_error else do not retun block set Check Condition goto Report_error else if PER is set set Check Condition if DCR is set- set sense to 01/17/01 The size of this paper applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X297mm) ^ IT ------ ^ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) A7 B7 printed by the Bureau of Standards and Staff Consumer Cooperative V. Description of invention (243) (RECOVERED DATA WITH RETRIES) else set sense to 01/18/01 (RECOVERED DATA WITH ERROR CORRECTION & RETRIES) prepare to retry the block if last retry and EEC is set set to use ECC correction goto Setup_for_read Report_error: if Sector Mark Threshold error set sense to 03/01 (NO INDEX / SECTOR SIGNAL) if ID CRC error set sense to 03/10 (ID CRC OR ECC ERROR) if ID Threshold error set sense to 03/12 (ADDRESS MARK NOT FOUND FOR ID FIELD) if Data Sync Threshold error set sense to 03/13

(ADDRESS MARK NOT FOUND FOR DATA FIELD) if Resync Threshold error set sense to 03/11/07 (DATA RESYNCHRONIZATION ERROR) if ECC Threshold error set sence to 03/11 / 0C This paper music ruler is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) ) A4 specification (210X297 mm) 〖Policy-(please read the notes on the back before filling in this page) Order A7 B7 5. Invention description (244) (UNRECOVERED READ ERROR, RECOMMEND REWRITE THE DATA) if Uncorrectable ECC error set sense to 03/22/02 (ERROR TOO LONG TO CORRECT) return to caller verify error codes (Verify Error Codes): This paragraph confirms that the response to the SCSI Verify Comand during the verification operation will cause the drive device to propose the status of returning to the host situation. Whether this status is actually raised depends on whether the host specifies the SCSI Request Sense Command. The situation can be divided into three main categories, including (1) trying to configure the desired segment, (2) trying to verify the segment, and (3) Drive Attention and other serious errors (Severe Erross). Table 8 above-Serious errors, provides a combination of sensing of the serious errors proposed. Printed if package printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Ministry of Economic Affairs of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) When trying to configure the desired section, the sensing combination previously listed in Table 19 The type of error indicated above will be raised by the drive. When attempting to verify the section, the sensing combination previously listed in Table 20 will be raised by the drive unit if it encounters the indicated error type. However, there is actually no information returned to the host during the verification operation. By defining 'During verification operation! _ ^ “〇_ ics will never be executed. This means that verification data is read using Mode Page 〇7h, Verify Error Recovery Parameters' (probably) stricter threshold. For the current The critical section that cannot be verified, no automatic redistribution is performed. (Note: After the write operation initiated by a completely different scsi command, automatic redistribution may be performed during verification.) This paper size is applicable to Chinese countries The rate (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 published) A7 printed by the employee consumer cooperative of the Central Bureau of Economic Development of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ________B7 V. Invention description (245) Proposed verification code: This paragraph introduces the logic used by the microprogram language to decide when to set A specific combination of sensing, when an error is raised via Check Condition, and when data is returned.

Verify Operation seek to desired sector if seek error abort with 04/15 (RANDOM POSITIONING ERROR)

Setup_for_verify: init verify retry count from Mode Page 07h if DCR is set set to detect ECC errors but not correct (Note: Wait for the hardware to indicate that the section has been read or has errors)

Wait_for_msg: wait for msg from ISR if no error if recovered from retry if PER is set set Check Condition if DCR is set set sense to 01/17/01 (RECOVERED DATA WITH RETRIES) else

Set sense to 01/18/01 This paper scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm), 1T ------ ^ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) ΚΊ ΚΊ Economy Printed by the Employees' Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry __Β7_ V. Description of Invention (246) (RECOVERED DATA WITH ERROR CORRECTION APPLIED) if DTE is set do not continue after this block if new seek required goto Setup_for_verify else if more to do goto Wait_for_msg else return to caller else decrement verify retry count if no more retries set Check Condition goto Report_error (same as Read Operation) else if PER is set set Check Condition if DCR is set set sense to 01/17/01 (RECOVERED DATA WITH RETRIES) else set sense to 01/18/01 (RECOVERED DATA WITH ERROR CORRECTION APPLIED) prepare to retry the block goto Setup a for_verify This paper scale is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) {一一 衣 ~ 、 1τ- ----- {(Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Employee Consumer Cooperative A7 B7 braking five invention is described in (247) write error code (Write Error Codes): confirmation in this paragraph may be raised due to the driving device like a state of the status back to the host while performing a write operation. Whether this status is actually raised depends on whether the host sends a SCSI Request Sensec Command. The situation can be divided into four main categories, including (1) trying to configure the desired segment, (2) trying to verify the segment, (3) trying to reallocate the segment, and 4) Drive Attention and other serious errors. Table 18 above-the error code proposed when attempting to reallocate the section, provides the sensed combination of serious errors proposed, while Table 8-serious error, shows the sensed combination of serious errors proposed. When attempting to configure the desired section, the sensing previously listed in Table 19, combined with the indicated type of error, will be proposed by the drive. When attempting to write to the section, the sensing combination previously listed in Table 23 will be raised by the driving device if it encounters the indicated error type. Table 23-Error codes raised when performing write operations

Error condition Sense Key / Code / ASCO No request retry 00/00/00 Request retry Ol / OC / OO Perform automatic redistribution (AWRE = 1) 01 / 0C / 01 Entrust automatic redistribution (AWRE = 1) 03 / OC / OO k Write Error Reporting: This paragraph introduces the logic used by the microprogram τ to determine when the specific sensing combination should be set, when an error is raised via Check Condition, and when data is returned. , Zhang Ni applies to China® ίϋ7 ^ Γ) Α4 ^ (210Χ297 ^ M ^, 1T ------ ^ (please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) A7 printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ___B7 V. Description of the invention (248)

Write Operation seek to desired sector if seek error abort with 04/15 (RANDOM POSITIONING ERROR) (Note: Installation paragraph)

Setup_for_write: init write retry count from Mode Page 01 h (Note: Waiting for the hardware to indicate that the section has been read or has errors) Wait_fo "_msg: wait for msf from ISR if no error if recovered from retry if PER is set set Check Condition set sense to 01 / 0C / 00 (RECOVERED WRITE ERROR) if DTE is set do not continue after this block if new seek required goto Setup_for_write else if more to do goto Wait_for_msg else return to caller else CNS) A4 specification (210X 297mm) (Binding --------- ^ (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Printed by the Employees Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs 2 ^ 94 ^ 9 A7 __B7 V. Description of Invention (249) decrement write retry count if no more retries if AWRE is set, not physical access, not write long attempt to reallocate if reallocation was successful if PER is set set Check Condition set sense to 01 / 0C / 01 ( WRITE ERROR RECOVERED WITH AUTO REALLOCATION) else set Check Condition if no spares available set sense to 03/32 (NO DEFECT SP ARE LOCATION AVAILABLE) if automatic reallocation failed set sense to 04/81 (AUTO REALLOCATION FAILED) if too many attempts to reallocate set sense to 04/44 / A6 (RELOCATION LIMIT REACHED) if Defect List could not be written set sense to 03 / 32/01 (DEFECT LIST UPDATE FAILURE) else set Check Condition goto Report_error This paper uses Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210X297mm) ^^ 1T ------ ^ (Please read the notes on the back first Please fill out this page again) A7 __ B7 printed by the Consumer Labor Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (250) else if PER is set set Check Condition set sense to 01 / 0C / 00 (RECOVERED WRITH ERROR) prepare to retry the block goto Setup_for_Write Verify After Write Error Codes: This paragraph confirms the situation when the verification after performing the write operation causes the drive device to propose the status of returning to the host. Whether this status is actually raised depends on whether the host specifies the SCSI Request Sense Command. The situation can be divided into four main categories, including (1) trying to configure the desired zone '(2) trying to verify the zone' and (3) trying to reallocate the zone, and (4) Drive Attention and other serious errors. Table 18 above. The error code presented when attempting to reallocate a segment 'The sensing combination presented when redistribution fails, while Table 8-Serious Errors, provides the sensing combination of the severe errors that are presented. When trying to configure the desired section, the senses previously listed in Table 19: Combined with the identification of the error category that will be presented by the drive device, the sensing combination previously listed in Table 20 In case of error, it will be proposed by the drive unit. When trying to verify the error 1 ^, 1τ ------ ^ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) This paper size is applicable to the Central Standard (CNS) Α4 specification (210Χ297mm) A7- --- --B7 V. Description of the invention (251) Put forward verification after write error (Verify After Write Error Reporting): This paragraph introduces the logic used by the microprogramming language to decide when to set a specific sensing combination and when Check the error through the Check Condition and when to return the data.

Verify After Write Operation seek to desired sector if seek error abort with 04/15 (RANDOM POSITIONING ERROR) (Note: Installation paragraph)

Setup_for_verify: init verify retry count from Mode Page 07h if DCR is set set to detect ECC errors but not correct (Note: Wait for the hardware to indicate that the section has been read or has errors)

Wait_for_msg: wait for msg from ISR if no error Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economy I nnn ^ 丨 ^^. I .... Ding (please read the notes on the back before filling this page) if recovered from retry if PER is set set Check Condition if DCR is set set sense to 01/17/01 (RECOVERED DATA WITH RETRIES) else This paper scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) Printed by the industrial and consumer cooperative A7 ___B7 V. Description of the invention (252) set sense to 01/18/01 (RECOVERED DATA WITH ECC &amp; RETRIES APPLIED) if DTE is set do not continue after this block if new seek required goto Setup_for_verify else if more to do goto Wait one for one msg else return to caller else decrement read retry count if no more retries attempt to reallocate if rewrite of same sector was successful if PER is set if DCR is set set sense to 01/17/09 (RECOVERED DATA WITH RETRIES AND / OR ECC, REWRITE OF DATA WAS SUCCESSFUL) else set sense to 01/18/07 (RECOVERED DATA WITH RETRIES &amp; E CC, REWRITE OF DATA WAS SUCCESSFUL) else if reallocation was successful if PER is set set Check Condition This paper scale is applicable to China National Standard (CNS & A4 specifications (21〇Χ297mm) --------- {-衣 ------ ir ------ ((Please read the notes on the back before filling this page)

A7 5. Description of the invention (253) if DCR is set set sense to 01/17/06 (RECOVERED DATA WITH ECC, AUTO REALLOCATION PERFORMED) else set sense to 01/18/02 (RECOVERED DATA WITH ECC, AUTO REALLOCATION PERFORMED) else set Check Condition if no spares available set sense to 03/32 (NO DEFECT SPARE LOCATION AVAILABLE) if automatic reallocation failed set sense to 04/81 (AUTO REALLOCATION FAILED) if too many attempts to reallocate set sense to 04/44 / A6 ( RELOCATION LIMIT REACHED) if Defect List could not be written set sense to 03/32/01 (DEFECT LIST UPDATE FAILURE) else if PER is set set Check Condition if DCR is set -set sense to 01/17/01 Use China National Falcon (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) t 'installed --- order (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) A7 printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Consumers Cooperative Staff Consumer Cooperative A7 Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs __._ _B7___ V. Invention Description (254) (RECOVERED DATA WITH RETRIES) else set sense to 01/18/01 (RECOVERED DATA WITH ECC & RETRIES APPLIED) prepare to retry the block goto Set_for-verify Defect Management Areas: This paragraph is TBD. The following notes and questions will be used in the definition of this paragraph》 Reading DMAs: The threshold of use is the set consideration; how many times to try again. Comparing / Updating DMAs: How many times are better; when to write again. Show &quot; Approaching End of Life ', and, End of Life,'. Each of these issues is a design consideration and does not affect the ability of those skilled in the art to discover and implement the invention. DMA data structure is established to support: Sector Slipping, Linear Replacement. Seek Tables for Different Media: The microprogramming language will download the appropriate speed table to the DSP to detect the type of media installed in the drive. The default (eg, traditional) speedometer will be used until the media type is determined. Drive command interface (DRIVE COMMAND INTERFACE): The drive command interface is a hardware platform where the software interface provides access to the drive device. For the SCSI interface, format sequence generator (F〇 "mat Sequencer), ENDEC and External ENDEC access is performed directly on those parts of the private paper wave standard 揌 家 榡 准 (CNS) A4 regulations ^ '21 〇 &gt; &lt; 297 mm I 11 II-I--^^ 1 -I 1-»* — I— I -I n I» 1—. Τ »| Teeth-έ (Please read the notes on the back before filling in This page) A7 ------ B7 V. Description of the invention (255) Access without using the drive command interface, the drive commands used to access all other components are defined in the following paragraphs. Drive commands (Drive CommandshJupiter Micro The drive commands used by the programming language are listed in Table 24 below. For the form of the stop line, define whether the drive command is immediate (丨), executed by 80C188 (188), or executed by DSP (DSP). Immediately The command causes the flag or bit to be set without requiring any CPU time to process or monitor the operation. The immediate command indicates that the command is completed immediately. The following paragraph, Drive Command Completion, provides a more detailed introduction to this point. 188 The command form indicates that 80C188 additional processing is required To meet the request. Additional monitoring is required to confirm that the hardware has reached the desired state. When processing and monitoring are complete, the command is indicated as complete. The DSP command form indicates that the command must be sent to the DSP to satisfy the drive command. When the DSP passes When returning to the status of its order, the order was not deemed to be completed. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Order the printed form of the 24th-Driver Command Code Name Description Form 0x0000 SET_EE_ADDR Set EEPROM address I 0x0100 READ_EEPROM Read EEPROM (at current address) 188 0x0200 SET_JUMP_BACK_IN Set jump back to ID DSP 0x0300 SET_JUMP_BACK_OUT Set jump back to 0D DSP 0x0400 JUMP_BACK_ENABLE Enable jump back to 0 0 I 0x0600 ----- ----- 0x0700 DISABLE_EEWR Disable EEPROM writing function (TOD) This paper scale is applicable to 9439 B7 of China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) V. Description of invention (256) Printed by the Male Workers' Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs

0x0800 REQ-STATUS Request DSP status DSP 0x0900 SET-LASER-THOLD ά ^ / ^ Laser Read Power Threshold DSP OxOAOO SET-FOCUSJTHOLD Set DSP F〇Cus Threshold DSP OxOBOO SETJTRACKJTHOLD 5 and then DSP Tracking Threshold DSP OxOCOO SET_SEEK-THOLD Set DSP Seek Threshold DSP OxODOO SET_SPIN—THOLD Set spindle RPM critical DSP ΟχΟΕΟΟ BIAS-TEST Perform Bias Magnet test 188 OxOFOO READ-DSP-REV Get DSP microprogramming language revision DSP 0x1000 WRITE-EEPROM write EEPROM (at current address) 188 0x2000 REQ A STD-STAT Mingqiu Standard Status 188.DSP 0x2900 REQ-OPT-STAT State seeking Optica I Status 188.DSP 0x4400 SET_MAG-READ Read setting Bias Magnet, freq · 188 0x4800 SET-MAG-ERASE Set clear Bias Magnet, freq. 188 0x4C00 SETJV1AG a WRITE to write settings Bias Magnet, freq. 188 0x5000 RESET_ATTN Reset Drive Attention DSP 0x5100 RECAL—DRIVE recalibration drive device (TBD) 0x5200 STOP—SPINDLE stop spindle 188, DSP 0x5300 START one SPINDLE start spindle 188, DSP 0x5400 LO CK-CART lock cassette I 0x5500 UNLOCK-CART unlock cassette I 0x5600 EJECT-CART eject cassette 188, DSP 0x5B00 SEEK—COMP-OFF set to seek compensation ON (TBD) 0x5B01 SEEK—COMP_ON set to seek compensation OFF (TFB) 0x5F00 SLCTJ3CR-FRQ-SET selects a set of frequencies I 0x6700 ALLOW-ATTN-CLEAR (TBD) 0x6800 READJDRV-RAM Reads RAM in DSP DSP ΟχβΑΟΟ NORMAL-PLL-BWIDTH Sets PLL Bandwidth to normal I ΟχβΑΟΙ HGH-PLL_BWIDTH Sets PLLBandwidth t High I 0x6A02 VHGH—PLL—Li DTH Set PLLBa n dw idth to be high I 0x7000 SETJLWP_RAM Set Laser Write Power I in RAM 0x8000 SEEK ^ BACKWARD Find DSP for ID OxCOOO SEEK_FORWARD Find DSP for OD The command is one or two Character command, this command requests some functions to be executed by 80C188 or sent to DSP. The paper size of the drive device is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) / Vt specification (210X297) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) The Drive Code is responsible for maintaining the agreement with dsp and deciding when to order Has been completed. In some situations, when the 80C188 performs a function, the command is immediately deemed to be completed. In other situations, it is necessary to delay while the hardware allows setting (for example, in the situation of turning off the bias). In the situation where the 80C188 commands the DSP to perform functions, the 80X188 must wait for the DSP to indicate that the command has been completed. See the following paragraph "Drive Command Completion" for a more detailed discussion of the completed commands. The high character of the two-character command is placed in the variable esdi_cmd. The low character is placed in the variable escjj_cmciz. Commands that use only a single character still use esdi_cmd. These variables are global variables and must be installed before calling the Drive_cmd function (Drive Command Descriptions): The following sub-paragraphs provide a more detailed description of the drive device commands. SET-EE-ADDR. Set EEPROM Address Com-mand is used to confirm the address of the next NVRAM operation. This address is set first and follows the READ_EEPROM or WRITE_EEPROM command issued by the Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, as discussed below. READ_EEPROM: Read EEPROM Command reads the data currently stored in NVRAM from the location previously confirmed with the SET_EE_ADDR command. This paper scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) A7 Description of invention (258) SET_JUMP_BACK_IN: Set Jumpback In Com-mand confirms to the DSP that the media is spiraling toward the ID and therefore jumping back should execute a Track search. Jump back is performed once per revolution to maintain the optics on the same actual trajectory. SET_JUMP one BACK one OUT: Set Jumpback Out

Command confirms to the DSP that the media is spiraling toward Od and therefore jumps back and should perform a track search toward OD. Jump back is performed once per revolution to maintain the optics on the same actual trajectory. JUMP_BACK_ENABLE: Jumpback Enable Com-mand informs the DSP that jumpback should be performed in order to maintain the current optical head position above the media. JUMP_BACK_DISABLE: Jumpback Disable Com-mand informs the DSP that jumpback should not be performed and the optical head should be allowed to follow the spiral of the media. DISABLE_EEWR: This paragraph is TBD ° Printed by the Staff Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page)

REQ_STATUS: Request Status Command requests the current status from the DSP. SET_LASER_THOLD: Set Laser Read Threshold Command sets the acceptable range of the laser read signal. If the read laser exceeds this threshold, the DSP ‘4 ^ aborts the interrupt. BU paper standard is applicable to Chinese National Standard ^ Yang) 84 specifications (210/297 public meeting) A7 B7 printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Invention description (259) SET_FOCUS_THOLD: Set Focus Threshold Com-mand The acceptable range of the signal. If the focus error signal exceeds the threshold, the DSP orders to abort the interrupt. SET_TRACK_THOLD: Set Tracking Threshold Command tracking error signal acceptable range. If the tracking error signal exceeds the threshold, the DSP orders to abort the interrupt. SET_SEEK-THOLD: This paragraph is TBD. SET_SPIN_THOLD: The spindle speed needs to be monitored to ensure that the data is written to the media and can be restored later. The spindle speed is monitored by the DSP for the minimum and maximum RPM specified by this command. If the spindle speed decreases to the minimum value or exceeds the maximum value, the DSP will give up the abort. The monitoring function allows the Drive Command interface to detect when the cassette has reached speed and when the cassette cannot maintain the correct speed. By setting the minimum RPM of the normal range of the media to zero and the maximum value to a lower RPM, when the cartridge actually reaches speed, the DSP will interrupt 80C188. Once the speed is reached, the 80C188 sets a new range to the DSP to specify the minimum and maximum RPM for the normal range of the media. A minimum RPM of zero indicates that no inspection should be performed at the minimum RPM. BIAS_TEST: Bias Test Command requests bias test. The actual steps during the test are described in the following paragraph, B. POST Definition, Bias MagnetTest. This paper scale is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) Α4 specification (210Χ 297 mm) (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

* 1T A7 299439 ______ B7. Fifth, the description of the invention (260) READ_DSP_REV: Read DSP Fireware Revision Command request micro-program language programming language revision level from DSP. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) WRITE_EEPROM: Write EEPROM Command writes data bytes to NVRAM, as described above in the location previously confirmed with SET_EE _ADDR. REQ_STD_STAT: Request Standard Status Com-mand requests ESDI Standard Status. The status provided includes the status to the drive and the status from the DSP. REQ_OPT_STAT: Request Optical Command requests ESDI Optical Status. The status provided includes the status of the drive and the status from the DSP. SET-MAG_READ: Set Magnet Read Command prepares the read operation of the drive. The offset command is in the Magnet Biads section below, and is described in Laser Power and PLL Frequency Command. Printed by the Beigong Consumer Investment Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs SET_MAG_E RASE: Set Magnet Erase Com-mand prepares to eliminate the drive device. The offset command is described in the Magnet Biad paragraph below, Laser Power and PLL Frequency Command. SET__MAG_WRITE: Set Magnet Write Command prepares the write operation of the drive. The offset command is in the Magnet Biads section below. The paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm> A7 B7. Printed by the Employees ’Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. V. Invention Instructions (261). It is introduced in PLL Frequency Command. RESET-ATTN: Reset Attention Command instructs DSP to reset the status bit, which is set to indicate the error condition of 80 A188 generated by Drive Atten_tion interrupt. RECAL_DRIVE: This paragraph is TBD. STOP-SPINDLE: Stop Spindle Command opens the servo loop and turns down the cassette. The Drive Command code first instructs the DSP to open the servo loop for laser, focusing and tracking. Then the spindle RPM is set to zero and the brake is applied. After (TBD) seconds, the brake Move away and the microprogramming language verifies that the spindle is sufficiently low (TBD) RPM. Once the spindle has slowed down, the microprogramming language will reapply the brake and delay (TBD) RPM. Once the spindle has slowed down, the microprogramming language will reapply Brake and delay (TBD) microseconds to stop the cassette. The time to wait for the initial slow rotation and the time to wait for the spindle to stop will depend on whether the cassette Depending on the plastic or glass. The microprogramming language will monitor the time to turn down the cassette to determine the format of the installation media. SET_SPIN_THOLD Command (see below) will be used to monitor the spindle RPM rate. START_SPINDLE: Start Spindle Command is responsible for turning on the cassette, Confirm that the cassette reaches the correct RPM, and then request Dsp to execute its initial card. Use the SET_SPIN_THOLD command to monitor the spindle RPM is completed, as described above. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Clothing · Order

A7 printed by the Beigong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ------- V. Description of the invention (262) '--- Turning on __ is a two-step procedure, including ⑴ setting the spindle threshold to monitor RPM until the card E reaches the minimum value of the special media form, and after narrowing ⑺ sets the spindle threshold to monitor the normal RpM range of the media. If the card £ is too long to transfer, the microprogramming language should switch down the card g and return an error code (D BD). The driving device must not exit the card g. The ten-second timer will use the measurement. The coal body needs to reach 4 × ( Default) The amount of time for RpM. The time required to remove the card® will depend on whether the media is plastic or glass. Once confirmed, the STOP_SPINDLE command will use the appropriate pause based on the card form. Once Ka Kuang reaches this RPM, the microprogramming language will assign an initial command to the DSP. At the same time, the DSP will try to close its servo loop. LOCK-CART: Lock Cartridge Command sets the flag to cause any subsequent request to exit the rejected cartridge. UNLOCK_CART: Unlock Cartridge Command clears the flag and allows the request to exit the accepted cartridge immediately. EJECT_CART: Eject Cartridge Command turns down the cassette. If the cassette is currently rotating, eject the cassette. The step to turn down the cassette is the same as the STOP_SPINDLE command, as described above. Once it has been transferred, the microprogram language assigns the exit cassette command to the DSP. SEEK_COMP-OFA This paragraph is TBD. The size of this paper is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 to 297 mm) (please read the precautions on the back and then fill out this page) to install. Order A7 Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Provincial Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Description of the invention (263) SEEK_COMP_ON: This paragraph is TBD. ^ *-CT_FRO_SET: Select Frequency Set Com-mand to select a set of frequencies. Each media format requires a different set of frequencies to record the media. See below, Bias Magnet Command, and this The command selects a frequency to use from this group. ALL〇W_ATTN_CLEAR: This paragraph is TBD. READ_DRV_RAM: This paragraph is TBD. NORMAL-PLL_BWIDTH: This paragraph is TBD. HGH_PLL__BWIDTH: This paragraph is TBD ° VHGH_PLL-BWIDTH: This paragraph is TBD SET-LWP—RAM: Set Laser Write Power RAM Command sets the laser write power value for the specified laser power area. The command allows the drive to modify the write power during diagnosis, which is executed in the specified power area Used during a clear or write operation. SEEK-BACKWARD: Seek Backward Command format is presented in the following paragraph, Seek Command. S EEK_FORWARD: The format of the Seek Forward command is presented in the following paragraph, Seek Command. Seek Command: The format of the two-character seek command is shown in Table 25. (Please read the notes on the back before filling in this莨) • H ^ I —II I. 1:81! ·

, 1T This paper scale is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) M specifications (210Χ297mm) A7 B7 5. Invention description (264) hi a wd: bit 15 bit 14 bit 13-0 lo_wd: bit 15-0 Table 25 -Find commands

Seek Command = 1 Direction Bit (1 = &quot; OD &quot;, 0 = &quot; ID &quot;) Unused

Number of tracks to seek For Seek Command, &quot; OD &quot; is defined as the direction toward OD or away from the spindle motor. &quot; ID &quot; is defined as the direction toward the ID or servo motor. The threshold used by the DSP in the search must be set separately before issuing the search command. The search threshold is set using the SET_SEEK_TH〇LD command.

Megnet Bias, Laser Power, and PLL Frequency Command: Bias Command is responsible for setting the hardware so that the drive can read, erase, or write to a specific location on the media. The format of a character Bias Command is shown in Table 26 below. Table 26-Bias, Laser Power and Frequency Command (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) &quot; Economy, printed by Deng Teng, Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Economic Development. _Wd: bit 15-12: Bias Command = 0100 bit 11-10: MO bias 01 = read 10 = erase 11 = write bit 9: &quot; seek to follow &quot; = 1 bit 8-0 Zone (Laser Power and Freq.) 1〇_ _wd: bit 15- 0: Unused This paper scale is applicable to China National Standards (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) Printed by A7 —__—_— B7_ of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 5. Description of invention (265) For reading, To eliminate or write to a specific location on the media, the drive command (Drive Command) code must be installed with magnetic bias, laser write power level (only for 2x and 4x), PLL frequency, critical to DSP focus and tracking. When the command is to be erased or written, the drive command code must also verify that the drawing current is within (TBD) microseconds (TBD) V and (TBD) V. The tandem ADC will be used to sample the traction bias current. The DSP focus and tracking boundaries used during read, erase, or write operations must be set separately before operation. The SET_FOCUS_THOLD and SET_TRACK _THOLD commands can be used to set these thresholds. There is only one frequency band for 1x media and when writing to 1x does not support writing, there is no Laser Power Write Zone, for 2x Laser Power Write Zone the number will be equal to the number of bands (ie, 16 zones). The number for 4x Laser Power Write Zone will be equal to the number of bands (ie, 30 bands for 512-byte segment format and 34 bands for 1024-byte segment format). Drive Command Status: The status obtained from the drive command interface is based on the modified ESDI interface, as used by RMD-5000 series products. The status bit reflects the actual state of the hardware, the error condition from the DSP, or the state managed by the microprogramming language. These statuses are two 16-bit characters, usually referred to as standard status and optical status. The source of the definition and status of the adverbial characters are listed in the following paper scale. Applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS> A4 specification (210X29? Mm) (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page). Order A 7 B7 5. 、 Instructions for invention (266) Table 27-ESDI Standard Status and Table 28-ESDI Op-tical Status. Table 27-ESD 丨 Standard Status

Standard Status Bit Source of Status (Reserved) 15 (not used) MEDIUM_NOT-PRESENT 14 FW maintained WRITE_PROTECT 13 FW maintained OROM—MEDIA 12 FW maintained (Reserved) 11 (not used) (Reserved) 10 (not used) SPINDLE_STOPPED 9 FW maintained POWER_ON CONDITION 8 (not used) ESDI_CMD_PTY_FLT 7 from DSP ESDI_INTERFACE_FLT 6 FW maintained ESDI_INVALID_CMD 5 from DSP SEEK_FAULT 4 from DSP MAGNET-BIAS_FAILURE 3 FW maintained MAX_LASER_POWER_EXCEEDED 2 (not used) WR ITE_FAU RIDE_TB_DAU Please read the precautions on the back first and then fill out this page) Order 28 printed by the Ministry of Economy Central Bureau of Accreditation Consumer Cooperatives-ESDI Optical Status

Standard Status bit Source of Status DRIVE_INIT_FAULURE 15 (not used) NOT-ON_TRACK 14 from DSP CART_LOAD_FAILURE 13 from DSP SPINDLE_SPEED-FAILURE 12 from DSP FOCUS_SERVO_FAILURE 11 from DSP (Reserved) 10 (not used) (Reserved) 9 (not used) This paper The scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (2 丨 OX297mm). The printing house A7 of the Beigong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Economics of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 267) LASER_DRIVE_FAILURE 8 CARTR old GE-REJECTED 7 CARTRIDGEJNIT-FAILURE 6 DRIVE-HARDWARE-FAILURE 5 WRITE_TERMINATED 4 EJECT_REQUEST 3 ERASE_BIAS_IS_ON 2 WRITE_BIAS_IS_ON 1 DC_POWER_FAILURE (from DSP) (DSP ()) (DSP ()) Maintained (not used) Serial Drive Control Interface (Serial Drive Control Interface): The drive command interface provides a common mechanism to plan the various serial devices in Upjter hardware. The tandem device is selected for spindle motor control, ACD, read channel components, and NVRAM. The microprogramming language outlines the serial interface. The drive command microprogramming language is responsible for knowing how to contact each device to start the spindle, read the bias current on the ADC, or read or write information about the location in NVRAM. It is important that the driver commands the microprogramming language to release all serial chips to choose to abandon any operations that may still be in progress. Open discussion: When serial access is performed, interrupts must be disabled. Interrupts must be disabled between 100ms and 1ms. .80C188 / DSP Communication interface (Communication inter-face): The commands and functions for the DSP are specified in the 80C188 / TMS320C5X communication file (DSP-COMM DOC), Rev XGH-1994, 8, 25. For convenience. These commands are listed in Table 29-DSP commands below. This paper wave scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Α4 specification (210X297mm) (please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) n ^ i · 策

， 1T A7-___B7 V. Description of invention (268) Table · 19th Fate DSP. _REQ_STAT 0x00 DSP. _INIT_DRV 0x01 DSP. _LSR_ON 0x02 DSP. _CAP_FOCUS 0x03 DSP. _CAP_FTRK 0x04 DSP. _CAP_CTRK 0x05 DSP. CLOSE DSP. _JB_EN_IN 0x07 DSP. .JB_EN_OUT 0x08 DSP. SEEKJN OxOA DSP. _SEEK a OUT OxOB DSP. _OPEN_LOOPS OxOC DSP_ _CLR_INT OxOD DSP. _RD_VEL OxOE DSP. _RD_CLOCK OxOF DSP. _EJECT_CART 0x_REC_080_11 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) Clothing. Order the DSP Status Definition (DSP Status Definition) printed by the Ministry of Economy Central Standards Bureau Negative Consumers Cooperative: Table 30 lists the bit definitions of the DSP status bytes . Table 30 also confirms how each bit is converted into a bit in the definition of ESDI Standard Status or ESDI Optical Status. Table 30-DSP Status to ESDI Status Translation DSP Status ByteO DSP_CMD—COMPLETE Bit ESDI Equivalent Status Bit DSP-BAD-CHECKSUM 6 ESDI_CMD_PTY_FLT Standard 7 DSPJNVALID-CMD 5 ESDI_INVALID) CMD Standard 5 DSPJTRACKING—ERR 4 NOT-ON_REACK Optical 14 Original paper 柒The standard adopts the Chinese National Standard (CNS> A · 4 specifications (210X297mm). Printed by the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Beigong Consumer Cooperative A7 ____ B7 5. Description of the invention (269) DSP_TIMER_EVENT 3 DSP_FOCUS_ERR 2 FOCUS-SERVOJ = AILURE Optical 11 DSP—LASER—POWER—ERR 1 LASER—DRIVE_FAILURE Optical 8 DSP_FOCUS_LP.CLOSED 0 DSP Status Byte 1 DSPJ = INE_LP_CLOSED 7 DSP_COARES_LPCLOSED 6 DSP_PINNING_LP_CLOSED 5 DSP_SPINDLE_SPEED_ERR 4 SPINDLE_SPEED_JECT_JECT_JECT_FAILURE_JE 13 DSP-BAD-SEEK 0 SEEK FAULT Standard 4

Drive Command Completion: In order to provide 80C188 microprogramming language with the flexibility to continue processing when the DSP executes commands, the command and state phases of Drive Command have been separated. In the latter, the 80C188 microprogramming language will particularly wait for the completed commands. Normally, all two consecutively requested commands will not be overrun. So, at the beginning of each Drive Command, the microprogram language must check the previously completed command, and if not, wait for a specified time (TBD) before the time expires. The commands to the DSP belong to different ranges and require different pauses. Memory access should be completed within 500ps. The short search should be completed within two microseconds, and the long search within 100 microseconds. DSP initialization can take two seconds. CNS) A4 specification (210x297 mm) I ........ I--........... 1 n clothing HI---II --I-- ------ , ςτ (please read the precautions on the back and then fill out this page) A7 ------ --B7 printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Committee of the Ministry of Economy V. Description of the invention (270)

The Dnve Command microprogramming language must also monitor the f-stops of the hardware directly responsible for processing, such as bias and read channel components. Biasing can take 45 microseconds to achieve the desired field strength. When setting the reading channel, the delay is (TBD) # 〇 JUKEBOX 20-PIN CONNECTOR SUPPORT: This paragraph introduces the operation of the Japiter drive device to automatically detect various signal responses on the 2 pin. In the microprogramming language, it will be determined whether to automatically detect whether the cable is connected or not without testing. All signals are released on the automatic control surface and the main sheet is connected whether or not the electric clam is connected. AC Eject: When the AC-EJECT signal appears on the 20-pin connector, the drive will abandon any current operation and convert all data in the write cache (Write Cache) to the media. If the cassette is rotating, the microprogram language will issue a drive command to rotate the card®. -Once the drive device confirms that the card g has stopped rotating (method is TBD), the drive device will specify the drive command to eject the cassette. (AC Reset): Open discussion. When the ac-RESET signal appears on the 20-pin connector, the drive no longer accepts any new commands. Those orders currently in Lincai will be completed. Any data currently being written to the cache will be written to the media. Once the drive has completed the above functions, the Re_setk number will be released (deassert) before Yuancheng SCSI is initialized (as described above). This paper _ is in use (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) Yiyi. Order V. Description of the invention (271)

Cartridge in Drive: The CARTJN-DRIVE (current AKA cartridge) signal on the 20-pin connector will remain in the released state. Regardless of whether the cassette is in the drive. There is no microprogram language support to provide this signal. Interrupts may come to External ENDEC. However, no sensor produces a signal that is in the channel.

Cartridge Loaded: When the cartridge is present and installed on the center, rotation and DSP have completed its initialization (including focusing and tracking), the CART_LOADED (current AKA card g) signal on the 20-pin connector will be asserted . Error • Whenever the exit sequence of the Cali fails, the ERROR signal on the 20-pin connector will be asserted. If there is no card or sensor in the channel, there is currently no way for the microprogram language to detect the failure of loading or unloading the cassette. LED Pipe: Whenever the LED of the driving device is illuminated, the LED_PIPE signal on the 20-pin connector will be asserted. Power Down Request printed by the Beigong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs: PWRDNREQ on the 20-pin connector, the drive will complete any ready write commands and then convert to write cache / write All data in the buffer will be matched. Power Down Acknowlodge. Xing writes \ | _ 吴 耳 The response to the PWRDNREQ signal has been updated, and the drive will assert the PWRDNACK signal on the 20-pin connector. A7 ________B7 5. Description of the invention (272)

Standalone / AC: The driver determines whether the 20-pin connector is connected. The level of this signal can be automatically detected on the interface by sensing. If the signal is high, the drive is in Standalone mode. If the signal is at a low level, the drive device has a 20-pin connector that is automatically detected. DRIVE OPERATION: Non-Volatile RAM: NVRAM will be used with Jupiter drives. Some drive device parameters (such as laser power settings and OEM product information) will be customized and stored in NVRAM. If NVRAM is removed later in the design, these parameters are stored in Flash. Power Supply Failures: Any failure of the 5V or 12V power supply will result in a hardware reset to the 80C188. Focus Offset Calibration for 1X and 2X: DSP will perform Focus Offset Calibration for 1x and 2x media to optimize the Radial Push Pul 丨 (RPP) signal. Focus Offset Calibration for 4X: This paragraph is TBD. Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs n I. I 1 ^ 1.-I! -I ΙΛ In ^^ 1: '^^ 1 ^^ 1 1 ^ 1 ^ ^, \ s port (please first Read the notes on the back of the pavilion and then fill out the notes and questions in the column) will be used during the definition of this paragraph. There are two parts to the implementation of 4χ Focus Offset Calibration. The first part of calibration is performed by the DSP to optimize the RPP signal, as performed for 〇ff_set Calibration. For the second part of 4X F〇cus 0ffset Caiibration, the carrier-to-noise ratio will be optimized. This paper standard applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297). A7 _____B7 __ printed by the industrial and consumer cooperatives 7. Description of invention (273) (carrier-to-noise ratio, CNR). This requires the 80C188 to write and read data to the DSP, select the best bias, and pass the bias. 8 0 C1 8 8 will instruct the DSP to use the specified focus offset and then write a 2T data pattern to the sector. This sector is read and the serial ADC must read to &quot; sample and The value of "Keep" is repeated with various focus offsets until the optimal value is determined. The specified algorithm is TBD, and the final value is sent to the DSP. For 2X Write Power Calibration: This paragraph is TBD. The following Notes and questions will be used during the definition of this paragraph. Open discussion of the situation. 80C188 will use the following (TBD) algorithm to perform write power calibration. Write Power Calibration for 4X: (pre-write test): this paragraph Is TBD. The following Solutions and problems will be discussed during the definition of this paragraph. Open discussion. We need to confirm when the pre-write test is performed: (1) Initial temperature, test all areas, (2) Initial temperature, only the next area used, (3) Each time a new area is written, and (4) some other algorithms. Or 'execute the pre-write test track has headers. Each question is a design consideration, but it will not affect people who are familiar with the art. The invention can be implemented with the discovery. For 4x write power calibration procedure is the same as the procedure for determining 4x focus offset. 80C188 is responsible for writing a series of sections while changing the writing of WR1 C ^) A4 ^ (210X297.J? ) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) 'Stupid · Order A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (274) Force level. This must be skipped-one or two sections write to the next at the same time Perform the installation. Once the range of the value is determined, the 80c188 reads the same segment and uses the serial ADC to quantitatively read back the signal. Based on the algorithm (TBD), the optimal write power level is determined. It is important and should be Note that this sequence requires Can be interrupted and restartable. If a new SCSI command is accepted in the algorithm room, the device needs to respond to the command in time and pass back the pre-write test at a later time. The situation is open for discussion. If the drive device is performing a pre-write Write test and the new SCSI writer command is accepted. The drive will either give up the pre-write test and execute the write command using the old write power level, or (2) continue the pre-write test to determine the new write power level , In order to increase the auxiliary operation (overhead) of this command. Each issue is a design consideration ’but does not affect the familiarity. The skilled person can implement the invention here. , Recalibration (Recalibration): This paragraph is TBD. The following solutions and questions will be used during the definition of this paragraph. When to be executed; what to do; temperature monitoring; monitoring times; how much the temperature rise needs to be guided and which needs to be calibrated to correspond to recalibration; when to drive the installation of Taitai 1 for recalibration and whether recalibration will be the same; call (_丨) Whether to execute

The current changes. Each issue is a design consideration, but it will not affect the familiarity of the skilled person in the implementation and implementation of the present invention. U This paper standard uses the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Α4 · (n-I--1 II —is HI-'-Cloth II!--I--, ςτ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this Page) Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Central Bureau of Standards, Employee and Consumer Cooperatives Printed by the quasi-Ministry of Economic Affairs, Central Bureau of Standards, and Employee Consumer Cooperatives A7 --------- B7 V. Description of invention (275) DSP calibration includes establishment of Focus Offset and RPE Offset. There are two algorithms for calibrating the focus. Which algorithm is used is not established. When the temperature function or when the error recovery procedure is recalibrated, it will be executed. Every 5_1〇ec temperature rise 'Focus Offset, RPE Offset and Write Laser

Power will be calibrated again. When "e | se" is processed, the call should be executed. If recalibration is in process, the incoming SCSI command must be interrupted. The standby system remains busy green for the extended period, and the last call must have priority. Each of the read power changes.

Flash EEPROM Support: Write Buffer SCSI Com-mand will be used to download the new SCSI microprogramming language to the driver. The drive will not be able to overcome the reset that occurred during the update of the Flash EEPROM and the power cycle (p0wer cycie) can attempt to perform microprogram language updates. It is important for end users to know this fact: they never cycle power or cause a reset during the download process. If this happens, the drive will be sent back to the factory for repair.

Manufacturing Requirements: This paragraph is TBD. The notes and questions of ij will be used during the definition of this paragraph. Trace Buffer Support (whether the same is RMD-5300 is a design consideration). Read Ahead Cache: This paragraph is TBD. The following notes and questions will be used during the definition of this paragraph. The amount of memory in the reading and writing section of the cache is set through the Mode Page. See below. The scale of this paper is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) 8 4 wires (21〇χ297 public meeting)! | I --- I i · ". Form --I-I order (please read the precautions on the back before filling in (This page) A7 ------- B7 V. Description of the invention (276) Write Cache: This paragraph is TBD. The following notes and questions will be used during the definition of this paragraph. Whether the timing update is supported. Immediate Reporting. Write Reordering. Each issue is a design consideration, but does not affect the ability of those skilled in the art to discover and implement the invention. SCSI Command Performance: This section falls into TBD. The following notes and questions will be used during the definition of this paragraph. Combine multiple SCS commands into a single media request. Searching separately is the initial or final search. Bus occupancy algorithm: Buffer Empty Ratio for writing. Buffer Full Ratio for reading. These are design considerations. Powered-On Hours: The number of drive-on hours will be kept in NVRAM. In order to accumulate the hours of power-on, the DSP will interrupt 80C188 every 10 seconds (219 x2 (Vs). 80C188 will update the power-on hours every 219 X 20ps and store the total in NVRAM. If the drive device encounters an error, 80C188 can request The current value of the DSP clock. Only the lower 19 bits are used and the relevant time stamp of the error event is added to the boot hour. Note: (1) The time spent during initialization before the DSP is released from reset is not included. This time can be added to each time the drive unit is turned on. (2) Maintain the time until the next 10 (approximately 5 seconds) can be added to each time the drive unit is turned on. Lens Cleaning: Once the lens must be cleaned, down The secondary drive will exit the cassette and the actuator will move. The cassette exits ^^ 1-I —-I-. I ---- I-I (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

* 1T Printed by the Consumer Labor Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs

A7 '~ ---- 87 —_ Printed A7' ~ 87 by employees of the Central Bureau of Economics of the Ministry of Economic Affairs — The description of the invention (277) will brush the brush across the lens. The actuator will move to its normal position when the cassette exits the channel. The following situations are open for discussion: (1) If the cassette is left in the channel. (2) When it is safe to move the actuator back to its normal position. (3) If the &quot; error &quot; of the actuator in this procedure at any time, whether the time is moved will damage the lens. Each of the two problems is a design consideration, but it does not affect those skilled in the art to be able to implement the invention. Microprogram Performance (Firmware Performance): This paragraph is TBD. The following notes and questions will be used during the definition of this paragraph. Confirm the minimum section time for coal body RPM. Use a strategy with multiple segments per interrupt. Identify the time critical areas of Interrupt Service Routines (ISRs). Front Panel Eeject Request: This paragraph is TBD. The following notes and questions will be used during the definition of this paragraph. Whether to give up the current order. Whether to write the cached content to the media first. Each issue is a design consideration, and does not affect the ability of those skilled in the art to discover and implement the invention. SCS 丨 SCSI Eject Command: This paragraph is TBD. The following notes and questions will be used during the definition of this paragraph. Even if Cartridge Present Switch indicates whether it will exit without a cassette; whether it should be disabled through the selection switch; Jukebox may or may not need the host to be able to exit the cassette; each problem is a design consideration, but this paper is used for standard China National Standards (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) ί —-I n-i · I γ Table I--I-----, ^ τ (please read the notes on the back before reading (Fill in this page) A7 B7 printed by the Beigong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Department of Economic Affairs of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 5. The description of the invention (278) will not affect those who are familiar with this skill and can discover and implement the invention here. Option Switch: This paragraph is TBD. The following notes and questions will be used during the definition of this paragraph. Enable / disable hardware reset from the SCSI bus reset signal (whether to enable or disable the hardware reset circuit). Enable / disable SCSI terminal. Enable / disable is automatically verified after writing. The enable / disable flash memory has been planned to update the SCSI microprogram language. Enable / disable the exit of SCSI commands. Reserved (number TBD). A. FIRMWARE REQUIREMENTS: This paragraph contains microprogram language requirements to derive the Firmware Functional Specification. 1 _ Diagnostics (Diagnostics) 1) Support serial communication for diagnosis. 2) Serial communication aids access to new hardware. 3) Develop POST diagnosis for new chips and hardware: RLL (1,7) EN-DEC, GLIC (Glue Logic IC), NVRAM, read channel, spindle motor, serial A / D converter, parallel D / D A converter. 4) The motor spindle speed must be changeable by the SCSI command. 2. Microprogram language upgrade 1) Support Flash EEPROM of SCSI Firmware. This paper scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A # specification (21〇χ297mm) ---------, Eryi ------ lτ ------ One (please read first Note on the back and then fill out this page) 5. Description of the invention (279) A7 B7 2) Micro-program language (SCSI and / or DSP) can be downloaded via SCSI 3) Micro-program language T download operation must be able to reply 3 .DSP support 1) Must be able to download DSP code from SCSI EEPROM. 2) It must support a communication interface that provides command, status and data exchange 3) It must be able to support romable DSP (R〇Mable DSP) 4) It can support different speed tables for different media formats. -------- 〇 clothing—— (Please read the precautions on the back first and then fill out this page. Printed by 4.20 pin connector of the employee consumer cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 1) The microprogram language must be able to detect when 2 〇Pin connector is connected. 2) The microprogramming language must be able to read the latched values of the following 20-pin connectors: Autochanger RESET, Autochanger Power Down Request, Autochanger Eject, SCSI ID, SCSI Parity Enabled. 3) The microprogramming language must be able to read the current state of Autochanger RESET (without latch). 4) The microprogram language must accept interruption when the following signals on the 20-pin connector are asserted: Autochanger RESET, Power Down Request, .Autochanger Eject ° This paper standard is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) A7 A7 Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Department of Economics and Trade of the Ministry of Economic Affairs --------- B7____ 5. Description of the invention (280) 5) The microprogram language must be able to claim / release the following on the 20-pin connector Signals: CART_IN_DRIVE, CART_LOADED, ERROR, PWRDNACK (Powe "Down Acknowledge). 6) When the 20-pin connector PWRDNREQ is asserted, (1) update the write cache, and then (2) assert PWRDNACK. 5.SCSI Initialization 1) The SCSI initialization microprogram language will use the 20-pin connector as the source of the SCSI ID of the drive device. When the cable is connected, the signal will be driven by the automatic detection device. When the cable is not connected, the same pin There will be a jumper (jumper cable) to install the indicated SCSI ID. 2) The SCSI initialization microprogramming language will use the 20-pin connector as the source of the drive ’s SCSI Parity Enable. When the cable is connected, the letter It will be driven by the automatic detection device. When the cable is not connected, the same pin will have a jumper (jumper) to install to indicate whether SCSI Parity should be enabled. 3) The drive device must support the user of the terminal power supply Choose 6. Reset 1) If the SCSI Bus RESET signal is asserted, 80NT88's 丨 NT3 will be generated. 2) If the Autochanger RESET signal is asserted, the 80C188 interrupt will be generated. 3) If the SCSI bus master_Zhang Zhong The NT3 ISR must determine whether the hardware or software reset must be performed from the selection switch. If the software reset is performed, the paper standard is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) (please read the back Note and then fill out this page} &quot; Order \ Ί \ Ί Printed by Beigong Consumer Cooperation of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ____ Β7 Fifth, the invention description (281) Then the NT3 ISR informs the Monitor Task that a reset has occurred and the write is fast The content must be updated. 4) If the autochanger advocates Autochanger RESET during the boot sequence, the drive unit ⑻ must ignore Autochanger EJECT, and (b) must wait for Autochange before performing SCSI initialization r RESET is released. 5) If the automatic converter changes the SCSI ID of the drive device at any time, it can claim Autochanger RESET. 7. Read channel support 1) The microprogram language must install the read channel in the form of the current read operation. 8. Write channel support 1) The microprogramming language must initially sample signal processing from the read channel for the section used for pre-write testing. 2) The microprogram language must determine the best Write Power Level for the current frequency region and the current drive device temperature. 3) The microprogram language must send Focus Offset to DSP for 4x media. 9. Driver command support 1) The driver command interface must be based on the HC11 interface used. This paper scale applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X297mm) 'n n n t— · n n In-X ^ i ^ i n n t— n Ding (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

Printed by Beigong Consumer Cooperative, Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs. 2) The definition of the status characters of the driving command must be the same as the status characters of c p used. 3) Jump back must be enabled / disabled by GUC register and read by Dsp. 4) The direction of the jump back must be assigned to the DSP. 5) The drive command microprogram language must set the spindle speed for the media format. 6) The drive command microprogram language must be able to confirm that the spindle has reached speed. 7) The drive command microprogram language must be able to sample the temperature of the drive. 8) The reset interface command will now assert SERVO RESET — release SERVO RESET in microseconds. 9) Look for the logical trajectory where the range that must be adapted to the actual trajectory is within the range of -3366 to +76724. 10) The drive command microprogram language will enable / disable the bias magnet and select the magnet polarity. 11) Bias / Laser / Freq Command must be adapted to reach 34 frequency and laser power area. 12) The driver command microprogram language will notify the DSP to exit the card g. 13) The drive command microprogram · language must be able to sense when · stuck is write-protected. This paper button is suitable for Zhongguanjia Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21GX297mm)-n--1-I-....... 'Winter------ (please read the back (Notes to fill out this page) A7 A7 Central Government Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Employee Consumer Cooperation Du Printing 5. Invention Instructions (283) 14) The drive command microprogram language will be selected for serial interface control products. 15) The drive command microprogramming language will use NVRAM for stagnant events and other stored drive parameters (such as laser power level) using NVRAM. 1◦. Drive Attention Handler 1) D "ive Attention Handler must detect when the cassette has been inserted and installed in the center, and then the cassette will turn up. 2) Insert, load, transfer in the cassette After being locked with DSP &quot; locked &quot;, CART-LOADED must be asserted. 3) If Autochanger EJECT is asserted or Front Panel EJECT switch is pressed, the drive (a) converts all queue write operations to the media (update Write cache), (b) turn down the cassette, and (c) eject the cassette. 4) When the cassette is turned down, CART_LOADED must be released. 5) During the cassette unloading sequence, if the DSP proposes that the ejection fails The Auto-changer ERROR signal is asserted. 6) The Drive Attention Handler must handle and clear the following error forms: Seek Fault, Off Track, Bias Magnet Failure, Laser Failure, Load / Unload Failure, Spindle Not At Speed, Write Fault. 11 · The need for functional enhancements • 1) When the drive is full and there are enough media access commands but not currently connected, add support for no media access commands. (This is usually when multiple initiators support . Test) n H - - n t ^ i - -. - ^ m -.. I ------, ςτ (Read Notes on the back and then fill the page)

IBM A7 B7 Fifth, invention description dagger 84) 2) Modify commands to support various command settings (TBD-HP DEC, Apple, Fujitsu, etc.). 3) Added support for new command settings (TBD). 4) Add support for the combination of Vendor Unique Sense Data and Sense Key / Code (tBD). 5) Add P-ROM support. 6) Add CCW (pseudo-WORM) support. 7) Add Read Ahead Cache. 8) Increase the write cache, including updating the buffer after a user-selectable time delay. 12. Performance requirements 1) The Interrupt Service Routine must be able to handle the minimum section time: 1 × at 3600 RPM is 538 microseconds, 2 × at 3320 RPM is .368 microseconds, and 4x at 1900 RPM is 272 microseconds. 13. Other requirements 1) Microprogramming language must claim / release Front Panel LED. 2) The microprogram language will support the power on hour counter (odometer). 3) The microprogramming language will support the cassette loading counter. I-1! — ^ 1 II-.- ·., 3: ^ —--*--Ding | W,-° (please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Beicong Consumption, Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 printed by the cooperative. V. Description of the invention (285) 4) If one of the 5V or 12V power supply fails, the drive will be (TBD). 14. Interrupt source 1) The interrupt source for Jupiter is i) INTO, Cirrus Logic SM331 (DINT), Cirrus Logic SM330, RLL (1,7) ENDEC; ii) INT1, Cirrus Logic SM331 (HINT); iii) INT2, DSP, GUC (Glue Logic IC); iv) INT 3, SCSI bus reset. 2) The sources of DSP interrupts are as follows: i) Non-Aborting Interrupt, Bad Seek Error, 10-second Timer Event, Bad Command Checksum, Unknown Command, Cartridge Eject Failed; ii) Aborting Interrupt, Focus Error, Off Track Error, Laser Power Control Error, Spindle Not At Speed Error ° 3) The sources of GLIC interruption are as follows: Autochanger Reset, Autochanger Power Down Request, Autochanger Eject, Front Panel Eject, Cartridge Inserted (in the channel), Cartridge Present (installed in the center) ° Central Ministry of Economy Printed by the Bureau of Standards, Peking Consumer Cooperatives --- III-I ^ Packed------ &quot; Order (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) 4) The microprogram language will not support Cartridge Inserted. 15_Error recovery 1) Heroic Error Recovery will be tried for individual sections. After the user-specified number of retries and the user-specified threshold. This paper scale is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X297mm)

^^ 9439 Fifth, the description of the invention (286) Respondent l) (ETfB :; Ree Na 7 listens to the lack of ordering in the complex mode of B. POST DEFINITION: this paragraph of sentence eight * if installed ------ order (please first Read the precautions on the back and then fill out this page) Each contains an introduction to the tests performed during the POST. 1.80C188 register and flag test 8〇C188 CPU symbol, parity, carry and zero flag are all It is checked to make sure they can properly set the texture. The execution has two parts. The first-'0XC5 value is placed in the AH register and then stored into the flag using the Sahf instruction. These flags reset their status Tested (ie, JNS, jNp, JNC, and JNZ). First, the value is complemented and the flags are stored. The opposite setting status of these flags is tested (ie, JS, JP, children and call. Any flag If it is not in an appropriate state, the test fails and forces the driver to use LEDs to signal CPU errors. The scratchpad test is a ripple test, which uses 0xFFFF to send to all scratchpads. (Ie, AX, BX, EX, CX , DX, SI, SS, BP, DI and SP printed by the Staff Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. Then 0x0000 Sent to the same scratchpad. If the desired value does not appear in the post-fetch scratchpad, the test fails and forces the drive to use LEDs to signal CPU errors. 2. CPU RAM test CPU RAM test has been written twice Enter all the addresses of incremental byte type (pat_tern) to static RAM (SRAM). The alternate type is then written into this paper standard, using the Chinese National Standards (CNS) A4 specification (210x297 mm) Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 ____________B7 printed by the Staff Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards V. Invention description (287) in a 128-byte block. On the first pass, this type is 0_, 0X01 '0x02' .... 0xFE for the first block , 0XFF. The type class for the next block is 0x01, 0x02, 0x03, ..., OxFF, 〇XOO. During the second pass, the type class is inverted. When reading back after each pass, if any S The RAM location} also contains the correct value 'The test failed and forced the drive to use LEDs and signaled RAM errors. 3.80C188 Interrupt Vector Test Interrupt Vector Test uses software interrupt test 80. Courier (djs_patching) ability of 88. Interrupt Vector Table (| VT) The entry item is initially referred to the test interrupt service routine (ISR). The AX register is initialized to 0x0000. The interrupt is quickly processed using the INT instruction, the AX register is decremented, and the isr exits. When returning from the interrupt, check the If the value is not 0xffFF in the test, the test fails and forces the driver to use the LED and signal the CPU error 0. 4. ROM Checksum Test The ROM checksum test uses the original level 16 polynomial to check the content of the Flash PROM . If the calculated checksum is not zero, the test fails and forces the drive to use LEDs and signal ROM errors. For each 16-bit character in the PROM, the lower byte in the BH register is XOR'd and BX is multiplied by 2. • If the carry flag is set after multiplication (shift), the equation 〇X38CB in BX is XOR'd. The paper standard in the BH register is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification &lt; 210X297mm) -------- If clothing ------ 1T ------ ^ ( Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) 5. Description of the invention (288) The high byte of PROM is x〇R, aBx multiplied by 2. If the carry flag is set after multiplication (displacement), the equation 〇X38CB in BX is X0R_S. 5. SM331 scratchpad test

The Cirrus Logic CL-SM331 scratchpad test resets the SM331 and checks the scratchpad after resetting the appropriate value. If any register test fails, the drive declares that the status cannot be cleared and uses LED display (TBD) error. The specified steps are as follows: (1) advocate SM331 chip reset, (2) release SM331 chip reset '(3) clear Disk Access Pointer (DAP), ⑷ is zero check register 0x57 (BM_DAPL) to 0x5F, (5) is Zero check register 0X41 (SCSI_SEL_REG), (6) zero check register 0x43 (SCSI-SYNC-CTL) to 0x45, (7) zero check register 0x48 (SCS 丨 STAT-2) to 0x49 , (8) is zero check register 0x50 (BM_SCHED _DATA) to 0x52. 6. Test of SM331 sequence generator Printed by f-consumer consumer cooperative of the Central Ministry of Economic Affairs of the Ministry of Economic Affairs-(Please read the notes on the back before filling this page)

The Cirms logic CL-SM331 sequence generator is tested to write the type to Write Control Store (WCS) and confirm the type to be written. ^ Any part of the test was defeated, and the driver S announced that the situation was clear and the LED display (TBD) error was used. The specified steps are as follows: 1) The sequence generator stops. (0x1 F value write start address)

A7 B7 * ^ 09439 Fifth, the description of the invention (289) 2) Block the Next Address, Control, Count and Branch incremental types are written to each 31 position in the WCS. 3) Verify the incremental type. 4) Write the incremental type of Next Address, Control, Count and Branch to each 31 position in WCS. 5) Verify the type of reduction. 7.SM330 ENDEC test

Cirrus Lgic CL-SM330 ENDEC test reset SM330, clear GPO register, clear Corrector RAM, verify Corrector RAM, and import Sector Transfer Count Equals Zero interrupt. If any part of the test fails, the drive device declares that the condition cannot be cleared and uses LED display (TBD) error. The specified steps are as follows: 1) It is recommended to reset the SM330 chip. 2) Release the SM330 chip to reset. 3) Delay the wafer by at least 10 microseconds to perform its reset. 4) The general purpose output (GP0) register is initially Οχοο. 5) Corrector RAM addresses 0x00 and 0x01 are zero. 6) 〇〇 "Yang <^ 〇" 8 eight 1 \ / 1 address (^ (^ and (^ 016 is zero. 7) Corrector RAM address 0x20 and 0x027 are zero. (Please read the notes on the back first Refill this page) Install. * 11 Printed B7 by the Beigong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Economic Affairs of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 5. Description of the invention (290) 8) Check the Corrector RAM addresses 0x00 and 〇〇10 for zero. 9) For zero Check Corrector RAM addresses OxOF and 0x016. 10) Check Corrector RAM addresses 0x20 and 0x027 for zero. 11) Perform standard chip initialization as described above. 12) The SM330's interrupt vector initially points to the test interrupt service routine. 13) &quot; Sector Transfer Count Equals Zero · 'interrupt force write zero to convert calculation to Sector Transfer Count Register. 14) The microprogramming language waits for the maximum count of OxFFFF for the interruption of the polled scratchpad. 8. External ENDEC test (TBD) 9. Glue Logic test (TBD) 10. Buffer RAM test Printed by the Employees Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs

The Buffer RAM test writes incremental address type classes to all locations in Buffer RAM and then verifies the type classes. The incremental types used are 0x00, 0x01, 0x02,..., 〇xFF. Then test and write the address type class to all locations in the Buffer RAM to verify the type class. The flip types used are 0x00, OxFF, OxFE, ..., 0x01. Finally, the test writes 0x00 to all locations in the buffer RAM. If any location in the Buffer RAM fails, the drive device declares that the status cannot be cleared, but the error is displayed without LED. This paper scale is applicable to China National Standards (CNS) A4 (210X297mm). Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Prototype Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. A7 __B7 5. Description of the invention (291)

11. The basic functionality of DSP POST DSP is verified by the 80C188 specifying the Reaci Cc3de Revision command to the DSP. This command tests the interface between the 80C188 and the DSP, accesses the DSP memory location, and tests the ability to return to a valid state. 12. Bias test The bias test will turn on bias for the write function. (To prevent accidental data loss, the laser write power digital-to-analog converters (DACs) will be maintained at the read power level.) The drive command code is responsible for turning on the magnet, installing the laser write power, and then reading Analog to digital conversion (ADC) to verify bias coil pull (TBD) current. The drive command code will wait (TBD) microseconds before reading the ADC. If the current is not within the (TBD) range, the drive declares that the condition cannot be cleared, but the error is displayed without LED. C. SM330 REGISTERS: This paragraph contains the description of Cirrus Logic SM330, Optical Disk ENDEC / ECC register as shown in Table 31 provided below. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) Install.,-* Table 31. Register name offset description Read / write status EDC_CFG_REG1 10h Configuration reg R / W IEDC_CFG_REG2 11h Configuration reg R / W __ EDC_CFG_REG3 12h Configuration reg R / W EDC_SPT 13h Sectors / track R / W EDC_ID_TARG_SEC 14h ID Target Sector R / W One paper music standard applies to China National Standards (CNS) A4 specifications (210X297mm) A7 V. Invention description (292) EDC_ID_TARG_TRK_LSB 15h ID Target Track LSB EDC_ID_TARG_TRK_MSB 16h ID target Track MSB EDC_ID_CMP-SEC 17h ID Compare Sector R / W EDC_ID_CMP_TRK_LSB 18h ID Compare Track LSB R / W EDC_ID_CMP_KD W EDC_SEC_XFR_CNT 1Ah Sect. Xfer Cnt. R / W EDC_SEC_COR_CNT 1Bh Sect. Corr. Cnt. R / W EDC_DAT_BUF_ADR_L 1Ch Data Buffer Address High R / W EDC_DAT_BUF_ADR_M 1Dh Data Buffer Address Mid R / W EDCA_D 1 R / W EDC_REV_NUMBER 1Fh CL-SH8530 Revision Nu mber R / W EDC_INT_EN_REG 20h Interrupt Enable Reg. R / W EDC_MED_ERR_EN 21h Media Error Enable R / W EDC_INT_STAT 22h Interrupt Status R7W EDC_MED_ERR_STAT 23h Media Error Status R / W EDC_SMC 24h Sector Mark Control R / W EDC_RMC 25h Resync Mark Control R / W EDC_ID_FLD_SYN_CTL 26h ID Field / Sync Control R / W EDC_ID_ERR_STAT 27h ID Error Status R / W EDC-WIN_CTL 28h Window Control R / W EDC_TOF_WIN-CTL 29h TOF Window Control R / W EDC_SM_ALPC_LEN 2Ah Sector Mark / ALPC R / W EDC_LFLD ALPC R / W EDC_PLL_LOCK_CTL 2Ch PLL Lock Control R / W EDC_PLL_RELOCK_CTL 2Dh Relock Control R / W EDC_LFLD_WIN_CTL 2Eh LFLD Window Control E / W EDC_RESV2 2Fh Reserved R / W EDC_ECC_COR_STAT 30h ECC Correction Status R / W EDCDR_ECC 31 / W EDC-ECC_RAM_ACC 32h ECC RAM R / W EDC-RESV3 33h Reserved one- EDC_VU_1 34h Vendor Unique Byte R / W EDC-VU one 2 35h Vendor Unique Byte R / W EDC-VU-3 36h Vendor Unique Byte R / W This paper scale is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X297mm) (installed-{please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) Order V. Description of invention (293) A7 B7

EDC_VU_4 37h Vendor Unique Byte R / W EDC_GPI 38h General Purpose R-- EDC_GPO 39h General Purpose R / W EDC_RESV4 3Ah Reserved --- EDC_TEST_REG 3Fh Test Register R / WDSM331 REGISTERS: This paragraph contains Cirrus Logic SM331, SCSI Optical Disk Controller The description of the scratchpad is shown in Table 32 provided below. The Ministry of Economic Affairs, Central Bureau of Industry and Commerce, Beigong Consumer Cooperative Printed Table 32 Offset Register Name Offset SCSI 1 ACC_REG 40h Direct SCSI Access Port SCSI_SEL_REG 41h Sel / Reselection ID ——— R / W SCSI_PHA_CTL 42h SCSI Phase control register SCSI_SYNC_CTL 43h SCSI Sync, Xfer. Control 「eg RM / SCSI_MODE_CTL 44h SCSI Mode Control reg raa / SCSI_OP_CTL 45h SCSI Operation Control reg SCSI_STAT_1 46h SCSI Status Reg 1 ------ ___ SCSI_INT_EN_1 47h SCSI Interrupt Enable Reg __R / V \ / SCSI_STAT 1 2 48h SCSI Status Reg 2 SCSI_INT_EN_2 49h SCSI Interrupt Enable Reg 2 SCSI_FIFO 4Ah SCSI MPU FIFO Access Port SF_SECT_SIZE 4Eh Sector Size SF-MODE-CTL 4Fh Mode Control BM_SCHED_DATA 50h Scheduled Buffer Data __raaT ^ BM_STAT_CTL 51h Buffer Status / Control _raXT Transfer Control reg BM_MODE_CTL 53h Buffer Mode Control BM_TIME_CTL 54h Buffer Timing Control BM_DRAM_REF_PER 55h DRAM Refresh Period-RmT ^ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Binding A 7 B7 V. Description of invention (294) BM_BUFF_SIZE 56h Buffer Size R / W BM_DAPL 57h Disk Address Pointer Low R / W BM-DAPM 58h Disk Address Pointer Mid R / W BM_DAPH 59h Disk Address Pointer High R / W BM_HAPL 5Ah Host Address Pointer Low R / W BM_HAPM 5Bh Host Address Pointer Mid R / W BM_HAPH 5Ch Host Address Pointer High R / W BM—SAPL 5Dh Stop Address Pointer Low R / W BM—SAPM 5Eh Stop Address Pointer Mid R / W BM_SAPH 5Fh Stop Address Pointer High R / W SF SYNC BYTE CNT _LMT 70h Sync. Byte Count Limit R / W SF_OP_CTL 77h Operation Control reg R / W SF-NXT-SEQ-ADR 78h Next Format Seq. Control R .. SF_BRANCH_ADR 78h Branch Address ..W SF_SEQ_STAT_REG1 79h Sequencer Status reg 1 R. · SF_SEQ_STRT-ADR 79h Sequencer Start Address: W SF_SEQ_STAT_REG2 7Ah Sequencer Status reg2 R. · SF_INT 7Dh Interrupt reg R / W SF_INT_EN 7Eh Interrupt Enable reg R / W SF_STACK 7Fh Stack R ·· (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Central Bureau of Economic Affairs, Zhengong Consumer Cooperative E. GLIC REGISTERS: This paragraph comprises MOST Manufacturing, described Inc. Glue Logic Integrated Circuit (GUC) registers as provided below in Table thirty-three. Table 30. Register name offset description Read / write status GLIC_DSP_REG OOh DSP Comm Register R / W GLIC_JB_CTRL_REG 01 h Jukebox Control Register R / W GLIC_INT_EN_REG 02h Interrupt Enable Register '---------- -R / W GLIC_MIO_REG 03h Miscellaneous Control Register R / W GLIC_JB_INP_REG 04h Jukeboxlnput Register ---------------- &quot; &quot; R .. This paper standard is applicable to China National Standards (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm)

GLIC_WPR_DACO 04h The drive presented Check Condi Cion to the box and it was restored by retrying, correcting and redistributing. ..W GLIC_INT_INS_REG 05h interrupt In-Service Register R .. GLIC_WPR_DAC1 05h Write Power DAC1 one ----- _.W GLIC one WPR_DAC2 06h Write Power DAC2 • _w 'GLIC_WPR_DAC3 07h Write Power DAC3 ..w' ---- -Driver for printing exceptions from the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Zhengong Consumer Cooperative: Status and Error Handling, the following Tables 33 to 43 provide the firmware I of the present invention, and the exception "handling designation is related to Specific designated summary. Next goal = discuss missing items / changes, data integrity risk events, and resolutions which functions are performed in the drive (considering logic, cost, and human resource impact) Notes and assumptions: 1) This means This list contains the status of all exception-driven processing. 2) When summarizing the present invention, find out the current best mode of the present invention, regarding power adjustment, laser feedback, and media read level damage criticality. In response to this, the following safe initial drive operation path is used to have all read levels and focus (The reading power focus has never been obtained in the data area, only maintained) This paper wave scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 public celebration) (please read the precautions on the back and fill in this page) ·-Order-A7 printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs---- ___B7 V. Description of invention (296) ~ '---3) Huikukunuolu provided a drive to stop operation and due to the failure of reply Volatile on the 4th, it will be shipped to the end, it has been green. These errors are identified and recorded, but the user cannot prevent trying to execute the command again. This increases the risk of user data integrity and non-volatile errors. 4) It is assumed that there will be more than one initiator on the SCSI bus. 5) Error detection should not be disabled (although interruption may cause shielding). 6) Exception handling priority = (1) complete data '(2) cost impact , (3) System performance and error operation recording ability. 7) Some features that drive the implementation of design methods and exception handling timing are the functions of our target market. The highly polluted environment and the relatively vibrating environment make special implementations possible. 8) The DSP has not been designed to implement additional power-on reset tests beyond the range of currently supported communication tests and described error status conditions. 9) GP〇 Temporaries 2 and 5 require proper power-on polarity checks. Not in the table The additional exceptions are: 1. &quot; Boot &quot;, &quot; Hardware reset &quot;, and, Software reset "discussed above. 2. The exception handling of &quot; invalid SCSI command &quot; and H wrong SCSI command &quot; will be discussed in conjunction with SCSI processing. 3. Normal &quot; Power failure &quot; (5V and 12V) is to trigger a power-on reset as described above. However, the discussion here is not to deal with power failures in the same place (individual 12V interrupts to the DSP and no 5V is a setting problem). At the time of consolidating this application, this paper standard is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 public daughter) (please read the precautions on the back and then fill in this page) 装 装--定 .II I- I · A7 A7 Printed by the Employees Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ___B7_ V. The description of the invention (297) can be ignored. However, it is believed that this detailed question only indicates the continuing development event and does not affect the invention disclosed herein. Maneuverability. 4. "Laser writing power error" during the period when writing cannot be performed or followed "Reserved to monitor the laser writing power level. 5.188 Internal" Write error "" Wrong flag writing A condition triggered by a rotation error (etc.). Previously, this could also be triggered by real-time measurement of the offset current. Real-time measurement of the offset current is currently a consideration in the future. The question marks that appear in the following list present design considerations , But it will not affect those who are familiar with this skill to be able to implement the invention here. Table 34. 1T ------ Μ (Please Read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Error detection signal Take power rotation focus tracking search exit status filter no no yes no critical time no yes yes no (accuracy) (do not try) sampling rate / TBD to 16.7 to 31.6 50Khz 50Khz TBD error time lmsec msec (1 rev) + TBD + TBD 80use 80usec + TBD 5sec. Write interrupt abandon / no abandon abandon abandon abandon abandon no abandon no abandon 188 masking ability no-yes? Yes Yes Yes Yes (CNS) 8 4 secrets (210X297mm) A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (298) Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs &amp; Only the Consumer Cooperative Printed a Table 35. Incorrect Qualification Signal Reading Power Rotary Focus Tracking Search for Exit Qualifications; Whether the Critical Time is Yes or No (Do Not Try ) No No No No No Sampling rate / error time ASAP TBD &gt; 100ms ec y msec y msec 10 msec TBD &gt; 100 Qualification Description Initialization procedure and focus search will request 100 msec® repetition and verification period. Check 100 msec for good after 1 second Status. If it is not successful, process the reply. The critical state of movement is the read level. More than y The ms e c period checks the good state of x msec. If it is not successful, the processing is repeated. The critical state of the moving state is the read level. Check the good state of X m s e c after y msec period. If not successful, process the reply. Handle the reply directly. Direct processing reply ○ Table 36 Error reply signal Reading power Rotation Focus Tracking Search Exit Priority 1 5 2 3 4 12 Reply instructions 1) Stop laser operation. Open all circuits 1) Reset rotation for proper speed. 1) Open all circuits and assign the initialization driver to the DSP ° 1) Open the fine-tuning and coarse-tuning tracking circuits. Close the fine-tuning tracking circuit, and then lease the tracking circuit. (May search be specified?) 1) Open the fine-tuning and coarse-tuning tracking circuits and designate the initial drive DSP ° 1) and then specify the exit command 〇 {batch clothing-(please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) -δ • 1 · * This paper scale is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) Α4 specification (210Χ297mm) A7 B7 Five printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Standards Bureau employee consumer cooperatives invention description (299 2) re-initialize power in the no-data area (initial drive) 3 ) Monitor the power state 100 2) Monitor the good state of the rotation state 100 msec for more than 1 second. 3) If it fails, open all circuits and stop the operation rotation and try 3 more times. 2) Monitor the success of the initial drive status. 3) If it fails, open all circuits and specify the initial drive a total of 3 times. 2) Monitor the tracking status. 3) If it fails, the third error will lead to open the fine-tuning and coarse-tuning trace back and send the order to drive to the DSP at the beginning. } 2) Fully open the first action and complete the action 2) After successfully completing the trial 3 exits, failure will cause the drive to stop shipping. (No volatile error record) A forced stop is issued. 2 will be moved. The first error is to drive Ϊ.Ι? 1} 4) The wrong stop is made and the green stop. Sending notes ^ 3 will move the action to the first mistake, the wrong drive will not f) 4) The wrong will stop the wrong green 4) The third error will cause the drive to stop working. (Non-volatile error green) The defeat and return to the final drive will result in the loss of the original guide. Tick 4) Move the road, start the move, start the move, and stop the move. S Wan drive 3 will move without error. Every time you start to drive the horse by mistake (wrong) 3) The mistakes at the beginning will stop. The green movement is wrong, and the fault is completely driven. The guidance is stopped. "Final} 5: The action will be sent. 5 5) The initial misoperation driving record. Table 37. Exceptions Source Signal Reading Power Rotation Focus Tracking Search Exit | Button Out ------ ΪΤ ------ {(Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (210Χ297mm)

V. Description of the invention (300) Laser feedback Vibration, tremor and media reaction, media radiance, and imbalance, drive error, thermal stop error. Operation and drive errors. The tremor calibration, intermediary, chemical errors, and changes. Vibration flaw quasi-drive error Vibration medium, motion medium, deactivation drive, fault change stop and error Vibration flaw body hot error SSI body medium, motion medium, deactivation drive. Initial, fault change stop #. Mistakes to make faulty hot body mistakes Table 38 Media organization blocking error and drive. Signal Reading Power Rotation Focus Tracking Search Exit * Nonvolatile errors for all reply attempts * Nonvolatile errors for all reply attempts * Nonvolatile errors for all reply attempts * Nonvolatile errors for all reply attempts * Yes · All non-volatile errors of reply attempts are recorded * Drive in the data area can support focus acquisition (laser feedback, etc.) * PR〇M impact * Item 1 丨 Need to test modulus / verification * Initial request modulus ( m 〇d) to identify the focus of the road open * response to the collision situation considerations * DSP can detect the cam position * exit the motor can maintain a constant current without burning up it .------ lτ (please first Read the notes on the back and fill out this page) Table 39 Printed by the Employees Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs

The error detection signal is incorrect. The track ID is searched. The magnetic offset section mask covers the track section ID. The data is read from the ECC level. The internal parity error status is filtered. Is it critical time? / Title1 / Write · -Operation 1Title 2Title section TBD This paper Μ 宜 财 @ ϋ (CNS &gt; A4 ^ (210X297_ ^ i ~ y

A B7 V. Description of the invention (301) Pre-written state pre-abandoned pre-abandoned pre-abandoned pre-abandoned pre-abandoned N / A Abandoned cover masking ability is it? Is it filter description READ: WRITE: VERIFY: successfully read a track and section ID. The number of 2 title tracks must match. READ: WRITE: VERIFY: 4 out of 5 and 3 out of 4 marks must match. READ: WRITE: VERIFY: 2 tracks and 2 of the number of sections must match. READ: The critical setting is the TBD level to support redistribution reading and detection. VERIFY: The critical setting is the TBD level (below the reading level to support verification and redistribution (please read the precautions on the back before filling the nest page). Table 40 Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs

Error qualification signal is incorrectly searched for track ID Magnetic offset section mask covers track section ID data read ECC level internal parity error qualification filter No No No No Critical time No Yes Yes Yes Yes Sampling rate / error time 1 / Title 1 / Write operation 1 / Title 2 / Title 1 / Sector TBD Table 41 Error response signal incorrectly search for track ID Magnetic offset-sector mask cover track segment ID data read ECC level internal parity Error The paper scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) 5. Description of invention (302) parity 6 8 Reply to the description READ: WRITE: VERIFY: Search three more times to get the number of tracks that match. If unsuccessful, raise an error to the host and non-volatile memory. WRITE: French Iron Yuan writes and records without magnetic bit record * | ° Definite effect. Non-g setting clears and loses' Yuji A7 B7 9 10 11 WRITE: VERIFY: 1) Failure to verify any SM will result in band frequency, passing the specified media (see &quot; Media Formats 2) Failure to specify a section will result in a section Redistribution. WRITE: READ: READ: VERIFY: Proof that DS will be brought, which means that if you see the 3ts track area, you will be defeated and retested. The failure rate will pass the match edirmaj and the number. Please match the misguided segment se. ° 1) If if'For '') 2) 2 tracks are needed, the zone M CC will be tried back to the best if the BD bit E is taste + reach again. T is added by ♦. I owed C ,. Increase the amount of money to repeat 3 / Super EC allocation VERIFY: If the ECC level exceeds TBD, then allocate the segment. WRITE: VERIFY: Make a non-memory operation. Mistakes and remembers the wrong machine. Re-printed 3 / recorded by the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Central Bureau of Standards, Employee Consumer Cooperative Printed READ: 1) Verification of any SM failure will result in band frequency, skimming the specified media (see &quot; Media Formats READ:?

Prove DS will bring, refer to the ats experience W defeat rate match edirma 1) $ Lost pilot frequency is fixed 丨 '' MeFO {装 ------ 定 ------ {,, (please first Read the precautions on the back and fill in this page) The paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) A7 B7 5. Invention description (303) 2) Designated area 2) Retry section failure will reach 3 times . He ric He ric Recov- Recovery includes ery including SM, and the reduction of 2 trajectories needs to be from the zone to the octet (the number of composite zones used must be covered by masks). Combined 0 Four tables exception source signal incorrect search track ID Magnetic Offset Section Mask Mask Track Section ID Data Read ECC Level Internal Parity Error Media Defect, Media Change, and Drive Error Thermal Performance Stops Operation and Drive Error Media Defect, Media Change, and Drive Error Media Defect, Media Changes, driver errors, media defects, media changes, driver errors and driver errors. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) -5 Printed Table 40 by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Three ISSUES signal is not correct to search for track ID. Magnetic offset section mask covers track section ID. Data reading ECC level internal parity error * wrong record in green in non-volatile memory * do we execute after writing? * For He- r o i c Recovery errors, enter green? * It is a problem to decide when the previous writing section is to be reallocated. * The data during writing is complete about the offset failure. * The redistribution of the high error section. This paper scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) A7 ---—________ B7 V. Description of the invention (3〇4)

I —. «In · Printed by the Central Standard Falcon Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Consumer Cooperative" This paragraph describes the twist of the pre-reading cache of the RMD-5200_SD drive. A brief description will be provided after the introduction of individual cache components Cache overview. This paragraph also introduces the operational test used to verify the pre-read cache. The 256 cache code is based on the 128 cache code. There are only two differences in the two modes of operation (except media (Except for special function calls) The first one is the 256 cache. The SR contains delayed error handling. (The delayed error is that the media error is first in the area # and has been corrected as if it was detected.) The second difference is 256 Mode does not diagnose &quot; sequence generator stopped ’error. The difference between the operation of the same pair of caches is not critical. Therefore, the current discussion will not distinguish between 256 and 128 caches. The pre-read cache code was invented before this. The invention includes modifications to the original code. These changes have improved data integrity and added 256-mode functionality. This discussion will not emphasize changes in features. In contrast, the role of the current best code mode will be introduced. Cache Overview (Cache Overview): Cache enabled status: only the following conditions occur when the cache starts, (1) Mode Page 8 RCD bit is set to zero, (2) in the addressed LBA mode, the current SCSI command Is Read_6 or Read_10, or (3) At present, the SCSI READ command is completed without &quot; installation! (Please read the notes on the back before filling in this ff)

.1 -I 1 -IIH ·· Order ---- This paper scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) The Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Beigong Consumer Cooperation Du Printing Pack A7 _ B7 V. Description of the invention (305) Any errors. This includes the Check Condition state phase and reconfiguration. When there is no delay or any reconfiguration for the SDL to be updated, the cache will not be executed. Cache Prefetch Operation: After the last logical block of the previous READ command, the prefetch operation starts immediately at the logical block. Errors that occur during the prefetch operation are not reported to the initiator unless the target cannot correctly execute the next command. If there is a wrong result, the error will be raised on the next order. Cache Termination (Cache Termination): The cache will be terminated in any of the following conditions, (1) read the last hidden LBA, (2) unrecoverable read error occurred Retry has been tried, (3) Bus Device Reset The reset occurs, (4) Receive the conflicting SCSI command, (&quot; Conflict • SCSI command is to request the drive to find, access the buffer, or change the drive parameters (spindle speed, prevent media removal status, etc.) see (Discussed below), or (5) 0 "~ 6 eight" 611-tion occurs ° Cache Components (Cache Components): Mode Page 8: Mode Page 8 defines the parameters that affect the aforementioned read cache operation. However, only the RCD bit The bit (bit 2 of byte 2) has any practical effect on the forward read cache operation in RMD-5200-SD. This bit is the Read Cache Disable bit. When this bit is set, its name It means that caching is disabled. Other stops in Mode Page 8 cannot be achieved and their default values cannot be changed. This paper scale is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) Α4 specification (21〇χ 297 mm) ίι-- ----, order ------ &lt;, (please read the notes on the back first (Write this page) A7 __B7 --------__________ V. Description of the invention (3G6) '' *-Drive Structure Cache Parameters: indicates the cache parameters that read the cache state forward Stored in the drive structure, drv-cfg, in: l) cache-ctrl (UINT) individual characters explain the current state of the cache:

0x0001: CACHE_ENABLED sets when Mode is allowed to cache, and the last READ command of the host is Read-6 or Read_10 in LBA mode, and has a block that can be stored.

0x0002: CACHE JN_PROG indicates that the hardware is performing a cache read. Set when the cache read starts, and when reset the cache ISR to arrange tcs in the cache line.

0x0004: CHCHE_STOP Printed by the Employees ’Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs {Laundry—— (please read the precautions on the back and then fill out this page} Cache Monitor settings to notify the cache to terminate the cache

0x0008: CACHE TCS ON Q mm indicates that the cache tSR is in the cache moni-tor queue. This tcs should be processed before starting another cache read. The standard of this paper is applicable to China National Standard (CNS> A4 specification (210X297mm). Employee's Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. A 7 B7 V. Description of invention (307)

0x0010: CHCHE_START_SCSI_XFER Set the function RdDataln-Cache when a cache hit occurs. This bit instructs the read processor to start SCSI conversion immediately.

0x0020: CHCHE_ABORT_READ_TASK indicates that the control should return to the SCSI Monitor Task by setting the Cache Monitor °

0x0040: CHCHE_MORM_IN_PROG indicates the current read operation of the requested data. 2) cache_start_lba (ULONG) The first LBA cache. 3) Cache_cur_lba (UL0NG) LBA follows the previous LBA cache. 4) Cache_buff_addr (UL0NG) The buffer address matches Cache_start_lba. 5) Cache_xfer_len (UINT) The number of blocks left the cache. 6) Cache_blks_rd (UINT) cache the number of blocks. 7) Cache_free_space (UINT) The paper standard system of the Guanjia Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 public broadcasting) u-. I-I-HI--1 / taxi K ^ 1 I-m I --- \ ~ '&gt; ^ U5-5 (Please read the note on the back of Hengling before filling in this page)

Description of the invention (308) Provide usable open space for cached materials. 8) Cache_free_space_predict (UINT) Expected open space for cached data.

Cache Function. When the cache is enabled, the called functions will be introduced in a rough order, where the functions are called during the simple cache sequence.

CheckQueuRouting (old task, new task): both scsi Monitor Tark and Cache Mointor Task can handle TCS from SCS 丨 select ISR. Only one of the two tasks performs this role at a time. The variable scsi-mon-task is used to diagnose the task to receive any more SCSI options TCS. CheckQueuRouting will diagnose scsi_mon_task = New_Task. In addition, the child column of 〇id_Task is filtered. Drive Attention ISR or SCSI select ISR TCS is transferred to the New-Task queue. The other TCS is reassigned. CheckQueuRouting called by both SCSI Monitor Task and Cache Moni-Tor Task controlled by SCSI switches between the two.

Compute_Cache_rng (): This function is a combined language program that is called before the normal read operation is initiated when the cache is executed later. The purpose is to calculate the maximum number of first cached LBA and cacheable blocks (Cache_xfer Jen). The cache conversion length is truncated by the LBA with the largest total number of available open spaces. Compute_cmache_mg () also initiates drv-cfg.cache-blks_rd = 0. If the conversion length is valid, the CACHE_ENABLED bit is set in drv_cfg. Cache_ctrl. This paper scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS> 84 specifications (210X2S »7))" ^, order ------ ^ (please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Central Bureau of Standards Printed by employee consumer cooperatives A7 B7 printed by employee consumer cooperatives of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economy V. Description of invention (309) —

Prep_Cache〇: This function is a combined language program whose purpose is to determine whether normal reading is completed, and if so, the following cache parameters are initialized: (1) drv_cfg.cache_free_space &gt; (2) drv_cfg.cache_free _space_predict, (3 ) dn / _cfg.cache_buff_addr If the cache can start ', then Prep_Cache () returns TURE, otherwise it returns FALSE.

Cache ISR (RA_cache isr, o "gcrRACjsr): The cache ISR is a simplified version of the normal read ISR, except that it is simplified in the following scope: (1) completed in ECC 'ISR only checks available open space and burst completion Unlike normal reading, the cache is not related to SCSI conversion, so there is no need to check the status of the SCSI notification; (2) Except for the sequence generator stop error, the cache ISR will not distinguish the error form. Fix any error threshold, so there is no need to decide the special error form; (3) Cache ISR checks the CACHE_STOP bit in each ECC completion d "v_cfg.cache_ct" l. If set, ISR terminates further cache Due to its simplified form, the Cache ISR returns three cache states: (1) RA_XFER_CMPLT, which is returned when the cache block has been successfully read, and requests a new section to continue the cache; (2) RA_RD_ERROR, Return when any error occurs, unless it is stopped by the sequence generator; (3) RA-SECLSTOPPED. This error can be handled separately, because the correct action requires the sequence generator to be started again. REQUEST-TACK (New Task): Request_task setting The state of the SLEEP task is fast, and New_Task is activated at the same time. Request • -task is also stored in the call function. The value of the Bian command indicator. New_Task will be applied to the Chinese national standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) in the paper standard -(Please read the notes on the back before filling this page)

, 1T

I Printed by the Employees Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 ________B7 V. Description of Invention (310) The last Requestjask (indicated by the stored instruction indicator) started to execute.

Cache Monitor Task: Activation of Cache Monitor Task: At the end of returning to the host data, the Reacj Task starts the Cache Monintor Task. Once activated ’, process SCSI to select ISR

The TCSs of Drive Attention ISR and Cache ISR ° is not just putting TCS on its queue to actuate, cache monitor task is not a pure task. Alternatively, REQUEST_TASK (New_Task) can be called by Read Task, as described above. Initially, the Cache Monitor Task will start its execution in the last sieep () statement. The Cache Monitor Task returns to control the Read Task to call REQUEST_TASK by another. It is important to note that when the Cache Monitor Task is active, a TCS is used by the Read Task and the system has not yet returned to the system. When control returns to the SCSI Monitor Task, the SCSI Monitor Task will still wait for this special TCS. SCSI Monitor Functions: Part of the role of the Cache Monitor Task is to handle the TCSs that SCSI selects for ISR. When SCSI Monitor

When Task accepts the READ command and Mode Page 8 does not disable caching,

The Cache Monitor Task starts to receive TCSs selected by SCSI for ISR. At this time, the SCSI Monitor Task calls CheckQueuRout-ing (SCSI_MONITOR-TASK, CACHE_MONI-TOR_TASK) to arrange its TCSs transmission path. This paper wave scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) ------ &quot; (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this hundred :)

Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Samples of the Ministry of Economic Affairs

The Cache Mon Task Task classifies SCS commands into three ranges, including ‘1 Conflicting Command, (2) Concurrent Command, and (3) Continuing Command. Depending on the command fan garden, cache

Monito "Task will give up caching, execute commands, or stop and start caching again. Conflicting commands: Conflicting commands refer to the need to drive to find, access buffers" or change drive parameters (spindle speed., Prevent media from moving out Etc.) When a conflicting SCSI command is received, the Cache Monitor Task will stop functioning and give up the cache. The SCSI Monitor Task is restored. The following commands are defined as conflicting commands: Rezero Unit, Prevent / Allow Media Remova Bu Format, Write "0, Reassign Block,

Seek_10, E "ase_6, Erase-10, Write_6,

Write / Verify, Seek_6, Verify, Mode Select, Read

Defect Data, Reserve Unit, Write Buffer, Release

Unit, Read Buffer, Mode Sense, Read Long, Start / Stop, Write Long, Send Diagnostics, all Vendor Unique Command, etc. Simultaneous commands: Simultaneous commands refer to a state that can be executed without degrading the cache. The following commands are defined as simultaneous commands: Test Unit Ready, Inquiry, Request Sense, Read Capacity. Continuing command: The continuation command is to read the data that the command can request to cache, and start extra cache it to fetch. Only two commands are classified as continuation commands. These commands are Read 6 and Read 10. This paper scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page. J Pack-D, -5 Printed by the Staff Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 _____B7___ Description of the invention (312)

Processing Cache ISR TCSs: The Cache Monitor Task receives the TCSs of the Cache ISR, and then calls ReCachels "Proc () to process the TCS.

Cache Monitor Task Deactivation: Control returns to the Read Task. Any SCSI READ command should request non-cache data. Control return to the SCSI Monitor Task should terminate the cache due to the occurrence of SCS 丨 Reset, Bus Device Reset Messoage, conflicting SCSI commands, or Drive Attention. When the Cache Monitor Task is disabled, control is returned to the Read Task, and then control may be returned to the SCSI Monitor Task. The control flow is determined by the cache task status set by the Cache Monitor Task. When the cache task status is restored via a call to REQUEST_TASK, the cache task status is evaluated by Read Task. Next, the three cache task states are explained. (1) RAC_TERM: This status indicates that the cache has been abandoned. The Read Task will return to the SCSI Monitor, immediately return the READ TCS and retrieve the next TCS to leave the queue. Note that when SCSI Monito is "normal, the SCSI Monitor Task will not go to the STATUS stage, because the status and command completion has been sent to be part of the Cache Monitor Task.

(2) RAC-CONT: This status indicates that a new command has come in, and all or part of the requested data has been cached. The Cache Monitor Task has started SCSI conversion, and the Read Processor needs to wait for the SCSI TCS. (3) RAC_NEW_REQ: This state indicates that a new READ command has been performed and that no requested data has been cached. The Read Processor needs to start &quot; normal &quot; reading and then wait for TCS from Read ISR. This paper music standard is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 Gongchu) ^^. 1T ------ Eight (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) A7 B7 V. Invention description (313 )

ReCachelsrProc (): This routine (routine) is called by the Cache Monitor Task, and its purpose is to perform the Read Task function for disc conversion. It handles the TCSs of the Cache ISR, updates the appropriate parameters in the drive structure, and additional read operations when starting the request.

Stop Cache in Prog (): This program is called when the Cache Monitor Task accepts the "continuing" READ command. The purpose of StopCacheln-Prog is to clear and terminate the current cache processing. It checks the CACHE_IN_PROG bit to understand the cache processing. It Check the CACHE_IN_PROG bit to see if the cache is in progress. If it is, the CACHE_S_OP bit is set to notify the Cache ISR to terminate the cache. After 5ms is allowed to terminate the cache, check the CACHE_IN_PROG bit to see if the SR is stopped. If the bit cannot be cleared, it is assumed that the cache is stopped by some other method. In this situation, both the CACHE_STOP and CACHEJN-PROG bits are cleared. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs --- book (please read the notes on the back before filling this page)

RdDatalnCache (): This procedure is called when the Cache Monitor Task starts processing the &quot; continuation &quot; READ command. The purpose is to determine whether a cache hit is requested by a new read. If there is a cache hit, the CACHE—START_SCSI_XFER bit in drv_cfg_cache_ctr 丨 is set. RdDatalnCache also modifies drv_cfg. "W_scsi_blks reflects how many request blocks have been cached. If there is a cache command, but not all requested data has been cached, RdDatalnCache modifies the drive structure to indicate how many blocks have been read and read. How much is it, and where should the reading be retrieved.

Read Ahead Cache Performance Test: Test description: develop a cache test program, called CT.C. This cache test program and this paper standard are applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CMS) A4 specification (210X297 mm). Α7 ___ Β7 5. Invention description (314) The SDS-3 (F) host adapter executes. This program has been slightly modified or CTTC.C. CTT.EXE is used to verify the read cache before RMD-5200SD. The first 64K LBAs of the CTT trial cache. The only type class is written on each of these LBAs. This type contains all 0x5A, and the first four bytes are superimposed on the square's hexadecimal LBA address (except LBA 0, the first four bytes are set to OxFF). First, CTT checks LBA0. If it is not the expected type, CTT initializes the disc. If LBA0 matches, the disc is assumed to be initialized. After the disc is initialized, CTT performs several consecutive read channels across 64K blocks. The same transfer length is used within the channel, and then the transfer length is doubled to the next channel. Since the buffer size of the host adapter is limited, the maximum transfer length uses 64 blocks. Each time the execution data is compared to verify the integrity of the data. Test selection: Write test results to a file (Command Line Option): The user can specify the file to be recorded by executing the command line, C:> CTT-f〇 = fi | ename_ext. If a log file is specified, any results normally displayed on the screen will also be written to the log file. Printed by the Staff Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs -------- ^ ^-(Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this f) Target ID: CTT can test various target IDs, although it is in the same This cannot be done during execution. Number of repetitions: The user can specify the number of times CTT performs the overall test. Initial transfer length: The user can specify the initial transfer length. In the subsequent channel, the transfer length is doubled until the transfer length exceeds 64 blocks. Compensator e? CNS) Α4 ·· ϋ 297 mm) -------- Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Description of invention (315) == There is no pause for testing during reading. However, there is one option, CTT can also be read in the test. This selection ensures that the drive has time to perform all or part of the action depending on the delay. Part of the cache test ensures that the driver can stop the cache. When all cache tests ensure that the buffer is full, the driver can stop the decision. , Pause length, if the pause length has been selected, the user is also required to stop the soil for a microsecond time delay. Stop on error: CTT also asks whether the test stops when an error condition is encountered (for example, the data does not meet the comparison or check the status status). It is useful to temporarily stop when the executing user does not record the results in the file. For example, errors often occur during the test. Disc Drive Firmware Architecture This section introduces the use of Cirrus Logic Optical Disk Controller Chip Set and the use of RMD-5200-SD microprogramming language to implement the architectural changes required by Jupiter-I.

The Jupiter-I architecture will reduce the number of tasks requested in the system. The SCSI Monitor Task (currently called Monitor Task) will control the overall functions of the driver. Read Task and Write Task will be combined into Drive Task. The functionality of the Read Ahead Cache Monitor Task will be separated; the duplication of monitoring functions will be eliminated and the cache function will be moved to the Drive Task. The special changes of (SCSI) Monitor Task and Drive Task are introduced above. This paper scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) {Binding (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs

_--* -l.l—- I 5. Description of the invention (316) Interrupt: Jupiter-I drive device has four ranges of interrupts. These include non-maskable interrupt (NMI), SCSI interrupt, driver interrupt and Drjve Atten-tion interrupt. When the SCSI Bus RESET signal is raised, when the 20 pin connector ACRESET is raised (TBD) or when PWRDNREQ Autochanger

When the Power Down Request is raised, _ will be generated. When the first 6 bytes of the command have been accepted, when the scsi bus attention signal is raised, when the SCSI parity error occurs, when the buffer parity error occurs, or when the SCSI transfer has completed, the SCSI interrupt will be generated . There are three possible chips that will generate drive interrupts: SM331, SM330 or External ENDEC. When the format sequence generator is stopped or when an ECC status vector parity error is detected, the SM331 will be interrupted. When a valid ID has been read, a media error has occurred, an Ecc error has occurred, a slide segment, or the Sector Transfer Count register has decremented to zero, or when an operation completion interrupt is generated, the SM330 will interrupt in lχ or 2χ mode. When an ECC error occurs or an Operation Complete interrupt occurs, the SM330 will be interrupted in 4x mode. When a valid id has been read, a media error has occurred, an Ecc error has occurred, a slide segment, the Sector Transfer Count register is decremented to order, / shadow division, or writing is abnormally terminated, or when an index pulse is generated, the External ENDEC interrupt in 4x mode.

Drive Attention interrupt is generated by DSP or Glue Logic IC (GUC). When the DSP cannot be properly initialized, an error occurs, a derailment condition is detected, the speed of the spindle motor is not the same as the speed of the spindle motor, --- (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

* 1T

5. Description of the invention (317) The DSP will generate a Drive Attention interrupt. When AC Eject is raised, the front panel exit key is pressed, the Eject Limit signal is raised, the Cartridge Sen-ser signal changes, and when the Cartridge Seated Sensor signal changes, GLIC will issue a Drive Attention interrupt. The core of multitasking: Identifying the form of information: The current architecture provides a method to identify the form of information received specifically. In general, the source of the information is asked and the &quot; status &quot; of the information is sometimes used as a form. Integer variables for TCS ID, TCS Source ID and TCS Destination ID will be converted to byte variables. The byte variable of the information form will be added, which maintains the additional bytes retained in the TCS header. The information form variable will be used as the function of the label field in the changed record. Simultaneous processing: Jupiter- 丨 requires simultaneous processing to drive, (a) execute the command queue 'and (b) when the read or write request is dispatched to the Drive Task' multiple times for the no media access command Initiator environmental response. The current architecture causes the SCSI Monitor Task to block execution until the Read Task or Write Task finishes processing the current request. Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs f Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

In Jupiter-I, simultaneous processing is achieved by means of that, when sending a request to the Drive Task, the Monitor Task is not allowed to block, (2) all tasks participate in "shared" CPU resources in circular scheduling, and (3) when No cut off command is received 'Allow the Monitor Task to obtain the Drive Task or Low-lenel Task first. In order to implement the above ⑴, the Monitor Task will send a request to the Drive Task using the new core service. The current method is to change when the Drive Attention occurs The task register to receive information will need to be changed. Drive Attention route information will be discussed in detail below. Project, circular scheduling will be introduced in the next paragraph. Project (3), the first paper is obtained in the next paragraph; ^ suitable Cai_Home Rolling Standard (CNS) A4 Specification (21 () &gt; &lt; 297 Co-Director) Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs-Description of Invention (318) (^ latter two shall be implemented. If Wang Yi first obtained it and could not implement it, the signal ^^ phG "e) was asked to come to the scs interface. The new core service will be required to test, set up and set up, and clear the scs to enter the coffee signal. Circular scheduling plan: for each _ Tasks &quot; equal "access to capital per cpu - a task must give up the CPU at periodic intervals. When the mission's execution of 20,000 yuan has reached the level of secret while waiting for the next one in its correction: the arrival of interest. In order to process the request at the same time, the potential time of the Task: the time required to execute the D "ive Task to hand over the CPU needs to be reduced. The potential result is described in the first paragraph. When the first acquisition is not required, the CPU will automatically It is shared between tasks. ^ Call waiting for the next message causes the current task to block and the core search is ready for the task. When the verification line is found, the potential factors for this search can be reduced by (1) reducing the number of tasks being checked, And (2) Reduce the number of possible tasks. The reduction in the number of tasks will become a single task by eliminating the Read Ahead Monitor Task and combining the tasks separated for reading and writing each media form. The task merge is described in further detail below The possible states for the current task include the &quot; waiting for special information &quot; state. For simultaneous processing requirements, this state may be invalid and therefore removed from the system. There are only three possible states: action, waiting for information, and sleeping. The core code of the task for checking rest tasks and waiting for information tasks has been highly optimized. The Ready Listw that is ready to retrieve tasks will not be added He Hei said that the enhancement. Before returning to check the original task, the core will require an additional 11S to test two additional tasks. This paper scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Eight 4 threats (210x297 Gongchu) (please read the back first (Please fill out this page again) ----- {Printed A7 ________B7 of the Employees ’Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Invention Instructions (319) Preemption: The Jupiter-I framework needs to be obtained first. The level of command reception 'media access commands that are cut off during this period will cause the Monitor Task to obtain the Drive Task or Low-Level Task first. There has been no requirement for the Drive Task to obtain the Monitor Task or Low-Level first

Task. It is proposed here to delay the non-cut command for ten or tens of microseconds, which is worse than causing the Drive Task to restart some parts of its processing. The part of the code needs to be recognized within the Drive Task and Low-Level Task (especially Heroic Recovery Routine). If the task is preempted, the processing of the part is restarted. DriVe Task and Low-

The Level Task will record itself at the beginning of those codes to identify where to start again. This is similar to the Drive Attention record. If the Drive Task or Low-Level Task is an action task but is not recorded, the task assumes that safety can be obtained first. That is, the task can be interrupted and later retrieved at the same point without any adverse effects. When the new command is received by the SCSI ISR, the new core call will be withdrawn from the isr to decide whether the first acquisition is requested. And if it is requested, it will be dealt with promptly. If the Monitor Task is the current task before the SCSI ISR is executed, it will be requested without first obtaining it. If the Drive Task or Low-Level Task is the current task, it is first requested. When the new uncut command is accepted by the SCSI ISR and the driver processes the cut media access command, the ISR will exit to call the new core service program to detect whether the task has a record itself. If there is no record, the task will be replaced by | ^ | 〇〇 "Task is given priority and the task is interrupted when the recurring schedule is retrieved. If the task is recorded, the 'core will ⑻ stop operating the driver' (b) to make the driver out of Spiral Mode ( Now Drive Command to DSP, ⑹ induce Drive Task or (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) (Install ------ Order --------I--m

Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Α7 Β7 V. Description of the invention (320)

The Low-Level Task starts again at the green address. After the Monitor Task processes the new command, the core call will wait for the next message. Then the core will enter the Idle Loop looking for preparation tasks. The Drive Task or Low-Level Task will still be ready, the core will process it quickly and the execution will retrieve the value in the AX instruction from the green address, and the instruction will start again. If it is acquired by the Monitor Task first, the CPU will check any aspect of the disc in real time (for example, waiting for the session mark), and any media access will stop. If you obtain these codes first, you need to start the green management again. Once the Drive Task or Low-Level Task has started media access, the hardware and disc ISR will continue to burst, causing it to terminate, and send k messages to the task to indicate that the burst is complete. The task is then responsible for excluding this information and rejecting the next shock. After the hardware has started, priority access will not cause any drive control problems. During the hidden search for media access, look for the code-disabled SCS, try to read the ID, and wait for the ISR to read the latched ID for 16 microseconds. During this 16-microsecond period, the SCSI ISR cannot be performed, which means that the SCSI Bus may remain in the middle of the comm_mand Phase (after the first six bytes have been read by SM33). In a successful search situation, the interruption of SCS 丨 will remain disabled and the time from the search code to read the ID until the search code returns to the installation code (for example, gCr_StartRdVfy) 'After all scratchpads have been installed and the sequence generator has been After starting. In order to better deal with this situation, the new architecture will allow the Monito Task to obtain the search first. In order to obtain the priority, the Greenton code is found and then the SCSI interrupt is enabled. If the SCS interrupt (request to obtain first) occurs At the same time looking for the link, the DSP will complete the search and enable the drive device "Qing Back. (This assumes that the DSP can wait for the Disable Spiral command and the Dsp completes the search for the paper standard for the national standard (C Gang A4 specification (2) 〇χ297ϋ {Μ 衣 ------ '11 (please read the note on the back Please fill in this page for details) A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Standards Department of the Ministry of Economic Affairs of the Central Standards Bureau. 5. Description of Invention (321). Right after the search has been completed but the hardware has been started, the SCSI interrupt should be issued. The green address is started again and the last search is performed. If the SCSI interrupt occurs after the volume has started, the media access is completely available first, so there is no need to remember the green ^ stack size (stack size): for each The stack size of a task is set to 512 bytes. For the increase in modularity and additional request management queue commands and cache levels expected by Jupiter- 丨, the stack size can be requested to increase to 1024 bytes Group. The number of tasks is reduced to three, and the memory allocated to the stack is actually reduced. Drive Configuration Structure: Identification of media forms: In order to quickly process the appropriate process for each media form In order, the micro language T will need to decide what kind of media has been inserted into the drive device. The bits separated in the drive configuration variable &quot; inited &quot; will be used to represent each media form: 1x, 2x and 4x. Variable (Drive State Variable): The requirements for the above simultaneous processing 'Monitor Task needs to be able to determine the current state of the drive device and specify the appropriate arrival event information. This will be done by importing a new drive state &quot; variable' Variables are only maintained by the Mnjtor Task. The following table 44 lists the possible driving states. The private paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (210X297 ^ · ^ button-down-(please read the back Note before filling this page}

、 1T i A 7 B7 Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economy V. Description of Invention (322) Table 44-Drive Status Power Up, Phase I (no selections) Power Up, Phase II (busy) Power Down Soft Reset Hard Reset Loading Cartridge Spinning Up Spinning Down Ejecting Cartridge Idle Seek Format Read, With Caching Read, Without Caching Read Cache Write Write Cache Flush Write Cache, then Power Down Flush Write Cache, then EjectCartridge Flush Write Cache, then Reset

Drive Task can change the status from "Read" to "NRead, Connected" or "Read, Disconnected". This paper scale is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) {Batch clothing ------, 1T (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) A7-~~-! Z___ printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. The ground rom test calculates the checksum of a single EPROM. With the dual-chip design of "click" _, the range of the checksum of ROM must include the address range of two chips. The address range of two chips is OxCOOOO To OxFFFFF.

Buffer RAM Diagnostic: Buffer RAM Diagnostic will target longer 4M Buffer RAM. After 250 microseconds Jupiter-I is requested to be able to handle SCSI selections. At present, the microprogramming language has two stages of initialization. The first stage of initialization is when the driver is performing its diagnostics (currently including Buffer RAM diagnostics) and no options are allowed. Once the basically complete driver has been established, the driver enters the second stage of initialization, can handle the selection and respond to Test Unit Ready or Inquiry Command. During the second stage, drive the EEPROM, initially the inquiry data, mode page data and various other data structures. Jupiter- 丨 4M Buffer RAM test should be performed during the second phase of initialization. RAM diagnosis: If it takes too long to diagnose the RAM of two SRAM chips, the test will be divided and the remaining part will be executed during the second stage of initialization, as described above for the Buffer RAM test. Self-inverter reset: If the drive device detects that the Autochanger Reset is asserted, the drive device must wait for the Autochanger Reset to be released before attempting to read the SCSI ID used by the 20-pin connector and whether SCSI Parity is enabled. ⑽When the factory Rest is claimed, all Jupiter-I drives can be initialized and executed in the first stage. When the drive unit prepares the SCSI part of the initial SM331, it will check the GLIC chip to see if the 20-pin connector is connected. If it is not connected, whether the SCSI ID and SCSI Parity are enabled depends on the choice of jumper. If the 20-pin connector is used, the paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Α4 specification (210Χ297mm) (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page).

1. Printed by 1T Ministry of Economic Affairs, Central Bureau of Standards, and consumer cooperation. 5. Description of invention (324) Connected to the drive device and asked the GUC chip to monitor the actual level of Autochanger Rest. When Autochanger Reset is released, the signal of the 20 pin connector will determine whether the SCSI ID and SCSI Parity are enabled. Boot task (B0〇t Task): initialization code ·· The second stage initialization code is included in the boot task. The startup task performs this initialization, creates other drive tasks, and then replaces itself with the code of the Monitor Task. It takes some time to overwrite the boot task with the Monitor Task. "Upjte" replaces placing the initial code of the second stage in the program that can be executed first within the Mom_tor Task. After the initialization is performed, the Monitor Task will perform its normal execution code. Since it is sufficient for the control loop in each task, the execution of the task will never leave the loop. The initial code will be placed before the task loop, so the initial code will only be executed once when the core initially creates the task. Into the task: the current architecture will separate tasks for 1x read, 2x read, 1x write and 2x write. There will never be more than one media installed at the same time. There is only one function, such as read or write, at one time Can be executed. So 'only one media access communication is needed' Read / VVrjte Task. The second stage initial code only creates a single read / write task, which is referred to as the Drive Task in this discussion. The following paragraphs provide further details. Cartridge initialization : When the cartridge is already in the drive at boot or when the cartridge is inserted after booting, the cartridge initialization is executed. The current architecture executes the initialization at boot Initialization is regarded as part of the power-on task. When the cartridge is inserted after power-on, initialization is performed as part of the Drive Attention Handler (ie, interrupt service routine ISR). Due to the new structure of dsp interruption and pause information, The initial function of the cassette must be performed by the task, so that the task can receive this paper standard in its queue. The Chinese national standard (CNS) M specification (21〇Χ 297 public advantage)

A7 A7 Printed by the Employees Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Information on the invention (325). (Only the task has a queue) The second stage of initialization at power-on and when the cartridge is inserted will send a message to the Drive Task to perform cartridge initialization card initialization. This is discussed in more detail below. (SCSI) Monitor Task: Simultaneous processing: Driver status management and control ^ Monitor Task is currently expensive to maintain &quot; drive status "variables. The following sub-paragraphs introduce the received scs 丨 command drive status, and the use of the drive architecture The relationship between various information. As previously mentioned, Table 44 provides a list of drive states. I Media Access》 P order: Monitor Task will retain responsibility for executing media-free access commands such as Test Unit ready, nqUiry and This Sense ° Start / Stop Spindle Command: In the current architecture, the Scsi MONITOR Task executes the start / stop spindle command. In order to provide simultaneous processing when the command is executed, this command must be executed by a separate task. Consistency in the architecture when the card is initialized, &quot; Spinning Down &quot;. For Low-

See Level Task below. SCSI Find_SCS 丨 Find Command is handled by Drive Task. The foregoing request is for the Monitor Task to support processing at the same time when a new command is received. The Monitor Task will change the drive state to "Seek" and send a message to the Drive Task to perform the search. The Drive Task will return the Seek Status information to the Monitor Task to indicate that the request has been fulfilled. 0 ϋ-n-n---{1 ^ 1 n III n D A7 Printed description of invention by the Consumer Cooperation of the Central Bureau of Economics of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (326) Media access commands. Monitor Task will be responsible for sending out information for each read, verify, erase, write, write / verify and format commands Give Drive Task. When requested, Monjtor ’s Ding Qi set the drive state to "quote", "write", or "format |". While waiting for the Drive Task to fulfill the request, the Monitor Task will not hinder it Execution. The Drive Task will return status information to the Monitor Task to indicate that the request has been fulfilled. Read Status and Cache: When the read request is received from the initiator, the Monitor Task will check whether the current Mode Page 08h has read the cache Yes. If enabled and there are no other commands in the queue, the Monitor Task will send information to the Drive Task to start processing the read request and when the execution starts to read the cache forward. At that time the drive state will change to ". If other commands are already in the list, the Monitor Task will decide whether the next command will prevent caching. If so, this information is sent to DrjVe TaSk to start processing the read request and when the execution starts to read the cache forward. At that time, the drive status will change to "Read, With Caching". If other commands are already in the queue, the Monitor Task will determine whether the next command will prevent caching. If so, the message is sent to the Drive Task to indicate that the cache does not start and the drive state is set to "Read, Without Caching". If the read cache is enabled and started, and then another command is received, the Monitor Task (executed at the same time) decides whether the forward cache should be stopped. For example, if the received command is a write request, the Monitor Task will send a message to the Drive Task to give up reading the cache forward and confirm any data in the cache. If the received command is a read request, the Monitor Task will send a message to the Drive Task to stop the ground ‘read the cache forward and retain the data in the cache (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

I I I

I -I--II-(The size of the paper for binding and ordering is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (2I0X297mm) A7 A7 Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economy V. Description of Invention (327) . Item fetching. The relevant designation for handling Drive Attention information will be discussed below. Write status and cache: When a write request is received from the initiator, the task will check whether the current Mode Page 08h has decided to cache Enable. If it is enabled and there are no other commands in the queue, the task will send information to the Drive Task to process the write request when requested. At that time, the drive status will change to &quot; Write Request , With Caching &quot;. If other commands are already in the queue, the Monitor Task will decide whether the next command will prevent caching. If so, this information is sent to the Drive Task to indicate that the cache is inappropriate and the drive status is set to &quot; Write Request, Without Caching., ^ Write cache is enabled and another command is received, Monitor Task (executed at the same time) determines whether the write cache should stop. For example, if the received command is a write request , Monitor Task will send information to the Drive Task to stop writing cache and update any data in the cache to the media. If the received command is a write request, the Monitor Task will have no action except after the current request command has been implemented Arrange processing commands. The relevant designation of processing Drive Attention information will be discussed below. Catastrophic event: Catastrophic event is defined as SCSI Bus Reset or Power Down Request from automatic converter. When one of these events occurs , NMI ISR will be requested to send information to the Monitor Task. Based on the driving status, the Monitor Task will have the correct action described below. This paper standard is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (210X297mm) t —installed- ----- &quot; (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) A7 B7_ printed by the Staff Consultation Office of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Invention Instructions (328) When the &quot; SCSI Bus Reset &quot; information is Accept, the Monitor task will check the current status. If the drive is currently in &quot; Write &quot; status, the &quot; Flush Write Cache &quot; message will be sent to Drive Task and the drive state changes to &quot; Flush Write Cache, then Reset &quot;. When the Drive Task returns the "Flush Status" message, the Monitor Task will check the Reset Bit in byte 14 of the Vendor Unique Mode Page 21h. If a hardware reset is configured, the Monitor Task sets the drive state to "Hard Reset", and then jumps to the boot address (OFFFFOh) to initiate the hardware reset. If the software reset is configured, the Monitor Task sets the drive state to "Soft Reset" and then initializes the software reset. When the &quot; SCSI Bus Reset &quot; message is accepted and the current drive is in the &quot; Read &quot; state, the Monitor Task will check the Reset Bit in byte 14 of the Vendor Unique Mode Page 21h and the initial hardware or software reset Set. When the "Power Down Request" message is received, the Monitor task will check the current status. If the drive is currently in the "Write" state, the "Flush Write Cache" message will be sent to the Drive Task and the drive state will change to "Flush Write Cache, Power Down". When the Drive Task returns the "F Mountain Status" message, the Monitor Task will change the drive status to "Power Down" and assert the PWRDNACK signal on the 20-pin connector. When the "Power Down request" message is received and the drive status is &quot; Read &quot; state, the Monitor Task will set the drive state to &quot; Power Down &quot; and claim the PWRDNACK signal on the 20-pin connector. Note: There will be additional actions after claiming PWRDNACK or retaining the limit. This paper scale applies to China Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) {Approved clothing ------ &quot; (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) A7 ___________B7 printed by the employee consumer cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Description of the invention (329) --- ~ --- T Lingzai · Note · Standard wearing or non-standard Tibetan columns. Each of these issues is considered design considerations, but will not affect those who are familiar with this skill. And discovery to implement the present invention. Drive Task (Drive Task): D "ive Task will perform cartridge initialization 'SCSI search and all media access and cache functions. A single task is requested because Only one type of media access can occur at a time and one type of cache is supported at a time. The Monitor Task will send information to the Drive Task to request appropriate services. Service SCS 丨 Command (Servicing SCSI Command): When the Drive Task receives a SCSI command ( When searching, reading / verifying, erasing / writing, or formatting) request service information, Drive Task's microprogramming language will branch out the appropriate path for reading, writing, or formatting, and then for 1χ, 2χ Or 4χ media formatting. The code for each media type is maintained as before, which is set separately for the basis of maintainability and stability reasons. Cassette initialization: When the boot receives information from the Monitor Task, the card initialization function is Drive Task is executed. When the card g is inserted after booting, the "Driev Attention Handle" will send "Ca" tridge | n_serted "message to the Monitor Task. The Monitor Task will change the drive status to "Loading Cartridge" and send it, 丨 _alize Cartrjdge Request "to the Drive Task. In order, the Drive Task will send the" Spindle Start / Stop Request "message to the L〇w_Level Task, as follows Said. Once the cassette has been successfully loaded and rotated to this speed, the Drive Task will determine the card® and media format, read four Defect Management Areas (DMA), write any DMA when requested, and the initial defect Management structure. When the initialization process is complete, the Drive Task will install (please read the notes on the back before filling out this page). -1Τ

In. Printed by the National Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs, Cooperative Workers Cooperative ¾ A7 ---- B7 V. Description of Invention (330) Return "Initialize Cartridge Status" message to the Monitor Task. Then the drive status will change to "Idle," Read and forward read cache: The read code within the Drive Task is responsible for managing the read program 'read forward cache, decide when a hit (hjt) occurs or decide to access the media. Information from the Monitor Task Will control the Drive Task to read, cache or not cache actions. When the Drive Task receives the information to perform the read, the information will indicate whether the cache should be started after the read is completed. _, Read ReqUest, without Caching '# The information indicates that the Drive Task should not plan to cache any data.

"Read Request, With Caching" message indicates that the Drive Task should plan to use extended cache reading. When one of these messages has been accepted by Drjve Ding 331 &lt;, the Monitor Task will prepare to set the drive state to the appropriate read state. Drive Task performs no cache reading and ignores the initial cache request and does not extend the read. The Drive Task may receive other information. If the &quot; St〇p Read Cache &quot; information is received, D "ive Task will only implement the read No part. If the cache is not ready to start, Drjve Ding Liu will not start forward reading. If the cache is ready to start, forward reading will be stopped and all cache data will be retained. Read _e state diagram Shown in Figure-One hundred and twenty-two. If the 'AbGii Read Cache' message is accepted, D "ive Ding ask will only realize the non-cached part of the read. If the cache is not available

Ta_ does not start forward spines. If the cache is ready to be opened, the reading will be stopped and the cached data will be invalid. . This paper ---------------- ordered (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) A7 B7 printed by the male-consumer cooperative cooperation of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ) The forward read cache will buffer from the last LBA, ABA section or track section until (1) &quot; Stop Read Cache &quot; or &quot; Abort Read

Cache &quot; information is accepted, (2) maximum pre-fetching is achieved, (3) no free space is reserved in Buffer RAM, or (4) section cannot be restored within the current threshold. When necessary, the Drive Task will maintain the Drive Attention Router (DAR) code (token). If Drive Attention occurs while performing a forward read, the Drive Task must be aware of the attention situation, clear the situation with appropriate actions, and start the recovery operation. The following describes the management of DAR codes. Write cache: This discussion is provided with reference to Figure 123. The write code within the Drive Task is responsible for when to access the media 'manage the write cache, manage the potential factors of the write cache, and update the write cache. The information of the Monitor Task will control the action of writing to the program. When the Drive Task receives a message to perform writing, the message will indicate whether the data is cached. &quot; Write Request, With Caching &quot; information indicates that the Drive Task cache data depends on the media flag in cdb and the content to be written into the cache. The &quot; Write Request, Without Caching &quot; message instructs the Drive Task not to cache data under any circumstances. When the Drive Task performs a cache write that updates the contents of the write cache, Drive Fash can accept other information. If &quot; stop write

Cache information is accepted ’, then Drjve Ding 3 will realize the current write request, and then update all the cache data to the media. If "F | ush Write Cache" information is accepted, then if a request is in progress, Drjve Task will realize the current paper standard t_) A4 * m (^ Clothing, ordering ----- 4 (please read the back (Notes and then fill this page) A7

The Ministry of Economic Affairs, Central Bureau of Precincts, Consumer Cooperative Printing and Rendering Write request, and then update all cache data to the media or if no request is made, all data will be updated to the media. The write cache feature has the advantage of requesting data coherency from multiple SCSI writes. Neighboring sections from multiple requests can be combined into a single media access, providing fewer processing aids. Adjacent sections can be cached. Rather than the adjacent zone causing the longest zone in the cache to be transferred to the media. The data is allowed to remain in the Buffer RAM until the maximum time specified by the Maximum Buffer Latency in Mode Page 21h. After writing 5 requests to be cached, the Drive Task will request that the time specified in the Maximum Buffer Latency expires, and the Tjmer service sends out the information if the data has been transferred to the media (due to the non-proximal nature of the request later). To the pause information, the Drive Task will start to transfer data (and all neighboring data) to the media. If the data is forced to be transferred to the media due to non-adjacent segment data, the Drive Task will request the Timer Service not to send the previously requested pause information. Only one suspension is required at any time in order to monitor the buffer's waiting time. A single pause is for the first write request to be cached. If the following requests are continuous, when the first request is written for the first time and written to the media, it is temporarily cached. If the following request is not continuous, the first request is written to the media, the suspension is canceled, and the new suspension is requested by the following request. Therefore only a single suspension is required. When necessary, the Drive Task will maintain the Drive Attention Router. (DAR) code (token). If Drive Attention is performed when writing the cache, the paper standard is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (210X297mm). Binding 1 (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Central Bureau of Economics and Trade, Ministry of Economic Affairs The employee consumption cooperative printed A7 _____B7 Five clear instructions (333) ~ — ~~ Occurred, the Drive Task must be aware of the attention situation, clear the situation with appropriate actions, and begin to respond to the operation. The following describes the management of DAR codes. Low-Level Task: In the current design, L〇w-Level

The Task is responsible for processing system requests for reading, verifying, erasing, writing, or replying to sections. These requests are used during the reading period of the Defect Management Area, the period of reallocation of the zone, the period of automatic reconfiguration of the zone, the reply period of the write error, and the Heroic Recovery period of the read error. Correct

The upstarts of the Low-Level Task will include handling Spindle Start / Stop Request and Eject Cartridge Request. For simultaneous processing requests, when the Monitor Task waits for new SCSI commands or pauses, the task can no longer query the spindle or exit the event. Therefore, these functions have been moved to the Low-Level Task. Low-Level Task has its own task queue and can prevent waiting for various events at the same time. When the Low-Level Task receives &quot; Spindle Start / Stop Request &quot;, the task will specify a drive command to start or stop the spindle, and monitor the pause. When the drive command to start the spindle is received, the language of the drive command microprogram will assign the appropriate speed command to the spindle motor control chip. The command will be assigned to the DSP to monitor the spindle speed and send an interrupt when the spindle has reached the required minimum speed. In order to monitor the time requested by the spindle start function, the Low-Level Task will assign a request to the Timer Service to receive information in (TBD) seconds. Then the Low-Level Task will wait for one of the two messages. When the DSP proposes that the spindle has reached the speed, the Drive Attention Handler will apply this paper standard to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm '' {^ — (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page). Printed A7 B7 by the WC Industrial Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Economic Affairs of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. V. Invention description (334) invoked (request). The Low-Level Task, as the recipient of the record of Drive Attention information, will receive "Spindle At Speed" The Timer Service will be notified that the spindle pause information is no longer required and the &quot; spindle Start / Stop Status &quot; message will be passed back to the Monitor Task. If the spindle pause signal is counted, the spindle motor will not reach the speed. The drive command will be designated to stop The spindle "Spindle Start / Stop Status" information will be passed back to the Monitor Task. At present, the task proposes whether it is necessary to monitor and stop the spindle power timer service (Timer Service): Jupiter-l's new available service is the system's Timer Service. Timer Service has Timer 1 and Timer 2 (used as presaclers) are used exclusively. Timer 0 is used by microprogramming languages at any time The Timer Service is responsible for sending information to the request unit after the specified time arrives. When multiple requests overlap, the Timer Service is responsible for managing separate requests and generating information at the correct time.

The Timer Service will accept two requests: insert Timer Event and Remove Timer Event. When the Insert Timer Event request is accepted and there are no other unresolved requests, the Timer Service will start the timer to calculate the total number of clock changes specified, enabling timer interruption, placing the request at the front end of its timer event table and sending Handle the callback program timer event. When a timer interrupt occurs, Time "Service will remove the request from the front end of the timer table and send the information to the request unit. When Timer Serv- ice receives the request of the timer event and one or more requests are not resolved at the same time 'Timer The Service will place these requests in the timer event table in an appropriate order to increase the delay period classification. All timer events in the table will be ---------------- ΪΤ-- ----_ (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page)

Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 -----—_______ B7_______ V. Description of Invention (335) △ (delta) time is managed. When a new timer event is requested before an existing request, the existing request and all later events in the table will have a recalculated delta time. If the new request accepts a smaller pause than the current event at the front of the queue, the timer will be reprogrammed and the new △ will be assigned to the event table. When a Remove Timer Event request is received, the Timer Service will use the processing returned from the Insert Timer Event request to confirm the timer event and remove the event from the timer event table. If the removed event is at the front of the timer event table, the timer will re-plan the hold time on the next event in the table and the new △ will be assigned to the event table. If the removed event is in the middle of the table, then △ for the removed event will be assigned to the event table. NMI ISR. When the SCSI Bus Base or Power Down Request occurs from the autochanger event, NMIISR will be requested. The ISR will ask Glue Logic IC (GLIC) to determine the source of the interrupt, and then send the information to the Monitor Task. Based on the information received, the Monitor Task will have the correct actions described above. If the SCSI Bus Reset bit in the GLIC (TBD) register is asserted, the NMI is caused by the asserted SCSI Bus Reset line and the "SCSI Bus Reset" message will be sent to the Monitor Task. If the Autochanger in the GLIC (TBD) register The reset bit is asserted, the NMI is caused by the asserted Autochanger Reset line and the "Autochanger Reset" message will be sent to the Monitor Task. If the Autochanger Power Down Request is asserted in the GLIC (TBD) register, the NMI is caused by the asserted Autochanger PWRDNREQ line and the &quot; Autochanger Power Down Request &quot; message will be sent to the Monitor Task. This paper scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (2 丨 0X297mm) {t ------ &quot; ------ ^ (Please read the note on the back before filling in this page ) A7 ---------- B7 Fifth, the description of the invention (336) --- drive / Wang Yi event (D "丨 ve Attention): Drive Attention is an exception event, such as derailment, finding errors or Exit request. This describes the requested _notification (pre-order language D "ive Attention has occurred and its information will be generated under its condition.: ~ Notification (Drive Attention Notification): When Drive

When Attention occurs, 'no ⑽ return to the remaining sequence is requested depending on what the drive device performs when the event occurs. For example, if the driving device is interposed and the collision is sufficient, no response is required. If the other party ^ reading is in progress, the drive needs to search again and continue reading. 、 There are tasks that have contact with the driving device can know the appropriate judgment and take the reply based on the task's behavior. Therefore, the notification of D "iveAtte_n needs to be handed over the task that is in contact with the current drive device. When this may be a task that is not implemented by each task, each task must confirm what is responsible for Drive Attention. Therefore, when Drive Attenti. n When it happens, the first notification agency sends information to the task in charge. The task in charge is controlled by the variable task — (“Saki" Identified ”Yan Hai variable is jointly controlled by all tasks. The first agency relies on each receiving information Tasks, one of which may be Drive Attenti0n information. If the microprogramming language is not the expected information, then stop the questioning as an effective loss of computing power. The second notice ^ also uses tasks that do not rely on asking Drive Attenti〇n information At the critical point of the microprogram language τ, a part of the task recordable code is used to indicate that Dnv is

Whether Attention occurs. If Drive Attention occurs, no additional time is requested except for qi / no record. · 'Green paper size appropriate financial l: i ^ NS ^ ———-______ * I— i — II 1 I · {装 ----- (read the precautions on the back before reading this page and fill in this page) • j = OJI. In I I. j--Printed by the Consumer Labor Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ^^ 9439 A7 B7 V. Invention description (337) Drive Attention Handling and Concu (Drive Attention Handling and Concu "rency) : Drive Attention Handler is executed as an ISR. First, the smaller core is interrupted, the SR is disabled, and then the larger processor is enabled. The following example 1 will provide illustrations. Example 1 Search is in progress and SCSI interrupt is disabled. Driver search Wrong so

Drive Attention occurs. Drive Attention Handler will execute 丨 SR. If another SCSI command is performed, the first six bytes will be processed by the hardware. Any reserved bytes will wait for PlO'd in the SCSI ISR until after Drive Attention is enabled again. When the drive is found, the SCSI interrupt will still be masked. Therefore, the SCSI wakeup row will remain in the middle of the command all the time for the reply (including the required reca |) executed by Drjve Attention Handler.

Drive Attention Events and Messages: Decide on the source of attention events. Send the message to the recipient of the current Green Drive Attention message. Send AC Eject Request, Front Pand Eject Request Spindle At speed and Eject Limit information. When the cassette is inserted, automatic turn-on and initialization are not performed.

Drive Attention Routing and Caching: When the Drive Attention Router code is needed: Monitor Task sends TCS to remove the forward read cache. This paper scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 public) (please read the notes on the back before writing this page). A7 B7 printed by the cooperative. V. Description of the invention (338) When the Drive Task is reading the cache before it is being executed, the Drive Task must keep records as a task to receive Drive Attention information. If Drive Attention occurs (for example, derailment), the Drive Task needs to act correctly. The Monitor Task will need to send information to the Drive Task to inform it to discard and return the Drive Attention Router code. SCS 丨 Transfer: PIO Mode: If the transfer is greater than (TBD) bytes, copy the data to Buffer RAM and then the DMA data away from that place. SCSI Message: Bus Device Reset, Terminate I / O and Abort.

Event: List of Events °

Message Types: Current TCS source type -i installed ----- (please read the notes before filling in this page)

SCSI TCS

ATTN TCS

LL RD TCS from Monitor Task to Drive Task through request from Drive Attention Handler for Low-Level Read request Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Standards Bureau Employee Consumer Cooperative Printed LL_WR-TCS for Low-Level Write request ERCVRY_TCS for Sector Error Recovery request Superseded:

Messages SCSI Bus Reset Autochanger Reset This paper standard applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) Printed by the Male Industry Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 _B7 V. Description of the invention (339)

Autochanger power Down Request Drive Attention TCSs

Error (Seek Fault, Off Track, Cartridge Not At Speed, etc.) Cartridge in Throat Cartridge on Hub

Eject Request (autochanger or front panel)

Eject Limit

Spindle At Speed

Timer Event Request

Timer Event Occurred

Spindle Start / Stop Request

Spindle Start / Stop Status (OK, Fail)

Eject Cartridge Request Eject Cartridge Status (OK, Fail)

Initialize Cartridge Request

Initialize Cartridge Status (OK, Fail; type of cartridge)

Drive Attention Router (DAR) Token

Return Drive Attention Router (DAR) Token DAR Returned

Seek Request

Seek Status (DAR Token returned)

Read Request, with caching Read Request, without caching Read Status

Stop Read Cache (Read Request will follow)

Abort Read Cache, flush Read Cache This paper standard is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) i ^ ------ IT (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Central Standard of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 printed by the Bureau ’s Consumer Cooperatives V. Description of invention (340) Write Request, with caching Write Request, without chaching Write Status Stop Write Cache (finish write and flush Write Cache) Timed Write Request (write selected portion of Write Cache to medium ) Flush Write Cache (Reset of Power Down Request) Flush Status Hardware requirements: (1) 2K Shadow RAM is NVRAM for quick access to stored data. This helps meet the requirements of no cut-off commands (ie, Mode Sense and Log Sense) ’(2) Elapsed TimeCounter for boot hours. Electronic Circuit The drive electronic circuit consists of three circuit combinations: the integrated spindle motor circuit is shown in Figures 101A to 101G. The pre-amplified flex circuit is shown in Figures 102 to 105, and the main circuit board including most of the driving functions is shown in Figures 1068 to 119. Integrated Spindle Motor Board The spindle motor board has three functions. One function is to receive the actuator signal on connector J2 of Figure 101-A and pass the signal through the motherboard to connector J1 of Figure 101-G. Other functions on the board are brushless spindle motor drive and rough position sensing pre-amplification. These features are described in detail below. Continuing to refer to Figure 10__A, G, this circuit shows the drive spindle motor. This spindle drive device circuit contains U], Figure 10—F, which is a brushless

(Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) Pack.,-°

X A7 A7 Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economy V. Description of the invention (341) A machine drive device and various components of a stable and stable spindle motor (motor not shown). m is configurable and uses the 1MHz clock provided by the motherboard. U1 sends a tack pulse on the FCOM signal to the motherboard, so the motherboard can monitor the spindle speed. The function of the circuit shown in Figure 10 to G is a rough position error. Yun amplifiers U2 and U3 generate error signals. U2 and U3 use 12 volt supply and + 5 volt supply. The +5 volt supply is used as a reference voltage. The reference signal is transmitted to the input pins 3 and 5 of u3 through a ferrite bead. U3 has 487K feedback resistors R18 and R19 and piC0_farad capacitors C19 and C20 arranged in parallel. Two transmission impedance amplifiers u3A and U3B receive input from a position sensing detector arranged on an actuator (not shown). The detector is similar to the photodiode of the separation detector. The amplifier U2A differentially amplifies the output of U3A and U3B by a factor of two. The output of U2A is sent to the main circuit board as a rough position error. Other operational amplifiers U2B have input pins 6 with reference levels generated by resistors R23 and R17. The reference level requires the combined output of U3A and U3B, and the synthesis of those two is visible (node 5 of J2B will be the same as the separated resistors R23 and R17 on node 6. The feedback of C21 makes U2B act as an integrator R21 drives the transistor Q3. Q3 drives the LED to illuminate the photodiode (not shown). This basic closed-loop system ensures the determined level of the voltage output of U3A and U3B. Refer again to Figure 101A to G The other function on this board is that the motor drives out of the driver. The motor drive is Darlington (Dar | ingtn) Q1. Figure 101 E 'current is limited by transistor Q2, such as resistor R7. The C11 series has noise suppression on the motor (not shown). The position of the eject mechanism of the cassette. The paper standard is the financial standard $: Su (CNS) A4 specification (21 () χ297 Gongqing) ~ --- ----- -llτ ------ ^ ---------- II; — ^ 1 ^^ 1 ·-m (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) A7 V. Invention description (342 )

It is made by Huo Zhuangying_rule 4, Figure-D, and its function determines the position of the gear transmission chain until the card g is withdrawn. There are also three switches wp-svy CP_SW and FP_SW on the board to detect whether the card M is write-protected, whether the cassette is present, and whether the front panel switch requests the main processor to exit the cassette. Preamplifiers Here are two examples of preamplifiers. The common components are shown in Figures 10-A to D and 1038-D. The different elements between the two embodiments are shown in Figs. 1048 to 105. As shown in Figure 1028 to 105B, the optical module has three main functions. The first is the servo transmission impedance amplification part; the second is the read channel read pre-amplifier; and the third is the laser driver. Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. Figure 1028 shows connector J4 and Figure 102. The signal output by u 'is the transmission impedance signal. Dingkou and Zhikou are two four detectors of servo signal. During the initial adjustment, X1 is not connected to χ2 so that individual redetectors can be adjusted. After that, X1 pin 1 is connected to X2 pin 1, X1 pin 2 is connected to X2 pin 2, and so on. The currents of the two quadruple detectors are then combined and amplified by amplifiers U1A to U1D into the transmission impedance. Four quadruple signals generate servo signals on the motherboard. The transmission impedance amplification function U1A_U1D is implemented with 100K ohm resistors: 1/8, 1 ^ 18, 8 = 1 (: with ^^ 10 and the parallel matching Picofarad capacitors C101-C104. Repeat Figure 4 and Figure 2, Diode FS is a forward-sensing diode. The forward-sensing current is an indication of the power output of the laser and is transmitted to the motherboard via pin 15 on the connector 4. The μ's Zhang scale is used in China. National Standard (CNS) A4 Specification (210X297mm) (Binding -------- ^ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

V. Description of the invention (343) Refer to FIG. -〇 二 B, which is connected to fine gamma as another quadruple detector. Two of the four quadruple detectors are used to generate a differential M0 (magneto-optical) signal. With the synthesized signal eVM_, u $ thing 439 is not a persuasion and t is a transmission impedance amplifier. The read No. 3 can be switched in the production-reduction synthesis domain 1, and the preformat signal from pin 6 is switched. Figure 8-Figures A to D show the level converters u7b, U7C and U7D for writing levels. U7B, U7C and U7D are three differential operational amplifiers, which are stable and highly qualitatively compensated. Differential amplifiers U7B, U7D, and U7D have 1/2 gain mounting write levels at transistor bases Q30i, ⑽2, Q303, Q304, Q305, and Q306, which are shown in Figure 1048 to the day. Three write levels: write level 1; write person level 2; write &amp; level 3; may allow the present invention to have different write levels for different pulses in the pulse sequence in which the M0 signal is written. ', 丄 are shown in Figure-Q3C'. The fourth operational amplifier U7A sets the reading current level. U7A drives Q12 and the current is mirrored to transistors Q7, 〇8, and Q9. The mirror current in Q7 and Q8 is the actual read current to the laser. The optical disc system according to the present invention incorporates a laser, a first method which is a first method of driving a laser by passing current to the laser, and a digital logic method which drives the vertebral motion, thereby only when the laser is excited With enhanced up and down switching characteristics to consume electronic power when reaching. In the preferred embodiment, the digital logic method includes a CMOS buffer, U301 and U302 shown in FIGS. 1048 and B, are connected between the electronic ground and the full supply voltage. In addition, the first method is preferably implemented using transistor Q30i_q306, Fig. 1048 to B. if ^ ------, 1τ (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) The paper standard printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Μ Specification (210X297 ^- -------- A7 A7 Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Description of Invention (344) According to this material sheet_another aspect has a focusing mechanism: tracking mechanism, lens and reading In this embodiment, the mechanism is controlled by a feedback loop. The best implementation of this feedback loop includes electronic circuits used to generate servo signals to affect the correction of the focusing mechanism and tracking mechanism. The first method is used to Passing the current to the laser, and the digital logic method is the first method to promote the switching drive laser, thereby consuming electronic power only when the laser is excited and enhances the up and down switching characteristics to reach. In this embodiment, The digital logic square enamel may include a CMOS buffer which is preferably connected between the electronic ground and the full supply voltage. The first method as described above can be realized by using the transistor. Fig. 1048 to B further Show real Pulse driver and enable laser LD1. In fact, the laser is protected with CMOS gates U3〇1 and U302A to ensure that when the voltage level rises, the laser is actually not affected by any current pulse. U302A guarantees that the Laser On signal The logic low level comes in and Figure 103A, and U302A will remain mirrored by the enabled current until the read enable latch (pins 1, 2 and 3 of U302A) is enabled at U302A pins 20, 21, 22 There is a high logic level on 23. This also provides a signal to enable the write pulse to drive the laser only after the laser is activated. This excitation is performed on pin 4 of U302A and controls 301A, 301B and 302B input. Enable pin, U320 and U301 pins 13 and 24, and U301A pin 24 are individual write signal and write strobe 1 (write strobe 1), write strobe 2 Consistent with write strobe 3. Turn on the three levels allowed by the current source generated by the individual transistors Q310 to Q306 to write. Figure 104, pure iron flanges 301 and 302 isolate the current from the write current The paper scale is applicable to China National Standard (CNS> A4 specification (210X297mm) --- {(Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) A7 ________B7 printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economy V. Invention description (345) ~~~ '' Read the current effect and use it for EMI purposes Keep the radiated RF modulation out of the cable. Refer to Figure ⅹ A to B. U303 is an IDZ3 'custom integrated circuit that performs a function of generating about 46 ° of clear current. This current is the RF modulation The change is directed to the laser to reduce laser noise. The Li output is coupled to C307. Pin i on U303 is an enable pin to turn modulation on or off. The invention includes changing #C_ts type vibrator to reduce pulse ringing (pusermgmg). The oscillator contains a resonant circuit with increased resistance to the vibrator. The resonant circuit also includes inductance. One aspect of the present invention is that the vibrator has an increased supply voltage, thus increasing the R.F. modulation amplitude and helping to reduce ringing. As will be described in more detail below, 'The best example of improving the electronic circuit of Co_s oscillator includes transistors with emitter, base and collector; electronic voltage supply; load resistance connected in series between collector and voltage supply, Therefore, when the write pulse is supplied to the edger, the vibration of the edger is relaxed. Preferably, the load inductance is also supplied in series with the load resistance. In this embodiment, the write pulse is provided to the interface between the load resistance and the load inductance, and the vibrations of the separation capacitor can be connected between the forbidden pole and ground and across the emitter and forbidden pole. Another preferred example of the improved Colpjtts oscillator electronic circuit of the present invention includes the transistor system having an emitter, a base, and a collector; the separation capacitor staggered vibration system is connected between the collector and ground to bridge the emitter and the collector The electronic voltage supply is connected in series between the load inductance and the load resistance between the collector and the voltage supply, so when writing 7 pulses to the interface between the load resistance and the load inductance, it can be eased: Oscillator vibration. Similarly, this example increases the supply voltage, so the R.F. modulation amplitude is increased and f helps reduce ringing. This c〇 丨 shuai 3 vibrating device has ^ contained this paper ruler money ®®) Λ4 ^ # (210χ297 ^ ¾) ------ iT ------ ί (Please read the notes on the back first (Fill in this page again)

-Description of the invention (346) Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. In a preferred embodiment, the load circuit also includes an inductor. Time = combined or may include laser, write pulse source, electrical equipment, C_S (the device has an emitter, base body: load resistance connected in series between the collector and the voltage supply when the pulse is supplied to the oscillator The capper rings. This may include a series connection of the second vibration sensor and the load resistance, in which the write pulse is provided for :, electric lightning, and the load resistance and resonance ^ '= between_surface and / or separation capacitor_ connected pole and Connect the ground between the emitter and the forbidden pole. 'According to the present invention, it is used in a disc drive system. This combined embodiment includes laser, write pulse source, c_S oscillator system and includes 2, transistors of base and first poles, and separation capacitors. The vibration system is connected between the forbidden cup adaptor 'and the load 1 and the voltage supply connected in series with the load resistance, so when the pulse is supplied to the interface between the load resistance and the load inductance: ringing at the time. In the same way this implementation increases the load on the carrier and the private supply = = R.F. modulates the amplitude and helps reduce the material. At c. Shuai s (iv) The method of reducing / ringing in the benefits includes the step of increasing the load resistance in the oscillator and increasing the voltage supply to the oscillator. As above, this optical disc system is a type with a focusing mechanism and a tracking mechanism, in which these mechanisms are controlled by a feedback loop, which includes an electronic circuit that can generate a servo error signal to affect the following modifications and sales structures and Tracking mechanism, laser, write pulse source, pitts vibrator ^ and includes emitter, base and secret transistor, separation capacitor resonance system is connected between the collector and ground and the emitter is bridged Compatible with collectors and electronic voltage supply, the paper size is suitable for financial rewards 2 ^ x297 ^ J7 (approval 1T ------- 《(please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) A7 A7 Central Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the Bureau of Standards Consumer Labor Cooperative B7 V. Description of the invention (347) The resonant inductance and the load resistance are connected in series between the collector and the voltage ^, so the &amp; write pulse is supplied to the interface between the load resistance and the resonant inductance When: the oscillator rings. ”^ Figure 1 ◦ Four Middle 'The second embodiment uses the Copits Oscillator to establish a single transistor Q4〇 in the encirclement. Figure 10 shows the separation capacitor. C403 and C402 and inductance L400. The circuit is powered by 12 volts and 2K The sexual load R400 bias ensures that the incoming write pulse passes through the pure iron flange FB3〇h without any ringing generated by the oscillator circuit. If it is necessary to disable, the disable of the oscillator will be provided by shortening R402 to Ground reference signal.

The previous design of the Colpitte oscillator included a 5 volt supply and an inductor to replace R400. However, other designs provide sufficient amplitude modulation ^ laser to reduce noise. This previous design would ring every time a write pulse is supplied. The write pulse no longer leads the vibration age in the oscillator circuit because the inductor is replaced by resistor R400. In order to eliminate ringing and maintain sufficient peak-to-peak current during rf modulation, it is necessary to change the supply of the oscillator from 5 volts to 12 volts and then to calibrate all appropriate resistors. Main circuit board Figure 10 shows the circuit board from ττΑ to '9C. The main circuit board contains the driving function but does not include the spindle motor board or the driving function of the preamplifier. The aforementioned circuit board includes a SCSI controller, and read / write codec / decoder, read channel, servo, power amplifier, and servo error generation. Figure 1068 shows the connection of the preamplifier flexible circuit J1. ”) Pin 15 is the forward sense current from the preamplified #flex circuit board, as shown in Figure 1028. Figure 1068, the sense of resistance R2 referring to the negative reference voltage ^ The paper scale is applicable to the Chinese standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (210X29? Mm) —, gas-loaded --- 1τ ------ ^ ( (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page)

The output is measured with ADC U11 (figure ^^ 9439 V. Description of the invention (348). Operational amplifier U23B buffers this signal-〇C to D). ~ Γγ0 Six A ’Two R58, R59 perform the function of the resistive voltage divider. The analysis of the current level is correct. Display off-reposition to analog output HU3, set laser read current. Figure 1 A to B, DSP U4 controls the converter. Figure 10-6E shows the Evaj connector, as is known to test the benefits of the connection. Eval connector j6 provides a serial communication connection test mode through the U43 I / O port (Figure 1088 (1 to A (3)) to the processor ⑽ (Figure _098 to 8). In Figure 106, the comparator U29A generates a SCSI reset to the processor. In Figure 10AG, the power monitor U45 monitors the system power and keeps the system reset until the 5V voltage supply is within the tolerance range and the 12V voltage supply is within the tolerance time. Figure 106! ~ 1, connector J3A connects the main circuit board to the main power supply. The power supply filters F1, F2 provide the filtering effect of the main circuit board. Figure 106. Capacitively coupled chassis mounts MT1, MT2, capacitively connected to the main circuit board to the chassis, which provides AC grounding to the chassis. Figure 1078 to C32 U32 shows the SCSI buffer management / controller circuit. U32 performs buffering functions and processes SCS 丨 bus commands. U19A extends the length of the ID found by the U43 signal in Figure 1088. In Figure 107C, U41, U42, and U44 are 1Mbx9 buffer RAMs of SCS 丨 buffer. Figure 10 shows the eight position dip switch S2 (DIP-SW). The format of the format paper is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) Λ4 (210X297mm) (please read the precautions on the back and then fill out this page) m — ^ 1 _ Outfit-Ministry of Economy Central Standards Bureau Staff Consumer Cooperatives to print economy A7 _________B7 printed by the Staff Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Education 5. Description of Invention (349) Off S2 is a general DIP switch for selecting SCSI bus parameters, such as reset and termination. Figure 1088 shows the encoding / decoding circuit U43, which is part of the SCSI controller. The encoding / decoding circuit U43 performs the encoding / decoding of RLL2, 7 data and provides all necessary signals, and decodes the sector format of the ISO standard disc format of 1X and 2χ 5-1 / 4 English leaf discs. There are also general purpose inputs / outputs, which have a variety of functions including communication with various serial devices, enabling the offset coil driver and determining the polarity of the offset coil. Figure 10.88 (3) ‘Small non-volatile RAM U34 stores the specified parameters of the drive. These parameters are set during the drive manufacturing drive calibration. Figure 108 shows that SCSI active termination packages (SCSI active termination packages) U50, U51 can be enabled by the switch S2 shown in Figure 1078. In Fig. 1088, the encoding / decoding circuit U43 has a specific mode used in driving to enable NRZ bit type for input and output. When enabled, Figures 11-15A to C, the customized GLENDEC U100 can be used to encode / decode RLL1, 7 on 4x discs. In the encoding / decoding circuit mode, circuit U43 can enable the use of many other encoding / decoding systems for other disc specifications. Figure 1 ◦9 shows the 80C188 system control processor (J38. The 80C188 system control processor U38 works at 20MHz, and has 256K bytes of program memory U35, U36 and 256K bytes of RAM U39, U40, as shown in Figure 10.九 〇 至 o '80C188 system control processor U38 controls the driving function. The 80C188 system control processor U38 is for general-purpose paper size suitable for financial security ^ T_CNS) Λ4 · (2 丨 ο297297) ^ ^- ---- 、 1T ------ {(Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) A7

V. Description of the invention (350) The central government's Bureau of Economy, Economics and Trade Cooperative prints the processor and can be planned to handle different formats and different customer requirements. Different disc formats can be handled with appropriate button equipment and secret / solution K systems. Figure 〇 shows Tl TMS320C50 DSP servo controller JJ4, multiple input_analog-to-digital converter υη to servo error signal conversion and 8-way C / 8-bit digital-to-analog converter ^ 3 series provides word drive signal and level setting . &gt; The DSP servo controller U4 receives the signal from the analog-to-digital converter U11 and outputs the signal to the digital-to-analog converter U3. The DSP servo controller U4 controls many functions, for example, through the Dsp servo control, the index signal on the pin 4 of the device U4 monitors the spindle speed. The DSp servo control preparation U4 determines whether the drive is written or read via the control signal on pin 45. The servo controller U4 is connected to the system control processor U38 via GLENDEC U100, which is shown in Figure 5-8 (3. DSP ^ g_controller U4 is responsible for fine-tuning the tracking dragon, coarse-tuning tracking ship, poly oil suit, and thunder Laser reading power control and card® exit control. The DSP word controller U4 also monitors the spindle speed to verify that the disc is currently rotating within the speed tolerance range. The analog-to-digital converter U11 performs; fT focus, chase bowl and coarse adjustment position The conversion of the signal. The focus and tracking conversion is performed using the analog to digital converter pin 1 of port 7 and 18, + / _ reference 'is generated from the quadruple synthesized signal. The quadruple synthesized signal is the synthesis of 2 signals .The normalization of the error signal is performed using the +/- quadruple synthesis® reference. The coarse adjustment position, quadruple synthesis signal and forward sensing are converted using the +/- voltage reference. Figure 1 ~ 〇D 'digit to analog The output of the converter U3 includes fine-tuning drive signal, coarse drive signal, focus drive, LS and MS signals. These signals are servo k-number drive power amplifiers (Figures-U9 and U10 of A to B 'and Figure 1 The function of calling and closing the servo loop in one or two days. Read the back of the precautions to fill out this page) installed. Order

II: I -I:-I 1 / _-*-I 1 I-I— I [I I. N I

V. Description of the invention (351 has FOCUSDRYLS and FOCUSDRYMS drive signals. The FOCUS-ERYLS signal allows the fine-tuning steps in the open-back (iv) measurement domain to take the disc gradually in various fine-tuning steps. The F〇CUSDRYMS signal is used as The ship's circuit drives the pure number. Figure — 〇D; the pin of the digital-to-analog converter U3 contains the signal rEAD_level-MS. The pin 9 of the digital-to-analog converter U3 contains the signal READ_LEVELJ_S. These digital-to-analog converter U3 The pins 7 and 9 of the signal are used to control the laser reading power. Pin 3 of the digital-to-analog converter U3 is the critical offset used in the 4 × read channel error recovery, and the offset can be injected into the read for error recovery Take the channel. The consumer cooperation of the Central Bureau of Preservation of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and the Ministry of Consumer Affairs du printed the optical disc system of the present invention, which generally includes a lens and a read disc, and related inventions also include improved methods of focus capture including lighting to read the disc The steps on the film, the lens is initially retracted to the bottom of its travel, when the maximum quadruple (Quad Sum) signal is searched, the scan can reach the top of the lens travel, as shown in Figure 1-10D analog to digital conversion Pin 25 of the converter U11, move the lens back to the disc, monitor all the light back and forth from the disc, determine the time when the full amount of light exceeds -half the measured peak value during the monitoring period, search for the first zero crossing, decide when The time when the quadruple synthesized signal exceeds half of the peak amplitude, and the focus at this point is turned off. Another embodiment of the method according to the present invention includes the steps of striking onto the reading disc, moving the lens to the first position, monitoring four It can be moved when the maximum quadruple composite signal is found: the mirror leaves the first position and moves toward the disc to be read, moves the lens back to leave the disc, monitors all the light received from the disc, and searches for the first zero crossing In addition, it is determined that all light exceeds half of the measured peak value during the light monitoring period. The focus is turned off when the signal exceeds-half-peak amplitude. In this method, the light emitted by the 22nd one can come from Lei. ---- ---------- tr ------ 1 (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page), description of the invention (352) The method on the focus capture film improved according to the present invention, the initial Retract the lens to its line ^ to read, lens away :; == = The method at the top of the process, the method of searching for the first-to-second measurement of the bee time exceeds half of the peak amplitude. The method of determining the peak vibration time of the quadruple synthesized signal and turning off the focus at this time. According to the present invention, Qi Good convergence and reduction ⑽ another-Examples include moving the lens position away from the first position toward the disc $ to be read, a method of 0-key music, and playing on the disc, monitoring the moving lens to The first ¥ dim girl, + ^ All ways, private ----, law, s of Likoucheng bluffing When finding the maximum quadruple composite signal: the method of receiving the disc, the decision is at a zero point of the light The method of mosquito t I peak-to-peak method, the method of searching for the first time, the method of Newton's quadruple synthesized signal exceeding-half-peak amplitude focus. In the Chengxin-half-peak amplitude, the aggregation laser is turned off. In the example, the method of printing light on the disc is printed by the Central Bureau of Economics of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, printed by the Commonwealth Consumer Cooperative. The aspect includes a thorough feedback loop and the disc of the optical disc system i. Focusing mechanism, tracking mechanism, lens and reading, loop-sounding "Zhonghai and other institutions are controlled by the aforementioned feedback loop. The second signal output is feedback; the correction back light that affects the focusing mechanism and the tracking mechanism to read the disc The above method, the initial collection .: The method at the bottom of the process, and then when the maximum quadruplex composite is searched for the method of reaching the top of the lens stroke, the lens is moved back to the disc to monitor all back and forth on the disc. The method of deciding to monitor the paper ’s miscellaneous finance ϋ s (210X297 mm) A7 B7 printed by the Employees ’Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. The invention description (353) The method of measuring the peak value time during the period when the total amount of light exceeds half, The method of searching for the first zero crossing, the method of deciding the quadruple synthesized signal to exceed half of the peak amplitude time and turning off the focus at this time, thus achieving enhanced focus capture capability. Figure-〇0 shows 2.5 volts Reference 1 ^ 4, line 1123 is put amplifier

Two times larger produces a 5 volt reference. The 2.5 volt reference U24 is used by the comparator U29. The comparator U29 compares the tracking error signal with the AC portion of zero volts to determine the zero tracking cross. The tracking error signal is digitized and sent to the GLENDEC U100, shown in Figure-5A to C, to determine the tracking trace used during the seek operation. In Figures 100 to [), the analog-to-digital converter U11 uses a quadruple synthesized signal to perform the conversion of focus and tracking errors. The error signal is automatically normalized to a quadruple synthesized signal by the analog-to-digital converter U11 referring to the quadruple synthesis on pins 17 and 18. The analog-to-digital converter U11 distributes the error by combining the signals and provides the input normalized error signal to the servo loop. This advantage is that the servo loop handles the reduced number of changes. On the surface, this normalization function can be implemented with an analog voltage divider. Analog voltage dividers have inherent precision and speed issues. This function can also be implemented by the DSP servo controller DSP servo controller U4, Fig. 08 to date, to perform the digital division of the error signal in the quadruple synthesized signal. The frequency division in the DSP servo controller U4 needs to indicate the amount of time. At a sampling rate of 50KHz, there may not be time to perform frequency division and process the digital error signal inside the servo loop. Because quadruple synthesis is used as a reference, frequency division is not necessary and the error signal can be automatically normalized. _ This paper scale is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) -------- II ------, 玎 ------ {{Please read the notes on the back Please fill in this page again.) Refer to Figures 〇 and 3, Analog-to-Digital Converter JJ11 (Figure 1-〇c to d) = _17 ⑽ The upper Libby to digital reference signal is derived from the figure-three operational amplifiers U17A, U17B The operational amplifiers U17A, U17B produce the reference + \ _ volts. Switches U27A and U27B select input references for operational amplifiers U17A and U17B. When the switch is activated, the functions of U17A and U17B can generate a reference of 4 volts and a reference of 4 volts (25 volts + M.5 volts reference). Switch the anti-eight and anti-Japanese servo sampling rate switching. This depends on the focus and tracking samples of each ship's re-synthesis, and the quadruple synthesis, forward sensing and coarse adjustment position will be referenced to 25 volts + \-1.5 volts. With multiple transmission references, automatic normalization of errors in single-analog to digital conversion is achieved. In short, the switching system shown in Figures 11-13 has multiple signaling levels (mu ^ Plex) from time to time. This system relies on the analog to digital conversion of the actual reference level of the laser power and the signal volume of the detected disc, and the normalization of the speech error signal when using a quadruple composite reference. This conversion processes signals in time, such as laser power, quadruple synthesis level, error signal focus' and 5_z, and tracks the switching between the two reference levels. Figure shows the circuit has a focusing power amplifier 1 ^, Figure ___ A, and fine-tuning drive power amplifier sU1〇, Figure --- B. Power amplifiers U9 and U10 have digital enable lines on pin 1◦, which are controlled by the processor. The micro-processor control lion-mining unit is not driving, the rate amplifier does not operate, so it can prevent the damage and uncontrollable movement of the associated focusing and driving components. The two power amplifiers U9 and U10 are used as a 25 volt reference. When used as an analog reference and driven by a 5 volt supply, the power amplifiers U9 and U10 have digital inputs from the DSP and controller U4 to the analog input to control the current output. The Ministry of Economic Affairs, Central Bureau of Standards, Negative Work Consumer Cooperative Seal A7 ---- —— --EZ ____ Fifth, the description of the invention (355) ~-Ικ coke power amplifier can drive + \-250 microampere current and fine-tuned power amplifier can drive + \ -200 microampere current. Fig. 12 shows a circuit with the power amplifier U30 in Fig. 12A and the power amplifier U8 in Fig. 12B, which can drive the M0 offset coil and coarse adjustment drive. The power amplifier U30, 1) 8 is driven by a 12 volt supply to allow the higher voltage range to cross the motor. The offset coil (not shown) is enabled by digital control and is set to one of the erase polarity or write polarity. The power amplifier U30 will output 1/3 to 20 ohm coils of amperage. Coarse adjustment motor U8 is designed to supply 0.45 ampere to 13-1 / 2 ohm load. The power amplifier U8 has a level converter U23A at the input, so the voltage drive is referenced to 5 volts instead of 2.5 volts. As shown in Figures 2 and 2, the power amplifiers U9, U10, U30, and U8 are similarly configured and compensated to produce a bandwidth greater than 30kHz. Figure-Two B, Clamping diodes CR1, CR2, CR4, CR5 on U8 will maintain the voltage on the output of the power amplifier 1 | 8 when exceeding the guide rail. When being reversed. The sweet diodes CR1, CR2, CR4, CR5 will maintain the power amplifier U8 from saturation during the extended time period and thus cause difficulty in finding. Figure 2A. The output of the amplifier U26A and the resistor divider R28 / R30 feed back the offset current to the analog-to-digital converter U6, shown in Figure 4a. This enables processor U38 (figure 1 and nine) to ensure that the offset coil is at the desired level before attempting to write. This paper size button) Λ4 · (Binding ------ ^ (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Standards Bureau Employee Consumer Cooperative Co., Ltd. 2439 A7 B7 V. Invention Description (356 ^ &quot;-one --- Referring to Figures one and two, it can be understood that the quadruple synthesis reference converter is such as circuits U27A, U27B, U17A and U17B 'as previously discussed with reference to Figure I_〇. Spindle Motor The connector J2 transmits signals to other circuit components. The differential amplifier U23C converts the coarse position error to a reference of 25 volts. The coarse position error of the spindle motor board (J2) is referenced to Vcc. Transistor Q14 is the front panel LED, LED1 Driver. Now referring to Figure 4-U6 is a tandem A to D converter that converts the signal of the temperature sensor U20. Active recalibration is a reaction to the temperature change that occurs. An important feature of the invention, Especially in the case of 4) &lt; writing, where the writing power is critical and may need to vary as a function of system temperature. The signal from pin 2 (PWCAL) and pin 6 of the analog to digital converter U6 is the source Servo differential amplifier information from 84910 (Figure 7) "These signals can be used to sample and read channel signals and are controlled by digital signals on pins 27-30 of 84910 of Figure 7b. In the embodiment of the present invention, pins 27-30 are grounded, but those Those skilled in the art will know that these pins can be driven by different signal types and allow different sampled signals for calibration purposes. Figure 4—A, pin 3 of the analog-to-digital converter U6 is AGC The level is buffered by U21B, and then the ratio of the resistive voltage determines the ratio input to the converter. The AGC level will be sampled in the known write section. The resulting value will be written to pin 19 of U16. Fix the AGC level. Then the fixed AGC level is input to S4910 of Figure 7. In addition, 84910 sets the AGC level of the original paper so the standard is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21〇 297 public) ---- ---------- 、 玎 ------- {___ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) A7 B7 to decide whether it is five, invention description (357) quasi 7TT only Zoom in ③ Operate at maximum gain while the section is evaluated as a blank section .... The disc drive system of the present invention includes integrated storage In fact, it is in the form of a complex data section, the amplifier device ⑽ a special section ^ whether the mosquito section is empty, and when the identification section. The amplifier device is prohibited from operating at the maximum gain device. In the implementation of __ specific implementations, the method of disabling the amplifier includes the microprocessor U38 of Figure A-9 A and B to set the gain level of the amplifier method.. Below is a more detailed introduction, the type of this optical disc system is focused Mechanisms and tracking mechanisms, lenses and read discs, where these mechanisms are controlled by the feedback and feedback loops. The aforementioned feedback loop includes electronic circuits and amplifier devices that generate servo signals that affect the focusing mechanism and tracking. One of the sections is used to determine whether the section is blank and used as an identification section to prohibit the amplifier device from operating at the maximum gain. In another specific implementation of this embodiment of the invention, the means for disabling the operation of the amplifier device at maximum gain includes a microprocessor U38, as shown in Figure 1098 and B, to set the maximum gain of the amplifier device. Refer to Figure 2; the offset current that has been discussed is monitored by pin 4 of the analog-to-digital converter U6 (Figures 1 to 4A). It is used during the write and erase operations to determine the correct amplitude and polarity Further protection. The signals PWCALLF and PWCALHF appear on pins 7 and 8 of the analog-to-digital converter U6 of A6 and A7, respectively. These signals come from the sample and hold circuit (see Figure 8) and are controlled by Glue Logic Encoder / Decoder (GLENDEC) signal WTLF or WTHF, as shown in Figure 1, the paper scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS &gt; Α4 specifications (2 丨 〇 &lt; 297mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) 袈 _ --β Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Standards Bureau A7 A7 Employee of the Ministry of Economics Central Standards Bureau Printed by Consumer Cooperative V. Description of Invention (358) 18 B. They are used within the section to sample the average DC component of high-frequency writing classes and low-frequency writing classes. The average value can be obtained by comparing Offset, which is used to optimize the 4x write power. Figure-Four A, pin 6 of U6 (A9) is coupled through U21A, which is a differential amplifier with inputs INTD + and INTD-. These * signals are data DC levels related to the DC level of the Restore signal in the 4x read channel. The differential signal determines the critical level to be compared in the 4x read channel. Use the DA converter in the digital to analog converter U3 DSP criticality, pin 3 (Figure 1-〇D) the DC offset It is canceled. In addition, the error complex offset will be sent to try to recover the data or it may not be able to recover. Therefore, it provides the function of 4 × read channel recovery and calibration. The signal ReadDIFF appears on U12 pin 12, A10, as a differential amplifier The output of U15B is shown in Figure 4-A to B. ReadDIFF is the dc component of the M0 preamplifier or preformatted preamplifier. Therefore, the DC value of the read signal can be determined and used to measure in the first direction The DC value of the elimination trace and the elimination trace in the second direction, in order to provide the peak-to-peak differential signal of the M0 signal. Alternatively, the data can be averaged to produce an average 〇〇value to provide the measurement being written. This value also Used by 4x write power calibration. Figure-Four B 'U16 for D to A converter is controlled by 8〇C188 (Figure 10A to B; U38) processor. The output of U16 is written to three The input current level (WR1-V, WR2-V, WR3-V) controls the voltage of the current level. These signals determine the power of the individual pulses. The fourth output is the aforementioned fixed AGC level. This paper size applies China National Standards (CNS) A4 specification (210X 297mm) Outfit-Please mark as 1, please read the precautions on the back and fill in this book) A7 ___B7_ printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Invention description (359) ~~ 'GLENDEC is shown as U100 in Figure 5 . Glue Logic ENcode / DECode must combine the number of different functions in the gate array. ENcode / DECode part is RLL1.7 encoding / decoding function. The input of the EN-code function is NRZ of U43 (Figure 1088), pin 70, and its output is coded as RLL1,7, so by the pins 36,37 and 38 of U100 (WR1, WR2, WR3) Write to disc. The DECode function accepts the RLL1,7-encoded data of the disc is decoded and sent back to the NRZ of U43 (Figure 1088). Figure-Four B, U16 also includes the 4x sector format used for timing. Of course (J16 is configurable, so different regional formats can be defined in it. Figure 5-Other functions managed by GLENDEC U1000 include between DSP (U4; Figure-〇) and the host processor 80C188 (U38; Figure 109) The communication interface between them. It also provides a counter for tracking crosses and a timer for measuring the time between tracking crosses, which are used by the DSP for the search function. Figure 6 shows the servo error generation circuit. Figure 6: Signals QUADA, QUADB, QUADC and QUAD represent the output of the servo transmission impedance amplifier, which is configured on the pre-amplifier board (Figure 10: B, U / A to U / D). These signals are in the operational amplifiers U22A and U22B, Figure- — Six A to B, which are added or subtracted as appropriate, in order to generate tracking and focus errors. 5 Tiger TE and FE are on J4 of Figure 1—Six A. Figure “One Six B, U22C synthesizes QUADA 'QUADB, QUADC and QUADDi are therefore quadruple synthesized signals QS.

Switches U28A, U28B—, U28C, U28D, U27C, and U27D are enabled during writing to a lower circuit gain, because the quadruple electric paper size is added during writing. The Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (210Χ297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) 袈 ·

1. 1T Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 ------- B7 __ Fifth, the invention description (360) flow. The period of writing to QUADA, QUADB, QUADC and QUADD is weakened by a factor of about 4. Reference is now made to Figure 8-A to discuss the read channel. The read signals RFD +, RDF come from the preamplifier board (figure 10 ergen ^ | 1〇6), as shown in figure-eight A (1) transmitted through the gain switch U48A, U48B, is to format The correlation levels of the signal and the MO signal are normalized. This gain switch is controlled by U25B 'to switch between pre-formatting and the M0 area of the disc. U48C and U48D are turned on during the write operation, so the read signal will not protect the input of the read channel. During the reading operation, the two switches are closed, and the reading signal is sent to the differentiator U47, Figure-Eight A (2). Differentiator U47 compensates for the minimum group delay error and is operable above 20 mHz. The output of the differentiator U47 is AC coupled to the SSI filter U1 through C36 and C37 and far beyond FRONTOUT + and FRONTOUT- to 84910 (Figure 7). The signal is weakened by R75 and R48, as shown in Figure --- tC, such an acceptable signal can be seen by 84910. Then FRONTOUT + and FRONTOUT- are AC coupled to 84910 via C34 and C33 respectively. The 84910 includes many functions in order to read the appropriate function of the channel. These include read channel AGC, read channel phase-locked loop, data detector, data separator and frequency synthesizer. The servo error generator generally refers to the Wjn · Chester servo error generator function, which is also part of 84910. However, these are not used in this embodiment. Figure 7: The signal data output of the separated 84910 (U 13) appears on pins 14 and 15 and is connected to U43 (-Monday 08A), SM330, these signals are used for 1x to 2x read channel mode . -t clothing ------, 1T ------ {(Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) 'This paper is the new county (CNS) Α4 specification (210X297mm) ~ ------- A7 ___—_ B7 V. Invention Test (361) ~ '~-Pin 31 of the pre-formatted signal control 84910, so there are actually two separate AGC signals. One is to read the header (header) or preformatted data for use and the other is for MO data. In the 4x read channel condition, Figure-Eight A (2), the signals SSIFP and SSIFN enter U49, the buffer amplifier (Figure 119A). The output of U49 leads to Q3, Q4, and Q5 (Figure--Nine A to B), which functions as a boost integrator. Figure-Nine B, U5 is a buffer amplifier for the integrated and boosted signals. Therefore, the 4x read channel includes SSI filter, equalization, differentiation and integration. The output of U5 is buffered by amplifier U12, Figure-Nine A, and it is summed into the circuit to determine the midpoint between the peak and peak levels, as is known in the recovery circuit. Due to recovery, the signal INTD + INTD- in Figure 8 is input to the comparator and its output provides the critical level signal used in data separation. Then the signals INT +, INT-, INTD + and INTD- are input to U14, MRC1 in Figure __8 C, these signals are compared, and the data are read separately. (The output of J14 is sent back to GLENDEC U100 (Figure 11-15) for encoding / decoding operations. The microprogramming language of the digital signal processor is disclosed in Appendix B. It is incorporated as a reference here. Employees of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs The consumer cooperatives print the teaching position leading / lagging compensation circuit. Known in this art is particularly related to the motor used in the position control system has a drive signal proportional to acceleration (for example, the drive signal is current). These position control systems Leading / lagging debt replenishment is required to fully eliminate oscillations and stabilize the position control system Γ or servo system. This paper scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm). System A7 .__ -— _B7 V. Description of the invention (362) The circuit of the present invention is a digital leading / lagging compensation circuit, which not only fully eliminates oscillations but also provides a concave filter cheek rate of half the digital sampling frequency. The transfer function (Transfer Function) is indicated in the following ) Is listed in the mathematical transfer function of the digital lead / lag circuit of the present invention, which is a single lead Double lag compensation. It also lists the prior art of the digital lead / lag compensation circuit and an analog lead / lag compensation circuit. From the following paragraphs, the transfer function of the invention can be understood as H⑻ = (s + w6) χ square (w7 ) Is divided by (Sc) Uare⑷ + 2 zeta7 w7s + SqUare (w7)) w6. The following paragraphs also list the s-domain formulation of the transfer function, which is suitable for display in the Bode diagram The formula of the above. From the Bode diagram, it can be understood that the compensation circuit of the present invention has the smallest impact on the phase. When the compensation circuit of the prior art can also understand that there is a minimum phase effect, the frequency of the notch filter of the compensation circuit of the present invention Only at half the digital sampling frequency. With proper selection of the sampling frequency, this notch filter can be used to notch parasitic mechanical resonance frequencies, such as those of compensated servo motors. In the drive device 10 of FIG. In the preferred embodiment, a single-leading complex backward lag compensation circuit is used to suppress the mechanical decoupling resonance of the fine tuning and focus servo motors, as shown in the following paragraphs. The transfer function is as follows The mathematical derivation explains the transfer function of the digital lead / lag compensation circuit of the present invention. The focus loop transfer will be first displayed and discussed. Following this discussion is a detailed description of the compensation transfer. This paper silver scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 Specifications (2I0X297 male thin)-^ ------ 1T ----- X 〆 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this book) Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economy ^^ 9439 Description of the invention (363) Focus loop transfer function: Shift in frequency at 23 C 1 factor l ω n-2-π · 3〇〇〇ί A7 B7 ACTUATOR MODEL: Decoupling Frequency: ω factor · 2 · 71'JJ_ ⑼ ζ i = o.oi

Parasitic Resonance: ω 3 z 1 factor &quot; ^ 3 '

Hi (s)

2'C ^ 'C0- | * S-CO s- _ 2.ζι.ο〇ι · 5-coy • 2.71.23-10 ^ ζ 2 r0.03 ω 2 = Tfactor'2'71'27'10 '! ω2 ω H2 (s) 丨 s ·-2. ζ 2.① 2.S _ ① 2 ** W ω 3_ s *-2 · ζ 3 · ω 3-s-ω3'Ι \ ω 2 HF Phase Loss: ω ^ = 2 · π · I00 * lty τ 4 ω 4 H3 (s)

τ 4'S (Pack ------ Order ------ {(Please read the notes on the back before filling this page)

Fundamental Frequency: constant = 790 m ’(s 2 * A) factor 2 π 3 ^ · 9 ^ 5 &quot; 0 08

M ω 5 H4 (s) constant ω 5 ω 52 \ s: ~ 2'ζ 5'ω 5's ω

Actuator Response;-Hactuator (s) = H 1㈤ · Η2 (3) · Η 3㈤'H4 (s) This paper scale is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) V. Invention description (364) A7 B7 DS? MODEL: Single Lead Complex Lag Circuit: Sample Period T 20. lo'5Hleadlag (s) = 0.107 0.S93 e (S '”_e (s 丁) 0.356 0.136 e (s. 丁） Vs. Ding) DSP S &amp; H and Processing Delay: ZOH (s) = Λ — eXP (-S. Ding) 'delay

= 3.3 · 10'6 H de! Ay ^ s) = exP s, delay DSP Response: Hdsp (s): 丨, Z〇H (s) .Hdelay (s) .Hleadlag (s) y

Anti-aliasing Filter: Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs

Rfilt: 20000 C fiit = 100 · 10 '12 t tilt &quot; R fiit'C fiit ㈤: 1 JI-s- Ffilt r 丨 F fiit = -958-104 2_π.τ ^ Simplified Focus Power Amp Response: ω pal = 2 · π * 28000 ζ pal: · 4 G pal = 0.09? AV r 5 V Pa2 -¾ apa2 = 2 · π · 450000 Gpa2: 0.3 Gpa ^ pal 'G pa2 A / BIT Gpa_M _ -3 m constant 5.90710 2. G pa _: 7.47? Io ~ 6 s- bit (installed ------ ordered ------ {(please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) This paper scale is applicable to China National Standards (CNS ) A4 specification (210X 297 mm) V. Description of invention (365) ω H pa (s) ^ pa 'pal

S '-2-C -pal, ω pal' A7 B7 ω pa2 s-ω pal pa2.Q pa2. S — ω pa2

Focus Error Signal:

Slope = oi 〇Sum G £ _ z2 ^ _Bit_ H "= S | 0De.G". # Ii! Hfe = 3.277 he μΓΠ fe H = Slope Printed by consumer cooperatives

Filter Response: H (s) = H ^ j | t (s) Volts / Volt DSP Response: H (s) = Hdsp (s) Volts / Volt Power Amp Response: H (s) = H pa (s) Amps / bit Actuator Response: H (s) = H m / a Focus Error Response: H (s)-H ^ e bil / m Open Loop Response: —H (s) = Hf || t (s) 'HdSp (s) -Hpa (s) .Hactuat〇 "(s) 'Hfe Gain Factor:

G Η (ω〇) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) 袈. Order G-36.059 The paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) V. Description of the invention (366)

Closed Loop Response: G-H (s)

Hc! (S. G-H (s) A7 B7

Generating Nyquist diagram with uM-circles &quot;: Selected amounts of closed loop peaking MP:

M 1.3 1.5 2.0 4.0

Radius of M-cirde M:

Rj

Center of M-circle Ctr; = — -iM; '— n 2 = 100 m ..n 2 min 2: R.-Ctr. Max 2 = -R--Ctr. (Binding-binding I (please read the back first (Please fill out this page again) Printed by the Employees Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs

% 丨 = min 2, (max2-min 2.V (m-1) Μ π 2

Vm, j = 'JvRjy' (^ .j 'Ctrj)' .j, 丨 (Rj) π = 300 k-1 .. π N. = 1000-100 · k This paper scale is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 Specification (210X 297mm) A7

V. Description of the invention (367)

Data for bode plots: / \ r • 4, / max '.; A π min: loo max: i〇-i〇J r: Irr-: r. ^ Min-e deg 3 77 \ rnin, K 130

Magn (s) = 20-log (i GH (s);) Φ (δ) = angle (Re (H (s)), lm (H (s)))-360 · deg Magn-| (s) = 20 · logf, H ci (s); j Φ 1 (s) = angle (Re (Hci (s)), lm (Hcl (s)))-360.deg The Nyquist graph of the transfer function includes equal-peaking-loci which creates M-circles 9-22, 9-24, 9-26 and 9-28. Each has Mp value 4_〇, 2.0, 1.5, 1.3. Figure 12-4 also shows the connection curve 9-30 which is generated by the open loop equation above. Figure 1 25 shows the amplitude curve of the open-loop response 9_32, and the amplitude curve of the closed-loop response 9-34. Figures 12 and 6 show the open-loop response 9-36 phase curve and the closed-loop response phase curve 9-38. Compensation transfer function: Ding = 20 · 10_6 ω q = 2 · π · ί * 3000 DSP S &amp; H and Processing Delay: ZOH (s) = (1 ~ exP | ~ s'T) j Tde | ay = 2.5_10- 6 Hdelay (s): exp (-s.Tde | ay) DSP MODEL: Triple Lead / Lag Circuit: 1: -1 T | ead 2 · π · 2185 X lag '2 · π-5848 Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (210 X 297mm) III (I order III 1 ^ (please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standard Vehicle Administration of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Invention Instructions (368 )

Bilateral Transform 2 z-s =-· —— T ς- _ 1 one τ lead.s Η leadlag (s) 1-τ lag. A7 B7 -2

H leadlag (z) τ lead (z-1) T '(z- 1) 2. lag (z-1) T ~' (z- 1) T- 2-x lead

-0.759 H Τ- 2 · τ lead leadlag (z) Tz τ lead'z ~ 2 · t lead Tz-T-2.τ ^ .ζ-2. lag'2-ζ'τ lag T- 2 ·· lag _ -0.463 2. lag H leadlag⑺ ^ 'τ lead.! 1 -r!' _ 2.τ lead 'z 2 .τ lag T-2 · τ lag z

Definition of z z-e 2 · τ lead ： 3

H

TripleComp (s) T- 2'xlead ': exp (s-T) "t clothing, 1T ------ {(please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) -2 · τ lag 1

Printed by Zx \ sg / exp (S'T) Employee Consumer Cooperative of Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs

Triple Lead Lag Response: Z〇H (s). H de | ay (s). H T 「jp | ec〇mp (s)

H

Triple (s) ^ TripleCompνω 0;

Single Lead Lag Response: lead 2 · π · 1000 lag 2_π.25000 This paper scale is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) JL · Description of invention (369 2-τ lead Η

LeadLag (s) A7 B7 2'τ lead exp (s.T) 2- τ lag 1 -2. Τ lag, exp (s-T)

H

Single (s) Z〇H (s). H de! Ay (s) _ H LeacjLag (s) H LeadLag ‘, ω Cl ·:

Complex Lead Lag: ω center = 2 · π.2200 Span: 1.〇 ω2 = ω center— 0.5.sPan.mcente "

: 1.7 C: 2 0.707 ω 2 HCompj (s) s r- 2 · C 2'ω 2- ω I I ω 52-2 · ζ3 · ω3 · 5 ~ ω32Ι ω22; ω 2 2.π

1.V1CT Η

Compl (z) 4 ί ζ-1 ω 2 &quot; 2 (ζ- 1) ζ Τ (ζ ω 2 ω ω 4 (ζ-1 ω 2.π 3 -4.4-103 Τ2 (Z- 4 &lt; 3 (ζ- 1) Τ (ζ- 1) ω ω -------- {¥ .------ Ιτ ------ ^ (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the Central Bureau of Standards Employees Consumer Cooperative Η Comp 丨 (ζ) Η

Compl (z) HCompl ⑺ / -2 -8 · ζ-4-4.ζ2 · ⑴ 2. Ding. Ζ -4.ζ2. Mountain 2. Ding-① 2. ζ-2.① 2 ζ, ① of · ⑴ 3 ί 2 2 2 _2 2 2 -τ2. 2 —2 '2 4 · ζ-8. ζ-4-Ding. Ζ-Α.ζβ-ού ^ -Τ-c〇3. &Quot; ι · ζ — 2 · co ^ '&quot; * * 2 rq ^' &quot; ί / mountain 2 4-ω 2 · f-4 .; 2.c〇2.Tj.z * (-8-2.c〇2 F / ζ- 4.ζ2.⑴2.Τ ， 4-c〇2. FJ ① .4 r ω 3 · τ 4.; 3-〇) 3.Tj.zr (, 8-2.ί〇3-, 2 -4 .; 3.c〇3 ·! *-4 τ c〇3 ·! 2, _ \. 2 2 4-c〇2 -T **-4 伂 2.. 山 2. 丁卜 21 i ω3 1 4-ω -8-2-0) ^ 2 ^ ι · ζ 1-I 4-ω-4 · 'ζ 3 * ω 3 * &quot; * &quot;;' z This paper size is applicable to China National Standards (CNS) Α4 specification (210X297mm) V. Description of invention (370

Compl (s) 4-ω y2, 3.ω 3. A7 B7 .8-2. ω 2 丁丁 exp (s. 丁) -4 ζ 2'ω 2 '&quot; * &quot; ~ 4 ~ ω 2' ^ exp (s · Τ) '2.ω Τ2 ώ, 2 ·! 2 · 4.ζ 3.ω 3. Ding. ~ 4 _ ⑴ 3' I — (ϋ 2 exp (sT) exp (sT / HC_ex㈤! it r- \ I! CO Π '

Complyω 0y

Analog Box Compensation: -6 τ lead = 20.5-10 .0.01.10 t lag = 0.Q1-10'6 ·-.. 2〇 ,; 5-2 · 051〇3 (20.5-2.05) t | p = 330 · 10'12 · 20.5 · 103 H ABox (s) &quot; bead's

H τ lag • s xlp's

AnalogBox (s) H ABox (s) ΗΑΒοχ (ω〇 '

Single Lead Complex Lag: ω 0 = 2 · π · 900 ω j = 2 · π · 22000 ς up = Q.8 fs ~ ω ω-2 H Compl (s) S-2-C y CO γ · S -r (ύ J ω 6 (Binding I (please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Printed and printed by the Central Standard Falcon Bureau Employee Consumer Cooperative H Compl (z) 2 (z- 1) [T (z, 1 ) ω 6 ω Η Compl (z) 4 (z- 1 t2 (: ω 4.ς7 .. 7 (Z- 1) T (z 十 1) ω ω (2.ζ_ 2, ω &amp; Τ-ζ-c 〇6. Ding> ((ζ — 1) · Ding), 4. ζ-8.ζ-4-4 * ζ 7'ω 7 * Τιζ-4 * ζ 7 · ω 7 · Τ-ω -2.co -co 72. ·] · ^ 2 ω7 ω6 This paper scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) A7 B7 5. Description of the invention (371:: C〇md (z) T'Z -2 'Tc〇g-T * · z-2 ω ί; · Τ ~ · ζ-cd 0 · 4-ζ * &quot;-8 · Z-4-4. <yt〇7.Tz-4.Gyc〇7 . 丁-oj 72 Τ'-z2- ω6! Qc-T ^ -2 · Τ-2 · ωβ · Τ2 ω6 · ΊΓ-2 · Τ Η Compi (z)

1 9 'ω ^ -r-2-Τ: ω g-T2-2 · Τ-2 · ω g * Τ2 Η

Comp〆 s) exP (s. Ding) exp (s-Tr ω

4-CO y 1-4 · ζ y CO exp (s.T) 4-ω 7. _ 4. ζ 7 · ο 7 • Ding, ω 丨 exp (s-T) 2 H slcl (s)

ZOH (s) · H plus 丨 ay (s). H c〇mp | (s) I ^ 0〇Γπρΐ (ω 〇) I

Plot Data:, (max \ π = 400 k = 1 .. n min = 100 r two lnt-! \ Min / jf # ------, order ------ {(please read the back page first (Notes and fill in this page again) 4 Printed by the consumer cooperation of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs k ·-deg: π max = 10-10 min-e n 180

Magn (s) = 20.log (| HT 「ip | e (s) i) φ (3) = angle (Re (HTrjp | e (s)) tlm (HTrjp | e (s)} j-360-deg

Magnus)-20-log (| H Sing) e (s) (s): angle (Re (HSing | e (s)), lm (HSingle (s) :)-360.deg (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) A7 B7 5. Description of invention (372)

Magn2 (s) -2〇. | 〇g; Η〇 χ (3) φ2 (3) = an9le, Re; Hc〇mpiex (s); Jm Hc〇mp | ex (s) ;;-360-deg

Magn3 (s): 20.0g: HAnalogB〇x (s) φ3 (5) = angle; Re; HAnaj〇gB〇x (s) ^, lm ;; HAna | 〇gB〇x (S) ;;- 360-deg Magn4 (s) = 20-log (; H s | d (S) :) φ 4 (s) = angle (Re (H sjc | (s);, | m (H s [d (s) ';). 360 · deg (袈 — (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) Printed picture 127 of the National Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumer Cooperative Co. Amplitude response curve of the function. Figure—The coordinate graph of twenty-seven shows the individual response curves of TRIPLE LEAD LAG, SINGLE LEAD LEG, COMPLEX, LEAD LAG, ANALOG BOX, and SINGLE LEAD COMPLEX LAG. Similarly, Figures one and two show focus compensation The phase response curve of the transfer function is derived from the relevant equations. The graphs in Figures 1 and 2 show the individual phase response curves of TRIPLE LEAD LAG, SINGLE LEAD LEG, COMPLEX, LEAD LAG, ANALOG BOX, and SINGLE LEAD COMPLEX LAG. Ω 22. T2, 4. ζ 2. (Subscribe to HCompKz) = τ (· 8 · 2.ω22. Ding 2) 2 2 Ding_4 乂 2- &lt; 〇2, Ding ζ 1-;-:-; ; -8 ^ 2 ^ 22 ^] -8-2 * co 2 * -3.- 2 · to τ2. -Z 4 * ζ3 * ω3 '&quot; 2.τ2-4.ς3. (3' 2.τ2, 4.ς3., 3. · This paper scale is applicable to China National Standard Rate (CNS) Α4 specification (210Χ297 Cent) 299439 A7 B7 V. Description of invention (373

N 8-2.0) /. 12

N N 3: -0.456

D

D 2-. ^ 32 ^ D 2 = -0.916 2 4-ω /. T2-4 · ζ 3. ω 3 · 4 -r ω

D 3 •• Τ2-4.ζ3 · ω3 · Τ D 〇 = 0.068 3

Single Lead Complex Lag: Η

Compi (z) ωω · Τ ^ -2-T / -2.c〇6.T ^ .z-丨 〇) 6 · &quot; Ρ'-2.τ '). Ζ -2 4 * · co 7 _ 4.ζ 7.ω 7.Ty, -8 · 2.ω 7. · Z _.; 4 _ ω 了 二 .- 4-ζ 了 · ω Τ / .z ω 6 《Binding ^ (please read first (Notes on the back and then fill in this page) Printed by the Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ω 2 Ν Ν Τ2 ^ 2 · Τ = 4.276-10-5 2.ω 2.Τ2 = 5.529.10_6 ω 6 . Τ Ν 2 ω 6 .Τ2 — 2_Τ 2.ω 6.Τ2 Ν2 = 0: 107 ω c- ^ 2 · T) This paper scale is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) Α4 specification (210Χ297 mm) Central Standard of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the Bureau ’s Consumer Cooperatives ____ 5. Description of the invention (374) 6. Shovel-2 丄 N 3 = -0-893 N1-N2-N3 = 2 3/9, ω 3 D-2 · D

D 〇 二 — -8-2. Ω72 T2 D 2 = 0.356 4-.ω72 T2-'4 &lt; 7'®7'T 4 π ^ ω72 Τ2 4; 7 · ω7.Τ' · D 3 = 0.136 u 3 4 〇) 72-r .--- 4;?. Ω 7, T is not prepared to disclose the degree of 'the following us patent is incorporated herein by reference-eetal, usPat. No 5 155 633; p "丨 cut 丨… 丨 us Pat.N〇_5,245,17 # Grassens, UspatN〇5J77 64〇. After introducing the present invention and detailed reference and best embodiment, it should be known that the present invention is not limited to those precise implementation For example, in the position of the best mode for implementing the present invention described in this patent specification, many modifications and changes can be proposed by those skilled in the art without departing from the scope and spirit of the present invention. Therefore, the scope of the present invention It can be indicated by the following patent application scope and previous description. All changes, modifications and changes within the equivalent method and scope of the patent application g are within the scope of its consideration. This paper scale is applicable to the Chinese national standard ( CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) -------- Ϊ. 規 ------ ίτ ------ ί (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

Claims (1)

Patent application Fan Gu B8 C8; Species: Slide = the component moves from the starting position to the target position relative to the storage medium (material, _ save _ with the center of the aforementioned slide frame assembly in the surface ㈣ ― speed rotation, and relative to The steps are as follows: On the 1st of January, the square enamel contains the scream of the heart _ in the body »» II · Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs to determine the starting position of the aforementioned sliding frame parallel to the circumference of the aforementioned staggered body Circumference distance from the target position of the aforementioned carriage assembly; Circumference = Initial distance of the aforementioned storage medium about the center of the aforementioned storage medium: Calculate relative to the first-half secondary distance, second radius distance, and circle == = The speed trajectory of the peripheral speed, by which if the "slider assembly is moved from the starting position to the target position with the aforementioned speed trajectory, the assembly will reach the aforementioned target position in the circumferential and radial directions simultaneously" The shelf assembly moves from the starting position to the target position. 2: A method for shifting the starting position of the rib rack group to the target position of the financial media, the storage medium has a center and a Compared with. Then, the slider assembly rotates at a speed at the aforementioned center. The aforementioned method includes the following steps: Moderately-ruler, one piece of paper, one falcon, one falcon, one country, one country, 7 cm (please read the back first Note: fill in the clothes f) • III ----- J V .-- Patent application Fan Gu BS rs \) S Move the aforementioned carriage assembly from the radial direction to the aforementioned target position at the first speed track; ° position Decide on the middle position of the slide assembly relative to the storage medium. Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Standards Bureau Employee Consumer Cooperative to determine the first radius distance between the middle position of the slide assembly and the heart; Han Ticai determines the slide The second radial distance between the aforementioned target position of the rack assembly and the aforementioned center; the circumferential distance between the intermediate position of the aforementioned sliding rack assembly of the circumference of the aforementioned storage medium of the ancestor door and the aforementioned target position of the aforementioned sliding rack assembly ; The initial calculation of the storage medium in the center of the circumference of the storage medium relative to the first radius radius, the second radius distance, the circle = and pain The speed trajectory of the peripheral speed, thereby moving the carriage assembly from the intermediate position to the target position as the speed trajectory, the assembly will reach the target position at the same time in the circumferential and radial directions; and the carriage assembly from the speed trajectory Move the intermediate position to the target position 3. A method of moving the carriage assembly from the starting position to the target position with respect to the storage medium, the storage medium having a center and a circle and being at the center with respect to the carriage assembly Rotate at a speed, the steps included in the above method are: 3 The paper size is applicable to the Chinese national standard (CNS & ^ 4 specifications (210x297 mm) (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) J-, π ^^ 9439 、 Patent application scope goal 2 = the circle of the off-frame assembly 1 and the front fan slide assembly = the initial speed of the patch surface before the h, and the circumferential distance and the initial speed of the initial circumferential speed = the aforementioned The sliding frame assembly is slightly offset from the direction at the same time; the r frame assembly will move to the circle and radius scale position ^ the aforementioned speed rail rides the secret group to move to the target 4.- Kind of moving the sliding frame assembly from the starting position Storage media 0 mark position 4 method, relying on the storage media has the steps of: towel heart and sister: The above-mentioned slide assembly rotates at the center at the above-mentioned speed. Move the sliding rack group toward the radius side (iv) the aforementioned target position; the position of the cattle determines the center position of the sliding rack assembly relative to the aforementioned storage medium. The second position is: half: group: middle and front fan sliding rack assembly of 99439 A8 B8 C8 D8_'Patent Scope — &quot;-Determine the circumferential distance between the intermediate position of the carriage assembly parallel to the circumference of the storage medium and the target position of the carriage assembly; determine the center of the storage medium The initial circumferential speed of the aforementioned storage medium; ° Calculate the speed trajectory with respect to the aforementioned radius distance, circumferential distance and initial circumferential speed, thereby moving the carriage assembly from the intermediate position to the target position with the speed trajectory The assembly will reach the target position simultaneously in the circumferential and radial directions; and move the carriage assembly from the intermediate position to the target position in the aforementioned speed trajectory. (Please read the precautions on the back first and then fill out this page) ------ Order ------ i,: -------- The paper printed by the Beigong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs is applicable to the paper standard China National Standard (CNS) A4 wash grid (210X297mm)